Nastar Operator Guide(V600R002_06)

NastarV600R002

Operator Guide

Issue 06

Date 2010-08-18

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2010. All rights reserved.No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior writtenconsent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. NoticeThe purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and thecustomer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within thepurchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representationsof any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in thepreparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, andrecommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.Address: Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, LonggangShenzhen 518129People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com

Email: [email protected]

Issue 06 (2010-08-18) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

http://www.huawei.com

mailto:[email protected]

About This Document

Intended AudienceThe intended audiences of this document are:

l Network planning and optimization engineers

l Operation and maintenance (OM) engineers

Change HistoryUpdates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue containsall updates made in previous issues.

06 (2010-08-18)This is the sixth formal release.

05 (2010-06-30)This is the fifth formal release.

04 (2010-03-15)This is the fourth formal release.

03 (2009-09-21)This is the third formal release.

02 (2009-08-17)This is the second formal release.

NastarOperator Guide About This Document


iii

01 (2009-07-02)This is the first formal release.

About This DocumentNastar

Operator Guide

iv Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Contents

About This Document...................................................................................................................iii

1 Overview of the Nastar Performance Analysis System......................................................1-11.1 Introduction to the Nastar Performance Analysis System...............................................................................1-21.2 Position of the Nastar on the network.............................................................................................................1-61.3 Performance Analysis Process........................................................................................................................1-7

2 Getting Started............................................................................................................................2-12.1 Logging In to the Nastar..................................................................................................................................2-3

2.1.1 Logging In to the Nastar Server.............................................................................................................2-32.1.2 Logging Out the User Account..............................................................................................................2-42.1.3 Exiting the Nastar Client........................................................................................................................2-4

2.2 Resetting the Password of an Nastar User .....................................................................................................2-52.3 Customizing Client GUI Effect.......................................................................................................................2-5

2.3.1 Setting Font Size....................................................................................................................................2-62.3.2 Setting Output Information....................................................................................................................2-6

2.4 Setting the Toolbar..........................................................................................................................................2-72.5 Customizing Client Time Display Mode........................................................................................................2-7

2.5.1 Setting the Time Format of the Client....................................................................................................2-72.5.2 Setting the Time Mode of the Client......................................................................................................2-82.5.3 Setting the Date Format of the Client.....................................................................................................2-9

2.6 Setting the Display Mode of Numbers............................................................................................................2-92.7 Locking Client...............................................................................................................................................2-10

2.7.1 Locking the Client Automatically........................................................................................................2-102.7.2 Locking the Client Manually................................................................................................................2-10

2.8 Unlocking the Client.....................................................................................................................................2-112.9 Broadcast Messages......................................................................................................................................2-11

2.9.1 Setting Broadcast Parameters...............................................................................................................2-112.9.2 Sending Broadcast Messages...............................................................................................................2-12

2.10 Setting the Alarm Sound When the Network Is Disconnected...................................................................2-122.11 Managing the Nastar License......................................................................................................................2-13

2.11.1 Querying the Nastar License..............................................................................................................2-132.11.2 Updating the Nastar License..............................................................................................................2-13

2.12 Collecting Nastar Log File..........................................................................................................................2-14

NastarOperator Guide Contents


v

2.13 Engineering Parameter Management..........................................................................................................2-142.13.1 Importing/Exporting Engineering Parameters...................................................................................2-152.13.2 Querying Engineering Parameters.....................................................................................................2-17

2.14 Creating Custom NE Groups.......................................................................................................................2-182.15 Querying NE Data.......................................................................................................................................2-202.16 Reference for the Performance Analysis System GUI................................................................................2-22

2.16.1 Interface Description: Nastar Client...................................................................................................2-222.16.2 Nastar Menu Function Reference.......................................................................................................2-242.16.3 Keyboard Shortcuts............................................................................................................................2-272.16.4 Parameters for Server Information.....................................................................................................2-292.16.5 Parameters for Logging In to the Nastar Server.................................................................................2-292.16.6 Parameters for Output GUI Information............................................................................................2-302.16.7 Parameters for Setting the Time/Date Style.......................................................................................2-312.16.8 Parameters for Collecting Nastar Log Files.......................................................................................2-322.16.9 Parameters for Importing and Exporting Engineering Parameters....................................................2-332.16.10 Parameters for Creating and Modifying Custom NE Groups..........................................................2-37

3 Monitoring the Status of the Nastar.......................................................................................3-13.1 Basic Knowledge of System Monitoring........................................................................................................3-2

3.1.1 System Monitoring Functions................................................................................................................3-23.1.2 Relation Between Threshold and Alarm................................................................................................3-2

3.2 Setting Nastar Server Thresholds....................................................................................................................3-33.2.1 Setting the Parameters for the System Resources Monitoring...............................................................3-33.2.2 Setting the Parameters for the Nastar Hard Disk Monitoring................................................................3-43.2.3 Setting the Parameters for the Nastar Database Monitoring..................................................................3-43.2.4 Setting the Parameters for the Nastar Service Monitoring.....................................................................3-4

3.3 Monitoring the Nastar..................................................................................................................................... 3-53.3.1 Monitoring the Nastar Service Status.....................................................................................................3-53.3.2 Monitoring the Nastar Process Status.................................................................................................... 3-63.3.3 Monitoring the Nastar Hard Disk Status................................................................................................3-63.3.4 Monitoring the Nastar Database Status..................................................................................................3-73.3.5 Monitoring the System Resource Status of the Nastar Server...............................................................3-73.3.6 Viewing the Information of Nastar Components...................................................................................3-73.3.7 Viewing Operation Logs on the System Monitor Client........................................................................3-73.3.8 Refreshing the Monitoring Information.................................................................................................3-83.3.9 Saving the Monitoring Information........................................................................................................3-8

3.4 Reference of System Monitoring GUIs...........................................................................................................3-93.4.1 Parameters for Setting Thresholds of the Nastar Server........................................................................ 3-93.4.2 Parameters for Monitoring Services of the Nastar Server....................................................................3-163.4.3 Parameters for Monitoring Process of the Nastar Server.....................................................................3-173.4.4 Parameters for Monitoring Hard Disk of the Nastar Server.................................................................3-173.4.5 Parameters for Monitoring Database of the Nastar Server...................................................................3-183.4.6 Parameters for Monitoring System Resources of the Nastar Server....................................................3-19

ContentsNastar

Operator Guide

vi Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

3.4.7 Parameters for Viewing the Component Information of the Nastar Server.........................................3-203.4.8 Parameters for Viewing System Monitoring Operation Logs..............................................................3-20

4 Security Management................................................................................................................4-14.1 Basic Knowledge of Security Management....................................................................................................4-3

4.1.1 Security Management.............................................................................................................................4-34.1.2 Concepts of Nastar Security...................................................................................................................4-34.1.3 Nastar User Rights Management Policies..............................................................................................4-54.1.4 Operation Right List...............................................................................................................................4-5

4.2 Changing the Password of the Current User...................................................................................................4-64.3 Setting the Security Policy of the Nastar........................................................................................................4-7

4.3.1 Setting the Password Policy...................................................................................................................4-74.3.2 Setting the Account Policy.....................................................................................................................4-84.3.3 Setting the System Policy.......................................................................................................................4-8

4.4 Setting Nastar System Login Mode................................................................................................................4-94.5 Setting the System ACL................................................................................................................................4-104.6 Creating a Nastar User..................................................................................................................................4-11

4.6.1 Procedure for Creating Nastar Users....................................................................................................4-124.6.2 Creating an Operation Set....................................................................................................................4-134.6.3 Creating a Nastar User Group..............................................................................................................4-144.6.4 Assigning the Managed Domain for a Nastar User Group..................................................................4-154.6.5 Assigning Operation Rights to a Nastar User Group...........................................................................4-154.6.6 Creating an Nastar User Account.........................................................................................................4-164.6.7 Adding an Nastar User to a User Group..............................................................................................4-174.6.8 Assigning the Managed Domain for a Nastar User..............................................................................4-174.6.9 Assigning Operation Rights to a Nastar User......................................................................................4-184.6.10 Assigning the User ACL....................................................................................................................4-18

4.7 Modifying a Nastar User...............................................................................................................................4-194.7.1 Resetting the Password of an Nastar User ..........................................................................................4-204.7.2 Modifying the Information About a Nastar User ................................................................................4-204.7.3 Adding an Nastar User to a User Group..............................................................................................4-214.7.4 Assigning the Managed Domain for a Nastar User..............................................................................4-214.7.5 Assigning Operation Rights to a Nastar User......................................................................................4-224.7.6 Modifying the Nastar Access Control List...........................................................................................4-22

4.8 Comparing the Nastar User Rights................................................................................................................4-234.9 Monitoring a Nastar User..............................................................................................................................4-23

4.9.1 Unlocking a Nastar User......................................................................................................................4-234.9.2 Monitoring the Nastar User Operations...............................................................................................4-244.9.3 Forcing a Nastar User to Quit..............................................................................................................4-25

4.10 Reference of the Security Management GUI..............................................................................................4-254.10.1 Operation Right List...........................................................................................................................4-264.10.2 Parameters for the System Security Policy........................................................................................4-274.10.3 Parameters for Creating a Nastar User Account................................................................................4-31



vii

4.10.4 Parameters for the Nastar User Information.......................................................................................4-334.10.5 Parameters for Adding a Nastar User Group......................................................................................4-354.10.6 Parameters for Assigning Operation Rights to Nastar User/User Groups.........................................4-36

5 Log Management........................................................................................................................5-15.1 Basic Knowledge of Log Management...........................................................................................................5-2

5.1.1 Log Management Function....................................................................................................................5-25.1.2 Log Types...............................................................................................................................................5-2

5.2 Managing Operation Logs...............................................................................................................................5-25.2.1 Querying Operation Logs.......................................................................................................................5-35.2.2 Collecting Statistics on Operation Logs.................................................................................................5-3

5.3 Managing System Logs...................................................................................................................................5-45.3.1 Querying System Logs...........................................................................................................................5-45.3.2 Collecting Statistics on System Logs.....................................................................................................5-5

5.4 Managing Security Logs.................................................................................................................................5-55.4.1 Querying Security Logs.........................................................................................................................5-55.4.2 Collecting Statistics on Security Logs...................................................................................................5-6

5.5 Managing Log Templates................................................................................................................................5-65.5.1 Creating a Log Query Template.............................................................................................................5-75.5.2 Creating a Log Statistical Template.......................................................................................................5-75.5.3 Modifying a Log Template....................................................................................................................5-85.5.4 Deleting a Log Template........................................................................................................................5-8

5.6 Reference of the Log Management GUI.........................................................................................................5-95.6.1 Parameters for Querying Operation Logs..............................................................................................5-95.6.2 Parameters for Operation Log Statistics...............................................................................................5-115.6.3 Parameters for Operation Log Details..................................................................................................5-135.6.4 Parameters for Querying System Logs.................................................................................................5-145.6.5 Parameters for System Log Statistics...................................................................................................5-155.6.6 Parameters for System Log Details......................................................................................................5-165.6.7 Parameters for Querying Security Logs...............................................................................................5-165.6.8 Parameters for Security Log Statistics.................................................................................................5-185.6.9 Parameters for Security Log Details....................................................................................................5-20

6 OSS Management.......................................................................................................................6-16.1 Basic Knowledge of OSS Management..........................................................................................................6-26.2 Creating an OSS..............................................................................................................................................6-26.3 Viewing the Attributes of an OSS...................................................................................................................6-46.4 Modifying the Attributes of an OSS...............................................................................................................6-56.5 Reference for the OSS Management GUI.......................................................................................................6-5

6.5.1 Interface Description: OSS Management...............................................................................................6-66.5.2 Parameters for Setting the Object Attributes of OSS Management.......................................................6-7

7 GSM Centralized Task Management.....................................................................................7-17.1 Basic Knowledge of Centralized Task Management......................................................................................7-3

ContentsNastar

Operator Guide

viii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

7.1.1 Types of Timing Tasks...........................................................................................................................7-37.1.2 System Timing Tasks.............................................................................................................................7-47.1.3 User Timing Task...................................................................................................................................7-47.1.4 Task Scheduling Parameters.................................................................................................................. 7-47.1.5 States of a Timing Task..........................................................................................................................7-57.1.6 Customizing the Interface for Managing Timing Tasks........................................................................ 7-6

7.2 Creating a GSM User-Defined Timing Task.................................................................................................. 7-77.2.1 Creating a Data Collection Task............................................................................................................ 7-87.2.2 Creating a Task of Importing GSM Performance Data........................................................................7-127.2.3 Creating a Task of Importing GSM Configuration Data......................................................................7-157.2.4 Creating a Task of Importing GSM Uplink ARFCN Scanning Data...................................................7-177.2.5 Creating a Task of Importing GSM Measurement-Task Data.............................................................7-197.2.6 Creating a Task of Importing GSM Engineering Parameters..............................................................7-22

7.3 Modifying a GSM User-Defined Timing Task.............................................................................................7-247.3.1 Modifying a Data Collection Task.......................................................................................................7-257.3.2 Modifying a Task of Importing GSM Performance Data....................................................................7-257.3.3 Modifying a Task of Importing GSM Configuration Data..................................................................7-267.3.4 Modifying a Task of Importing GSM Uplink ARFCN Scanning Data...............................................7-277.3.5 Modifying a Task of Importing GSM Measurement-Task File Data...................................................7-277.3.6 Modifying a Task of Importing GSM Engineering Parameters...........................................................7-28

7.4 Modifying a GSM Data Deletion Task.........................................................................................................7-297.4.1 Modifying the Task of Deleting GSM History Data............................................................................7-297.4.2 Modifying the Task of Deleting GSM Performance Data...................................................................7-307.4.3 Modifying the Task of Deleting GSM Configuration Data.................................................................7-317.4.4 Modifying a Task of Deleting GSM Uplink ARFCN Scanning Data..................................................7-327.4.5 Modifying a Task of Deleting GSM Measurement-Task File Data.....................................................7-32

7.5 Modifying the Task of Backing Up Data......................................................................................................7-337.6 Setting the Suspend or Resume Time of a Timing Task...............................................................................7-347.7 Viewing Timing Tasks..................................................................................................................................7-35

7.7.1 Browsing the Information of Timing Tasks.........................................................................................7-357.7.2 Checking the Task Progress.................................................................................................................7-357.7.3 Checking the Task Execution...............................................................................................................7-36

7.8 Reference for the GSM Centralized Task Management GUI.......................................................................7-367.8.1 Interface Description: Centralized Task Management.........................................................................7-377.8.2 Parameter for Setting Task Filter Conditions.......................................................................................7-397.8.3 Parameter for Setting Common Parameters for Timing Tasks............................................................7-407.8.4 Parameter for Setting the Time of a Common Periodic Task..............................................................7-417.8.5 Parameter for Setting the Time of a Common One-Time Task...........................................................7-427.8.6 Parameters for Creating or Modifying a Data Collection Task............................................................7-427.8.7 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting History Data.............................................................7-447.8.8 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting GSM Performance Data...........................................7-457.8.9 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting GSM Configuration Data.........................................7-45



ix

7.8.10 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting the GSM Uplink ARFCN Scanning Data..............7-467.8.11 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting the GSM Measurement-Task File Data.................7-467.8.12 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Backing Up Data...................................................................7-477.8.13 Parameters for Setting the Time of a Timing Task............................................................................7-47

8 GSM MR Analysis.....................................................................................................................8-18.1 Basic Knowledge of GSM MR Analysis........................................................................................................8-3

8.1.1 GSM MR Analysis Function..................................................................................................................8-38.1.2 TopN KPIs..............................................................................................................................................8-48.1.3 GSM MR Topics....................................................................................................................................8-7

8.2 Process of GSM MR Analysis........................................................................................................................8-88.3 Managing GSM MR Analysis Tasks............................................................................................................8-10

8.3.1 Creating a GSM E2E Task...................................................................................................................8-108.3.2 Creating a GSM MR Analysis Task.....................................................................................................8-138.3.3 Modifying a GSM MR Analysis Task.................................................................................................8-158.3.4 Checking a GSM MR Analysis Task...................................................................................................8-16

8.4 Querying the GSM MR Overview Report....................................................................................................8-178.4.1 Querying the GBSC Report..................................................................................................................8-188.4.2 Querying the GSM Cell Group Report................................................................................................8-218.4.3 Querying a GSM TopN TRX Report...................................................................................................8-248.4.4 Querying a GSM MR Topic Analysis Report......................................................................................8-26

8.5 Querying the MR Results of GSM Cells.......................................................................................................8-278.6 Comparing the GSM MR Analysis Results..................................................................................................8-298.7 Reference for the GSM MR Analysis GUI...................................................................................................8-30

8.7.1 Interface Description: GSM MR Analysis...........................................................................................8-318.7.2 Parameters for Creating GSM E2E Tasks............................................................................................8-348.7.3 Parameters for Creating and Modifying GSM MR Analysis Tasks.....................................................8-378.7.4 Parameters for Querying GBSC Reports.............................................................................................8-418.7.5 Parameters for Querying the GSM Cell Group Reports......................................................................8-498.7.6 Parameters for Querying the GSM TopN TRX Reports......................................................................8-578.7.7 Parameters for Querying the GSM MR Topic Analysis Reports.........................................................8-638.7.8 Parameters for Querying the MR Analysis Results of GSM Cells......................................................8-698.7.9 Parameters for Comparing GSM MR Analysis Results.......................................................................8-75

9 GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis............................................................................................9-19.1 Basic Knowledge of GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis...................................................................................9-3

9.1.1 GSM Neighbor Cell Analysis Function.................................................................................................9-39.1.2 Algorithms for the GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis.............................................................................9-4

9.2 Procedure for Using GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis...................................................................................9-69.3 Managing GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis Tasks.........................................................................................9-7

9.3.1 Creating a GSM E2E Task.....................................................................................................................9-89.3.2 Creating a GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis Task...............................................................................9-109.3.3 Modifying a GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis Task............................................................................9-129.3.4 Checking a GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis Task.............................................................................9-12

ContentsNastar

Operator Guide

x Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

9.4 Querying a GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis Report....................................................................................9-149.5 Querying Co-BCCH and Co-BSIC GSM Cell Analysis Reports.................................................................9-159.6 Querying Co-BCCH GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis Reports...................................................................9-169.7 Exporting Neighboring Cell Analysis Reports..............................................................................................9-179.8 Reference for the GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis GUI..............................................................................9-19

9.8.1 Interface Description: GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis.....................................................................9-209.8.2 Parameters for Creating GSM E2E Tasks............................................................................................9-219.8.3 Parameters for Creating and Modifying GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis Tasks...............................9-249.8.4 Parameters for Querying the Analysis Reports of GSM Neighboring Cells........................................9-269.8.5 Parameters for Querying Co-BCCH and Co-BSIC GSM Cell Analysis Report..................................9-309.8.6 Parameters for Querying the Co-BCCH GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis Reports............................9-31

10 GSM Frequency Analysis.....................................................................................................10-110.1 Basic Knowledge of GSM Frequency Analysis..........................................................................................10-3

10.1.1 GSM Frequency Analysis Function...................................................................................................10-310.1.2 Process of GSM Frequency Analysis.................................................................................................10-410.1.3 Process of GSM Frequency Optimization..........................................................................................10-510.1.4 Spacing Rules of GSM ARFCNs.......................................................................................................10-6

10.2 Procedure for Using GSM Frequency Analysis..........................................................................................10-710.3 Managing GSM Frequency Analysis Tasks................................................................................................10-9

10.3.1 Creating a GSM E2E Task.................................................................................................................10-910.3.2 Creating a GSM Frequency Analysis Task......................................................................................10-1110.3.3 Modifying a GSM Frequency Analysis Task...................................................................................10-1310.3.4 Checking a GSM Frequency Analysis Task....................................................................................10-14

10.4 Querying GSM Frequency Analysis Reports............................................................................................10-1510.4.1 Querying the Interference Matrix Report of GSM Measurement Cells...........................................10-1610.4.2 Querying the Report of the GSM Cell Interference Matrix.............................................................10-1710.4.3 Querying the Report of the GSM Cell Frequency Interference Matrix...........................................10-18

10.5 Querying the GSM Frequency Optimization Report................................................................................10-1910.6 Exporting GSM Interference Analysis Reports........................................................................................10-2210.7 Exporting GSM Frequency Optimization Reports....................................................................................10-2410.8 Reference for the GSM Frequency Analysis GUI.....................................................................................10-25

10.8.1 Interface Description: GSM Frequency Analysis............................................................................10-2510.8.2 Interface Description: GSM Frequency Optimization.....................................................................10-2810.8.3 Parameters for Creating GSM E2E Tasks........................................................................................10-2910.8.4 Parameters for Creating and Modifying GSM Frequency Analysis Tasks......................................10-3210.8.5 Parameters for Querying the Overview Report of the GSM Test Cells...........................................10-3410.8.6 Parameters for Querying the Report of GSM Cell Interference Matrix...........................................10-3510.8.7 Parameters for Querying the Report of the GSM Cell Frequency Interference Matrix...................10-3710.8.8 Parameters for Querying GSM Frequency Optimization Reports...................................................10-39

11 GSM Uplink Interference Analysis....................................................................................11-111.1 Basic Knowledge of GSM Uplink Interference Analysis...........................................................................11-211.2 Procedure for Using GSM Uplink Interference Analysis...........................................................................11-2



xi

11.3 Managing GSM Uplink Interference Analysis Tasks.................................................................................11-411.3.1 Creating a GSM E2E Task.................................................................................................................11-411.3.2 Creating a GSM Uplink Interference Analysis Task..........................................................................11-711.3.3 Modifying a GSM Uplink Interference Analysis Task......................................................................11-911.3.4 Checking a GSM Uplink Interference Analysis Task........................................................................11-9

11.4 Querying a GSM Uplink Interference Analysis Report............................................................................11-1111.5 Reference for the GSM Uplink Interference Analysis GUI......................................................................11-12

11.5.1 Interface Description: GSM Uplink Interference Analysis..............................................................11-1211.5.2 Parameters for Creating GSM E2E Tasks........................................................................................11-1411.5.3 Parameters for Creating and Modifying GSM Uplink Interference Analysis Tasks.......................11-1711.5.4 Parameters for Querying the Uplink Interference Analysis Reports of GSM Cells........................11-18

12 UMTS Centralized Task Management.............................................................................. 12-112.1 Basic Knowledge of Centralized Task Management..................................................................................12-3

12.1.1 Types of Timing Tasks.......................................................................................................................12-312.1.2 System Timing Tasks.........................................................................................................................12-312.1.3 User Timing Task...............................................................................................................................12-412.1.4 Task Scheduling Parameters..............................................................................................................12-412.1.5 States of a Timing Task......................................................................................................................12-512.1.6 Customizing the Interface for Managing Timing Tasks....................................................................12-5

12.2 Creating a UMTS User-Defined Timing Task............................................................................................12-612.2.1 Creating a Task of Importing UMTS Uplink-Interference Data........................................................12-712.2.2 Creating a Task of Importing UMTS Neighboring-Cell Analysis Data..........................................12-1012.2.3 Creating a Task of Importing UMTS Configuration Data...............................................................12-1212.2.4 Creating a Task of Importing UMTS Coverage Analysis Data.......................................................12-1512.2.5 Creating a Task of Importing UMTS Engineering Parameters........................................................12-17

12.3 Modifying a UMTS User-Defined Timing Task.......................................................................................12-1912.3.1 Modifying a Task of Importing UMTS Uplink Interference Data...................................................12-2012.3.2 Modifying a Task of Importing UMTS Neighboring-Cell Analysis Data.......................................12-2012.3.3 Modifying a Task of Importing UMTS Configuration Data............................................................12-2112.3.4 Modifying a Task of Importing UMTS Coverage Analysis Data....................................................12-2212.3.5 Modifying a Task of Importing UMTS Engineering Parameters.....................................................12-22

12.4 Modifying a UMTS Data Deletion Task...................................................................................................12-2312.4.1 Modifying the Task of Deleting GSM History Data........................................................................12-2412.4.2 Modifying a Task of Deleting UMTS Uplink Interference Data.....................................................12-2412.4.3 Modifying the Task of Deleting UMTS Neighboring-Cell Analysis Data......................................12-2512.4.4 Modifying the Task of Deleting UMTS Configuration Data...........................................................12-2612.4.5 Modifying the Task of Deleting UMTS Coverage Analysis Data...................................................12-26

12.5 Modifying the Task of Backing Up Data..................................................................................................12-2712.6 Setting the Suspend or Resume Time of a Timing Task...........................................................................12-2812.7 Viewing Timing Tasks..............................................................................................................................12-29

12.7.1 Browsing the Information of Timing Tasks.....................................................................................12-2912.7.2 Checking the Task Progress.............................................................................................................12-29

ContentsNastar

Operator Guide

xii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

12.7.3 Checking the Task Execution...........................................................................................................12-3012.8 Reference to the UMTS Centralized Task Management Interface...........................................................12-30

12.8.1 Interface Description: Centralized Task Management.....................................................................12-3112.8.2 Parameter for Setting Task Filter Conditions...................................................................................12-3312.8.3 Parameter for Setting Common Parameters for Timing Tasks........................................................12-3412.8.4 Parameter for Setting the Time of a Common Periodic Task..........................................................12-3512.8.5 Parameter for Setting the Time of a Common One-Time Task.......................................................12-3612.8.6 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting History Data.........................................................12-3612.8.7 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting UMTS Uplink Interference Data..........................12-3712.8.8 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting Neighboring UMTS Cell Analysis Data..............12-3812.8.9 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting UMTS Configuration Data...................................12-3812.8.10 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting UMTS Coverage Analysis Data.........................12-3912.8.11 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Backing Up Data...............................................................12-3912.8.12 Parameters for Setting the Time of a Timing Task........................................................................12-40

13 UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis.................................................................................13-113.1 Basic Knowledge of UMTS Uplink-Interference Analysis........................................................................13-213.2 Process of UMTS Uplink-Interference Analysis........................................................................................13-213.3 Managing UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis Tasks...............................................................................13-4

13.3.1 Creating a UMTS E2E Task...............................................................................................................13-413.3.2 Creating a UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis Task.......................................................................13-613.3.3 Modifying a UMTS Uplink-Interference Analysis Task...................................................................13-813.3.4 Checking a UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis Task......................................................................13-8

13.4 Querying a UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis Report..........................................................................13-1013.5 Reference for the UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis GUI....................................................................13-11

13.5.1 Interface for UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis...........................................................................13-1213.5.2 Parameters for Creating or Modifying a UMTS E2E Task..............................................................13-1313.5.3 Parameters for Creating or Modifying a UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis Task......................13-1313.5.4 Parameters for Querying the Uplink Interference Analysis Reports of UMTS Cells......................13-14

14 UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis...........................................................14-114.1 Basic Knowledge of UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis....................................................14-3

14.1.1 UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Function..............................................................14-314.1.2 UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Algorithms..........................................................14-4

14.2 Process of UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis....................................................................14-514.3 Managing UMTS Neighboring Cell Analysis Tasks..................................................................................14-6

14.3.1 Creating a UMTS E2E Task...............................................................................................................14-714.3.2 Creating a UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Task...................................................14-814.3.3 Modifying a UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Task.............................................14-1014.3.4 Checking a UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Task...............................................14-11

14.4 Querying a UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Report.....................................................14-1314.5 Exporting a UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Report....................................................14-1414.6 Reference for the UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis GUI...............................................14-16

14.6.1 Interface Description: UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring-Cell Analysis.......................................14-16



xiii

14.6.2 Parameters for Creating or Modifying a UMTS E2E Task..............................................................14-1814.6.3 Parameters for Creating and Modifying UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Tasks.....................................................................................................................................................................14-1814.6.4 Parameters for Querying UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Reports.....................14-20

15 UMTS Coverage Analysis....................................................................................................15-115.1 Basic Knowledge of UMTS Coverage Analysis.........................................................................................15-315.2 Process of UMTS Coverage Analysis.........................................................................................................15-315.3 Managing a UMTS Coverage Analysis Task..............................................................................................15-5

15.3.1 Creating a UMTS E2E Task...............................................................................................................15-515.3.2 Creating a UMTS Coverage Analysis Task.......................................................................................15-715.3.3 Modifying a UMTS Coverage Analysis Task....................................................................................15-915.3.4 Checking a UMTS Coverage Analysis Task....................................................................................15-10

15.4 Querying a UMTS Coverage Analysis Report..........................................................................................15-1115.5 Exporting a UMTS Coverage Analysis Report.........................................................................................15-1315.6 Reference for the UMTS Coverage Analysis GUI....................................................................................15-14

15.6.1 Interface for UMTS Coverage Analysis...........................................................................................15-1415.6.2 Parameters for Creating or Modifying a UMTS E2E Task..............................................................15-1715.6.3 Parameters for Creating and Modifying UMTS Coverage Analysis Tasks.....................................15-1815.6.4 Parameters for Querying UMTS Coverage Analysis Reports..........................................................15-19

16 CDMA Centralized Task Management.............................................................................16-116.1 Basic Knowledge of Centralized Task Management..................................................................................16-3

16.1.1 Types of Timing Tasks.......................................................................................................................16-316.1.2 System Timing Tasks.........................................................................................................................16-316.1.3 User Timing Task...............................................................................................................................16-416.1.4 Task Scheduling Parameters.............................................................................................................. 16-416.1.5 States of a Timing Task......................................................................................................................16-516.1.6 Customizing the Interface for Managing Timing Tasks.................................................................... 16-5

16.2 Creating a CDMA User-Defined Timing Task...........................................................................................16-616.2.1 Creating a Task of Importing CDMA VIP KPI Analysis Data..........................................................16-716.2.2 Creating a Task of Importing CDMA Uplink-Interference-Ranking Analysis Data.......................16-1016.2.3 Creating a Task of Importing the CDMA Uplink-Interference-Spectrum Analysis Data...............16-1216.2.4 Creating a Task of Importing CDMA Neighboring-Cell Analysis Data..........................................16-1516.2.5 Creating a Task of Importing CDMA Configuration Data..............................................................16-17

16.3 Modifying a CDMA User-Defined Timing Task......................................................................................16-1916.3.1 Modifying a Task of Importing CDMA VIP KPI Analysis Data....................................................16-2016.3.2 Modifying a Task of Importing CDMA Uplink-Interference-Ranking Analysis Data....................16-2116.3.3 Modifying a Task of Importing CDMA Uplink-Interference-Spectrum Analysis Data..................16-2116.3.4 Modifying a Task of Importing CDMA Neighboring Cell Analysis Data......................................16-2216.3.5 Modifying a Task of Importing CDMA Configuration Data...........................................................16-23

16.4 Modifying a CDMA Data Deletion Task..................................................................................................16-2316.4.1 Modifying the Task of Deleting GSM History Data........................................................................16-2416.4.2 Modifying a Task of Deleting CDMA VIP KPI Analysis Data.......................................................16-25

ContentsNastar

Operator Guide

xiv Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

16.4.3 Modifying a Task of Deleting CDMA Uplink-Interference-Ranking Analysis Data......................16-2516.4.4 Modifying a Task of Deleting CDMA Uplink-Interference-Spectrum Analysis Data....................16-2616.4.5 Modifying a Task of Deleting CDMA Neighboring Cell Analysis Data.........................................16-2716.4.6 Modifying a Task of Deleting CDMA Configuration Data.............................................................16-27

16.5 Modifying the Task of Backing Up Data..................................................................................................16-2816.6 Setting the Suspend or Resume Time of a Timing Task...........................................................................16-2916.7 Viewing Timing Tasks..............................................................................................................................16-30

16.7.1 Browsing the Information of Timing Tasks.....................................................................................16-3016.7.2 Checking the Task Progress.............................................................................................................16-3016.7.3 Checking the Task Execution...........................................................................................................16-31

16.8 Reference to the CDMA Centralized Task Management Interface..........................................................16-3116.8.1 Interface Description: Centralized Task Management.....................................................................16-3216.8.2 Parameter for Setting Task Filter Conditions...................................................................................16-3316.8.3 Parameter for Setting Common Parameters for Timing Tasks........................................................16-3416.8.4 Parameter for Setting the Time of a Common Periodic Task..........................................................16-3516.8.5 Parameter for Setting the Time of a Common One-Time Task.......................................................16-3616.8.6 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting History Data.........................................................16-3716.8.7 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Backing Up Data.................................................................16-3816.8.8 Parameters for Setting the Time of a Timing Task..........................................................................16-38

17 CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis................................................................................17-117.1 Basic Knowledge of CDMA Uplink-Interference Analysis........................................................................17-317.2 Process of CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis........................................................................................17-317.3 Managing CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis Tasks..............................................................................17-6

17.3.1 Creating a CDMA E2E Task..............................................................................................................17-617.3.2 Creating a CDMA Uplink-Interference-Ranking Analysis Task.......................................................17-817.3.3 Creating a CDMA Uplink-Interference-Spectrum Analysis Task...................................................17-1017.3.4 Modifying a CDMA Uplink-Interference-Ranking Analysis Task..................................................17-1217.3.5 Modifying a CDMA Uplink-Interference-Spectrum Analysis Task................................................17-1317.3.6 Checking a CDMA Uplink-Interference-Ranking Analysis Task...................................................17-1317.3.7 Checking a CDMA Uplink-Interference-Spectrum Analysis Task..................................................17-15

17.4 Querying the CDMA Uplink-Interference-Ranking Analysis Report......................................................17-1617.5 Querying the CDMA Uplink-Interference-Spectrum Analysis Report.....................................................17-1817.6 Reference for the CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis GUI...................................................................17-19

17.6.1 Interface Description: CDMA Uplink-Interference-Ranking Analysis...........................................17-2017.6.2 Interface Description: CDMA Uplink-Interference-Spectrum Analysis..........................................17-2117.6.3 Parameters of CDMA E2E Tasks.....................................................................................................17-2217.6.4 Parameters for Creating and Modifying CDMA Uplink-Interference-Ranking Analysis Tasks.....17-2317.6.5 Parameters for Creating and Modifying CDMA Uplink-Interference-Spectrum Analysis Tasks...17-2417.6.6 Parameters for Querying the Uplink-Interference-Ranking Analysis Reports of CDMA Cells......17-2517.6.7 Parameters for Querying the Uplink-Interference-Spectrum Analysis Reports of CDMA Cells....17-26

18 CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis..........................................................18-118.1 Basic Knowledge of CDMA Neighboring Cell Analysis...........................................................................18-3



xv

18.1.1 CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Functions........................................................... 18-318.1.2 CDMA Neighboring Cell Analysis Algorithms.................................................................................18-4

18.2 Process of CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring-Cell Analysis...................................................................18-518.3 Managing CDMA Neighboring Cell Analysis Tasks................................................................................. 18-6

18.3.1 Creating a CDMA E2E Task..............................................................................................................18-718.3.2 Creating a CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Task..................................................18-818.3.3 Modifying a CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Task............................................18-1018.3.4 Checking a CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Task..............................................18-11

18.4 Query a CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Report.........................................................18-1318.5 Exporting a CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Report...................................................18-1418.6 Reference for the CDMA Neighboring Cell Analysis GUI......................................................................18-18

18.6.1 Interface Description: CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis......................................18-1818.6.2 Parameters of CDMA E2E Tasks.....................................................................................................18-2018.6.3 Parameters for Creating and Modifying CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Tasks.....................................................................................................................................................................18-2018.6.4 Parameters for Querying CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Reports....................18-22

19 CDMA VIP KPI Analysis.....................................................................................................19-119.1 Basic Knowledge of CDMA VIP KPI Analysis......................................................................................... 19-219.2 Process of CDMA VIP KPI Analysis......................................................................................................... 19-219.3 Managing CDMA VIP KPI Analysis Tasks............................................................................................... 19-3

19.3.1 Managing CDMA VIP Groups.......................................................................................................... 19-419.3.2 Creating a CDMA E2E Task..............................................................................................................19-619.3.3 Creating CDMA VIP KPI Analysis Tasks.........................................................................................19-819.3.4 Modifying CDMA VIP KPI Analysis Tasks....................................................................................19-1019.3.5 Checking CDMA VIP KPI Analysis Tasks.....................................................................................19-11

19.4 Querying the Analysis Reports About the QoS of CDMA VIP Subscribers............................................19-1219.5 Reference for the CDMA VIP KPI Analysis GUI....................................................................................19-13

19.5.1 Interface for CDMA KPI Analysis...................................................................................................19-1419.5.2 Parameters for Creating and Modifying CDMA VIP Subscribers and VIP Groups........................19-1919.5.3 Parameters of CDMA E2E Tasks.....................................................................................................19-2019.5.4 Parameters for Creating and Modifying CDMA VIP KPI Analysis Tasks......................................19-2019.5.5 Parameters for Querying a CDMA VIP KPI Analysis Report.........................................................19-22

20 CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis...............................................................................20-120.1 Basic Knowledge of CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis.......................................................................20-220.2 Process of CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis.......................................................................................20-220.3 Managing CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis Tasks.............................................................................20-3

20.3.1 Creating User-Defined Counter Sets..................................................................................................20-320.3.2 Creating CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis Tasks......................................................................20-520.3.3 Modifying CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis Tasks...................................................................20-720.3.4 Checking CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis Tasks.....................................................................20-7

20.4 Querying a Complaint Assistant Analysis Report.......................................................................................20-920.5 Reference for the CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis GUI.................................................................20-10

ContentsNastar

Operator Guide

xvi Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

20.5.1 Interface for CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis........................................................................20-1020.5.2 Parameters for User-Defined Count Sets.........................................................................................20-1120.5.3 Parameters for Creating and Modifying CDMA Complaint Analysis Tasks...................................20-1220.5.4 Parameters for Querying a CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis Report......................................20-13

21 FAQ...........................................................................................................................................21-121.1 How to Solve the Problem That a Neighboring Cell Analysis Task or a Frequency Analysis Task Fails to BeExecuted?............................................................................................................................................................21-121.2 How to Solve the Problem That the NE Information on the Nastar Is Inconsistent with That on the M2000?.............................................................................................................................................................................21-221.3 How to Solve the Problem That the OSS Navigation Tree Cannot Be Displayed Normally in the OSSManagement Window?......................................................................................................................................21-321.4 How to Modify the Default Font Type and Font Size on the Nastar Client?..............................................21-421.5 How to Query the Detailed Software Version of the Nastar Client?..........................................................21-5



xvii

Figures

Figure 1-1 Software modules of the Nastar..........................................................................................................1-4Figure 1-2 Modules of the server software of the Nastar.....................................................................................1-5Figure 1-3 Position of the Nastar on the network................................................................................................1-6Figure 1-4 Process of Nastar performance analysis.............................................................................................1-8Figure 2-1 Data Query window..........................................................................................................................2-21Figure 2-2 GUI of the Nastar client....................................................................................................................2-23Figure 6-1 Interface of OSS management............................................................................................................6-6Figure 7-1 State transition of a timing task..........................................................................................................7-5Figure 7-2 Integrated Task Management interface............................................................................................ 7-38Figure 8-1 Process of GSM MR analysis.............................................................................................................8-9Figure 8-2 MR Overview Report....................................................................................................................... 8-31Figure 8-3 MR Query Result..............................................................................................................................8-33Figure 8-4 MR Comparison Report....................................................................................................................8-34Figure 9-1 Algorithms for the GSM neighboring cell analysis............................................................................9-5Figure 9-2 Process of GSM neighboring cell analysis.........................................................................................9-6Figure 9-3 Interface for the neighboring cell analysis........................................................................................9-20Figure 10-1 Flow chart for frequency analysis...................................................................................................10-5Figure 10-2 Flow chart for frequency optimization...........................................................................................10-6Figure 10-3 Process of GSM frequency analysis...............................................................................................10-7Figure 10-4 Frequency analysis interface (1)...................................................................................................10-26Figure 10-5 Frequency analysis interface (2)...................................................................................................10-27Figure 10-6 Frequency optimization interface.................................................................................................10-28Figure 11-1 Process of GSM uplink interference analysis.................................................................................11-3Figure 11-2 Interface for the overview of the uplink interference of cells......................................................11-13Figure 11-3 Interface for the uplink interference analysis of a cell.................................................................11-13Figure 12-1 State transition of a timing task......................................................................................................12-5Figure 12-2 Integrated Task Management interface........................................................................................12-32Figure 13-1 Workflow of uplink-interference analysis......................................................................................13-3Figure 13-2 Interface for the uplink-interference analysis of a cell.................................................................13-12Figure 14-1 Workflow of co-frequency neighboring cell analysis.................................................................... 14-5Figure 14-2 UMTS co-frequency neighboring-cell analysis interface.............................................................14-17Figure 15-1 Workflow of coverage analysis......................................................................................................15-4Figure 15-2 Interface for the coverage analysis (1)..........................................................................................15-15

NastarOperator Guide Figures


xix

Figure 15-3 Interface for the coverage analysis (2)..........................................................................................15-16Figure 15-4 Interface for the coverage analysis (3)..........................................................................................15-17Figure 16-1 State transition of a timing task......................................................................................................16-5Figure 16-2 Integrated Task Management interface........................................................................................16-32Figure 17-1 Workflow of uplink interference analysis......................................................................................17-4Figure 17-2 Interface for the uplink-interference-ranking analysis.................................................................17-21Figure 17-3 Interface for the uplink-interference-spectrum analysis...............................................................17-22Figure 18-1 Workflow of co-frequency neighboring-cell analysis....................................................................18-5Figure 18-2 Interface for the co-frequency neighboring cell analysis.............................................................18-19Figure 19-1 Workflow of VIP KPI analysis.......................................................................................................19-2Figure 19-2 Interface for the KPI analysis (1)..................................................................................................19-14Figure 19-3 Interface for the KPI analysis (2)..................................................................................................19-15Figure 20-1 Workflow of complaint assistant analysis......................................................................................20-2Figure 20-2 Interface for the complaint assistant analysis (1).........................................................................20-10Figure 20-3 Interface for the complaint assistant analysis (2).........................................................................20-11Figure 21-1 Configuration file...........................................................................................................................21-4

FiguresNastar

Operator Guide

xx Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Tables

Table 1-1 Functions supported by the GSM, CDMA, and UMTS networks.......................................................1-2Table 1-2 The description of the Nastar analysis functions.................................................................................1-3Table 1-3 Modules of the server software............................................................................................................1-5Table 1-4 Functional units on the network...........................................................................................................1-6Table 1-5 Process of Nastar performance analysis...............................................................................................1-8Table 2-1 GUI description of the Nastar client.................................................................................................. 2-23Table 2-2 System menus.....................................................................................................................................2-24Table 2-3 Maintenance menus............................................................................................................................2-25Table 2-4 Security menus...................................................................................................................................2-26Table 2-5 Tab page menus..................................................................................................................................2-26Table 2-6 Help menus.........................................................................................................................................2-27Table 2-7 Controls and corresponding keyboard shortcuts................................................................................2-27Table 2-8 Shortcut keys......................................................................................................................................2-28Table 4-1 Impact of ESN and license on Maximum Sessions............................................................................4-9Table 4-2 Creating users in initial configuration................................................................................................4-12Table 4-3 Creating Users in Routine Maintenance............................................................................................ 4-13Table 6-1 Interface description: OSS management..............................................................................................6-6Table 7-1 Tasks divided according to execution period.......................................................................................7-3Table 7-2 Tasks Divided According to Task Features.........................................................................................7-4Table 7-3 Description of the task description parameters....................................................................................7-4Table 7-4 Mapping between the Nastar topic functions and the types of data to be collected............................7-8Table 7-5 Description of the Integrated Task Management interface................................................................7-38Table 7-6 Time parameters of a timing task.......................................................................................................7-48Table 8-1 Relation between the quality levels of the received signals and bit error rate.....................................8-5Table 8-2 Relation between the received levels and levels..................................................................................8-5Table 8-3 Description of link balance levels........................................................................................................8-6Table 8-4 Topic categories and relevant operation suggestions...........................................................................8-7Table 8-5 Process of GSM MR analysis..............................................................................................................8-9Table 8-6 Parameters related to the TRXs on the entire network (1).................................................................8-41Table 8-7 Parameters related to the TRXs on the entire network (2).................................................................8-43Table 8-8 Parameters related to the TRXs in a GBSC (1)..................................................................................8-44Table 8-9 Parameters related to the TRXs in a GBSC (2)..................................................................................8-45Table 8-10 Parameters related to the task information.......................................................................................8-46

NastarOperator Guide Tables


xxi

Table 8-11 Parameters related to the cell information........................................................................................8-46Table 8-12 Topic categories and relevant operation suggestions.......................................................................8-47Table 8-13 Parameters related to the TRXs on the entire network (1)...............................................................8-49Table 8-14 Parameters related to the TRXs on the entire network (2)...............................................................8-51Table 8-15 Parameters related to the TRXs in a cell group (1)..........................................................................8-52Table 8-16 Parameters related to the TRXs in a cell group (2)..........................................................................8-53Table 8-17 Parameters related to the task information.......................................................................................8-54Table 8-18 Parameters related to the cell information........................................................................................8-55Table 8-19 Topic categories and relevant operation suggestions.......................................................................8-56Table 8-20 Parameters related to the TopN TRXs (1)........................................................................................8-58Table 8-21 Parameters related to the TopN TRXs (2)........................................................................................8-59Table 8-22 Parameters related to the task information.......................................................................................8-60Table 8-23 Parameters related to the cell information........................................................................................8-60Table 8-24 Topic categories and relevant operation suggestions.......................................................................8-61Table 8-25 Parameters related to the problematic TRXs involved in topic analysis (1)....................................8-63Table 8-26 Parameters related to the TRXs involved in topic analysis (2)........................................................8-65Table 8-27 Parameters related to the task information.......................................................................................8-66Table 8-28 Parameters related to the cell information........................................................................................8-66Table 8-29 Topic categories and relevant operation suggestions.......................................................................8-67Table 8-30 Parameters related to querying TRXs in the MR analysis results of GSM cells.............................8-69Table 8-31 Parameters related to querying TRXs in the MR analysis results of GSM cells (2)........................8-71Table 8-32 Parameters related to the task information.......................................................................................8-72Table 8-33 Parameters related to the cell information........................................................................................8-72Table 8-34 Topic categories and relevant operation suggestions.......................................................................8-73Table 9-1 Network changes and their impacts.....................................................................................................9-4Table 9-2 Process of GSM neighboring cell analysis...........................................................................................9-6Table 10-1 Network changes and their impacts.................................................................................................10-4Table 10-2 Process of GSM frequency analysis.................................................................................................10-8Table 11-1 Process of GSM uplink interference analysis..................................................................................11-3Table 12-1 Tasks divided according to execution period...................................................................................12-3Table 12-2 Tasks Divided According to Task Features.....................................................................................12-3Table 12-3 Description of the task description parameters................................................................................12-4Table 12-4 Description of the Integrated Task Management interface............................................................12-32Table 12-5 Time parameters of a timing task...................................................................................................12-40Table 13-1 Description of the workflow of uplink-interference analysis...........................................................13-3Table 13-2 Mapping between E2E tasks and analysis tasks..............................................................................13-5Table 14-1 Network changes and their impacts.................................................................................................14-4Table 14-2 Description of the workflow of co-frequency neighboring cell analysis.........................................14-6Table 14-3 Mapping between E2E tasks and analysis tasks..............................................................................14-7Table 15-1 Description of the workflow of coverage analysis...........................................................................15-4Table 15-2 Mapping between E2E tasks and analysis tasks..............................................................................15-6Table 16-1 Tasks divided according to execution period...................................................................................16-3

TablesNastar

Operator Guide

xxii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Table 16-2 Tasks Divided According to Task Features.....................................................................................16-3Table 16-3 Description of the task description parameters................................................................................16-4Table 16-4 Description of the Integrated Task Management interface............................................................16-33Table 16-5 Time parameters of a timing task...................................................................................................16-39Table 17-1 Description of the workflow of uplink interference analysis...........................................................17-5Table 17-2 Mapping between E2E tasks and analysis tasks..............................................................................17-7Table 18-1 Description of the workflow of co-frequency neighboring-cell analysis.........................................18-6Table 18-2 Mapping between E2E tasks and analysis tasks..............................................................................18-7Table 19-1 Description of the workflow of VIP KPI analysis...........................................................................19-3Table 19-2 Mapping between E2E tasks and analysis tasks..............................................................................19-7Table 20-1 Description of the workflow of complaint assistant analysis...........................................................20-3

NastarOperator Guide Tables


xxiii

1 Overview of the Nastar PerformanceAnalysis System

About This Chapter

The iManager Nastar performance analysis system is located on the same network as the EMSof an operator. The iManager Nastar performance analysis system collects topic data of NEsthrough the EMS data center and provides topic analysis for network optimization. Theoptimization results of the topic analysis can be saved as files and sent to the CME of Huaweior a third-party data configuration tool through the EMS. Based on the optimization results, youcan modify the relevant parameters by using the data configuration tool and send the modifiedparameters to NEs.

1.1 Introduction to the Nastar Performance Analysis SystemThe Nastar performance analysis system is a system that performs localization and analysis ofquality-related problems on the radio network. This system supports multiple performanceanalysis such as coverage analysis, neighboring cell analysis, uplink-interference analysis,frequency analysis, complaint assistant analysis, and VIP KPI analysis.

1.2 Position of the Nastar on the networkThe Nastar is located in a distributed client/server network and is connected to the M2000.

1.3 Performance Analysis ProcessThis describes the performance analysis process.

NastarOperator Guide 1 Overview of the Nastar Performance Analysis System


1-1

1.1 Introduction to the Nastar Performance Analysis SystemThe Nastar performance analysis system is a system that performs localization and analysis ofquality-related problems on the radio network. This system supports multiple performanceanalysis such as coverage analysis, neighboring cell analysis, uplink-interference analysis,frequency analysis, complaint assistant analysis, and VIP KPI analysis.

Overview

The traditional network analysis system monitors the running status of networks by monitoringalarm information and analyzing performance reports. It analyzes networks on the basis of thealarm information and performance measurement statistics on network elements (NEs). Thealarm information and measurement statistics, however, both reflect the running status ofnetworks from the perspective of NEs. Therefore, they cannot provide evidences for expert andthorough radio network analysis and optimization.

The Nastar obtains the data containing the characteristics of the radio network and analyzes thedata. The data includes the MRs of radio links, pilot frequency measurement strength indicator,neighboring cell measurement data, uplink interference data, and user call events records(UCERs). By analyzing the data, the Nastar helps in locating and analyzing network problemsand provides auxiliary solutions to the problems.

Product FunctionThe Nastar performance analysis system can be used together with the parameter managementsystem and performance report system. The Nastar performance analysis system can be used forthe routine maintenance, planning, and optimization of the radio network.

Table 1-1 lists the functions supported by the GSM, CDMA, and UMTS networks.

Table 1-1 Functions supported by the GSM, CDMA, and UMTS networks

Technology GSM CDMA UMTS TD-SCDMA

Coverage analysis √ - √ √

Neighboring cellanalysis

√ √ √ √

Uplinkinterferenceanalysis

√ √ √ -

Frequency analysis √ - - -

Complaintassistant analysis

- √ - √

VIP KPI analysis - √ - √

Table 1-2 describes the functions of the Nastar.

1 Overview of the Nastar Performance Analysis SystemNastar

Operator Guide

1-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Table 1-2 The description of the Nastar analysis functions

Analysis function Description

Coverage analysis The information about the radio links involved in a customer'scall in the test cell is included in the MR. The informationpertains to the coverage, quality, and subscriber distribution ofthe carrier and cell. Coverage analysis can help networkmaintenance engineers analyze and locate a large number ofnetwork problems, such as weak cell coverage, cross coverage,poor QoS, imbalance between uplink and downlink.

Neighboring analysis This function is performed to analyze neighboring cells basedon the MRs of the actual calls of all the subscribers in the testcell. It supports the analysis of defined and undefinedneighboring cells. It helps to identify and handle the problems,including redundant and missing neighboring cellconfiguration of a cell and improper priorities of neighboringcells. In addition, it can be performed to solve network QoSproblems caused by redundant or missing neighboring cellconfiguration.

Uplink interferenceanalysis

This function is performed to analyze whether the values of themain and diversity Received Signal Strength Indicators(RSSIs) of the transmit and receive channels of a BTS arenormal. Based on the display and analysis in the time domain,it helps Nastar operators analyze and identify reverseinterference signal sources, and thus initially locate the BTSthat is being interfered with and the cause of the interference.This function can be performed to analyze and identifyinterference in the frequency domain and help Nastar operatorsselect the frequencies experiencing light interference.

Frequency analysis This function is performed to evaluate the impact of GSMfrequency planning and analyze the cells and Absolute RadioFrequency Channel Numbers (ARFCNs) experiencing severeinterference on the current network. If cells and ARFCNsexperiencing server interference are detected during drive test(DT) analysis and traffic analysis, this function can beperformed to find the frequencies that can be replaced.Therefore, network interference is decreased and network QoSis improved. Based on the interference traffic sequence of theavailable ARFCNs in an expansion cell, this function can alsobe used to find out the optimal frequencies to be added to theexpansion cell. This is a basis for preparing a frequency planfor the network.



1-3

Analysis function Description

Complaint assistantanalysis

Whenever terminal subscribers encounter network-relatedproblems, they lodge a complaint with the operators. Afterreceiving a complaint, the operator can perform this functionto obtain the UCERs pertaining to the mobile user concerned.Then, the operator can analyze the cause of the problem andthen locate and solve the problem. This helps to improve theefficiency of handling complaints, thus improving usersatisfaction.

VIP KPI analysis This function is performed to filter the call records of VIPsubscribers from the UCERs of the entire network and obtainthe KPIs of the voice and data services of VIP subscribers. TheKPIs include call drop rate, call setup delay, and forward andreverse data rate. By monitoring the QoS of VIP subscriberseach day, the Nastar operators can find out the potentialcomplaints of VIP subscribers and solve them in advance toensure that network problems do not arise. This helps toprovide better services for the VIP subscribers and improvetheir satisfaction.

Software ArchitectureAs shown in Figure 1-1, the software architecture of the Nastar performance analysis system isdivided into two parts:l Server software

l Client software

Figure 1-1 Software modules of the Nastar

Figure 1-2 shows the modules of the server software of the Nastar.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Figure 1-2 Modules of the server software of the Nastar

As shown in Figure 1-2, the server software of the Nastar consists of many functional modules.Through the Data bus, these modules communicate with each other and also communicate withthe corresponding modules of the client software. In addition, these modules access the serverdatabase of the Nastar through the database interface to perform operations on the database.

Table 1-3 describes the modules.

Table 1-3 Modules of the server software

Module Name Function

Task managementsubsystem

The task management subsystem supports the functions of viewing andoperating thematic analysis tasks. The task management subsystem isused to manage and maintain all the tasks of the entire system.

Data processingsubsystem

l Supports the functions of collecting, parsing, importing, and pre-processing the original data and generating data that is suitable forservice analysis.

l Supports the functions of managing, deleting, and backing up theoriginal data.

l Supports the functions of managing, importing, and exporting theresults of performance analysis.

Service analysissubsystem

Supports the functions of topic analysis tasks and displaying theperformance analysis results on the client.

The client of the Nastar provides a graphical user interface (GUI) for you to perform topicanalysis. The modules corresponding to the task management subsystem and service analysissubsystem are provided on the client to enable you to gain access to these two subsystems.



1-5

1.2 Position of the Nastar on the networkThe Nastar is located in a distributed client/server network and is connected to the M2000.

Figure 1-3 shows the position of the Nastar on the network.

Figure 1-3 Position of the Nastar on the network

The communication between the functional units on the network is based on the TCP/IP protocol.The Nastar server and the M2000 must be in the same local area network (LAN), and their IPaddresses must be on the same network segment.

Table 1-4 describes the functional unities in the network.

Table 1-4 Functional units on the network

Function Application Scenarios

Nastar One of the multi-user telecommunication platforms developed byHuawei. It implements performance analyses such as coverageanalysis, frequency analysis, neighboring cell analysis, uplinkinterference analysis, complaint assistant analysis, and VIP KPIanalysis for the radio network.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Function Application Scenarios

SAU Service Aware Unit. It implements the communication betweenoperation and maintenance (OM) terminals and other boards of theCBSC/RNC. For the CBSC/RNC, an extra SAU is required for pre-processing the data required by the Nastar.The main functions of the SAU are as follows:l Receiving the MML commands from the Nastar to manage the

tasks of data pre-processingl Filtering and summarizing the raw data of NEs according to the

principles of thematic Nastar tasksl Uploading the pre-processed data to the Nastar for thematic

service analysis through the M2000

Huawei M2000 A uniform management platform of Huawei mobile network. Itmanages the mobile NEs manufactured by Huawei. The M2000provides the following functions:l Centralized fault management

l Centralized performance management

l Centralized configuration management

l Centralized topology management

l Centralized security management

l System management

Connecting to the Nastar, it provides performance data,configuration data, pre-processed UCER(User Call Events Record)data, and pre-processed MR data for the Nastar through FTP.

GBSC/CBSC/RNC Base station controller. It controls BTSs and manages BTSs andradio resources.

1.3 Performance Analysis ProcessThis describes the performance analysis process.

Figure 1-4 shows the process of Nastar performance analysis.



1-7

Figure 1-4 Process of Nastar performance analysis

Start

Create a performance analysis task

View the results of a performance analysis

task

(Optional) Send the optimization results to the data configuration

tool

End

Create an E2E task

Create a performance data collection task

Table 1-5 describes the process of Nastar performance analysis.

Table 1-5 Process of Nastar performance analysis

Serial No.

Procedure Description

1 Create an OSS The Nastar collects the required data from the OSS (FTP server)to the Nastar server.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Serial No.


2 Create aconfigurationdata collectiontask

After the system installation is complete, the administrator canchoose Maintenance > Task Management on the Nastar clientto open the Task Management window, and then create aconfiguration data collection task. After the task is created, theNastar periodically obtains the required configuration data fromthe NMS and saves the data as files on the Nastar server for futureanalysis.The administrator needs to create a periodic configuration datacollection task when the Nastar is used for the first time.

3 Create an end-to-end task

You can choose Maintenance > E2E Task Management onthe Nastar client to open the E2E Task Management window,and then create an end-to-end task. After the task is created, theNastar issues MML commands to the NMS, and then NMSissues the received MML commands to the corresponding NE.At last, the NE that receives the MML commands performs themeasurement task and generates measurement results.When you create an E2E task, the Nastar will automaticallycreate a data collection task.

4 Import engineerparameters

You can create an engineer parameters import task in theAnalysis Task Management window of the main interface onthe Nastar client. After the task is created, the Nastar imports theengineering parameters to the database.

5 Create aperformanceanalysis task

You can create a performance analysis task in the Analysis TaskManagement window of the main interface on the Nastar client.After the task is created, the Nastar periodically obtains therequired performance data, uplink frequency scanning data,measurement data, and user call events records from the Nastardatabase, and then generates an analysis report through theanalysis.

6 View the resultsof a performanceanalysis task

You can view the results of the performance analysis tasks thatare successfully performed after querying the analysis report.

7 Send theoptimizationresults to the dataconfigurationtool (optional)

The Nastar provides the function of exporting certainperformance analysis optimization results as files. You canmanually send the files to the Huawei data configuration tool.After checking the optimization results, the data configurationtool applies the optimization results to NEs.



1-9

2 Getting Started

About This Chapter

This describes the GUIs of the client of the Nastar performance analysis system and the commonoperations on the GUIs.

2.1 Logging In to the NastarThis section describes how to log in to the Nastar, and how to log out the current user or exit theNastar client.

2.2 Resetting the Password of an Nastar UserThis section describes how the user in SMManagers reset the password of an Nastar user. If youforget your password, contact the user in SMManagers to reset the password.

2.3 Customizing Client GUI EffectYou can customize the GUI effect of the Nastar client.

2.4 Setting the ToolbarYou can perform this task to set the shortcut buttons shown on the toolbar.

2.5 Customizing Client Time Display ModeYou can customize the time display mode as desired.

2.6 Setting the Display Mode of NumbersThrough this operation, customize the number display mode of the client, such as, the displaymode of the system monitoring data.

2.7 Locking ClientIf no operation is performed within a preset period, the Nastar client is locked manually orautomatically to prevent other users from illegally operating the client.

2.8 Unlocking the ClientThis describes how to unlock the locked Nastar client.

2.9 Broadcast MessagesThe broadcast message function includes "setting the broadcast parameter" and "sending thebroadcast message". By the broadcast function of the Nastar, it can send messages to other usersexpediently.

2.10 Setting the Alarm Sound When the Network Is Disconnected

NastarOperator Guide 2 Getting Started


2-1

On the Nastar client, you can set the alarm sound that is played by the sound box when theNastar client is disconnected from the network.

2.11 Managing the Nastar LicenseNastar licenses can restrict the number of manageable devices, and the availability duration ofthe Nastar. You need to manage the licenses periodically.

2.12 Collecting Nastar Log FileWhen the Nastar client or server cannot run properly, you can collect all the running informationfrom the Nastar client and server to locate faults.

2.13 Engineering Parameter ManagementThis describes the project parameter management. The Nastar performance analysis systemprovides the function of managing project parameters for users. You can import projectparameters according to the template as required, which facilitates the project implementation,network analysis, and network optimization, and guides the future construction based on thelearned experience.

2.14 Creating Custom NE GroupsThis section describes how to create custom NE groups. The Nastar client provides the functionsof creating, modifying, deleting, importing, and exporting custom NE groups. You can addcertain NEs to an NE group so that the performance analysis can be performed for all the NEsin an NE group.

2.15 Querying NE DataThe Nastar provides the function of querying NE data. Before creating an analysis task, you cancheck whether the data related to this analysis task has been imported into the Nastar databaseby querying the data, and check the time of the imported data. The information is the basis forthe analysis task.

2.16 Reference for the Performance Analysis System GUIThis describes the parameters of the client of the Nastar performance analysis system, such asthe parameters related to the client login. You can refer to the description for better operationson the Nastar client.

2 Getting StartedNastar

Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

2.1 Logging In to the NastarThis section describes how to log in to the Nastar, and how to log out the current user or exit theNastar client.

2.1.1 Logging In to the Nastar ServerThe Nastar uses the client/server model. To perform an operation, you need to log in to the serverthrough the Nastar client.

2.1.2 Logging Out the User AccountTo ensure security, when you do not need to perform any operations on the client, you can logout the user account. This operation does not end the client program.

2.1.3 Exiting the Nastar ClientWhen you do not need to perform any operations on the client, exit the Nastar client.

2.1.1 Logging In to the Nastar ServerThe Nastar uses the client/server model. To perform an operation, you need to log in to the serverthrough the Nastar client.

PrerequisiteBefore login, ensure that the Nastar client and server are connected normally, and the serverworks correctly.

Contextl The default port number of the server is 31037. Do not change it in normal conditions.

Otherwise, you cannot log in to the Nastar server.

l By default, the password of the Administrator is empty. After you successfully log in tothe Nastar server for the first time, change the password in time. For details on how tochange a password, see 4.2 Changing the Password of the Current User.

l You can only log in to the server in common mode. In common mode, the data is notencrypted during transmission.

l If you do not log in to the Nastar server in more than 60 (default value) days, the Nastarautomatically disables your account except that you are an Administrator user.

l If you never use your new account to log in to the Nastar server, the Nastar neither disablesnor deletes the new account.

l The users in SMManagers group can click the disabled or hibernated user account on theSecurity Management navigation tree, and then set Enable/Disable user account toEnable on the Details tab to set the account to an enabled user account.

Procedure

Step 1 From the Start menu, start the Nastar client.

Step 2 In the Login dialog box, select an IP address or a host name from the Server drop-down list.



2-3

NOTE

l Before logging in to the Nastar server with the host name, you should be sure that the C:\WINDOWS\system32\drivers\etc\hosts file of the Nastar client contains the mapping of the IP address to the hostname.

l If there is no server to select, do as the followings:

1. Click on the right of Server drop box.

2. In the Server List dialog box, click Add.

3. In the Add Server Information dialog box, set the server name, port, and mode. Click OK.

4. In the Server List dialog box, click OK.

Step 3 In the Login dialog box, enter the user name and password.

Step 4 Click Login.l If the user name and the password are correct, the Loading dialog box is displayed, indicating

the loading progress.l If the user name or password is wrong, the Information dialog box prompts a login failure.

l If the password is to expire, the system prompts you to change the password before theexpiration date.

l If the license is to expire, the system notifies you of the expiration date.

----End

2.1.2 Logging Out the User AccountTo ensure security, when you do not need to perform any operations on the client, you can logout the user account. This operation does not end the client program.

Contextl To ensure security, when you do not need to perform any operations on the client, you can

log out the user account or exit the Nastar client.l This operation does not end the client program. After logout, the Login dialog box is

displayed. You can enter the proper information in the dialog box to log in to the Nastaragain.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose System > Logout.

Step 2 In the Confirm dialog box, click OK.

----End

2.1.3 Exiting the Nastar ClientWhen you do not need to perform any operations on the client, exit the Nastar client.

Contextl To ensure security, when you do not need to perform any operations on the client, exit the

Nastar client or log out the user account. If you do not need to perform any operations for


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

a while, you can 2.7.2 Locking the Client Manually or 2.7.1 Locking the ClientAutomatically.

l This operation will end the client program. If you want to perform some operations on theclient, restart the Nastar client.

ProcedureStep 1 Choose System > Exit.

Step 2 In the confirm dialog box, click OK.

----End

2.2 Resetting the Password of an Nastar UserThis section describes how the user in SMManagers reset the password of an Nastar user. If youforget your password, contact the user in SMManagers to reset the password.

Contextl The password setting must comply with the password policy. For details on how to set a

password policy, see 4.3.1 Setting the Password Policy.l The password of the administrator contains eight or more digits. In addition, it must also

comply with the password policy.l The user in SMManagers can reset the password of any other user except the administrator.

The password of the administrator can be changed by only the administrator through theNastar client.

ProcedureStep 1 Choose Security > Security Management.

Step 2 Under the Security Management navigation tree in the Security Management window, expandthe User node. Right-click the user whose password you want to reset, and then choose ResetPassword.

NOTEYou can also choose System > Change Password to change the password.

Step 3 In the Reset Password dialog box, set New Password and Confirm Password, and then clickOK.

Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, click OK.

----End

2.3 Customizing Client GUI EffectYou can customize the GUI effect of the Nastar client.

2.3.1 Setting Font SizeThis section describes how to set the font size on the Nastar client.

2.3.2 Setting Output Information



2-5

The output window is at the bottom of the Nastar client GUI. It displays the prompt messagesand feedback information of the errors that affect the running of the Nastar. You can managethe display of output messages and export the messages by setting the output window.

2.3.1 Setting Font SizeThis section describes how to set the font size on the Nastar client.

ContextAfter you set the font size, you need to log in to the Nastar again for the settings to take effect.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose System > Preferences.

Step 2 From the navigation tree on the left of the Preferences window, select Font.

Step 3 In Font Size drop-down list, select a proper value.

NOTEFont Size can be as follows:

l Small: The font size is 11 pounds.

l Middle(Default): The font size is 12 pounds.

l Large: The font size is 13 pounds.

Step 4 Click OK.

----End

2.3.2 Setting Output InformationThe output window is at the bottom of the Nastar client GUI. It displays the prompt messagesand feedback information of the errors that affect the running of the Nastar. You can managethe display of output messages and export the messages by setting the output window.

Procedure


Step 2 From the navigation tree on the left of the Preferences window, select Output Window, andthen set relevant parameters.

NOTE

l Right-click in the output pane and choose Select All, and then right-click again and choose Copy to copyall the displayed output information to the clipboard.

l Right-click in the output pane and choose Clear to clear all the displayed output information.

l Right-click in the output window and choose Find. Enter the keywords in the Find what text box.

l Right-click in the output pane and choose Save As to save the output information as an *.txt file.

l Right-click in the output window and choose Auto Scroll. The output information is set to scrollautomatically. Right-click in the output window again and choose Auto Scroll, the auto scroll is cancelled.

l Right-click in the output window and choose Parameter Setting. The Output Window pane is displayedin the Preferences window.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Step 3 Click OK.

----End

2.4 Setting the ToolbarYou can perform this task to set the shortcut buttons shown on the toolbar.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose System > Customize Toolbar.

Step 2 In the Customize Toolbar dialog box, select System in the Toolbar Groups group box.

Step 3 Click Advanced to display a new dialog box.

NOTE

l The new dialog box consists of two sections: Usable Tools and Customized Tools. All the buttons inCustomized Tools are displayed on the toolbar, and the buttons in Usable Tools are not displayed on thetoolbar.

l Click Advanced again. The new dialog box is hidden.

l Click Reset to restore the toolbar so that you can reset it.

Step 4 In the Toolbar Buttons dialog box, set the buttons you want to display on the toolbar.

l In the Usable Tools group box, select the buttons you want to display. Click tomove the buttons to Customized Tools.

l In the Customized Tools group box, select the buttons you do not want to display. Click

to move the buttons to Usable Tools.

Step 5 Click OK.

----End

2.5 Customizing Client Time Display ModeYou can customize the time display mode as desired.

2.5.1 Setting the Time Format of the ClientThis section describes how to set the time format of the client.

2.5.2 Setting the Time Mode of the ClientThis section describes how to set the time mode of the client to determine whether the time isdisplayed according to the Nastar server time or the NE time.

2.5.3 Setting the Date Format of the ClientThis section describes how to set the date format of the client.

2.5.1 Setting the Time Format of the ClientThis section describes how to set the time format of the client.



2-7

Contextl After you set the time format, you need to log in to the server again for the settings to take

effect.l Next time when you log in to the client, the Nastar client automatically uses the settings

that you used last time.

Procedure


Step 2 From the navigation tree on the left of the Preferences window, expand the Region Settingnode and select Time.

Step 3 In the Time Settings group box, set the time format.

NOTEThe time format is displayed in Appearance Example.

Step 4 Click OK.

----End

2.5.2 Setting the Time Mode of the ClientThis section describes how to set the time mode of the client to determine whether the time isdisplayed according to the Nastar server time or the NE time.

Context

The settings take effect after you log in to the client again.

l After you set the time mode, you need to restart the Nastar client for the settings to takeeffect.

l Next time when you log in to the client, the Nastar client automatically uses the settingsthat you used last time.

Procedure


Step 2 In the navigation tree on the left of the Preferences window, select Time Mode.

Step 3 In the Time Mode pane, select Time Mode.

NOTE

The time can be displayed in two modes:

l Server time mode: If you select this mode, the information are queried according to the server time.

l NE time mode: If you select this mode, the information are queried according to the NE time.

You are advised to retain the default value NE time mode.

Step 4 Click OK.

----End


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

2.5.3 Setting the Date Format of the ClientThis section describes how to set the date format of the client.

Contextl After you set the date format, you need to restart the Nastar client again for the settings to

take effect.

l Next time when you log in to the client, the Nastar client automatically uses the settingsthat you used last time.

Procedure


Step 2 In the navigation tree on the left of the Preferences window, expand the Region Setting nodeand select Date.

Step 3 In the Date group box, set the date format.

NOTE

l Date Separator: symbol to separate the date. There are three symbols for you to select: "/", "-", and ".". Thedefault is "/".

l Date Format: display format of the date. It can be set to "yyyy/MM/dd", "dd/MM/yyyy", or "MM/dd/yyyy".

l The date display effect that you set is displayed in Appearance Example.

Step 4 Click OK.

----End

2.6 Setting the Display Mode of NumbersThrough this operation, customize the number display mode of the client, such as, the displaymode of the system monitoring data.

Contextl The settings take effect after you log in to the client again.

l Next time when you log in to the client, the Nastar client automatically uses the setting thatyou used last time.

l After you modify the region number settings, the display and sequence of the number maybe changed. You can view the display effect in the Positive number text box and Negativenumber text box.

Procedure


Step 2 In the Preferences dialog box, select Number from the navigation tree on the left, and then setthe number display format in the Number area on the right.



2-9

NOTE

l Digits of decimal fraction: digits of decimal fraction. The default is two digits, and the value rangesfrom 0 to 3, 2 by default.

l Number separator: whether to use the comma (,) to group the integer part of numbers. The default isblank space. You can choose the blank space or comma ",".

l Start with 0: whether to add 0 before the decimal point. The default is to add a 0.

Step 3 Click OK.

----End

2.7 Locking ClientIf no operation is performed within a preset period, the Nastar client is locked manually orautomatically to prevent other users from illegally operating the client.

2.7.1 Locking the Client AutomaticallyYou can set the Nastar client to lock automatically. If there is no operation performed on theclient during the preset time period, the Nastar locks the client automatically.

2.7.2 Locking the Client ManuallyWhen you do not need to perform any operations on the Nastar client, you can lock the clientmanually to prevent illegal operations.

2.7.1 Locking the Client AutomaticallyYou can set the Nastar client to lock automatically. If there is no operation performed on theclient during the preset time period, the Nastar locks the client automatically.

Procedure


Step 2 From the navigation tree on the left of the Preferences window, select Lock Settings.

Step 3 Select the Automatically locked check box. In the minutes, the terminal is automaticallylocked. text box, enter a proper value.

NOTE

l Clear the Automatically locked check box. The function of auto lock is disabled.

l The lock interval ranges from 1 minute to 35000 minutes.

l If you select Visible on Terminal lock, the main window of the client is visible after the client islocked. If you deselect Visible on Terminal lock, the main window of the client is invisible after theclient is locked.

Step 4 Click OK.

----End

2.7.2 Locking the Client ManuallyWhen you do not need to perform any operations on the Nastar client, you can lock the clientmanually to prevent illegal operations.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Procedure

Step 1 Choose System > Lock Terminal or click on the toolbar.The client is locked. The Nastar does not respond to user operations until the client is unlocked.

----End

2.8 Unlocking the ClientThis describes how to unlock the locked Nastar client.

Contextl If you unlock your own account, the Nastar becomes operable after it is unlocked.

l If your user account is in the Administrators user group and you unlock a user account ofsomeone else, the unlocked account is logged out.

Procedure

Step 1 When the client is locked, press Ctrl+Alt+U.

Step 2 In the Unlock dialog box, enter the user name and the password, and then click OK.

----End

2.9 Broadcast MessagesThe broadcast message function includes "setting the broadcast parameter" and "sending thebroadcast message". By the broadcast function of the Nastar, it can send messages to other usersexpediently.

2.9.1 Setting Broadcast ParametersSetting the broadcast parameters on the Nastar client refers to setting the number of latestmessages and the total number of stored messages, that is, setting the display number of broadcastmessages on the client and the total number of broadcast messages that can be cached in theserver.

2.9.2 Sending Broadcast MessagesThis section describes how to send broadcast messages from the client.

2.9.1 Setting Broadcast ParametersSetting the broadcast parameters on the Nastar client refers to setting the number of latestmessages and the total number of stored messages, that is, setting the display number of broadcastmessages on the client and the total number of broadcast messages that can be cached in theserver.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose System > Broadcast Message.



2-11

Step 2 In the Broadcast Message dialog box, click Options.

Step 3 In the Broadcast Messages Options dialog box, enter the values in Updated message countand Saved message count, click Save.

NOTE

l The value of Updated message count ranges from 1 to 1000.

l The value of Saved message count ranges from 0 to 1000.

l The broadcast messages are refreshed in real time.

Step 4 Click OK.

----End

2.9.2 Sending Broadcast MessagesThis section describes how to send broadcast messages from the client.

Contextl Broadcast messages are sent to only the clients that connects to the server normally after

user login.l A client can receive the broadcast messages sent by itself. A message is displayed in the

output window.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose System > Broadcast Message.

Step 2 In the Broadcast Message dialog box, enter the message content in the Sending message field.

NOTE

l A broadcast message cannot be null, and cannot exceed 128 characters.

l The system automatically adds line feeds according to the length of broadcast messages.

Step 3 Click Send.When the sending is complete, the Message dialog box is displayed on other clients. Users canclick Detail to view the message.

Step 4 In the Information dialog box, click OK.

----End

2.10 Setting the Alarm Sound When the Network IsDisconnected

On the Nastar client, you can set the alarm sound that is played by the sound box when theNastar client is disconnected from the network.

Contextl You can use the sound file of the Nastar or others.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

l Only the sound files of the Wav type in PCM format are supported. The Microsoft ADPCMtype is not supported.

Procedure


Step 2 In the Preferences dialog box, select Disconnection Sound from the navigation tree on the left.

Step 3 In the Disconnection Sound group box, select Enable, and then click . In the Open dialogbox, select a sound file, and then click Open.

NOTE

You can click to play the sound.

Step 4 Click OK.

----End

2.11 Managing the Nastar LicenseNastar licenses can restrict the number of manageable devices, and the availability duration ofthe Nastar. You need to manage the licenses periodically.

2.11.1 Querying the Nastar LicenseThis topic describes how to query the license file on the Nastar server through the Nastar client.

2.11.2 Updating the Nastar LicenseThis topic describes how to replace the Nastar license file on the Nastar server through the client.

2.11.1 Querying the Nastar LicenseThis topic describes how to query the license file on the Nastar server through the Nastar client.

Procedure

Step 1 ChooseHelp > License Information.

Step 2 In the License Information dialog box, query the license information about resources andfunctions on the Resource control item and Function control item tabs.

----End

2.11.2 Updating the Nastar LicenseThis topic describes how to replace the Nastar license file on the Nastar server through the client.

Contextl The type of the license applied for must be consistent with the version type.

l The valid time for the license that is uniformly used in Nastar contains two fields: Expiry(Days) and End Time. If both the fields exist, the value of Expiry(Days) is valid.



2-13

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Help > License Information.

Step 2 In the License Information dialog box, click Update.

Step 3 In the Open dialog box, select the new license file, and then click Open.

Step 4 In the License Information dialog box, view the changes of the licenses, and then clickClose.

----End

2.12 Collecting Nastar Log FileWhen the Nastar client or server cannot run properly, you can collect all the running informationfrom the Nastar client and server to locate faults.

PrerequisiteYou have logged in to the Nastar client.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Help > Logs Collection. The Logs Collection window is displayed.

Step 2 Set the relevant parameters.For details about these parameters, see 2.16.8 Parameters for Collecting Nastar Log Files.

Step 3 Click Collect.

----End

2.13 Engineering Parameter ManagementThis describes the project parameter management. The Nastar performance analysis systemprovides the function of managing project parameters for users. You can import projectparameters according to the template as required, which facilitates the project implementation,network analysis, and network optimization, and guides the future construction based on thelearned experience.

2.13.1 Importing/Exporting Engineering ParametersThis section describes how to import and export engineering parameters. You can export theengineering parameters in .csv, .xls, or .xlsx files to the Nastar database, which providesreference for certain algorithms of the performance analysis and for assistant analysis. You canalso export all the engineering parameters in the Nastar database as .csv or .xls files to facilitatethe query and management of engineering parameters.

2.13.2 Querying Engineering ParametersThis describes how to query engineering parameters. You can query the information about theimported engineering parameters of NEs .


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

2.13.1 Importing/Exporting Engineering ParametersThis section describes how to import and export engineering parameters. You can export theengineering parameters in .csv, .xls, or .xlsx files to the Nastar database, which providesreference for certain algorithms of the performance analysis and for assistant analysis. You canalso export all the engineering parameters in the Nastar database as .csv or .xls files to facilitatethe query and management of engineering parameters.

Prerequisitel You have logged in to the Nastar client.

l You are authorized to manage the engineering parameters.

ContextThe engineering parameters include mainly the cell engineering information, geographicalinformation, and key configuration information. The engineering parameters can be importedto the database to provide reference for certain algorithms of the performance analysis and forassistant analysis.

The engineering parameter template files in .csv, .xls, and .xlsx formats can be imported. Toopen .xlsx files, you must install Microsoft Office 2007.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Function List > System Function > Engineering parameter management from thenavigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window.

Step 2 Import or export engineering parameters as required.

If You Want to ... Then ...

Import engineering parameters Perform Step 3.

Export engineering parameters Perform Step 4.

Step 3 Perform the following operations to import engineering parameters:1. In the Engineering parameter management window, click the *** engineering

parameters tab and then click Import.*** refers to the network system such as GSM, CDMA, UMTS, or TD-SCDMA.

2. In the displayed Open dialog box, select an engineering parameter file, and then clickOpen.If an engineering parameter file in .xls or .xlsx format is selected and the file containsmultiple worksheets, a prompt is displayed for you to select the worksheet to be imported.

3. Configure the column headers.l At the header of each column, you can right-click and choose the title of the current

column.When you move the pointer to the column header of a column, a pop-up message isdisplayed, showing the information about this column, for example, column number/configured columns headings/column headings in the engineering parameter file.



2-15

l The column headers marked with the * character must be configured. Otherwise, theimport operation is not allowed.

l If you need to modify an incorrectly configured column header, right-click the columnheader, clear the check box next to the original header, and then reconfigure the header.

l GSM system– The number of digits in the BCC and NCC values cannot exceed two. The values of

the BCC, NCC, MNC, and MCC must not be null and must be unique. The valuesof LACs and CIs of two different cells cannot be both the same. Otherwise, theengineering parameter file cannot be imported to the database.

– It is recommended that the BCCH, BCC, NCC, and CGI information regarding eachcell in the engineering parameters be the same as that in the configuration parameterfiles. Otherwise, cells cannot be accurately located during neighboring cell analysisor frequency analysis.

l CDMA systemThe values of MSC ID, cell ID, and sector ID of a carrier must not be null. The valuesof MSC ID, cell ID, and sector ID of two different carriers cannot be all the same.Otherwise, the engineering parameter file cannot be imported to the database.

l UMTS systemThe values of RNC ID and cell ID of a cell must not be null. The values of RNC ID andcell ID of two different cells cannot be both the same. Otherwise, the engineeringparameter file cannot be imported to the database.

l TD-SCDMA systemThe values of RNC ID and Cell ID of a cell must not be null. The values RNC ID andCell ID of two different cells cannot be both the same. In addition, the RNC ID and CellID in the engineering parameters must be the same as those in the configurationparameter file. Otherwise, the engineering parameter file cannot be imported to thedatabase.

4. Click OK.5. Perform the operations as prompted.

l If the imported information is correct and no duplicates of the records exist, go to Step3.6.

l If the imported information is correct but certain duplicates of the records exist, thesystem will overwrite the existing records and import the additional records. After theimport is complete, go to Step 3.6.

l If certain abnormal records exist in the information to be imported, the import of thecurrent file is not allowed. In this case, the system displays the number of abnormalrecords.– For CDMA, UMTS and TD-SCDMA system, Click Export Check Result to export

the check result so that you can make modifications based on the error informationto complete the current import task.

– You can click Cancel to terminate the current import task.

6. In the displayed dialog box, click OK.

Step 4 Perform the following operations to export engineering parameters:1. In the Engineering parameter management window, click the *** engineering

parameters tab and then click Export.*** refers to the network system such as GSM, CDMA, UMTS, or TD-SCDMA.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

2. Set a file name and specify the save path and file type in the displayed Save dialog box,and then click Save.

----End

2.13.2 Querying Engineering ParametersThis describes how to query engineering parameters. You can query the information about theimported engineering parameters of NEs .


l You have imported engineering parameters.

Procedure

Step 1 From the navigation tree in the left pane of the Analysis Task Management window, chooseFunction List > System Function > Engineering Parameter Management.

Step 2 In the Engineering Parameter Management window, click the *** EngineeringParameters tab, and query the engineering parameter information about each NE.l *** represents a network technology. It can be GSM, CDMA, or UMTS.

l By default, the engineering result list displays all the engineering parameter information thathas been imported to the database. To view the required engineering parameter information,you can deselect all the objects in the left NE object navigation tree and then select the objectsthat you want to view.

l The system enables you to search for the objects in the navigation tree. You can right-clickin the navigation area and then press Ctrl+F to display the Find dialog box. Type thekeywords, that is, the search condition, in the dialog box. Then, the system searches for theobjects that meet the search condition.You can select Case sensitive to ensure that the typed keywords are case sensitive.You can select Up or Down in the Direction area to define the search area.

----End

Postrequisitel Delete engineering parameter.

In the NE object navigation tree on the left, select the NE node whose engineering

parameters you plan to delete, and then click .l Synchronize the engineering parameters with the configuration data as required. This

function is applicable to the GSM and the UMTS system.NOTE

When the engineering parameters are imported to the Nastar database, the system updates theengineering parameters such as BSC name, BCCH information, BSIC, cell name, and BTS nameaccording to the latest configuration data. If the configuration data is changed later, you mustsynchronize the engineering parameters with the configuration data manually or import the modifiedengineering parameter file to maintain the consistency between the configuration data and theengineering parameters.

To synchronize the engineering parameters with the configuration data, do as follows:



2-17

1. In the Engineering Parameter Management window, click the GSM EngineeringParameters tab.

2. Click in the upper right corner of the window.

2.14 Creating Custom NE GroupsThis section describes how to create custom NE groups. The Nastar client provides the functionsof creating, modifying, deleting, importing, and exporting custom NE groups. You can addcertain NEs to an NE group so that the performance analysis can be performed for all the NEsin an NE group.


l You are authorized to manage NE groups.

ContextThe export of custom NE group files in .csv and .xls formats are supported.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Function List > System Function > NE Group Management from the navigation treein the Analysis Task Management window. The NE Group Management window isdisplayed.

Step 2 Perform the following operations as required:


Create a custom NE group directly Perform Step 3.

Create a custom NE group by importing one Perform Step 4.

Step 3 Create a custom NE group directly.1. Click the *** NE Group Management tab. Click New to open the NE Group Edit dialog

box.*** refers to the network system such as GSM, CDMA, UMTS, or TD-SCDMA.

2. Set the relevant parameters.l The system enables you to search for the objects in the navigation tree. You can right-

click any point of the navigation tree and then press Ctrl+F to open the Find dialogbox. Type the keywords, that is, the search condition, in the dialog box. Then, the systemsearches for the query result that meets the search condition.You can select Case sensitive to ensure that the keywords you typed are case sensitive.You can select Up or Down in the Direction area to determine the direction of thesearch.

l For description of the parameters, see 2.16.10 Parameters for Creating andModifying Custom NE Groups.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

3. Click OK.

Step 4 Create a custom NE group by importing one.

1. Click the *** NE Group Management tab, and then click Import.*** refers to the network system such as GSM, CDMA, UMTS, or TD-SCDMA.

2. In the displayed Open dialog box, select an edited NE group file, and then click Open.If an NE group file in .xls format is selected and the file contains multiple worksheets, aprompt is displayed. In this case, select the worksheet to be imported.

NOTE

l If multiple lines of remarks regarding an NE group are inconsistent in the edited NE group file,the system displays the last line of remarks on the Note title bar of the NE GroupManagement window.

l It is recommended that the remarks in different lines regarding an NE group be consistent whenyou define NE group information.

3. Perform the operations as prompted.

l If the imported information is correct and no duplicates of the records exist, go to Step4.4.

l If the imported information is correct but certain duplicates of the records exist, theConfirm dialog box is displayed. In this case, click Yes to overwrite the existing recordsand import the additional records. After the import is complete, go to Step 4.4.

You can also click No in the displayed Confirm dialog box to ignore the duplicaterecords and import the additional records.

l If certain abnormal records exist in the information to be imported, the import of thecurrent file is not allowed. In this case, the system displays the number of abnormalrecords.

– Click Export Check Result to export the check result so that you can makemodifications based on the error information to complete the current import task.

– You can click Cancel to terminate the current import task.

4. In the displayed dialog box, click OK.

----End

Postrequisitel Modifying the attributes of a custom NE group

1. In the NE Group Management window, click the *** NE Group Management tab.Select an NE group, and then click Modify. The NE Group Edit dialog box isdisplayed.

*** refers to the network system such as GSM, CDMA, UMTS, or TD-SCDMA.

2. Modify the relevant parameters.

The objects and remarks of an NE groups can be modified but the name of an NEgroups cannot be modified.

For description of the parameters, see 2.16.10 Parameters for Creating andModifying Custom NE Groups.

3. Click OK.



2-19

NOTE

If the NE group is used by certain tasks, the modification does not affect the ongoing tasks. Ifthe NE group is used by a periodic task, the related information is updated in the next periodafter the modification.

TIP

When you need to modify NE group information in batches, you can export the NE group information,make modifications, and then import the NE group information again.

l Viewing the information about members of the custom NE groupIn the NE Group Management window, click the *** NE Group Management tab. Then,double-click a custom NE group to view the detailed information about the members of thecustom NE group.*** refers to the network system such as GSM, CDMA, UMTS, or TD-SCDMA.

l Deleting custom NE groups

1. In the NE Group Management window, click the *** NE Group Management tab.Then, select one or multiple NE groups and click Delete.*** refers to the network system such as GSM, CDMA, UMTS, or TD-SCDMA.

2. In the displayed Confirm dialog box, click OK.

NOTE

If the NE group is used by certain tasks, the modification does not affect the ongoing tasks. Ifthe NE group is used by a periodic task, the related information is updated in the next periodafter the modification.

l Exporting the custom NE group information to .csv or .xls files

1. In the NE Group Management window, click the *** NE Group Management tab.Then, select one or multiple NE groups and click Export.*** refers to the network system such as GSM, CDMA, UMTS, or TD-SCDMA.

2. Set a file name and specify the save path and file type in the displayed Save dialogbox, and then click Save.

NOTE

You can also choose Save As on the *** NE Group Management tab page to export all the NEgroup information.

2.15 Querying NE DataThe Nastar provides the function of querying NE data. Before creating an analysis task, you cancheck whether the data related to this analysis task has been imported into the Nastar databaseby querying the data, and check the time of the imported data. The information is the basis forthe analysis task.


l You have imported the data corresponding to an analysis task.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Procedure

Step 1 From the navigation tree in the left pane of the Analysis Task Management window, chooseFunction List > System Function > Data Query.

Step 2 In the left pane of the Data Query window, set Data Type and Condition Selection, and thenselect an NE object from the NE object navigation tree.Condition Selection is optional. You need to select Required Time Limited before setting thetime range. If the time is not limited, you need not set this option.

Step 3 Click Query in the lower-left corner. Then, you can determine whether the data related to theanalysis task is imported into the Nastar database by viewing the information in the right pane.You can also view the time of the imported data.The data of different network systems is displayed in a two-dimensional table in the right pane,as shown in Figure 2-1.

Figure 2-1 Data Query window

NOTE

The right pane is described as follows:

l Overview tab page displays the analysis start time of all BSCs. Other tab pages display the informationabout each BSC.

l Each line represents one day, and the columns from 0 to 23 represent hours.

l The cells in green indicate that the analysis data of a BSC at the time exists. The cells in white indicatethat the analysis data of a BSC at the time does not exist.

l The number in each cell refers to the quantity of analysis data of a BSC at the time.

----End



2-21

2.16 Reference for the Performance Analysis System GUIThis describes the parameters of the client of the Nastar performance analysis system, such asthe parameters related to the client login. You can refer to the description for better operationson the Nastar client.

2.16.1 Interface Description: Nastar ClientThis section describes the contents and functions of the Nastar client.

2.16.2 Nastar Menu Function ReferenceThis section describes the Nastar menus and their functions. You can refer to this section if youare not familiar with the access to an operation.

2.16.3 Keyboard ShortcutsThe Nastar client provides keyboard shortcuts for some operations. You can perform theseoperations more quickly by using the keyboard shortcuts than using the mouse.

2.16.4 Parameters for Server InformationThis section describes the parameters in the Server List dialog box. You can refer to theseparameters when you log in to the Nastar.

2.16.5 Parameters for Logging In to the Nastar ServerThis section describes the parameters in the Login dialog box. You can refer to these parameterswhen you log in to the Nastar.

2.16.6 Parameters for Output GUI InformationThis section describes the parameters in the Output Window group box. You can refer to theseparameters when you set output information.

2.16.7 Parameters for Setting the Time/Date StyleThis section describes the parameters in the Time/Date dialog box. You can refer to theseparameters when you set the client time/date style.

2.16.8 Parameters for Collecting Nastar Log FilesThis describes the parameters for collecting Nastar log files. You can refer to the descriptionwhen collecting Nastar log files.

2.16.9 Parameters for Importing and Exporting Engineering ParametersThis section describes the parameters for importing and exporting the engineering parameters.You can refer to these parameters when importing and exporting the engineering parameters.

2.16.10 Parameters for Creating and Modifying Custom NE GroupsThis section describes the parameters for creating and modifying custom NE groups. You canrefer to the parameter description when creating and modifying the custom NE groups.

2.16.1 Interface Description: Nastar ClientThis section describes the contents and functions of the Nastar client.

GUI IntroductionFigure 2-2 shows the displayed GUI after you log in to the Nastar client. Table 2-1 describesthe items in Figure 2-2.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Figure 2-2 GUI of the Nastar client

Table 2-1 GUI description of the Nastar client

No. Name Description

(1) Area of system toolbuttons

Describes the operation buttons of the Nastar client.

(2) Function listnavigation pane

Displays all the theme functions and system functionsof the Nastar through a navigation tree.

(3) Menu items Describes the menus and related functions of the Nastar.

(4) Area of themeanalysis task list

Displays the theme analysis tasks that are created byusers.

(5) Area of themeanalysis result list

Displays the corresponding theme analysis result whenyou select a certain theme analysis task in Area (4).



2-23

System Tool ButtonsIcon Name Description

Exit Exits the Nastar client.

Logout Logs out of the current user.

Lock Terminal When the client is locked,you cannot do any operationson the client, and you need toenter your password tounlock the client.

Full Screen If you click this icon, themenu bar, toolbar, outputwindow, and status bar arehidden. Thus, you canexpand the main window infull screen. Press ESC orclick Close Full Screen toexit the full screen.

2.16.2 Nastar Menu Function ReferenceThis section describes the Nastar menus and their functions. You can refer to this section if youare not familiar with the access to an operation.

Table 2-2 describes the submenus of the System main menu.

Table 2-2 System menus

Menu Item Description

SystemMonitor

Browser Open the System Monitor Browser window to browsethe status of the services, processes, hard disks,databases, system resources, components, and logs.

Settings Set the parameter values for performance monitoring,hard disk monitoring, database monitoring, and servicemonitoring.

LogManagement

Query OperationLogs

Set a template or a filter condition for browsingoperation logs to know the information about useroperations.

Query SystemLogs

Set a template or a filter condition for browsing systemlogs to know the events that occur during the systemoperation.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


Query SecurityLogs

Set a template or a filter condition for browsing securitylogs to know the information about the securityoperations such as login, logout, and unlocking a useraccount.

Operation LogStatistics

Use a template or set one or more statistical items andfilter conditions to collect statistics on operation logsand display these operation logs.

System LogStatistics

Use a template or set one or more statistical items andfilter conditions to collect statistics on system logs anddisplay these system logs.

Security LogStatistics

Use a template or set one or more statistical items andfilter conditions to collect statistics on security logs anddisplay these security logs.

Preferences Set the font size on the client GUI, output windowaction, time and date, client auto lock, disconnectionsound, number display mode, time mode, upgrade andlogin mode.

Customize Toolbar Customize the display of the toolbar on the client GUI,including whether to display the tool buttons and whichtool buttons to display.

Broadcast Message Open the Broadcast dialog box to send broadcastmessages.

Lock Terminal Lock the client immediately.

Change Password Change the password of the current user logged in.

Logout The current user logs out of the Nastar client but doesnot close the client.

Full Screen Display the current window in full screen.

Exit The current user logs out of the Nastar client and closesthe client.

Table 2-3 describes the submenus of the Maintenance main menu.

Table 2-3 Maintenance menus


Task Management Open the Task Management window to performoperations related to centralized task management.



2-25


OSS Management The OSS and NE management subsystem provides thebasic functions for managing objects. The objectscontain OSS systems, subnets, and NEs.

E2E Task Management Open the E2E Task Management window to performoperations related to end-to-end task management.

Table 2-4 describes the submenus of the Security main menu.

Table 2-4 Security menus


Security Management Open the Security Management window to manage theusers, user groups, and operation sets.

User Monitor Monitor the user operations, the current sessions or forcethe user to exit.

ACL Add, modify, and delete the IP address or networksegment in the ACL.

Security Policy Set the security policies of the Nastar, including thepassword policy, user account policy, and systempolicy.

Table 2-5 describes the submenus of the Window main menu.

Table 2-5 Tab page menus


Close Close the active tab page.

Close All Close all the open tab pages.

Minimize To minimize the active tab page. After the tab page isminimized, the icon of the tab page is displayed in thelower left corner.

Minimize All Minimize all the open tab pages. After the tab pages areminimized, the icons of the tab pages are displayed inthe lower left corner.

Toggle Window Tabbed Bar Show or hide the tab bar in the window.

Toggle Message Output Area Show or hide the message output area at the bottom ofthe window.

Cascade Cascade all the open tab pages on the client.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


Tile Tile all the open tab pages on the client. Each tab pageoccupies a part of the client GUI.

Tile Horizontally Tile all the open tab pages on the client. Each tab pageoccupies a part from the top to bottom of the client GUI.

Tile Vertically Tile all the open tab pages on the client. Each tab pageoccupies a part from the left to right of the client GUI.

Table 2-6 describes the submenus of the Help main menu.

Table 2-6 Help menus


Help Topics To view the Online Help.

Check For Upgrades Check whether the Nastar client needs to be upgraded.

Environmental Information To view the environment information.

License Information To Update the Nastar License information.

Logs Collection To collect all the running information from the Nastarclient and server to locate faults.

About To view the version information of the Nastar.

2.16.3 Keyboard ShortcutsThe Nastar client provides keyboard shortcuts for some operations. You can perform theseoperations more quickly by using the keyboard shortcuts than using the mouse.

Keyboard Shortcuts of Controls on GUIs

Table 2-7 describes keyboard shortcuts of controls on GUIs. You can use keyboard shortcutsinstead of the mouse to perform operations on GUIs conveniently.

Table 2-7 Controls and corresponding keyboard shortcuts

Control Description

Menu For any menu followed by an asterisk * (* represents a letter or number),you can press Alt+* instead of choosing the menu.

Drop-down menu For any drop-down menu followed by an asterisk *, you can press *instead of choosing the menu when the menu is expanded.



2-27

Control Description

Button l For any button followed by an asterisk * (* represents a letter ornumber), you can press Alt+* instead of clicking the button.

l When a dialog box is open and the focus is on a button, this button isthe default button. If the focus is not on any button, OK is the defaultbutton.

l When the focus is on a button, you can press Enter or space barinstead of clicking the button.

l If the focus is on a control that does not respond when you pressEnter, then the effect is the same when you press Enter or when youclick the default button.

Drop-down list When the focus is on a drop-down list, you can press the down arrowkey to expand the drop-down list. You can press the Up, Down arrowkeys to switch between options in a drop-down list, and press Enter toselect the current option.

Option button If the focus is on an option button, you can press the space bar to selectthe option button.

Check box If the focus is on a check box, you can press the space bar to select orclear the check box.

Navigation tree When the focus is on the navigation tree, you can move the Down arrowkey or Up arrow key to switch between the nodes in the tree. And youcan move the Left arrow key or Right arrow key to expand or collapsea node that contains subnodes.

Switchingbetween controls

When there are multiple controls in a window, dialog box, or tab page,you can press Tab to switch from one control to another, and press Shift+Tab to switch to the previous control.

Other Combined Shortcut Keys

Table 2-8 describes other combined shortcut keys provided by the Nastar client. You can usethese compound shortcut keys to perform operations quickly.

Table 2-8 Shortcut keys

Operation Shortcut keys

Exit a dialog box or prompt Esc

Unlock a terminal Ctrl+Alt+U

Open the Help F1

Close the current window Ctrl+F4

Restore down (when the service window inthe public window is maximized)

Ctrl+F5


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Operation Shortcut keys

Minimize the window (applied to the servicewindow in the public window)

Ctrl+F9

Maximize the window (when the servicewindow in the public window is restored)

Ctrl+F10

NOTE

The public window area refers to the area below the toolbar on the Nastar client.

2.16.4 Parameters for Server InformationThis section describes the parameters in the Server List dialog box. You can refer to theseparameters when you log in to the Nastar.

Parameters

Name Description Settings

Server Name Description:The host name or the IP address of theNastar server.

Value:Value range: 1-50 characters.The server name must beunique and cannot be leftblank.

Port Description:The port number of the Nastar server.

Value:Value range: 1-65535.Default value: 31037.

Mode Description:The mode of the connection.

Value:Common.

Add Description:To add a Nastar server.

Value:-

Modify Description:To modify the specified Nastar server.

Value:-

Delete Description:To delete the specified Nastar server.

Value:-

2.16.5 Parameters for Logging In to the Nastar ServerThis section describes the parameters in the Login dialog box. You can refer to these parameterswhen you log in to the Nastar.



2-29

ParametersName Description Settings

User Name Description:The valid user name registered in theNastar server.

Value:Cannot be null.

Password Description:Used to log in to the Nastar server,displayed as *.

Value:l When using the default

password policy, the userpassword cannot be less than sixcharacters. For the descriptionof the password policyparameters, see 4.3.1 Settingthe Password Policy.

l The password ofAdministrator cannot be lessthan eight characters.

Server Description:IP address or host name of theNastar server to log in.

Value:Cannot be null. Select the Nastarserver you want to log in from thedrop-down list.NOTE

Click on the right, and then theServer List dialog box is displayed.You can add, modify, or delete theserver information in the dialog box.

2.16.6 Parameters for Output GUI InformationThis section describes the parameters in the Output Window group box. You can refer to theseparameters when you set output information.


MaximumOutput Lines

Description:The maximum lines that can bedisplayed in the output window. If thelines of output information exceedthe maximum lines, the earliest inputlines are deleted automatically andthe maximum lines are displayed.

Value:Value range: 30-3000


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


Automaticallyscroll to the newmessage

Description:If you select this option and there isnew output information, the outputwindow scrolls to the newinformation automatically. If youdeselect this option, you can onlyscroll to the new informationmanually.

Setting method:-

Automaticdump

Description:If you select this option, the outputinformation is dumped to a fileaccording to the preset conditions.

Setting method:-

Dump Lines Description:Dump lines of output information.The value cannot exceed the value setin Maximum Output Lines. If thevalue exceeds the preset maximumvalue, the output information isdumped to the corresponding fileautomatically, and the dump lines arethe same as that set in Dump Lines.

Value:Value range: 20-300

Dump FileName

Description:The dump path and dump file nameof output information. The filessaved in TXT format.

Setting method:Cannot be null.

2.16.7 Parameters for Setting the Time/Date StyleThis section describes the parameters in the Time/Date dialog box. You can refer to theseparameters when you set the client time/date style.

Time ParametersName Description Settings

Time Format Description:HH:mm:ss and hh:mm:ss tt:l HH indicates the 24-hour format.

l hh indicates the 12-hour format.

l mm indicates minutes.

l ss indicates seconds.

l tt indicates the suffix for morningor afternoon.

Setting method:The default is HH:mm:ss.The value can be HH:mm:ss orhh:mm:ss tt.



2-31


Time Indicator Description:Format of the suffix for morning orafternoon.

Value:The value is AM/PM.

Show time zoneoffset

Description:Indicates whether to show the timezone.If you select the check box, the timezone is displayed after the time.

Setting method:Check box.Example:For example, 15:10:20 +08:00.

Show daylightsaving time(DST)

Description:Indicates whether to show thedaylight saving time.If you select the check box, the DSTis displayed after the time.

Setting method:Check box.Example:For example, 15:10:20 DST.

Date Parameters


Date Separator Description:Symbol to separate the date.

Setting method:There are three symbols can be setto "/", "-", and ".". The default is"/".

Date Format Description:Display format of the date.

Value:There are three format can be set to"yyyy/MM/dd", "dd/MM/yyyy",or "MM/dd/yyyy".

2.16.8 Parameters for Collecting Nastar Log FilesThis describes the parameters for collecting Nastar log files. You can refer to the descriptionwhen collecting Nastar log files.

Parameter description

Parameter Description

Server Address Indicates the IP address of the server.

Ftp Port Indicates the port of the server.

FTP User Name Indicates a valid name that the user already registered to the Nastar.

Password Indicates the password that is used to log in to the target server.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


Start Time Indicates the start time for collecting log files.

End Time Indicates the end time for collecting log files.

Path Indicates the directory for the collected log files.

2.16.9 Parameters for Importing and Exporting EngineeringParameters

This section describes the parameters for importing and exporting the engineering parameters.You can refer to these parameters when importing and exporting the engineering parameters.

GSM Parameter DescriptionParameter Description Value Range Optional/

Mandatory

MSCName Indicates the name of anMSC.

String Optional

BSCName Indicates the name of aBSC.

String Mandatory

SiteName Indicates the name of aBTS.

String Mandatory

CellName Indicates the name of acell.

String

MCC Indicates the mobilecountry code.

Integer Mandatory

MNC Indicates the mobilenetwork code.

Integer and only atwo-digit number

Mandatory

LAC Indicates the locationarea code of a cell.

l Integer

l Value range: 1 to65533, 65535

Mandatory

CI Indicates the cellidentification.

Integer Mandatory

BCCH Indicates the broadcastcontrol channel.

l Integer

l Value range: 1 to1023

Mandatory



2-33

Parameter Description Value Range Optional/Mandatory

TCH Traffic channel. StringCharacter strings canbe separated by space,comma (,), orsemicolon (;).

Optional

BCC Indicates the color codeof a BTS.

l Integer

l Value range: 1 to 8

Mandatory

NCC Indicates the networkcolor code.

l Integer

l Value range: 1 to 8

Mandatory

Longitude Indicates the longitudewhere a cell is located, forexample, 116.389722.

[-180.0, 180.0] Mandatory

Latitude Indicates the latitudewhere a cell is located, forexample, 39.952778.

[-90.0, 90.0] Mandatory

Azimuth Indicates the azimuth ofan antenna.

[0, 360] Mandatory

Is Outdoor Indicates whether the cellis an outdoor cell.

l 0: No

l 1: Yes

Optional

Is Direct Indicates whether the cellis a directional cell.

l 0: No

l 1: Yes

Optional

CDMA Parameter DescriptionParameter Description Value Range Optional/

Mandatory

MSC_ID Indicates the number ofan MSC.

String Mandatory

BSC_ID Indicates the number of aBSC.

Integer Mandatory

BTS_ID Indicates the number of aBTS.

Integer Mandatory

Cell_ID Indicates the number of acell.

Integer Mandatory

Sector_ID Indicates the number of asector.

Integer Mandatory


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



[-180.0, 180.0] Mandatory


[-90.0, 90.0] Mandatory


[0, 360] Mandatory

AntennaGain(dBi)

Indicates the antennagain.

Floating number Mandatory

UMTS Parameter DescriptionParameter Description Value Range Optional/

Mandatory

MSCName Indicates the name of anMSC.

String Optional

RNCId Indicates the number ofan RNC.

Integer Mandatory

NodeBID Indicates the number of aNodeB.

Integer Mandatory

NodeBName Indicates the name of aNodeB.

String Mandatory

Cell ID Indicates the number of acell.

Integer Mandatory

CellName Indicates the name of acell.

String Mandatory


Integer Mandatory

RAC Indicates the route areacode of a cell.

l Integer


Mandatory

SAC Indicates the service areacode of a cell.

l Integer


Mandatory

UARFCN-DOWNLINK

Indicates the downlinkARFCNs of a cell.

Integer Mandatory



2-35


UARFCN-UPLINK

Indicates the uplinkARFCNs of a cell.

Integer Optional

P-SC Indicates the primaryscramble code of a cell.

Integer Mandatory


[-180.0, 180.0] Mandatory


[-90.0, 90.0] Mandatory


[0, 360] Mandatory

Is Outdoor Indicates whether the cellis an outdoor cell.

l 0: No

l 1: Yes

Optional

Is Direct Indicates whether the cellis a directional cell.

l 0: No

l 1: Yes

Optional

TD-SCDMA Parameter DescriptionParameter Description Value Range Optional/

Mandatory

RNC ID Indicates the number ofan RNC.

l Integer

l Unique andexistent in theexisting network

Mandatory

NodeB ID Indicates the number of aNodeB.

l Integer


Optional

NodeB Name Indicates the name of aNodeB.

String Optional

Cell ID Indicates the number of acell.

l Integer


Mandatory

Cell Name Indicates the name of acell.

String Optional


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


UARFCN Indicates the UniversalTerrestrial Radio AccessNetwork (UTRAN)Absolute RadioFrequency ChannelNumber (ARFCN).

Integer Mandatory


Integer Optional

RAC Indicates the route areacode of a cell.

Integer Optional

PSC Indicates the primaryscramble code of a cell.

Integer Optional


[-180.0, 180.0] Mandatory


[-90.0, 90.0] Mandatory


[0, 360] Mandatory

IsOutdoor Indicates whether the cellis an outdoor cell.

l yes

l no

Optional

IsDirect Indicates whether the cellis a directional cell.

l yes

l no

Optional

2.16.10 Parameters for Creating and Modifying Custom NE GroupsThis section describes the parameters for creating and modifying custom NE groups. You canrefer to the parameter description when creating and modifying the custom NE groups.



2-37

Parameter DescriptionParameter Description

NE Group Name Indicates the name of the NE group, for example, Cell_1.Value range:l A maximum of 20 characters

l Characters not allowed: ~ ! # $ % ^ * + = | \ / , ' `

l Unique and not null

l Case sensitive

Remarks Provides the description of an NE group.Value range:l A maximum of 200 characters

l Characters not allowed: ~ ! # $ % ^ * + = | \ / , ' `


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

3 Monitoring the Status of the Nastar

About This Chapter

When monitoring the running status and resource status of the Nastar, you can obtain the healthstatus of the Nastar in time, and handle the exceptions of the Nastar hardware and software intime.

3.1 Basic Knowledge of System MonitoringThis section describes the basic functions of the system monitor client. You can use these systemmonitoring functions to know the running status of the Nastar server in time.

3.2 Setting Nastar Server ThresholdsYou can set thresholds for the performance monitoring, hard disk monitoring, databasemonitoring, and service monitoring. When the threshold is reached, the Nastar raises an alarm.

3.3 Monitoring the NastarYou can monitor the running status (including the status of the CPU, hard disk, database,processes, and services) and the component information of the Nastar server as well as logs ofthe operations performed on the system monitor client.

3.4 Reference of System Monitoring GUIsThis section describes the parameters displayed on system monitoring GUIs.

NastarOperator Guide 3 Monitoring the Status of the Nastar


3-1

3.1 Basic Knowledge of System MonitoringThis section describes the basic functions of the system monitor client. You can use these systemmonitoring functions to know the running status of the Nastar server in time.

3.1.1 System Monitoring FunctionsIn system monitoring, the status information of the monitored objects is collected, and thethresholds of the monitored objects are configured. Thus, the running status of the Nastar canbe displayed in real time, and prompts are provided when exceptions occur.

3.1.2 Relation Between Threshold and AlarmYou can set alarm thresholds for the Nastar. When the CPU usage, memory usage, hard diskusage, or database usage of the Nastar exceeds the preset alarm threshold, a relevant alarm israised, and the corresponding icon of the alarm is displayed in red. After the alarm is sent, if theCPU usage, memory usage, hard disk usage, or database usage is less than the preset threshold,a corresponding cleared alarm is sent, and the corresponding icon of the alarm is displayed ingreen.

3.1.1 System Monitoring FunctionsIn system monitoring, the status information of the monitored objects is collected, and thethresholds of the monitored objects are configured. Thus, the running status of the Nastar canbe displayed in real time, and prompts are provided when exceptions occur.

SettingsYou can set the thresholds for monitoring system resources, hard disks, databases, and services.When the threshold of a monitored object is reached, an alarm is raised on the Nastar to promptthe user to handle the exception in time.

Monitored ObjectsIn system monitoring, you can conveniently view the status of the following monitored objects:l Service Monitor: monitors the service information and the service running status of the

Nastar server.l Process Monitor: monitors the process information and the OS resource usage of the

Nastar server.l Hard Disk Monitor: monitors the hard disk partitions, usage, and status of the Nastar server.

l Database Monitor: monitors the database information of the Nastar server.

l System Resources Monitor: monitors the system resource usage of the Nastar server, anddisplays the CPU usage and the memory usage in real time.

l Component Information: displays the information of the components installed on theNastar server.

l Operation Logs: displays the operations on the system monitor client.

3.1.2 Relation Between Threshold and AlarmYou can set alarm thresholds for the Nastar. When the CPU usage, memory usage, hard diskusage, or database usage of the Nastar exceeds the preset alarm threshold, a relevant alarm is

3 Monitoring the Status of the NastarNastar

Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

raised, and the corresponding icon of the alarm is displayed in red. After the alarm is sent, if theCPU usage, memory usage, hard disk usage, or database usage is less than the preset threshold,a corresponding cleared alarm is sent, and the corresponding icon of the alarm is displayed ingreen.

3.2 Setting Nastar Server ThresholdsYou can set thresholds for the performance monitoring, hard disk monitoring, databasemonitoring, and service monitoring. When the threshold is reached, the Nastar raises an alarm.

3.2.1 Setting the Parameters for the System Resources MonitoringYou can set the parameters for the system resources monitoring to specify the threshold of theCPU usage, memory usage, and refresh period of the system resources monitoring. When theCPU usage and memory usage reach the thresholds, the Nastar raises corresponding alarms, andthe corresponding icon on the System Resources Monitor browsing tab pages is displayed inred.

3.2.2 Setting the Parameters for the Nastar Hard Disk MonitoringYou can set the parameters for the Nastar server hard disk monitoring to specify the thresholdof the hard disk usage and the refresh period of the hard disk monitoring. When the Nastar serverhard disk usage reaches the threshold, the Nastar raises an alarm, and the corresponding icon onthe Hard Disk Monitor browsing tab is displayed in red.

3.2.3 Setting the Parameters for the Nastar Database MonitoringYou can set the parameters for the Nastar server database monitoring to specify the thresholdof the database usage and the refresh period of the database monitoring. When the Nastarserverdatabase usage reaches the threshold, the Nastar raises an alarm, and the corresponding icon onthe Database Monitor browsing tab is displayed in red.

3.2.4 Setting the Parameters for the Nastar Service MonitoringYou can set the parameters for service monitoring to specify popup prompts and refresh intervalfor service monitoring. Thus, when the service is changed, the corresponding prompts aredisplayed. At the same time, the service is refreshed according to the specified interval.

3.2.1 Setting the Parameters for the System Resources MonitoringYou can set the parameters for the system resources monitoring to specify the threshold of theCPU usage, memory usage, and refresh period of the system resources monitoring. When theCPU usage and memory usage reach the thresholds, the Nastar raises corresponding alarms, andthe corresponding icon on the System Resources Monitor browsing tab pages is displayed inred.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose System > System Monitor > Settings.

Step 2 In the System Monitor Settings window, click the System Resources Monitor tab to set theproperty values.

Step 3 Click OK.

----End



3-3

3.2.2 Setting the Parameters for the Nastar Hard Disk MonitoringYou can set the parameters for the Nastar server hard disk monitoring to specify the thresholdof the hard disk usage and the refresh period of the hard disk monitoring. When the Nastar serverhard disk usage reaches the threshold, the Nastar raises an alarm, and the corresponding icon onthe Hard Disk Monitor browsing tab is displayed in red.

Procedure


Step 2 In the System Monitor Settings window, click the Hard Disk Monitor tab to set the propertyvalues.

Step 3 Click OK.

----End

3.2.3 Setting the Parameters for the Nastar Database MonitoringYou can set the parameters for the Nastar server database monitoring to specify the thresholdof the database usage and the refresh period of the database monitoring. When the Nastarserverdatabase usage reaches the threshold, the Nastar raises an alarm, and the corresponding icon onthe Database Monitor browsing tab is displayed in red.

Procedure


Step 2 In the System Monitor Settings window, click the Database Monitor tab to set the propertyvalues.

Step 3 Click OK.

----End

3.2.4 Setting the Parameters for the Nastar Service MonitoringYou can set the parameters for service monitoring to specify popup prompts and refresh intervalfor service monitoring. Thus, when the service is changed, the corresponding prompts aredisplayed. At the same time, the service is refreshed according to the specified interval.

Procedure


Step 2 In the System Monitor Settings window, click the Service Monitor tab to set the propertyvalues.

Step 3 Click OK.

----End


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

3.3 Monitoring the NastarYou can monitor the running status (including the status of the CPU, hard disk, database,processes, and services) and the component information of the Nastar server as well as logs ofthe operations performed on the system monitor client.

3.3.1 Monitoring the Nastar Service StatusYou can monitor the status of the services of the Nastar server to view the information such asthe service name and service status and understand the running status of the Nastar server. Thus,you can detect and handle exceptions, and ensure the efficient running of the Nastar server.

3.3.2 Monitoring the Nastar Process StatusYou can monitor the status of the Nastar server processes to view the information, such as theprocess name, process ID, and number of threads, to know the running status of the Nastar server.Thus, you can identify and handle exceptions, and ensure the efficient running of the Nastarserver.

3.3.3 Monitoring the Nastar Hard Disk StatusYou can monitor the status of the Nastar server hard disk to view the information, such as thetotal space and usage of the hard disk, to know the running status of the Nastar server. Thus,you can detect and handle exceptions, and ensure the efficient running of the Nastar server.

3.3.4 Monitoring the Nastar Database StatusYou can monitor the status of the Nastar server database to view the information, such as thedatabase name, server name, and database status, to know the running status of the Nastar server.Thus, you can detect and handle exceptions, and ensure the efficient running of the Nastar server.

3.3.5 Monitoring the System Resource Status of the Nastar ServerThis function enables you to view the system resource information of the Nastar server that youlog in to.

3.3.6 Viewing the Information of Nastar ComponentsThis function enables you to view the information of the components installed on the Nastarserver that you log in to.

3.3.7 Viewing Operation Logs on the System Monitor ClientThis function enables you to view operation logs on the system monitor client.

3.3.8 Refreshing the Monitoring InformationTo know the latest running status of the NMS server, you need to refresh the monitoringinformation.

3.3.9 Saving the Monitoring InformationFor the convenience of future analysis, you can save the required monitoring information to theserver.

3.3.1 Monitoring the Nastar Service StatusYou can monitor the status of the services of the Nastar server to view the information such asthe service name and service status and understand the running status of the Nastar server. Thus,you can detect and handle exceptions, and ensure the efficient running of the Nastar server.

ContextIf a service is abnormal, its icon is displayed in red.



3-5

Procedure

Step 1 Choose System > System Monitor > Browser.

Step 2 In the System Monitor Browser window, click the Service Monitor tab to view the serviceson the server.

Step 3 Right-click an service to choose Details. In the displayed Service Details dialog box, view thedetails of the service.

NOTEYou can also double-click an service to view its details in the displayed Service Details dialog box.

----End

3.3.2 Monitoring the Nastar Process StatusYou can monitor the status of the Nastar server processes to view the information, such as theprocess name, process ID, and number of threads, to know the running status of the Nastar server.Thus, you can identify and handle exceptions, and ensure the efficient running of the Nastarserver.

Context

Only the running processes are displayed in the monitored content.

Procedure


Step 2 In the System Monitor Browser window, click the Process Monitor tab to view the serverprocesses.

----End

3.3.3 Monitoring the Nastar Hard Disk StatusYou can monitor the status of the Nastar server hard disk to view the information, such as thetotal space and usage of the hard disk, to know the running status of the Nastar server. Thus,you can detect and handle exceptions, and ensure the efficient running of the Nastar server.

Context

If you set a threshold of the hard disk and an item reaches the threshold, the icon of the item isdisplayed in red.

Procedure


Step 2 In the System Monitor Browser window, click the Hard Disk Monitor tab to view the statusof the server hard disk.

----End


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

3.3.4 Monitoring the Nastar Database StatusYou can monitor the status of the Nastar server database to view the information, such as thedatabase name, server name, and database status, to know the running status of the Nastar server.Thus, you can detect and handle exceptions, and ensure the efficient running of the Nastar server.

ContextIf you set a threshold of the database and then an item reaches the threshold, the icon of the itemis displayed in red.

Procedure


Step 2 In the System Monitor Browser window, click the Database Monitor tab to view the statusof the Nastar server database.

NOTEThe Nastar server runs in Solaris and SuSE Linux. Solaris uses Sybase and SuSE Linux uses Oracle. The statusof the databases that you monitor varies according to the database type.

----End

3.3.5 Monitoring the System Resource Status of the Nastar ServerThis function enables you to view the system resource information of the Nastar server that youlog in to.

Procedure


Step 2 Click the System Resources Monitor tab. The system information of the computer where theNastar server is installed is listed.

----End

3.3.6 Viewing the Information of Nastar ComponentsThis function enables you to view the information of the components installed on the Nastarserver that you log in to.

Procedure


Step 2 Click the Component Information tab.The information of all the installed components are listed.

----End

3.3.7 Viewing Operation Logs on the System Monitor ClientThis function enables you to view operation logs on the system monitor client.



3-7

Procedure


Step 2 Click the Operation Logs tab.The information of operation logs is listed.

Step 3 Select a time range for the logs to be viewed from the Time range drop-down box.

Step 4 Right-click an operation log to choose Details. In the displayed Log Detail dialog box, view thedetails of the operation log.

NOTEYou can also double-click an operation log to view its details in the displayed Log Detail dialog box.

----End

3.3.8 Refreshing the Monitoring InformationTo know the latest running status of the NMS server, you need to refresh the monitoringinformation.

Contextl When you refresh the current tab page, only the information on this tab page is refreshed.

The information on other tab pages is not refreshed.l When you switch tab pages, the information on these tab pages are refreshed immediately.

Therefore, you can refresh information by switching tab pages.

Procedure


Step 2 In the System Monitor Browser window, click the tab of the monitoring information to berefreshed, and then click Refresh.

----End

3.3.9 Saving the Monitoring InformationFor the convenience of future analysis, you can save the required monitoring information to theserver.

Procedure


Step 2 In the System Monitor Browser window, click the tab of the monitoring information, and thenclick Save As.

NOTE

l The monitoring information can be saved in the format of TXT, HTML, CSV, or XML.

l The default format is XML.

----End


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

3.4 Reference of System Monitoring GUIsThis section describes the parameters displayed on system monitoring GUIs.

3.4.1 Parameters for Setting Thresholds of the Nastar ServerThis section describes the parameters of system monitor settings. You can refer to theseparameters when you set the server thresholds.

3.4.2 Parameters for Monitoring Services of the Nastar ServerThis section describes the parameters of the query result displayed in the Service Monitor tab.

3.4.3 Parameters for Monitoring Process of the Nastar ServerThis section describes the parameters of the query result displayed in the Process Monitor tab.

3.4.4 Parameters for Monitoring Hard Disk of the Nastar ServerThis section describes the parameters of the query result displayed in the Hard Disk Monitortab.

3.4.5 Parameters for Monitoring Database of the Nastar ServerThis section describes the parameters of the query result displayed in the Database Monitortab.

3.4.6 Parameters for Monitoring System Resources of the Nastar ServerThis section describes the parameters of the query result displayed in the System ResourcesMonitor tab.

3.4.7 Parameters for Viewing the Component Information of the Nastar ServerThis section describes the parameters on the Component Information tab page. The parametersettings determine the component information displayed in the query result.

3.4.8 Parameters for Viewing System Monitoring Operation LogsThis section describes the parameters on the Log tab page. The parameter settings determine theinformation displayed in the query result.

3.4.1 Parameters for Setting Thresholds of the Nastar ServerThis section describes the parameters of system monitor settings. You can refer to theseparameters when you set the server thresholds.



3-9

System ResourcesName Description Settings

System ResourcesMonitor ParameterSettings

CPU sustainedoverload times(times)

Description:l If the CPU usage

is larger than thesum of CPU usedrate value and itsoffset forconsecutive xtimes, the Nastarraises a high CPUusage alarm.

l If the CPU usageis smaller than thedifferencebetween CPUused rate valueand its offset forconsecutive xtimes, the Nastarraises thecorrespondingclearance alarm.

Value:Value range: 40-400Default value: 40

System Resourcestatus refresh interval(seconds)

Description:Refresh interval forsystem resourcemonitoring, that is,the CPU usage issampled every xseconds.

Value:Value range: 2-60Default value: 3

System ResourcesMonitor ThresholdSettings

CPU used rate (%) Description:Threshold of theCPU usage.

Value:Value range: 1-99.Default value: 80.Offset value range:0-10. Default value:5.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


Memory used rate(%)

Description:Threshold of thememory usage.l When the memory

usage exceeds thesum of the presetvalue and offsetvalue, the Nastarraises a memorybusy alarm.

If the memory usageis smaller than thedifference betweenthe threshold and theoffset, the Nastarraises thecorrespondingclearance alarm.

Value:Value range: 1-99.Default value: 90.Offset value range:0-10. Default value:3.

Hard DiskName Description Settings

Disk MonitorParameter Settings

Hard disk statusrefresh interval(seconds)

Description:Refresh interval forhard diskmonitoring.

Value:Value range:60-3600Default value: 60



3-11


Disk MonitorThreshold Settings

Default value setting(%)

Description:All defaultthresholds of harddisk usage on theNastar server. Whenthe hard disk usageexceeds the sum of avalue correspondingto an alarm severityand the offset, theNastar raises the highdisk usage alarm ofthis severity.

Value:l Value range:

1-100Default value:– Warning: 60

– Minor: 70

– Major: 80

– Critical: 90

l Offset valuerange: 0-10Offset defaultvalue:– Warning: 0

– Minor: 0

– Major: 0

– Critical: 0NOTE

The sum of the presetvalue and offset valueof a low-severityalarm must be lessthan or equal to thedifference of thepreset value and offsetvalue of a high-severity alarm.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


Advanced Setting(%)

Description:Thresholds of all thehard disk usage onthe Nastar server.When the hard diskusage exceeds thesum of a valuecorresponding to analarm severity andthe offset, the Nastarraises the high diskusage alarm of thisseverity.NOTE

l If you selectDefault Value, theNastar uses thethreshold specifiedin Default ValueSetting.

l If you selectCustomize Value,the Nastar usescustomizedthresholds ofalarms.

Value:Value range: 1-99Offset value range:0-10NOTE


DatabaseName Description Settings

Database MonitorParameter Settings

Database statusrefresh interval(seconds)

Description:Interval of databaserefreshing.




3-13


Database MonitorThreshold Settings

Default ValueSetting (%)

Description:All defaultthresholds ofdatabase usage on theNastar server. Whenthe database usageexceeds the thresholdcorresponding to analarm severity andthe offset, the Nastarraises the highdatabase usage alarmof this severity.

Value:Value range:l Warning: 1-90

l Minor: 85-95

l Major: 90-98

l Critical: 95-100

default value:l Warning: 85

l Minor: 90

l Major: 95

l Critical: 98NOTE



Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


Advanced Setting(%)

Description:Thresholds for thedatabase usagealarms of differentseverities. You needto set thesethresholds separatelyfor each database onthe Nastar server.When the databaseusage exceeds thethresholdcorresponding to analarm severity andthe offset, the Nastarraises the highdatabase usage alarmof this severity.

Setting method:Set the followingparameters for eachdatabase:l Default Value:

use defaultthresholds for thedatabase usagealarms of differentseverities.

l CustomizeValue: customizethresholds for thedatabase usagealarms of differentseverities.Value range:– Warning: 1-90

– Minor: 85-95

– Major: 90-98

– Critical: 95-100

default value:– Warning: 85

– Minor: 90

– Major: 95

– Critical: 98

l DisabledMonitoring:Disable thedatabasemonitoring.

NOTEThe sum of the presetvalue and offset valueof a low-severityalarm must be lessthan or equal to thedifference of thepreset value and offsetvalue of a high-severity alarm.



3-15

Services


Services MonitorParameter Settings

Service status refreshinterval (seconds)

Description:Interval of servicerefreshing.


Service MonitorScreen Tip Settings

Default Group Description:Set whether todisplay the servicestatus at the lowerright corner of theNastar system

monitor client by

or .NOTE

l If all the monitoredservices are

running, isdisplayed.

l if a monitoredservice is stopped,

is displayed.

l The ServiceMonitor tab pageis displayed when

or isclicked.

Setting method:Select a service fromthe Service Namedrop-down list.Select enable ordisable in thecorresponding ShowScreen Tips drop-down list.

3.4.2 Parameters for Monitoring Services of the Nastar ServerThis section describes the parameters of the query result displayed in the Service Monitor tab.

Parameters

Name Description

Service Name Description:The name of a service.

Agent Name Description:The name of a process.

Service Description Description:The description information of functions and interfacesprovided by a service.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Name Description

Status Description:The status of a service.

Start Mode Description:The service start mode, including Automatic, Manual, andDisable. The Disable mode is available only for stoppedservices.

Service Start Time Description:The time that the service is started.

Server Name Description:The name of the server.

3.4.3 Parameters for Monitoring Process of the Nastar ServerThis section describes the parameters of the query result displayed in the Process Monitor tab.

ParametersName Description

Agent Name Description:Name of a process.

Process ID Description:ID of a process.

Handle Number Description:Amount of handles used by a process.

CPU Usage Rate(%) Description:CPU usage by a process.

Memory Usage(MB) Description:Memory usage by a process.

Thread Number Description:Amount of connected threads in a process.

3.4.4 Parameters for Monitoring Hard Disk of the Nastar ServerThis section describes the parameters of the query result displayed in the Hard Disk Monitortab.



3-17

Parameters

Name Description

File System Description:Hard disk partitions and their paths.

Total Size(MB) Description:Total space of a specific partition, equals to the sum of UsedSize and Free Size.

Used Size(MB) Description:Used space of a specific partition.

Free Size(MB) Description:Available space of a specific partition.

Used Rate(%) Description:Current usage of a specific partition.

Status Description:Current status of a specific partition, including normal andabnormal. If the usage is more than or equal to the maximum,the system displays Abnormal.

3.4.5 Parameters for Monitoring Database of the Nastar ServerThis section describes the parameters of the query result displayed in the Database Monitortab.

Parameters

Name Description

Database Name Description:Name of the database on the Nastar server.

Total Data Space(MB) Description:Total data space.

Free Data Space(MB) Description:Remaining data space.

Data Space Used Rate(%) Description:Usage rate of the used data space and total data space.

Status Description:Database status, including normal and abnormal. If thedatabase usage is more than or equal to the threshold,the system displays Abnormal.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Name Description

Description Description:Description of the database.

3.4.6 Parameters for Monitoring System Resources of the NastarServer

This section describes the parameters of the query result displayed in the System ResourcesMonitor tab.


Server Name Description:Name of the Nastar server.

Server Status Description:Status of the Nastar server, including Active andStandby.

OS Description:Operating system of the server.

Total Physical Memory(MB) Description:Total physical memory space.

Free Physical Memory(MB) Description:Remaining physical memory space.

Total Swap Memory(MB) Description:Total virtual memory space.

Free Swap Memory(MB) Description:Remaining virtual memory space.

CPU Usage Rate(%) Description:CPU usage.

Memory Usage(%) Description:The usage of the total memory space (including physicalmemory and virtual memory).



3-19

3.4.7 Parameters for Viewing the Component Information of theNastar Server

This section describes the parameters on the Component Information tab page. The parametersettings determine the component information displayed in the query result.

Parameters of component information

Name Description

Component Description:Component name of the Nastar server.

Version Description:Component version of the Nastar server.

Description Description:Component description of the Nastar server.

3.4.8 Parameters for Viewing System Monitoring Operation LogsThis section describes the parameters on the Log tab page. The parameter settings determine theinformation displayed in the query result.

Parameters of operation logs

Name Description

User Name Description:Nastar user who perform the operation.

Operation Name Description:Name of the operation.

Operation Time Description:Time when the user performs the operation.

Client Description:IP address of the system monitor client thatperforms the operation.

Result Description:Information indicating whether the operationsucceeds.

Details Description:Operation description.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

4 Security Management

About This Chapter

Security management provides the functions of managing user rights and system securitypolicies. These functions can prevent illegal intrusion on the Nastar server and ensure datasecurity of the Nastar server.

4.1 Basic Knowledge of Security ManagementThis topic describes the security management of the Nastar, such as the security managementfunctions, security policies, and basic concepts.

4.2 Changing the Password of the Current UserIt is suggested that you should change the user password periodically, to ensure the security ofthe password.

4.3 Setting the Security Policy of the NastarYou can set the password policy, account policy and system policy of the Nastar, to enhance thesecurity.

4.4 Setting Nastar System Login ModeThe Nastar provides two login modes: multiuser mode and single-user mode. In normal state,the Nastar runs in multiuser mode. When you need to maintain the Nastar server, you can setthe Nastar to run in single-user mode, to avoid the interference from other users.

4.5 Setting the System ACLYou can set the Access Control List(ACL) to allow the users to log in to the Nastar through theclients of only the specific IP addresses or network segment.

4.6 Creating a Nastar UserThis section describes how to create a Nastar user and assign corresponding rights to it.

4.7 Modifying a Nastar UserThis section describes how to modify passwords, normal properties and user rights of Nastarusers.

4.8 Comparing the Nastar User RightsBy comparing the rights of two Nastar users, you can understand the differences between theirrights.

4.9 Monitoring a Nastar User

NastarOperator Guide 4 Security Management


4-1

This section describes how to view states of Nastar users, monitor sessions and operations ofNastar users, and force Nastar users to exit.

4.10 Reference of the Security Management GUIThis section provides the reference information of the security management GUI.

4 Security ManagementNastar

Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

4.1 Basic Knowledge of Security ManagementThis topic describes the security management of the Nastar, such as the security managementfunctions, security policies, and basic concepts.

4.1.1 Security ManagementProper use and configuration of the security management ensures the secure running of theNastar.

4.1.2 Concepts of Nastar SecurityThe security management involves the concepts regarding the security of the Nastar. Theconcepts help you understand the description about security management and facilitate youroperations.

4.1.3 Nastar User Rights Management PoliciesYou can manage user rights based on the rights management policies. By this means, theallocation of user rights is clearer, and the rights management is more simple.

4.1.4 Operation Right ListThe operation right list describes operation rights of Nastar applications. You can refer to theseparameters when you assign the operation rights for the Nastar users.

4.1.1 Security ManagementProper use and configuration of the security management ensures the secure running of theNastar.

The security management of the Nastar is a set of functions used for users and user rightsmanagement.

To log in to the Nastar and perform operations, you need to have the user account and rights ofthe Nastar. Through users and rights management, the operator can log in to the Nastar to performoperations such as monitoring and maintenance to prevent illegal access and operations on theNastar. In the security management, users and user rights are managed.

The security management involves the following functions:l Creating, monitoring, and deleting users

l Creating, monitoring, and deleting user groups

l Creating, monitoring, and deleting operation sets

l Managing user rights, including the user managed domain, operation right, and ACLsettings.

l Monitoring users

l Setting the system ACL

l Setting the security policies of the Nastar, including the password policy, security policy,and system policy

4.1.2 Concepts of Nastar SecurityThe security management involves the concepts regarding the security of the Nastar. Theconcepts help you understand the description about security management and facilitate youroperations.



4-3

l UserA user represents a user account. To create a user is to create a user account.Administrator is the default superuser of the Nastar, who has the right to view all devicesand has all operation rights.

l User groupA user group is a collection of user accounts. You can create a user group to assign rightsto its members. A network needs more than one person to maintain. Thus you need to createmultiple user accounts for the Nastar. To manage users better, you can group them.The Nastar provide five default user groups:– The SMManagers user group has all the security rights, such as user management and

resetting user password. The SMManagers user group also has the right of queryingthe security log, and the right of viewing the managed objects. You cannot modify therights of the SMManagers.

– The Administrators user group has the right of viewing the managed objects, and therights that does not belong to the SMManagers. You cannot modify the rights assignedto the Administrators user group.

– By default, the Operators, Monitors, and Normal groups do not have any rights. Youcan modify the rights of the Operators, Monitors, and Normal.

l Managed domainThe managed domain means which devices and boards that the user and user group havethe right to view. You can set the managed domain of the user and user group to determinewhich devices that the user has the right to view.After the user logs in to the Nastar, only the information of the device that this user has theright to view is displayed on the Nastar client. For example, only the alarm information ofthe device that the user has the right to view is displayed.

l Operation rightsOperation rights determine the operations that a user can perform.Operation rights are associated with the managed domain. To perform operations on theNEs, you must have the viewing right and operation right.

l Type setThe type set refers to the right to perform operations on a certain type of devices. It is aspecial right. The type set means to assign rights based on the type of the NE device. Afterthe rights of the type set are assigned to the user, the user has the rights to view and operatethe device of this type set.

l Operation setAn operation set is a group of operation rights. It is used when the user or user group rightsare set.Operation sets fall into two types, Network Management Application and NetworkDevice. The operation sets of the network management application type only includes thenetwork management application rights; the operation sets of the network device type onlyincludes the device operation rights.Nastar provides two default operation sets, AllApplicationOperations andAllDeviceOperations. Operation set AllApplicationOperations is of the networkmanagement application type, including all the network management application rightsexcept the security application rights; operation set AllDeviceOperations is of the networkdevice type, including all the device operation rights.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

l Access control list

Access control list is a mechanism of security control. Users are restricted to log in to theNastar server through the specified IP addresses or network segment. In this case, illegalusers cannot use your user name and password to log in to the Nastar server through IPaddresses not in the access control list, even if they steal your account information. Thishelps to enhance the security of the Nastar.

4.1.3 Nastar User Rights Management PoliciesYou can manage user rights based on the rights management policies. By this means, theallocation of user rights is clearer, and the rights management is more simple.

l Login right policy

The user login right is the right to control Nastar user login Nastar, such as the login time,IP address, and account. You need to set the security attributes for Nastar users.

l Managed domain and operation right policies

There are two kinds of rights to manage the NEs. One is the right to view the NEs; that is,it determines whether the Nastar user can view the NEs. This right is controlled throughthe managed domain. The other is the operation right. This right controls which operationthat the Nastar user can perform on the NEs. To perform operations on the NEs, you musthave the viewing right and operation right.

l User group management policy

A user group is a set of users. The managed domain and operation rights can be granted toa user group. When a user is added to a user group, the user has the management domainand operation rights of the user group.

In this method, the managed domain and operation rights of the users can be controlled ina centralized manner.

Multiple users may use the Nastar for maintenance. These users can be divided into severalgroups based on the operations. Members of each group can only perform specifiedoperations in the specified domain. Based on operations, users can play different roles,including administrators, operators, monitors, and custom operators. User groups are setup based on roles. Users are then assigned to the corresponding user groups. This realizesunified management of user rights.


Maintenance Right List

Operation Right Description

TaskManager Management Used to create, modify and delete a scheduled task.

Operations of SystemMonitor

Used to monitor the status of processes and databases of theNastar server and set system monitoring parameters.

Download System Files Used to obtain the Nastar server files through the client.

Expand Database Space Used to expand the space of the Nastar server database.



4-5


Broadcast Messages Used to send broadcast messages.

Browse System MonitorDetails

Used to browse the information about system monitoring,including the status information on services, processes anddatabases.

Data Management Used to back up, restore, and delete data.

Set Broadcast MessagesParameters

Used to set the count of the broadcast messages that aredisplayed and the count of the broadcast messages that aresaved on the server.

Manager SystemMonitor Used to manage the system monitoring.

Log Right ListOperation Right Description

Log rights management Used to set the rights of log management.

Query Operation Logs Used to query operation logs by condition or collect statisticson operation logs.

Query System Logs Used to query system logs by condition or collect statistics onsystem logs.

Set Operation LogsTemplate

Used to manage the template for querying operation logs.

Set System Logs Template Used to manage the template for querying system logs.

Default Operation SetOperation Set Description

AllApplicationOperations The default operation set of the network managementapplication type provided during initialization includes all theapplication rights except the security management rights.

4.2 Changing the Password of the Current UserIt is suggested that you should change the user password periodically, to ensure the security ofthe password.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Contextl The new password must comply with the password policy. For details on how to set the

password policy, see 4.3.1 Setting the Password Policy.

l The password of the Administrator must comply with the password policy, and its lengthmust be greater than or equal to 8 digits.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose System > Change Password.

Step 2 In the Change Password dialog box, set the new password for the current user, and then clickOK.

Step 3 In the Information dialog box, click OK.

----End

4.3 Setting the Security Policy of the NastarYou can set the password policy, account policy and system policy of the Nastar, to enhance thesecurity.

4.3.1 Setting the Password PolicyTo avoid users to set a very simple password or use the same password for a long time, you canset the password policy to ensure that the password is enough complex and safe.

4.3.2 Setting the Account PolicyIn the account policy setting, you can set the parameters such as maximum login attempts andauto unlock time.

4.3.3 Setting the System PolicyThe number of sessions is the number of the connections between the Nastar client and theNastar server. You can set the system policy to set the maximum number of the sessions thatare supported by the Nastar.

4.3.1 Setting the Password PolicyTo avoid users to set a very simple password or use the same password for a long time, you canset the password policy to ensure that the password is enough complex and safe.

Contextl The password dictionary is a password set containing characters or strings. You can set the

user password to not contain the characters or strings of the password dictionary.

l In the password dictionary file, each row holds one character or string. The suffix of eachpassword dictionary file is dic. The file is in $Nastar_ROOT/etc/conf/pwddic/ on theNastar server.

l The number of the password dictionary files are not limited in the Nastar, but the totalnumber of words in all the password dictionary files cannot exceed 5000.



4-7

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Security > Security Policy.

Step 2 In the Security settings navigation tree, select Password Policy.

Step 3 In the right pane, set the password policy.

Step 4 Click Apply.

----End

4.3.2 Setting the Account PolicyIn the account policy setting, you can set the parameters such as maximum login attempts andauto unlock time.

Contextl When you log in to the Nastar, if the failed login times exceed the value set in Max. Login

Attempts, the account is locked to prevent attacks from illegal users to the Nastar.l When your account is locked, the users of the SMManagers user group have the unlock

right to unlock your account. You can also wait for the Nastar to unlock your accountautomatically. The unlock time is defined in the account policy.

Procedure


Step 2 In the Security settings navigation tree, select Account Policy.

Step 3 In the right pane, set the policies such as the maximum login attempts and auto unlock time.

Step 4 Click Apply.

----End

4.3.3 Setting the System PolicyThe number of sessions is the number of the connections between the Nastar client and theNastar server. You can set the system policy to set the maximum number of the sessions thatare supported by the Nastar.

ContextThe maximum number of sessions in the Nastar depends on the following three elements:

l Login mode.In single-user login mode, only the Administrator user is allowed to log in to the Nastarthrough a client regardless of the value of Maximum Sessions. For details about loginmodes, see 4.4 Setting Nastar System Login Mode.

l Hardware condition.In some hardware conditions such as memory overflow, the user is not allowed to log into the Nastar.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

l ESN or license. Table 4-1 shows impact of ESN and license on Maximum Sessions.

Table 4-1 Impact of ESN and license on Maximum Sessions

Condition MaximumSession

Description

ESN is not matched or thelicense is invalid

3 If three users already log in through clients,no more user can log in. If the number ofusers who already log in is less than three,any other user can log in.

ESN ismatchedand thelicense isvalid

The numberof sessions isnot restrictedin license.

32767 -

The numberof sessions isrestricted inlicense.

The smallernumber inthe licenseand thespecifiedvalue ofMaximumSessions.

If the number of current sessions exceedsthe value set in Maximum Sessions butdoes not exceed the number in the license,the Administrator user can still log in tothe Nastar.

Procedure


Step 2 In the Security settings navigation tree, select System Policy.

Step 3 In the right pane, set the maximum number of the sessions that are supported by the Nastar.

Step 4 Click Apply.

----End

4.4 Setting Nastar System Login ModeThe Nastar provides two login modes: multiuser mode and single-user mode. In normal state,the Nastar runs in multiuser mode. When you need to maintain the Nastar server, you can setthe Nastar to run in single-user mode, to avoid the interference from other users.

ContextOnly the Administrator user can set the system login mode.



4-9

CAUTIONOnly the Administrator can log in to the Nastar through a client and all the other users are forcedto log out after the Nastar is switched from the multiuser mode to the single-user mode. Pleaseswitch to the multiuser mode after you complete the operations in the single-user mode.

Procedure


Step 2 In the navigation tree on the left, select System Login Mode.

Step 3 In the System Login Mode interface, set the system login mode.

Setting Login Mode Operations

Switch to a single-user mode Choose Single-user mode and click Apply. In the SetSwitch Delay dialog box, set the delay of login modeswitch, and then click OK.

A warning dialog box is displayed to show the remainedtime of login mode switch. After the switch delay, theNastar is switched to the single-user mode, and Single-usermode is displayed on the status bar of the Nastar client.

Switch to a multiuser mode Choose Multiuser mode, and then click Apply.

The Nastar is switched to the multiuser mode immediately,and Multiuser mode is displayed on the status bar of theNastar client.

----End

4.5 Setting the System ACLYou can set the Access Control List(ACL) to allow the users to log in to the Nastar through theclients of only the specific IP addresses or network segment.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Security > ACL.

Step 2 In the ACL window, specify the IP addresses of the clients that can log in to the Nastar server.

Setting the System ACL Operations

Add an access control item Click Add. In the New System Access Control Item dialogbox, enter the IP address or network segment anddescription. Click OK.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Setting the System ACL Operations

Modify the existing accesscontrol item

Select the IP addresses or network segment that need to bemodified, and then click Modify. In Modify System AccessControl Item, modify relevant information, and then clickOK.

Delete the existing accesscontrol item

Select the IP addresses or network segment that need to bedeleted, and then click Delete. In the Confirm dialog box,click Yes.

Step 3 In the ACL window, click Close.

----End

4.6 Creating a Nastar UserThis section describes how to create a Nastar user and assign corresponding rights to it.

This section contains the following topics:

4.6.1 Procedure for Creating Nastar UsersThis topic describes how to create Nastar users in different scenarios.

4.6.2 Creating an Operation SetYou can plan and create an operation set, and grant operation rights to users or user groups as aset. You can grant operation rights in batch to users, to improve management for operation rights.

4.6.3 Creating a Nastar User GroupYou can create a Nastar user group. The users with the same permissions assigned belong to thesame user group. Because you can assign permissions to users in batch by setting themanagement domain of user group and operation permissions, the permission assignmentefficiency is improved.

4.6.4 Assigning the Managed Domain for a Nastar User GroupThis function enables you to assign the managed domains for a user group. Then users in theuser group can manage all devices in the managed domain.

4.6.5 Assigning Operation Rights to a Nastar User GroupThis function enables you to assign operation rights to a user group. Then users in the user groupown the corresponding operation rights.

4.6.6 Creating an Nastar User AccountYou can create a user account of the Nastar and assign rights to NMS users based on theirresponsibilities.

4.6.7 Adding an Nastar User to a User GroupYou can add the Nastar users to user groups. These users can be managed in a centralized manner.Thus, you can assign rights to the users.

4.6.8 Assigning the Managed Domain for a Nastar UserYou can assign the managed domain for a Nastar user to allocate the managed objects to theuser.

4.6.9 Assigning Operation Rights to a Nastar UserThis function enables you to assign operation rights to a Nastar user. Then the Nastar user canown other operation rights except for the operation rights of the user group to which the user



4-11

belongs. This function is applied in the case where certain operation rights can be assigned tothe specified Nastar user only.

4.6.10 Assigning the User ACLYou can Assign the ACL to allow the users to log in to the Nastar only through the clients ofthe specific IP addresses or network segment.

4.6.1 Procedure for Creating Nastar UsersThis topic describes how to create Nastar users in different scenarios.

l Initial configuration of the NastarCreate and configure the operation sets, and user groups before you create users. For detailson how to create users, see Table 4-2.

l Routine maintenanceIn this case, the operation sets, and user groups are created and configured. You only needto create users and add the users to the user groups. For details on how to create users, seeTable 4-3.

Table 4-2 Creating users in initial configuration

Step Action Description

1 4.6.2 Creating an OperationSet

Assigning the operation rights in the form ofgrouping can reduce the complexity of rightsmanagement.

2 4.6.3 Creating a Nastar UserGroup

Grouping can reduce the complexity of usermanagement.

3 4.6.4 Assigning the ManagedDomain for a Nastar UserGroup

By setting the managed domain for a user group,you can set the objects that can be managed by auser group.

4 4.6.5 Assigning OperationRights to a Nastar UserGroup

You can assign operation rights to a user group.

5 4.6.6 Creating an NastarUser Account

Create a Nastar user account, and then users canuse the account to log in to the Nastar.

6 4.6.7 Adding an Nastar Userto a User Group

When added to a user group, a user inherits therights of the user group.

7 4.6.8 Assigning the ManagedDomain for a Nastar User

By setting the managed domain for a user, youcan set the objects that can be managed by theuser.

8 4.6.9 Assigning OperationRights to a Nastar User

You can assign operation rights to a user.

9 4.6.10 Assigning the UserACL

To ensure security, a user can log in to theNastar only through the specified IP addresses ornetwork segment of clients.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Table 4-3 Creating Users in Routine Maintenance

Step Action Description

1 4.6.6 Creating an NastarUser Account

Create a Nastar user account, and then users canuse the account to log in to the Nastar.

2 4.6.7 Adding an Nastar Userto a User Group

When added to a user group, a user inherits therights of the user group.

4.6.2 Creating an Operation SetYou can plan and create an operation set, and grant operation rights to users or user groups as aset. You can grant operation rights in batch to users, to improve management for operation rights.

Contextl The Nastar provides two default operation sets: AllDeviceOperations and

AllApplicationOperations. The operation set AllDeviceOperations is of the networkdevice type, including all the device rights; the operation set AllApplicationOperationsis of the network management application type, including all the application rights.

l The maximum count of all the operation sets (including the default operation sets) is 100.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Security > Security Management.

Step 2 In the Security Management navigation tree, right-click the Operation Set node and selectNew Operation Set. Otherwise, click in the toolbar of the navigation tree, choose NewOperation Set.

Step 3 In the New Operation Set dialog box, set the properties of the new operation set.

In the properties of a new operation set, the operation set name and the operation set type mustbe set when you create the operation set; other properties can be set after the operation set iscreated.

Setting Properties of anOperation Set

Operations

Set normal properties of anoperation set

On the Details tab page, set the new operation set names,operation set type and description content.

Set members of an operationset

On the Members tab page, click Select. In the SelectOperation Set Member dialog box, select the operationrights that need to be added to the operation set, and then clickOK to add members of the operation set.

Step 4 In the New Operation Set dialog box, click OK.

----End



4-13

4.6.3 Creating a Nastar User GroupYou can create a Nastar user group. The users with the same permissions assigned belong to thesame user group. Because you can assign permissions to users in batch by setting themanagement domain of user group and operation permissions, the permission assignmentefficiency is improved.

Context

The Nastar provide five default user groups:l The SMManagers user group has all the security rights, such as user management and

resetting user password. The SMManagers user group also has the right of querying thesecurity log, and the right of viewing the managed objects. You cannot modify the rightsof the SMManagers.

l The Administrators user group has the right of viewing the managed objects, and the rightsthat does not belong to the SMManagers. You cannot modify the rights assigned to theAdministrators user group.

l By default, the Operators, Monitors, and Normal groups do not have any rights. You canmodify the rights of the Operators, Monitors, and Normal.

Procedure


Step 2 In the Security Management navigation tree, right-click the User Group node and select NewUser Group.

Step 3 In the New User Group dialog box, set the properties of the new user group.

You must manually set the name of the user group. For the other properties of user group, youcan set them after you create the user group successfully.

User Group Properties Operations

User group name anddescription

On the Details tab page, set the user group name anddescription.

Members of user group l To add members, on the Details tab page, click Add. Inthe Add User dialog box, set the members to be added tothe user group.

l To delete members, on the Details tab page, select themembers to be deleted from Members, and then clickDelete.

Management domain of usergroup

On the Domain tab page, click Select. In the SelectDomain dialog box, set the management domain of the usergroup, and then click OK.

Operation rights of user group On the Operation Rights tab page, click Select, in the SelectRights dialog box, set the operation rights for the user group,and then click OK.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

NOTEFor management domain of user group and operation permissions of user group operations, on theDomain and Operation Rights tab page, click Copy Rights from User Group. In the Copy Rights fromUser Group dialog box, select user groups and copy the management domain rights and operationpermissions of these user groups.

Step 4 In the New User Group dialog box, click OK.

----End

4.6.4 Assigning the Managed Domain for a Nastar User GroupThis function enables you to assign the managed domains for a user group. Then users in theuser group can manage all devices in the managed domain.

ContextThe nodes in the navigation tree are divided by NE type. If you select a node of an NE type, allthe NEs of this type are selected. If you select the root node, all the NEs are selected.

Procedure


Step 2 In the Security Management window in the Security Management navigation tree, expandthe User Group node, select the user group you want to set.

Step 3 On the Domain tab, click Select.

NOTE

Select Group by device type in the Domain tab, the NEs in the navigation tree are grouped by device type.

Step 4 In the Select Domain dialog box, set the devices and device sets that the user group needs tomanage, and then click OK.

----End

4.6.5 Assigning Operation Rights to a Nastar User GroupThis function enables you to assign operation rights to a user group. Then users in the user groupown the corresponding operation rights.

ContextThe Nastar provide five default user groups:l The SMManagers user group has all the security rights, such as user management and

resetting user password. The SMManagers user group also has the right of querying thesecurity log, and the right of viewing the managed objects. You cannot modify the rightsof the SMManagers.

l The Administrators user group has the right of viewing the managed objects, and the rightsthat does not belong to the SMManagers. You cannot modify the rights assigned to theAdministrators user group.

l By default, the Operators, Monitors, and Normal groups do not have any rights. You canmodify the rights of the Operators, Monitors, and Normal.



4-15

Procedure


Step 2 In the Security Management window in the Security Management navigation tree, expandthe User Group node, select the user group you want to set.

Step 3 On the Operation Rights tab, click Select.

Step 4 In the Select Rights dialog box, select the authorization and corresponding rights. Click OK.

----End

4.6.6 Creating an Nastar User AccountYou can create a user account of the Nastar and assign rights to NMS users based on theirresponsibilities.

Context

When you create an Nastar user, the property settings must comply with the password policyand the account policy. For details about how to set a password policy and an account policy,see 4.3.1 Setting the Password Policy and 4.3.2 Setting the Account Policy.

Procedure


Step 2 In the Security Management window in the Security Management navigation tree, right-clickthe User node and choose New User.

Step 3 In the New User dialog box, set the properties of the new user.

You must manually set the user name and password. For the other properties, you can use defaultvalues or set them after you create the user account successfully.

User Properties Operations

Normal properties On the Details tab, set user properties, such as user name,description content, and password.

Owner group l To add a new owner group, on the User Groups tab, clickAdd, select the user group to which you want to add theuser.

l To delete an owner group, on the User Groups tab, selectthe user group to be deleted from the user group list, andthen click Delete.

Management domain of user On the Domain tab, click Select. In the Select Domain dialogbox, set the management domain of the user.

Operation permissions ofuser

On the Operation Rights tab, click Select. In the SelectRights dialog box, set operation permissions for the user.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

User Properties Operations

Access control list (ACL) On the ACL tab, set the ACL for the user.

Step 4 In the New User dialog box, click OK.

----End


Contextl You cannot add the user Administrator to a user group.

l The user Administrator belongs to both the Administrators group and SMManagersgroup.

Procedure


Step 2 In the Security Management window in the Security Management navigation tree, expandthe User node. Select the user you want to set.

Step 3 On the User Groups tab, set a user group for Nastar users.

Add Users to User Groups Operations

Add users to a new usergroup

Click Add, in the Add User Group dialog box, select theuser group to which you want to add the user. Click OK.

Delete the existing user group Select the user group to be deleted and click Delete. In theConfirm dialog box, click Yes.

----End


Contextl By default, all devices are visible for the Administrator. You cannot set the managed

domain for the Administrator user.

l When the user managed domain is set, Nastar does not display the managed domain of itsuser group. The final managed domain for the user is the union of the allocated usermanaged domain and its user group managed domain.



4-17

Procedure



Step 3 On the Domain tab, click Select.NOTE


Step 4 In the Select Domain dialog box, select the managed objects, and then click OK.

----End

4.6.9 Assigning Operation Rights to a Nastar UserThis function enables you to assign operation rights to a Nastar user. Then the Nastar user canown other operation rights except for the operation rights of the user group to which the userbelongs. This function is applied in the case where certain operation rights can be assigned tothe specified Nastar user only.

ContextYou cannot set the operation rights of the user Administrator.

Procedure



Step 3 On the Operation Rights tab, click Select.NOTE

On the Operation Rights tab, if you select Show access from user group, the operation rights of the user groupare displayed in the operation rights list.

Step 4 In the Select Rights dialog box, select the type of operation rights and the corresponding rights.Click OK.

----End

4.6.10 Assigning the User ACLYou can Assign the ACL to allow the users to log in to the Nastar only through the clients ofthe specific IP addresses or network segment.

Contextl Only the users of the SMManagers user group can set the user ACL.

l The system ACL allows all the Nastar users to log in to the Nastar only through the clientsof the specific IP addresses or network segment. The user ACL is a subset of the systemACL. The user ACL is effective only for the current user.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Procedure



Step 3 On the Access Control List tab, set the ACL of the Nastar user.

ACL Properties Operations

Use the System ACL Select Use the System ACL, click Apply.NOTE

For details about how to set the system ACL, see 4.5 Setting theSystem ACL.

Use the current user ACL Select Use the current user ACL. Then select the IPaddresses or network segment through which the users canlog in to the server, click Apply.

----End

4.7 Modifying a Nastar UserThis section describes how to modify passwords, normal properties and user rights of Nastarusers.


4.7.1 Resetting the Password of an Nastar UserThis section describes how the user in SMManagers reset the password of an Nastar user. If youforget your password, contact the user in SMManagers to reset the password.

4.7.2 Modifying the Information About a Nastar UserThis section describes how to modify normal properties of the Nastar user, such as loginperiod and Enable/Disable user account.




4.7.6 Modifying the Nastar Access Control ListYou can modify the Nastar access control list to modify the IP addresses of the clients throughwhich the users can log in to the Nastar server.



4-19

4.7.1 Resetting the Password of an Nastar UserThis section describes how the user in SMManagers reset the password of an Nastar user. If youforget your password, contact the user in SMManagers to reset the password.

Contextl The password setting must comply with the password policy. For details on how to set a

password policy, see 4.3.1 Setting the Password Policy.

l The password of the administrator contains eight or more digits. In addition, it must alsocomply with the password policy.

l The user in SMManagers can reset the password of any other user except the administrator.The password of the administrator can be changed by only the administrator through theNastar client.

Procedure


Step 2 Under the Security Management navigation tree in the Security Management window, expandthe User node. Right-click the user whose password you want to reset, and then choose ResetPassword.

NOTEYou can also choose System > Change Password to change the password.

Step 3 In the Reset Password dialog box, set New Password and Confirm Password, and then clickOK.

Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, click OK.

----End

4.7.2 Modifying the Information About a Nastar UserThis section describes how to modify normal properties of the Nastar user, such as loginperiod and Enable/Disable user account.

Procedure


Step 2 In the Security Management window, in the Security Management navigation tree, expandthe User node. Select the user whose information you want to modify. Click the Details tab fromthe pane on the right.

Step 3 On the Details tab, modify the parameters in Description, Enable/Disable user account, andlogin period.

Step 4 Click Apply.

----End


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


Contextl You cannot add the user Administrator to a user group.

l The user Administrator belongs to both the Administrators group and SMManagersgroup.

Procedure



Step 3 On the User Groups tab, set a user group for Nastar users.

Add Users to User Groups Operations

Add users to a new usergroup

Click Add, in the Add User Group dialog box, select theuser group to which you want to add the user. Click OK.

Delete the existing user group Select the user group to be deleted and click Delete. In theConfirm dialog box, click Yes.

----End


Contextl By default, all devices are visible for the Administrator. You cannot set the managed

domain for the Administrator user.

l When the user managed domain is set, Nastar does not display the managed domain of itsuser group. The final managed domain for the user is the union of the allocated usermanaged domain and its user group managed domain.

Procedure



Step 3 On the Domain tab, click Select.



4-21

NOTE


Step 4 In the Select Domain dialog box, select the managed objects, and then click OK.

----End


Context

You cannot set the operation rights of the user Administrator.

Procedure



Step 3 On the Operation Rights tab, click Select.

NOTE

On the Operation Rights tab, if you select Show access from user group, the operation rights of the user groupare displayed in the operation rights list.

Step 4 In the Select Rights dialog box, select the type of operation rights and the corresponding rights.Click OK.

----End

4.7.6 Modifying the Nastar Access Control ListYou can modify the Nastar access control list to modify the IP addresses of the clients throughwhich the users can log in to the Nastar server.

Procedure


Step 2 In the Security Management window, in the Security Management navigation tree, expandthe User node. Select the user you want to set.

Step 3 In the pane on the right, click the Access Control List tab.

Step 4 On the Access Control List tab, do as follows:l Select Use the system Access Control List.l Select Use the current user Access Control List. Then select the IP addresses or network

segment through which the users can log in to the server.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Step 5 Click Apply.

----End

4.8 Comparing the Nastar User RightsBy comparing the rights of two Nastar users, you can understand the differences between theirrights.

Procedure


Step 2 In the Security Management window, click on the top of the Security Managementnavigation tree.

Step 3 In the Select User for Compare dialog box, select two users.

Step 4 Click OK.

The comparison result is displayed in the Compare User Rights Result dialog box.

----End

4.9 Monitoring a Nastar UserThis section describes how to view states of Nastar users, monitor sessions and operations ofNastar users, and force Nastar users to exit.


4.9.1 Unlocking a Nastar UserIf the number of times that a user enters an incorrect password reaches the number of the presetlogin attempts, the user account is locked and can not login the Nastar. This section describeshow to unlock a Nastar user.

4.9.2 Monitoring the Nastar User OperationsYou can monitor the Nastar user sessions and operations to prevent illegal user operations.

4.9.3 Forcing a Nastar User to QuitYou can force a Nastar user to quit if the user performs dangerous operations or initiates illegalsessions.

4.9.1 Unlocking a Nastar UserIf the number of times that a user enters an incorrect password reaches the number of the presetlogin attempts, the user account is locked and can not login the Nastar. This section describeshow to unlock a Nastar user.

Contextl Only the Administrator and the members of SMManagers group can perform this

operation.



4-23

l If you do not manually unlock a user, after the auto unlock time period, the user is unlockedautomatically.

l For details about how to set the maximum number of login attempts and the auto unlocktime, see 4.3.2 Setting the Account Policy.

Procedure


Step 2 In the Security Management dialog box, expand the User node. Right-click the user you wantto unlock, and then select Unlock User.Account Status of the unlocked user changes to Normal.

----End

4.9.2 Monitoring the Nastar User OperationsYou can monitor the Nastar user sessions and operations to prevent illegal user operations.

ContextThe session is the connection between the Nastar client and the Nastar server.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Security > User Monitor.

Step 2 In the User Monitor window, you can monitor an activated session or the operations performedfor a specific session.

Monitoring Users Operations

Monitoring a session In the Session Monitor group box, you can view the sessioninformation in active state.

If a session is not in normal state, you can select this sessionand click Force User to Exit to force the user to exit thelogin interface.

NOTE

l The information about the current client is also displayed in theSession Monitor group box. When the client is selected, theForce User to Exit becomes unavailable.

l When the computer where the client is present installs multiplenetwork cards, the Terminal value can be randomly taken fromavailable IPs.

l After the Nastar server is restarted or the network is recoveredafter interruption, you need to click Refresh to refresh the sessionmonitoring list.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Monitoring Users Operations

Monitoring user operations In the Session Monitor group box, select a session. In theOperation Monitor group box, view the operations aboutthe session.NOTE

l In the Filter dialog box, you can click Filter and set theconditions for monitoring user operations. In the OperationMonitor group box, only the operations meeting the filteringconditions can be displayed.

l In the operation monitoring list, only the user's operations afterthe User Monitor window is activated are displayed. If themonitored user performs the related operations, the informationdisplayed in the operation monitoring list is updated in real time.

----End

4.9.3 Forcing a Nastar User to QuitYou can force a Nastar user to quit if the user performs dangerous operations or initiates illegalsessions.

Contextl If you force a user to quit, only the user of the related session is logged out forcibly. If the

user logs in to the Nastar server through multiple clients, multiple sessions of this user areestablished. To forcibly log out the user from all clients, you need to log out the user foreach related session established.

l Current users logged in cannot force themselves to quit from their corresponding sessions.

ProcedureStep 1 Choose Security > User Monitor.

Step 2 From the session monitoring table, select the records of the sessions to quit forcibly, and thenclick Force User to Exit.

Step 3 In the Confirm dialog box, click Yes.

----End

4.10 Reference of the Security Management GUIThis section provides the reference information of the security management GUI.


4.10.2 Parameters for the System Security PolicyThis section describes the parameters in the Security Settings window. You can refer to theseparameters when you set the Nastar security policy.

4.10.3 Parameters for Creating a Nastar User Account



4-25

This section describes the parameters in the Details tab page. You can refer to these parameterswhen you add a Nastar user.

4.10.4 Parameters for the Nastar User InformationThis section describes the parameters of the Nastar user on the Details tab. You can refer tothese parameters when you view the user information and modify the user attributes.

4.10.5 Parameters for Adding a Nastar User GroupThis section describes the parameters in the Details tab page. You can refer to these parameterswhen you add a Nastar user group.

4.10.6 Parameters for Assigning Operation Rights to Nastar User/User GroupsThis section describes the parameters in the Select Rights dialog box. You can refer to theseparameters when you bind operation rights to a Nastar user/user group.


Maintenance Right ListOperation Right Description

TaskManager Management Used to create, modify and delete a scheduled task.

Operations of SystemMonitor

Used to monitor the status of processes and databases of theNastar server and set system monitoring parameters.

Download System Files Used to obtain the Nastar server files through the client.

Expand Database Space Used to expand the space of the Nastar server database.

Broadcast Messages Used to send broadcast messages.

Browse System MonitorDetails

Used to browse the information about system monitoring,including the status information on services, processes anddatabases.

Data Management Used to back up, restore, and delete data.

Set Broadcast MessagesParameters

Used to set the count of the broadcast messages that aredisplayed and the count of the broadcast messages that aresaved on the server.

Manager SystemMonitor Used to manage the system monitoring.

Log Right ListOperation Right Description

Log rights management Used to set the rights of log management.

Query Operation Logs Used to query operation logs by condition or collect statisticson operation logs.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


Query System Logs Used to query system logs by condition or collect statistics onsystem logs.

Set Operation LogsTemplate

Used to manage the template for querying operation logs.

Set System Logs Template Used to manage the template for querying system logs.

Default Operation SetOperation Set Description

AllApplicationOperations The default operation set of the network managementapplication type provided during initialization includes all theapplication rights except the security management rights.

4.10.2 Parameters for the System Security PolicyThis section describes the parameters in the Security Settings window. You can refer to theseparameters when you set the Nastar security policy.


Passwordpolicy

Max. PasswordValid Days

Description:Validity period of the newpassword. If the password isnot modified, the validityperiod starts from when theuser is created.

Value:

Value range: 0-999.

Default value: 180.

The value 0 means "alwaysvalid".

Min. PasswordValid Days

Description:Minimum days that a newpassword can be used after itis set.

Value:Value range: 0-999.Default value: 10.The value 0 means "alwaysvalid".

Min. Length Description:Minimum length of thepassword.The password forAdministrator cannot be lessthan eight characters.




4-27


Min. Uppercase Description:Minimum uppercase letters ina password.

Value:Value range: 0-16.Default value: 0.The value 0 means"unrestricted".

Min.Lowercase

Description:Minimum lowercase letters ina password.


Min. Numbers Description:Minimum numbers in apassword.


Min. Characters Description:Minimum special charactersin a password.Special characters contain ~!@#$%^&*()_+-={}|\\:\";'?,./`and blank space.



Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


History Record(s)

Description:Number of history passwordskept in the Nastar. The historypasswords are kept from thelatest.The new password cannot bethe same as the historypassword.

Value:Value range: 0-24.Default value: 24.The value 0 means"unrestricted".Example:For example, suppose thepasswords you use from thelatest are 111, 222, and 333.l When this parameter is set

to 0, it means not to keephistory passwords, andyou can set the newpassword to be the sameas the history password.

l When this parameter is setto 1, the system keeps thepassword 111, and youcannot set the newpassword to 111.

l When this parameter is setto 2, the system keeps thepassword 111 and 222,and you cannot set thenew password to 111 or222.

Advancereminder ofpasswordexpiry (days)

Description:Lead time for promptingpassword expiry.


Cannot containthe same andconsecutivecharactersequences

Description:A password cannot containtwo same and consecutivecharacter sequences.

Value:Value range: Enabled orDisabled.Default value: Disabled.

Cannot containascending ordescendingcharactersequences

Description:A password cannot contain atleast two ascending ordescending characterssequence.




4-29


Cannot containpart of the username or thewhole username

Description:The password cannot containpart of or all of the user namecharacters.

Value:Value range: All, Disabled,or 1-32.Default value: Disabled.The number indicates theminimum number ofcharacters of a user namethat cannot be contained inthe related password.

Cannot containa word in thepassworddictionary

Description:The password cannot be aword from the dictionary.NOTE

l The suffix of each passworddictionary file is dic. The fileis in $Nastar_ROOT/etc/conf/pwddic/ on the Nastarserver.

l The number of the passworddictionary files are notlimited in the Nastar, but thetotal words in all thepassword dictionary filescannot exceed 5000.


Accountpolicy

Max. LoginAttempts

Description:If the attempts to log in to theNastar by a wrong passwordexceed this value, the accountis locked. If you enter thecorrect password before theincorrect login attemptsexceed the maximum, theNastar clears the incorrectlogin records.


Auto UnlockTime (minutes)

Description:When a user account is lockeddue to the login attemptsexceeding the Max.LoginAttempts, it is unlocked afterthis time.


Min. Length ofUser Name

Description:Minimum length of a Nastaruser.



Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


Inactive UserPolicy

Description:If you do not log in during thepreset period after theprevious login, the Nastardisables or delete the useraccount.

Value:Value range: Hibernate orDeleteDefault value: Hibernate

Systempolicy

MaximumSessions

Description:The total clients that can log into the Nastar. The maximumsessions are controlled by theNastar licenses. If thisparameter is set to more thanthe value controlled by thelicense, the total clientsallowed to log in is the valuecontrolled by the license.

Value:Value range: 0-32767Default value: 30The value 0 indicates that theclients that can log in to theNastar are not limited.

4.10.3 Parameters for Creating a Nastar User AccountThis section describes the parameters in the Details tab page. You can refer to these parameterswhen you add a Nastar user.


User Name Description:Name of the new user.

Value:l The length of the user name

can be neither less than Min.Length preset in the accountpolicy nor greater than 32characters.

l The user name can containcapital letters, small letters,numbers and underscores.

l The name must be unique andcannot be left blank. Theinitial character cannot be anumber or an underline.

Description Description:A brief description of the user. It isused to distinguish users.

Value:The description can contain0-100 characters.



4-31


User type Description:Whether the user belongs to a localuser or a remote user.

Value:l Local User

l Remote User

Password Description:Password of the new user.The password must follow thesystem password policy.To view the policy, chooseSecurity > Security Policy.

Value:The password is a characterstring and is case sensitive.NOTE

The length of the password of theAdministrator user cannot be lessthan 8 characters. The length of thepassword of the non-Administratoruser cannot be less than Min.Length preset in the passwordpolicy.

Confirm Password Description:Enter the password again to ensurethat the one you enter in is correct.

Value:The value range is the same asthe Password field.

User must changepassword for nextlogin

Description:If this option is selected, you needto change the user password whenyou log in to the Nastar next time.

Value:-

User can not changepassword

Description:If this option is selected, you cannotchange your password through theNastar client.

Value:-

User account isdisabled

Description:If this option is selected, the useraccount is disabled. You cannot login to the Nastar using this account.

Value:-

Use systemmaximumpassword valid days

Description:If this option is selected, themaximum password valid days youset must be the same as that definedin the password policy.

Value:-

Maximumpassword valid days

Description:The expiration date of a newpassword.If you have never changed thepassword, the count date starts fromthe creation date.If you select Use systemmaximum password valid days,this parameter is disabled.

Value:Value range: 0-999, 0 for validpermanently.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


LoginDuration

EnablePeriodlimit

Description:If the option is selected, thefollowing options are all enabled.you can set the login duration.

Setting method:In the New User dialog box,click Login Duration.In the Login Duration dialogbox, select Enable period limitcheck box.

Startdate/Enddate

Description:Start date/End date when you canuse this account to log in.

Value:The value range is 1st January,2001 - 31st December, 2037.

Dailystarttime/Dailyend time

Description:The daily start time or daily endtime when you can use this accountto log in.

Value:The value range is 00:00:00 -23:59:59 (hour:minute:second).

Sun/Mon/Tue/Wed/Thu/Fri/Sat

Description:If the option is selected, you can login from Start date to End dateevery week.

Value:-

4.10.4 Parameters for the Nastar User InformationThis section describes the parameters of the Nastar user on the Details tab. You can refer tothese parameters when you view the user information and modify the user attributes.


Parameter Description Settings

User Name Description:User name that is set when you createthe user.

Setting method:-

User Type Description:User belong to local user or remoteuser.

Value:Local user or remote user.

Description Description:User description used to distinguishdifferent users.

Setting method:Value range: 0-100 characters

Enable/Disableuser account

Description:Whether the account is enabled ordisabled.

Value:-



4-33


Valid From Description:Start date that you can log in to theNastar.

Value:-

Valid To Description:End date that you can log in to theNastar.

Value:-

Valid Time Description:Period during which you can log in tothe Nastar.

Setting method:

Click . In the LoginDuration dialog box, select theEnable period limit check box.Set Daily Start Time and DailyEnd Time in the spin boxes andselect the days in a week that youcan log in to the Nastar.

TimeAuthorized toChangePassword

Description:Earliest time that you can change youpassword.

Value:-

PasswordExpiry Time

Description:Time that your password expires.Your password is invalid if you donot change it before PasswordExpiry Time.

Value:-

Locked Status Description:Locked status of the user.

Value:Locked or Unlocked.

User mustchangepassword nextlogin

Description:Yes indicates that you need to changeyour password when you log in to theNastar next time. No indicates thatyou do not need to change yourpassword when you log in to theNastar next time.

Value:-

You can notchangepassword

Description:Yes indicates that you cannot changeyour password on the Nastar client.No indicates that you can changeyour password on the Nastar client.

Value:-


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


Maximumpassword validdays

Description:Maximum valid days of yourpassword after you set a newpassword.If you do not change your passwordafter you create it, the start valid dateof your password is the date that youcreate the user.

Setting method:

Click . In the Maximum ValidDays dialog box, set the maximumvalid days of your password.If you select the Use systemmaximum password valid dayscheck box, Maximum passwordvalid days is the maximum validdays of the system password.Value:Value range: 0-9990 indicates that the password ispermanently valid.

RecentSuccessfulLogin Time

Description:Latest time that you successfully login to the Nastar.

Setting method:-

RecentSuccessfulLogin Time

Description:Latest time that you successfully login to the Nastar.

Setting method:-

RecentSuccessfulLogout Time

Description:Latest time that you successfully logout the Nastar.

Setting method:-

Recent Date forChangingPassword

Description:Latest date that you change yourpassword.

Setting method:-

Login Status Description:Your current login status.

Setting method:-

4.10.5 Parameters for Adding a Nastar User GroupThis section describes the parameters in the Details tab page. You can refer to these parameterswhen you add a Nastar user group.



4-35

Parameters


Name Description:Name of the new user group.

Value:Value range: 1-20 characters.NOTE

l In special characters, onlyunderline can be contained in thename.

l The start and end characters of theuser group name cannot be a space.

l The name cannot start with_private.

l The name must be unique andcannot be null.

Description Description:A brief description of the user. It isused to distinguish deferent usergroups.

Value:Value range: 0-100 characters.

Members Description:Users that are added to the usergroup.

Setting method:-

Copy Rightsfrom UserGroup

Description:Copy rights from other user group.

Setting method:1. Click Copy Rights from User

Group.2. Select the user group from

Copy Rights from UserGroup dialog box.

3. Click OK.

4.10.6 Parameters for Assigning Operation Rights to Nastar User/User Groups

This section describes the parameters in the Select Rights dialog box. You can refer to theseparameters when you bind operation rights to a Nastar user/user group.

Parameters

Name Description

Authorization Objects Description:Object of the operation rights.The object selected in Authorization Objects determines theoperation rights displayed in Operations.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Name Description

Operations Description:Operation right list.The operation rights displayed in Operations are determinedby the object selected in Selected Rights.

Selected Rights Description:Operation rights to be assigned to the Nastar user/user group.



4-37

5 Log Management

About This Chapter

The log records the operations on the Nastar and important system events. You can use logmanagement to query and collect statistics on logs.

5.1 Basic Knowledge of Log ManagementUnderstanding the general knowledge of log management such as its functions and log typeshelps you manage logs.

5.2 Managing Operation LogsYou can query and collect statistics on operation logs of the Nastar to understand the operationstatus of the Nastar.

5.3 Managing System LogsYou can query and collect statistics on system logs of the Nastar to understand the running statusof the Nastar.

5.4 Managing Security LogsYou can query and collect statistics on security logs of the Nastar to understand the securityoperation status of the Nastar.

5.5 Managing Log TemplatesYou can use log templates to query and collect statistics on logs conveniently. This sectiondescribes how to manage log templates, including how to create, modify, and delete a logtemplate.

5.6 Reference of the Log Management GUIThis section provides the reference information of the log management GUI.

NastarOperator Guide 5 Log Management


5-1

5.1 Basic Knowledge of Log ManagementUnderstanding the general knowledge of log management such as its functions and log typeshelps you manage logs.

5.1.1 Log Management FunctionThis section describes the log management function of the Nastar. The Nastar records Nastarrunning logs and user operation logs, so you can understand the Nastar running status by queryingand collecting statistics on logs. In addition, you can save the query or statistics result in a file.

5.1.2 Log TypesThe Nastar has three types of logs: operation logs, system logs, and security logs. The three typesof logs record different log information.

5.1.1 Log Management FunctionThis section describes the log management function of the Nastar. The Nastar records Nastarrunning logs and user operation logs, so you can understand the Nastar running status by queryingand collecting statistics on logs. In addition, you can save the query or statistics result in a file.

The log management function of the Nastar enables you to perform the following operations:l Querying logs;

l Collecting statistics on logs;

l Creating, modifying, or deleting a log query or statistics template;

l Saving and printing the log query or statistics result.

5.1.2 Log TypesThe Nastar has three types of logs: operation logs, system logs, and security logs. The three typesof logs record different log information.

The following describes the three types of logs:

l Operation logsOperation logs record the information about the non-security operations on the Nastar, suchas querying logs.

l System logsSystem logs record important events that occur in the Nastar. For example, the Nastar doesnot work properly, a network fault occurs, or the Nastar is under attack. The logs help youto analyze the system status. You can then remove the faults in time.

l Security logsSecurity logs record the security operations on the Nastar, such as logging in to the server,modifying the password, and exiting the Nastar server.

5.2 Managing Operation LogsYou can query and collect statistics on operation logs of the Nastar to understand the operationstatus of the Nastar.

5 Log ManagementNastar

Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

5.2.1 Querying Operation LogsYou can query operation logs to know the operation records of the Nastar.

5.2.2 Collecting Statistics on Operation LogsYou can know the operation status by collecting statistics and analyzing the operation log. Forexample, you can know the period during which maximum number of operations are performed,and the period during which operations are performed most frequently.

5.2.1 Querying Operation LogsYou can query operation logs to know the operation records of the Nastar.

ContextThe statistics result is generated based on the existing data in the database. If the database isempty, the statistics result contains no match.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose System > Log Management > Query Operation Logs.

Step 2 In the Filter window, set the filter conditions, and then click OK.

NOTEYou can also click Cancel, and then query logs in the Query Operation Logs window in the following ways:

l Click Template Filter, and then select Open. Select a template from the template list, and then clickOpen to use an existing template to query logs. For details about how to create a log query template, see5.5.1 Creating a Log Query Template.

l Click Filter. Set the query conditions in the Filter, and then click OK to query logs.

----End

5.2.2 Collecting Statistics on Operation LogsYou can know the operation status by collecting statistics and analyzing the operation log. Forexample, you can know the period during which maximum number of operations are performed,and the period during which operations are performed most frequently.


Procedure

Step 1 Choose System > Log Management > Operation Log Statistics.

Step 2 In the Statistic Filter window, set statistical items and statistic condition, and then click OK.



5-3

NOTEYou can also click Cancel, and then collect statistics in the Operation Log Statistics window in the followingways:

l Click Template Statistic, and then select Open. Select a template from the template list, and then clickOpen to use an existing template to collect statistics on operation logs.

l Click Statistic Filter. Set Statistical Items and Filter Condition in the Statistic Filter window, and thenclick OK to collect statistics on operation logs.

In the Operation Log Statistics window, the statistical result is displayed.

Perform the following operations as required:

l Click Print to print the statistical result.

l Click Save As to save the statistical result.

----End

5.3 Managing System LogsYou can query and collect statistics on system logs of the Nastar to understand the running statusof the Nastar.

5.3.1 Querying System LogsYou can query system logs to know the important events that occur when the Nastar is running.

5.3.2 Collecting Statistics on System LogsYou can know the system status by collecting statistics and analyzing the system log. Forexample, you can know which type of services raises the most alarms.

5.3.1 Querying System LogsYou can query system logs to know the important events that occur when the Nastar is running.

Context

The statistics result is generated based on the existing data in the database. If the database isempty, the statistics result contains no match.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose System > Log Management > Query System Logs.

Step 2 In the Filter window, set the filter conditions, and then click OK.

NOTEYou can also click Cancel, and then query logs in the Query System Logs window in the following ways:


l Click Filter. Set the query conditions in the Filter window, and then click OK to query logs.

----End


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

5.3.2 Collecting Statistics on System LogsYou can know the system status by collecting statistics and analyzing the system log. Forexample, you can know which type of services raises the most alarms.


Procedure

Step 1 Choose System > Log Management > System Log Statistics.

Step 2 In the Statistic Filter window, set statistic condition, and then click OK.

NOTEYou can also click Cancel, and then collect statistics in the System Log Statistics window in the followingways:

l Click Template Statistic, and then select Open. Select a template from the template list, and then clickOpen to use an existing template to collect statistics on system logs.

l Click Statistic Filter. Set statistic condition in the Statistic Filter window, and then click OK to collectstatistics on system logs.

In the System Log Statistics window, the statistical result is displayed.Perform the following operations as required.l Click Print to print the statistical result.


----End

5.4 Managing Security LogsYou can query and collect statistics on security logs of the Nastar to understand the securityoperation status of the Nastar.

5.4.1 Querying Security LogsYou can query security logs to know the security operations of the Nastar.

5.4.2 Collecting Statistics on Security LogsYou can know the security operations by collecting statistics and analyzing the security log. Forexample, you can know the period during which maximum number of security operations areperformed, and the period during which operations are performed most frequently.

5.4.1 Querying Security LogsYou can query security logs to know the security operations of the Nastar.




5-5

Procedure

Step 1 Choose System > Log Management > Query Security Logs.

Step 2 In the Filter window, set the filter conditions, and then click OK.NOTE

You can also click Cancel, and then query logs in the Query Security Logs window in the following ways:


l Click Filter. Set the query conditions in the Filter window, and then click OK to query logs.

----End

5.4.2 Collecting Statistics on Security LogsYou can know the security operations by collecting statistics and analyzing the security log. Forexample, you can know the period during which maximum number of security operations areperformed, and the period during which operations are performed most frequently.


Procedure

Step 1 Choose System > Log Management > Security Logs Statistics.

Step 2 In the Statistic Filter window, set statistical items and filter condition, and then click OK.NOTE

You can also click Cancel, and then collect statistics in the Security Log Statistics window in the followingways:

l Click Template Statistic, and then select Open. Select a template from the template list, and then clickOpen to use an existing template to collect statistics on security logs.

l Click Statistic Filter. Set Statistical Items and Filter Condition in the Statistic Filter window, and thenclick OK to collect statistics on security logs.

In the Security Log Statistics window, the statistical result is displayed.Perform the following operations as required.l Click Print to print the statistical result.


----End

5.5 Managing Log TemplatesYou can use log templates to query and collect statistics on logs conveniently. This sectiondescribes how to manage log templates, including how to create, modify, and delete a logtemplate.

5.5.1 Creating a Log Query Template


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

You can save the specific query conditions in a log query template. This helps you query logsconveniently. The procedures for creating the query templates for operation logs, system logs,and security logs are similar. This section takes the creation of an operation log query templateas an example to describe how to create a log query template.

5.5.2 Creating a Log Statistical TemplateYou can save the specific statistics conditions in a log statistics template. This helps you collectstatistics on logs conveniently. The procedures for creating the statistics templates for operationlogs, system logs, and security logs are similar. This section takes the creation of an operationlog statistics template as an example to describe how to create a log statistics template.

5.5.3 Modifying a Log TemplateYou can modify the query or statistics conditions in the created log query or statistics template.The procedures for modifying the templates for operation logs, system logs, and security logsare similar. This section takes the modification of an operation log query template as an exampleto describe how to modify a log template.

5.5.4 Deleting a Log TemplateYou can delete the log template that is not required any more. The procedures for deleting thetemplates for operation logs, system logs, and security logs are similar. Taking the deletion ofan operation log query template as an example, this section describes how to delete a logtemplate.

5.5.1 Creating a Log Query TemplateYou can save the specific query conditions in a log query template. This helps you query logsconveniently. The procedures for creating the query templates for operation logs, system logs,and security logs are similar. This section takes the creation of an operation log query templateas an example to describe how to create a log query template.

Procedure


Step 2 In the Filter window, click Cancel.

Step 3 In the Query Operation Logs window, click Template Filter , then select New.

Step 4 In the Enter The Template Name dialog box, enter the name of the template, and then clickOK.

Step 5 In the Filter window, set query conditions, and then click OK.

----End

5.5.2 Creating a Log Statistical TemplateYou can save the specific statistics conditions in a log statistics template. This helps you collectstatistics on logs conveniently. The procedures for creating the statistics templates for operationlogs, system logs, and security logs are similar. This section takes the creation of an operationlog statistics template as an example to describe how to create a log statistics template.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose System > Log Management > Operation Log Statistics.



5-7

Step 2 In the Statistic Filter window, click Cancel.

Step 3 In the Operation Log Statistics window, click Template Statistic and select New.

Step 4 In the Enter The Template Name dialog box, enter the name of the template, and then clickOK.

Step 5 In the Statistic Filter window, set statistic condition, and then click OK.

----End

5.5.3 Modifying a Log TemplateYou can modify the query or statistics conditions in the created log query or statistics template.The procedures for modifying the templates for operation logs, system logs, and security logsare similar. This section takes the modification of an operation log query template as an exampleto describe how to modify a log template.

Procedure


Step 2 In the Filter Condition dialog box, click Cancel.

Step 3 In the Query Operation Logs window, click Template Filter and then choose Open.

Step 4 In the Open dialog box, select the log template to be modified, and then click Open.

Step 5 In the Query Operation Logs window, click Filter.

Step 6 In the Filter Condition dialog box, modify the filtering conditions in the log template, and thenclick OK.

Step 7 Click Template Filter and then choose Save.

----End

5.5.4 Deleting a Log TemplateYou can delete the log template that is not required any more. The procedures for deleting thetemplates for operation logs, system logs, and security logs are similar. Taking the deletion ofan operation log query template as an example, this section describes how to delete a logtemplate.

Procedure


Step 2 In the Filter Condition dialog box, click Cancel.

Step 3 Click Template Filter and then choose Delete.

Step 4 In the Delete dialog box, select the log template to be deleted, and then click Delete.

NOTE

l In the Delete dialog box, you can press the Ctrl key to select multiple log templates.

l The log templates in use cannot be deleted.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Step 5 In the Confirm dialog box, click Yes.

Step 6 In the Delete dialog box, click Close.

----End

5.6 Reference of the Log Management GUIThis section provides the reference information of the log management GUI.

5.6.1 Parameters for Querying Operation LogsThis section describes the parameters in the Filter Condition dialog box. You can refer to theseparameters when you query operation logs.

5.6.2 Parameters for Operation Log StatisticsThis section describes the parameters in the Statistic Filter dialog box. You can refer to theseparameters when you collect statistics on operation logs.

5.6.3 Parameters for Operation Log DetailsThis section describes the parameters of the query result displayed in the Query OperationLog window.

5.6.4 Parameters for Querying System LogsThis section describes the parameters in the Filter dialog box. You can refer to these parameterswhen you query system logs.

5.6.5 Parameters for System Log StatisticsThis section describes the parameters in the Statistic Filter dialog box. You can refer to theseparameters when you collect statistics on system logs.

5.6.6 Parameters for System Log DetailsThis section describes the parameters of query result displayed in the Query System Logswindow.

5.6.7 Parameters for Querying Security LogsThis section describes the parameters in the Filter dialog box. You can refer to these parameterswhen you query security logs.

5.6.8 Parameters for Security Log StatisticsThis section describes the parameters in the Statistic Filter dialog box. You can refer to thissection when you collect statistics on security logs.

5.6.9 Parameters for Security Log DetailsThis section describes the parameters of query result displayed in the Query Security Logswindow.

5.6.1 Parameters for Querying Operation LogsThis section describes the parameters in the Filter Condition dialog box. You can refer to theseparameters when you query operation logs.



5-9


User Description:To query data by user.

Setting method:

Click . From the Select Userdialog box, select one or moreitems.

Terminal Description:To query by terminal.

Setting method:

Click . From the SelectTerminal dialog box, select oneor more items.

Operation Level Description:To query by operation level.

Setting method:From the Operation Level groupbox, select one or more items.

Result Description:To query by operation result.The operation result involves:l Succeeded means the

operation is complete, and allthe operation results arereturned.

l Failed means the operation isfailed.

l Partly succeeded means theoperation is complete, andsome operation results arereturned.

l Ongoing means the operationis being carried out, the resultis not returned.

l Canceled means the operationis canceled.

Setting method:From the Result group box,select one or more items.

Time Range Description:To query by time range.From means the start time, andTo means the end time.

Setting method:Select From and To, and thenenter the date and time in the text

box, or click and set the timein the Date/Time Selectiondialog box.Example:Example: Set the time range to"2002-02-09 00:00:002003-02-09 00:00:00".


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


Operations Description:To query by operation.

Setting method:

Click corresponding to Operation.From the Select Operationsdialog box, select one or moreitems.

Operation Object Description:To query by operation objects.

Setting method:

Click corresponding to OperationObject. From the SelectOperation Object dialog box,select one or more items.

5.6.2 Parameters for Operation Log StatisticsThis section describes the parameters in the Statistic Filter dialog box. You can refer to theseparameters when you collect statistics on operation logs.

Statistical items


Statistic Row Description:Set the row heading of thestatistical result table.

Setting method:Set one or two statistics items(you must select at least onestatistics item, but you cannotselect more than two statisticsitems). The statistical results aresorted according to the statisticalitems.

Statistic Column Description:Set the column heading of thestatistical result table.

Setting method:Statistic item of Statisticcolumn must be set.

Statistic Item Description:Set the row heading and columnheading of the statistical resulttable.

Value:The parameters include None,User, User Type, Operation,Category, Terminal, Result,and Operation Object.

Example Description:Preview the style of the statisticalresult table.

Value:-



5-11

Filter conditionName Description Settings

User Description:To collect statistics data by user.

Setting method:


Terminal Description:To collect statistics by terminal.

Setting method:


Operation Level Description:To collect statistics by operationlevel.

Setting method:From the Operation Level groupbox, select one or more items.

Result Description:To collect statistics by operationresult.The operation result involves:l Succeeded means the






Setting method:From the Result group box,select one or more items.

Time Range Description:To collect statistics by timerange.From means the start time, andTo means the end time.

Setting method:Select From and To, and thenenter the date and time in the text

box, or click and set the timein the Date/Time Selectiondialog box.Example:Example: Set the time range to"2002-02-09 00:00:002003-02-09 00:00:00".


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


Operations Description:To collect statistics by operation.

Setting method:

Click corresponding to Operation.From the Select Operationsdialog box, select one or moreitems.

Operation Object Description:To collect statistics by operationobjects.

Setting method:


5.6.3 Parameters for Operation Log DetailsThis section describes the parameters of the query result displayed in the Query OperationLog window.

Parameters

Name Description

Operations Description:Name of user operations, such as add, delete, and browse.

Operation Level Description:Level of a user's operation, such as prompt, minor, and major.

User Description:Name of the user who performs the operation.

User Type Description:Type of the user who performs the operation.

Start Time Description:Start time of the operation. The format is consistent with that in regionsettings, such as YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss.

End Time Description:End time of the operation. The format is consistent with that in regionsettings, such as YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss.

Category Description:To identify different types of operations, such as log and remotenotification.



5-13

Name Description

Terminal Description:To identify clients in IP addresses.

Operation Object Description:Operation objects, such as the Nastar.

Result Description:To indicate whether the operation is successful, includingSucceeded, Failed, Canceled, Partly succeeded, andUncompleted.Partly succeeded means the operation is complete, and someoperation results are returned. Uncompleted means the operation isbeing carried out, the result is not returned.

Details Description:Details of operation logs.

5.6.4 Parameters for Querying System LogsThis section describes the parameters in the Filter dialog box. You can refer to these parameterswhen you query system logs.

Parameters


Source Description:To query logs by log source.

Setting method:

Click . From the SourceSelect dialog box, select one ormore items.

Level Description:To query logs by log level.

Setting method:From the Level group box, selectone or more items.

Time Range Description:To query logs by time range. Ifthe time range is not set, all logsgenerated at any time arequeried.From means the start time, andTo means the end time.

Setting method:Select From and To to enter thedate and time directly, or click

and set the time in the Date/Time Selection dialog box.Example:Example: Set the time range to"2002-02-09 00:00:002003-02-09 00:00:00".


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

5.6.5 Parameters for System Log StatisticsThis section describes the parameters in the Statistic Filter dialog box. You can refer to theseparameters when you collect statistics on system logs.

Statistical itemsName Description Settings


Setting method:The Statistic Item parameterunder Statistic Row ismandatory.


Setting method:The Statistic Item parameterunder Statistic Column ismandatory.


Value:The parameters include None,Level, and Source.

Example Description:Preview the style of thestatistical result table.

Value:-


Source Description:To collect statistics logs by logsource.

Setting method:

Click . From the SourceSelect dialog box, select one ormore items.

Level Description:To collect statistics by log level.

Setting method:From the Level group box, selectone or more items.



5-15


Time Range Description:To collect statistics by timerange. If the time range is not set,all logs generated at any time arequeried.From means the start time, andTo means the end time.



5.6.6 Parameters for System Log DetailsThis section describes the parameters of query result displayed in the Query System Logswindow.


Level Description:There are three levels for system logs: Error, Warning, and Info.

Source Description:The log IDs of the subsystems of the Nastar are system management andsecurity management.

Time Description:The date and time when the system log is recorded. The format isconsistent with that in region settings, such as YYYY-MM-DDhh:mm:ss.

BasicInformation

Description:The basic information of system logs. For example: start service.

Details Description:Details of system logs.

5.6.7 Parameters for Querying Security LogsThis section describes the parameters in the Filter dialog box. You can refer to these parameterswhen you query security logs.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


User Description:To query data by user.

Setting method:


Terminal Description:To query by terminals.

Setting method:


Result Description:To query by operation result.The operation result involves:l Succeeded means the






Setting method:From Result, select one or moreitems.

Event Level Description:To query by event levels.

Setting method:From the Event Level group box,select one or more items.

Time Range Description:To query by time range. If thetime range is not specified, alllogs generated at any time arequeried.From means the start time, andTo means the end time.





5-17


Security Event Description:To query by security events.

Setting method:

Click corresponding to SecurityEvent. From the Select SecurityEvent dialog box, select one ormore items.

Operation Object Description:To query by operation objects.

Setting method:


5.6.8 Parameters for Security Log StatisticsThis section describes the parameters in the Statistic Filter dialog box. You can refer to thissection when you collect statistics on security logs.

Statistical itemsName Description Settings


Setting method:Set one statistics item at least andselect two statistics items at most.The statistical results are sortedaccording to the statistical items.


Setting method:The Statistic Item parameterunder Statistic Column ismandatory.


Value:The parameters include None,User, User Type, SecurityEvent, Event Type, Terminal,Result, Operation Object, andEvent Level.

Example Description:Preview the style of the statisticalresult table.

Value:-


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


User Description:To collect statistics data by user.

Setting method:


Terminal Description:To collect statistics by terminals.

Setting method:


Result Description:To collect statistics by operationresult.The operation result involves:l Succeeded means the






Setting method:From Result, select one or moreitems.

Event Level Description:To collect statistics by eventlevels.

Setting method:From the Event Level group box,select one or more items.

Time Range Description:To collect statistics by timerange. If the time range is notspecified, all logs generated atany time are queried.From means the start time, andTo means the end time.





5-19


Security Event Description:To collect statistics by securityevents.

Setting method:

Click corresponding to SecurityEvent. From the Select SecurityEvent dialog box, select one ormore items.

Operation Object Description:To collect statistics by operationobjects.

Setting method:


5.6.9 Parameters for Security Log DetailsThis section describes the parameters of query result displayed in the Query Security Logswindow.


Security Event Description:Operation information of the security event.

Event Level Description:Severity of a security event, such as minor, major, and critical.

User Description:Name of the user who performs the operation.

User Type Description:Type of the user who performs the operation.

Start Time Description:Start time of the operation. The format is consistent with that inregion settings, such as YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss.

End Time Description:End time of the operation. The format is consistent with that in regionsettings, such as YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss.

Event Type Description:Type of the event.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Name Description

Terminal Description:To identify clients in IP addresses.NOTE

During the initialization of the Nastar server installation, the terminal IPaddress corresponding to the operations performed by using scripts orcommands is 1.1.1.1 displayed in security logs.

Operation Object Description:Operation objects, such as the Nastar

Result Description:To indicate whether the operation is successful, includingSucceeded, Failed, Canceled, Partly succeeded, and Ongoing.Partly succeeded means the operation is complete, and someoperation results are returned. Uncompleted means the operation isbeing carried out, the result is not returned.

Details Description:Details of security logs.



5-21

6 OSS Management

About This Chapter

This describes the OSS management. The OSS management enables you to create objects to bemanaged, modify objects, and delete objects. The centralized task management subsystemupdates the object data at the preset time according to the object changes in the navigation treeon the interface of OSS NE management.

6.1 Basic Knowledge of OSS ManagementThis describes the basic knowledge about the OSS management functions. You should graspthe basic knowledge before you perform management operations, which facilitates themanagement over network objects.

6.2 Creating an OSSThis describes how to create an OSS. Creating an OSS is actually to define a physical FTP server.The Nastar collects the required data from the OSS (FTP server) to the Nastar server.

6.3 Viewing the Attributes of an OSSThis describes how to view the attributes of an existing OSS of OSS management.

6.4 Modifying the Attributes of an OSSThis describes how to modify the attributes of an existing OSS of OSS management accordingto the new requirement.

6.5 Reference for the OSS Management GUIThis describes the parameters about the interface of OSS management and the parameters forsetting the object attributes of OSS management. You can refer to the description whenperforming the relevant operations on the interface.

NastarOperator Guide 6 OSS Management


6-1

6.1 Basic Knowledge of OSS ManagementThis describes the basic knowledge about the OSS management functions. You should graspthe basic knowledge before you perform management operations, which facilitates themanagement over network objects.

In the OSS management, objects present the physical or logical entities on the network. Aphysical or logical entity, namely, an object, can be an OSS or an NE.l OSS

Operation Support System. It defines the interface protocol principle in the Nastar. TheNastar collects the required data from a specified FTP server according to the OSS attributesand saves the data as files in a specified path in the Nastar.

l NENEs are used to identify network devices, such as switches and routers. NEs can beclassified into actual NEs and virtual NEs.Actual NEs are actual telecommunications devices of Huawei on the network.Virtual NEs are the NEs that do not actually exist or are telecommunications devices ofother vendors on the network.

The OSS management subsystem provides the basic functions for managing objects. Thecentralized task management subsystem adds the objects to the GUI through the OSSmanagement subsystem.

The OSS management of the Nastar provides the following functions: creating an OSS, viewingand modifying the attributes of OSSs, deleting the OSSs, refreshing the OSSs, importing theOSSs and export the OSSs.

6.2 Creating an OSSThis describes how to create an OSS. Creating an OSS is actually to define a physical FTP server.The Nastar collects the required data from the OSS (FTP server) to the Nastar server.


Procedure

Step 1 Choose Maintenance > OSS Management. The OSS Management window is displayed.


If you need to ... Then ...

Create an OSS through addition Go to Step 3.

Create an OSS through import Go to Step 4.

6 OSS ManagementNastar

Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Step 3 To create an OSS through addition, perform the following steps:

1. Click New OSS.

2. Set the attribute parameters of the OSS.

CAUTIONThe values of OSS data interface type, OSS User Name, OSS Password, and OSS ServerPort must be correct. Otherwise, the end-to-end task and data collection may fail.

3. Set the information about the FTP server.

CAUTIONThe values of FTP server ip, FTP server port, FTP user, FTP password, FTP transfermode, and Protocol must be correct. Otherwise, the data collection may fail.

4. Click OK.

Step 4 To create an OSS through import, perform the following steps:

1. Click Import.2. In the displayed Open dialog box, select an .xls file that meets the formatting requirements

of the OSS and NE template, and then click Open.If the name of the OSS or NE to be imported is the same as the name of the existing OSSor NE, the system displays the Information dialog box, prompting you whether tooverwrite the existing information.

3. In the displayed ImportReport dialog box, check the information about the OSS or NE tobe imported, and then click OK.

Step 5 Optional: If you set OSS data interface type to the M2000 V200R008 or a later version, andthe M2000 adopts the SLS system, perform the following steps to set slave servers:When the M2000 V200R008 or a later version adopts the SLS system, the data required by thesystem is distributed on different servers because of the huge network. During the creation ofan OSS, you must create a master server before setting the slave servers.

1. In the navigation tree in the left pane, select the created OSS (master server), and then clickSlave Server. The Slave Server is displayed.

2. Click Add. The Slave server information dialog box is displayed.

3. After setting the information about the slave server, click OK.

4. Repeat Step 5.1 through Step 5.3 to set the information about all the slave servers. ClickClose.

----End

Postrequisitel Set the NEs managed by the OSS.



6-3

1. In the navigation tree in the left pane of the OSS Management window, select anOSS, and then click NE Manager. The NE Selector dialog box is displayed.

2. Set the NEs that are managed by the selected OSS.The left pane lists the NEs to be selected for the management of the OSS. The rightpane lists the NEs that are selected for the management of the OSS.– In the left pane, you can double-click an NE to add it to the right pane.

– You can click to move one or more NEs from the left pane to the rightpane.

– You can click to move all the NEs from the left pane to the right pane.

– You can click to move one or more NEs from the right pane to the leftpane.

– You can click to move all the NEs from the right pane to the left pane.

CAUTIONIf an NE is not added to the right pane, the data of this NE cannot be collected to theNastar server.

3. Click OK.When creating an OSS through import, you can edit the NEs to be managed by theOSS in the file containing the information about the OSS or NE to be imported. Afterthe import is successful, the new OSS can manage these NEs.

l Delete an existing OSS.

1. In the navigation tree in the left pane of the OSS Management window, select anOSS to be deleted, and then click Delete.If the selected OSS contains subobjects, the system prompts you to delete all thesubobjects before deleting this OSS.

2. In the displayed dialog box, click OK.l Export the information about an OSS and the managed NEs.

1. In the lower left corner of the OSS Management window, click Export.2. Set a file name and specify a save path in the displayed Save dialog box, and then

click Save.The file format must be .xls.

3. In the displayed Information dialog box, click Yes to open the file that contains theinformation about each OSS and the managed NEs.

6.3 Viewing the Attributes of an OSSThis describes how to view the attributes of an existing OSS of OSS management.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


l Certain OSSs are created.

Procedure


Step 2 Select an OSS from the navigation tree in the left pane. Then, you can view the attributes of theOSS in the right pane.

----End

6.4 Modifying the Attributes of an OSSThis describes how to modify the attributes of an existing OSS of OSS management accordingto the new requirement.


l Certain OSSs are created.

Procedure


Step 2 Select an OSS whose attributes are to be modified from the navigation tree in the left pane, andthen click Edit.

Step 3 Modify the relevant attributes.

Step 4 Click OK.

----End

6.5 Reference for the OSS Management GUIThis describes the parameters about the interface of OSS management and the parameters forsetting the object attributes of OSS management. You can refer to the description whenperforming the relevant operations on the interface.

6.5.1 Interface Description: OSS ManagementThis describes the interface of OSS management. Before perform the relevant operations, youneed to familiarize yourself with the functions of each area on the interface.

6.5.2 Parameters for Setting the Object Attributes of OSS ManagementThis describes the parameters for creating or modifying the objects of OSS management. Youcan refer to the description when creating or modifying the objects of OSS management.



6-5

6.5.1 Interface Description: OSS ManagementThis describes the interface of OSS management. Before perform the relevant operations, youneed to familiarize yourself with the functions of each area on the interface.

Figure 6-1 shows the interface of OSS management. Table 6-1 describes the items in Figure6-1.

Figure 6-1 Interface of OSS management

Table 6-1 Interface description: OSS management


(1) Navigation tree Indicates that the objects in the navigation treeare sorted by OSS.

(2) Toolbar Provides the buttons for importing andexporting the information about OSSs and themanaged NEs, creating and deleting OSSs,setting slave servers, managing NEs, andmodifying the attributes of the created OSSs.

(3) Area of OSS attributes Displays the details of the OSS that you selectin the navigation tree.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


(4) Area of FTP serverinformation

Displays the details of the FTP servercorresponding to the OSS that you select in thenavigation tree.

6.5.2 Parameters for Setting the Object Attributes of OSSManagement

This describes the parameters for creating or modifying the objects of OSS management. Youcan refer to the description when creating or modifying the objects of OSS management.

Parameters Related to the OSS AttributesParameter Description

OSS name Indicates the name of an OSS to be created or modified.Value range:l A maximum of 60 characters

l The following characters are not allowed: ~ ! @ # $ % ^ & * += < > ?

l Unique and cannot be null

l Case sensitive

OSS data interface type Indicates the type of the interface between the EMS and theNastar.Value range: M2000V2R6, M2000V2R8, M2000V2R9,M2000V2R10, OMC920V400R001C01, and OtherWhen the Nastar collects data from the OSS, this interface definesthe relevant principles such as the path of the configuration datafiles and performance data files in the OSS and the naming rulesof the files. Thus, the Nastar can collect the required files from thepath specified by the OSS and saves the files in the specified pathon the Nastar client.NOTE

When creating an OSS, you need to set the value of OSS data interfacetype according to the data collection principles supported by the OSS. TheOSSs of different version may support the same data collection principles.

If you set OSS data interface type to Other, you need to set thesave paths in the EMS and Nastar when creating a data collectiontask. Thus, the Nastar can collect files from the specified path inthe EMS and save the files in the specified path on the Nastar client.

OSS User Name Indicates the user name used to log in to the OSS server.This parameter cannot be null.



6-7


OSS Password Indicates the password used to log in to the OSS server.This parameter cannot be null.

OSS Server Port Indicates the port number of the OSS server.This parameter cannot be null.

Description It is the description of an OSS.Value range:l A maximum of 128 characters


l Case sensitive

Parameters Related to the FTP ServerParameter Description

FTP server ip Indicates the IP address of the FTP server where the file to becollected is located.This parameter cannot be null.

FTP server port Indicates the port number of the FTP server where the file to becollected is located.This parameter can be set to any integer from 1 to 65535. Thedefault value is 21.This parameter cannot be null.

FTP user Indicates the user name used to log in to the FTP server.Value range:l A maximum of 25 characters


l Case sensitive

This parameter cannot be null.

FTP password Indicates the password used to log in to the FTP server.This parameter cannot be null.

FTP transfer mode Indicates the transfer mode set for the FTP server. The parametervalue can be Passive Mode or Active Mode.

Protocol l SFTP: Indicates the encrypted FTP transfer, which requires thesupport from the FTP server.

l FTP: Indicates the non-encrypted FTP transfer, which is ageneral FTP mode.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Parameter Related to the slave server AttributesParameter Description

FTP server IP Indicates the IP address of the slave server in the M2000 SLSsystem.The value of this parameter cannot be null.

FTP server port Indicates the FTP service port.Value range: an integer from 0 to 65535. The default value is 21.If the parameter value is null, the system uses 0 as the port number.

FTP user Indicates the valid user name of the FTP service in the M2000 SLSsystem.Value range:l A maximum of 25 characters


l Case sensitive

FTP password Indicates the password of the FTP service in the M2000 SLSsystem.



6-9

7 GSM Centralized Task Management

About This Chapter

The Nastar provides centralized management for the GSM timing tasks. By setting GSM timingtasks, you can collect data from the EMS periodically, save the data as a file in certain path onthe Nastar system, and import the data from the file to the database periodically for future queryand analysis. In addition, you can delete the data whose storage duration has expired from thedatabase at the preset time to save resource space of the system. By using the function of GSMcentralized task management, you can create, modify, delete, suspend, resume, or cancel a GSMtiming task. In addition, you can view information such as status and progress of a task.

7.1 Basic Knowledge of Centralized Task ManagementCentralized task management involves the concepts such as types of timing tasks, parametersfor task scheduling, and states of timing tasks. Learning the basic knowledge of the centralizedtask management helps you perform the operations related to the centralized task management.

7.2 Creating a GSM User-Defined Timing TaskThe Nastar allows you to create GSM timing tasks. Thus, you can create GSM timing tasks bysetting common parameters and extended parameters based on the requirements of networkmaintenance.

7.3 Modifying a GSM User-Defined Timing TaskThe Nastar allows you to modify certain parameters of a GSM user-defined timing task. If theexecution of a GSM user-defined timing task is complete, you cannot modify the task.

7.4 Modifying a GSM Data Deletion TaskThis describes how to modify a GSM data deletion task. If data is periodically imported to theNastar database, the database resources may be insufficient. By performing the GSM datadeletion task, the Nastar can delete the data whose storage duration has expired from the databaseat the preset time to save system resources. A GSM data deletion task is a system timing task.You can modify only certain parameters of the task. To modify a GSM data deletion task, youmust be a user in the administrator group. If the execution of a GSM data deletion task iscomplete, you cannot modify the task.

7.5 Modifying the Task of Backing Up DataThis describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of backing updata.

7.6 Setting the Suspend or Resume Time of a Timing Task

NastarOperator Guide 7 GSM Centralized Task Management


7-1

You can set an automatic suspend time or an automatic resume time for a timing task. In thissituation, the Nastar automatically suspends the task or resumes the task.

7.7 Viewing Timing TasksThrough the Nastar function of viewing timing tasks, you can view the status of all timing tasksin a centralized manner. This helps you adjust the concerned timing tasks according to actualconditions.

7.8 Reference for the GSM Centralized Task Management GUIThis describes the interface for the GSM centralized task management and related informationsuch as the parameters used in the centralized task management. This help you understand thefunctions of the GSM centralized task management.

7 GSM Centralized Task ManagementNastar

Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


7.1.1 Types of Timing TasksThe Nastar divides timing tasks into different types according to execution periods and taskfeatures.

7.1.2 System Timing TasksThe system timing task is created during the installation or upgrade of the Nastar system. Userdbuser is the Creator of the system timing task.

7.1.3 User Timing TaskA user timing task is a customized task that is created to maintain a network.

7.1.4 Task Scheduling ParametersThe task scheduling parameters are the parameters related to the task execution type, consistingof task start time, task execution period, and execution times.

7.1.5 States of a Timing TaskA timing task has four states: idle, running, suspended, and finished.

7.1.6 Customizing the Interface for Managing Timing TasksThis describes how to customize the interface for managing timing tasks. The system can displaytiming tasks of the specified function type in the navigation tree or display the timing tasks thatmeet the conditions in the task list.


Tasks Divided According to Execution PeriodAccording to the execution periods of tasks, the Nastar divides the managed timing tasks intotwo types: one-time task and periodic task. Table 7-1 describes the meanings of two task types.

Table 7-1 Tasks divided according to execution period

Task Type Description

One-time task A task is performed only once at a specific time.

Periodic task A task is performed periodically after a specific time.

Tasks Divided According to Task FeaturesAccording to different task features, the Nastar divides the managed tasks into two types: systemtiming tasks and user timing tasks. Table 7-2 describes the meanings of each task type.



7-3

Table 7-2 Tasks Divided According to Task Features


System Timing Tasks System timing tasks are necessary for the Nastar system torun properly. For details, see 7.1.2 System Timing Tasks.

User Timing Tasks User timing tasks are the user-defined tasks that are createdto meet the requirement of network maintenance. Fordetails, see 7.1.3 User Timing Task.


The Nastar uses to indicate system timing tasks.

NOTE

l Users in the administrator group and users in the operator group can browse system scheduled tasks.No user groups can manage system scheduled tasks.

l The system timing tasks cannot be copied or deleted. Only some parameters of the system timingtasks can be modified.


l You can create, modify, delete, copy, suspend, and resume user timing tasks.

l The Nastar uses to indicate the user timing tasks.


Table 7-3 describes the task scheduling parameters.

Table 7-3 Description of the task description parameters


Task Type According to different task execution periods, the Nastar divides theexecution types of the managed timing tasks into two types: periodicexecution and one-time execution. The execution type of the systemtiming tasks is periodic execution. The execution type of the otheruser timing tasks can be periodic execution or one-time execution.

Task start time Indicates start time of periodic tasks and one-time tasks set duringtask creation, including date and time. The start time of tasks shouldbe later than the current server time.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


Period l Interval between periodic tasks. It has two enlistments: unit andduration.

l The task execution period can be represented by month, week, day,and hour.

l The period interval range is as follows: 1 to 12 for month, 1 to 52for week, 1 to 366 for day, 1 to 8784 for hour.

Run Times Indicates execution times of a periodic task. The execution timesrange from 0 to 65535. The value 0 indicates no limit.

For example, if the scheduling parameters of the data collection task are:l Execution type = Periodicityl Start time = 2006-10-21 09:07:28l Execution period = 1 dayl Period execution times = 0Infer that the system starts to carry out the data collection task every day from 2006-10-2109:07:28.


The states of a timing task change with different operations. For details, see Figure 7-1.

Figure 7-1 State transition of a timing task



7-5

State transition of a timing task is as follows:

l A timing task is in the idle state after it is initially created.

l An idle task is changed to the running state after being scheduled.

l An idle task is changed to the suspended state after being suspended.

l A running task is changed to the idle state after being cancelled.

l A suspended task is changed to the idle state after being resumed.

l If a task need not be scheduled after being performed, it is in the finished state. If it needsto be scheduled again, it returns to the idle state.

When a timing task is in the idle, suspended, or finished state, you can delete the timing task.



Procedure

Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management, the Task Management window is displayed.

Step 2 Perform different operations according to different customized requirement.

Customized Requirement Operation

Customize the navigation tree. 1. Right-click in the navigation tree and choose FilterType from the shortcut menu. The Filter Type dialogbox is displayed.

2. Select the timing task type to be displayed. By default,all the timing task types that the current user is authorizedto browse are displayed.

Customize the task list 1. Right-click the task list and select Filter Task. The TaskFilter Setting dialog box is displayed.

2. Set the User Name, Category, Task State, and LastRun Result as the filtering conditions. For detailedparameter description, refer to 7.8.2 Parameter forSetting Task Filter Conditions.

Step 3 Click OK.

----End


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

7.2 Creating a GSM User-Defined Timing TaskThe Nastar allows you to create GSM timing tasks. Thus, you can create GSM timing tasks bysetting common parameters and extended parameters based on the requirements of networkmaintenance.

ContextIf you need to ... the initial installation

version is ...Then ...

l Creating a Task ofImporting GSMPerformance Data,

l Creating a Task ofImporting GSMConfiguration Data,

l Creating a Task ofImporting GSM UplinkARFCN Scanning,

l Creating a Task ofImporting GSMMeasurement-Task Data,

V600R002SPC120 or a laterversion

You need not create this taskmanually. This task is alreadylisted in the system tasks.

A version earlier thanV600R002SPC120

You need to create this taskmanually.

Creating a Task of ImportingGSM EngineeringParameters,

- You need to create this taskmanually.

7.2.1 Creating a Data Collection TaskA data collection task is performed to collect the performance data, configuration data. andinterference data of the M2000 to certain path on the Nastar at the preset time. When you createan E2E task on the Nastar, the Nastar will automatically create a data collection task. When youcreate an E2E task on the M2000, you need to manually create a data collection task on theNastar accordingly.

7.2.2 Creating a Task of Importing GSM Performance DataA task of importing GSM performance data is performed to import data from the performancedata file in the specified directory on the server to the database at the preset time.

7.2.3 Creating a Task of Importing GSM Configuration DataA task of importing GSM configuration data is performed to import data from the configurationdata file in the specified directory on the server to the database at the preset time.

7.2.4 Creating a Task of Importing GSM Uplink ARFCN Scanning DataA task of importing GSM uplink ARFCN scanning data is performed to import data from theuplink ARFCN scanning data file in the specified directory on the server to the database at thepreset time.

7.2.5 Creating a Task of Importing GSM Measurement-Task Data



7-7

A task of importing GSM measurement-task data is performed to import data from themeasurement-task data file in the specified directory on the server to the database at the presettime.

7.2.6 Creating a Task of Importing GSM Engineering ParametersA task of importing GSM engineering parameters is performed to import data from theengineering parameter file in the specified directory on the server to the database at the presettime.

7.2.1 Creating a Data Collection TaskA data collection task is performed to collect the performance data, configuration data. andinterference data of the M2000 to certain path on the Nastar at the preset time. When you createan E2E task on the Nastar, the Nastar will automatically create a data collection task. When youcreate an E2E task on the M2000, you need to manually create a data collection task on theNastar accordingly.


l The required performance data, configuration data, and interference data are available onthe EMS.

l The file path for saving the collected data is provided.

Contextl A CDMA data collection task is a user-defined timing task.

l A data collection task can be executed once or periodically. The options of the executionperiod are Minute, Hour, Day, Week, and Month.

l Table 7-4 describes the mapping between the Nastar topic functions and the types of datato be collected.

Table 7-4 Mapping between the Nastar topic functions and the types of data to be collected

Nastar Topic Function Type of Data to Be Collected

GSM MR analysis task Configuration data and performance data

GSM neighboring cell analysis task Configuration data, performance data, andneighboring cell measurement task files

GSM uplink interference analysistask

Configuration data and uplink frequency scanningdata

GSM frequency analysis task Configuration data and performance data

CDMA co-frequency neighboringcell analysis task

Configuration data

CDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis task

Configuration data

CDMA uplink-interference-spectrum analysis task

Configuration data


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Nastar Topic Function Type of Data to Be Collected

CDMA VIP KPI analysis task Configuration data

CDMA complaint assistantanalysis task

Configuration data

UMTS uplink interference analysistask

Configuration data

UMTS co-frequency neighboringcell analysis task

Configuration data

UMTS coverage analysis task Configuration data

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management. The Task Management window is displayed.

Step 2 Click New. The New Task dialog box is displayed.TIP

Choose Task Type > Data Collection from the navigation tree and double-click Data Collection. TheNew Task dialog box is displayed. The Task Type is set to Data Collection by default.

Step 3 Set the basic information about the task.

1. Type the name of the task in Task Name.

2. Select the data collection task from Task Type.

3. Select Once or Period in the Run Type area.

Step 4 Click Next to set the execution time.

1. Click . In the displayed Date/Time Selection dialog box, set the start time.You can also set the start time by editing the Start Time area.

NOTE

l Start Time must be later than the current server time.

l If Run Type is set to Once, the Start Time parameter is invalid after you select Run AtOnce. In addition, the task is performed immediately after the settings are complete.

2. Perform operations based on Run Type.

l If Run Type is set to Once, perform Step 5.

l If Run Type is set to Period, perform Step 5 after you set Period and Run Times.

– Configuration data: It is recommended that configuration data is collected once eachday.

– GSM performance data: Collect GSM performance data is collected once each halfhour or each hour based on the traffic statistics period.

– GSM neighboring cell measurement task files: It is recommended that GSMneighboring cell measurement task files are collected once each day.

– GSM uplink frequency scanning data: It is recommended that GSM uplink frequencyscanning data is collected once each hour.



7-9

Step 5 Click Next. Then, set parameters such as OSS and Data Type.

If ... Then ... It indicates that ...

Any of the followingconditions is met:l M2000V2R6 is selected

from the OSS drop-downlist box and Config data isselected from the Datatype drop-down list box

l M2000V2R8,M2000V2R9 orM2000V2R10is selectedfrom the OSS drop-downlist box and Config data,NeighboringMeasurement Task File,or Frqlog Data is selectedfrom the Data type drop-down list box

Select one or multiple OSSsin the navigation tree.

The related data of all theNEs in the selected OSS areperiodically collected to aspecified path on the Nastar.

Select one or multiple NEobject nodes under certainOSSs in the navigation tree.

The related data of theselected NEs is periodicallycollected to a specified pathon the Nastar.

M2000V2R8,M2000V2R9or M2000V2R10is selectedfrom the OSS drop-down listbox and Config data,Performance data,Neighboring MeasurementTask File or Frqlog Data isselected from the Data typedrop-down list box.

Select one or multiple OSSsin the navigation tree.

The related data of all theNEs in the selected OSS areperiodically collected to aspecified path on the Nastar.

Select one or multiple NEobject nodes under certainOSSs in the navigation tree.

The related data of theselected NEs is periodicallycollected to a specified pathon the Nastar.

Select Specify the timerange and set Start time andEnd time.

The related data isperiodically collected withinthe specified period orcollected once from theM2000 to a specified path onthe Nastar.

M2000V2R6, M2000V2R8,M2000V2R9 orM2000V2R10 is selectedfrom the OSS drop-down listbox and Any is selected fromthe Data type drop-down listbox.

Set the path for saving fileson the M2000 and the Nastarand set the file name.

The Nastar can access aspecified file path on theM2000 and collect the relateddata to a specified path on theNastar.

Select Get files repeatedly. All the related data arecollected from the M2000 tothe Nastar each time during aperiodic collection task.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

If ... Then ... It indicates that ...

Select Get files all over. The Nastar traverses all thefiles under the subdirectoriesin the path where theconfigured source data issaved and collects the data.

Step 6 Click Finish.The new task is displayed in the task list.

----End

Postrequisitel Deleting a task

If required, you can delete created tasks to save system resources.NOTE

l You can delete only the tasks that are created by yourself. If you are a user in the administrator group,you can delete all the user-defined tasks.

l System tasks cannot be deleted.

l Running tasks cannot be deleted.

1. Choose Task Type from the navigation tree in the right pane of the TaskManagement window.

2. Select one or more timing tasks from the task list in the right pane.3. Click Delete.4. In the Confirm dialog box, click Yes.

Then, the task is deleted from the task list.l Suspending a task

To delay the execution of a task, you can suspend a timing task that is in the idle state.


2. You can manually or automatically suspend a task that is in the idle state:– Suspending a task manually

Select one or more timing tasks that are in the idle state from the task list in theright pane. Right-click and choose Suspend. In the Confirm dialog box, clickYes.

– Suspending a task automaticallySelect a timing task to be suspended from the task list in the right pane. Right-clickand choose Timely Suspend/Resume. In the Timely Suspend/Resume dialogbox, select Suspend Time and set its value. Click OK.To set the time for automatically suspending a task, see 7.8.13 Parameters forSetting the Time of a Timing Task.

l Resuming a taskYou can resume a suspended task to the idle state. Then, the task can be scheduled by thesystem.



7-11

NOTE

Only the tasks that are in the idle state can be scheduled by the system.


2. You can manually or automatically resume a task that is in the suspended state:– Resuming a task manually

Select one or more timing tasks that are in the suspended state from the task list inthe right pane. Right-click and choose Resume. In the Confirm dialog box, clickYes.

– Resuming a task automaticallySelect a timing task to be resumed from the task list in the right pane. Right-clickand choose Timely Suspend/Resume. In the Timely Suspend/Resume dialogbox, select Resume Time and set its value. Click OK.To set the time for automatically resuming a task, see 7.8.13 Parameters forSetting the Time of a Timing Task.

l Canceling a taskYou can cancel a running task. After a task is canceled, its state is changed fromRunning to Idle.

NOTE

You can cancel only the tasks that are created by yourself. If you are a user in the administrator group,you can cancel all the user-defined timing tasks.


2. Select one or more running tasks from the task list in the right pane. Right-click andchoose Cancel.

3. In the Confirm dialog box, click Yes.Then, the task state is changed from Running to Idle.

l Viewing a logYou can view the system log related to a collection task. For details, see 5.3.1 QueryingSystem Logs.

7.2.2 Creating a Task of Importing GSM Performance DataA task of importing GSM performance data is performed to import data from the performancedata file in the specified directory on the server to the database at the preset time.


l The ItmService process of the Nastar runs normally.

l The NastarDataImportService process of the Nastar runs normally.

l The GSM performance data is collected to the Nastar server.

Contextl A task of importing GSM performance data is a user-defined timing task.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

l The task can be executed only periodically. The options of the execution period are Hour,Day, Week, and Month.

l The system allows you to create only one user-defined timing task of this type.

l The task of importing GSM performance data can be performed only after the related datacollection task is complete. Otherwise, the integrity of the imported data may be affected.

l The formats of files to be imported vary according to collection mode.– If Data Type of a collection task is set to Any, the files in .zip format can be imported.

– If Data Type of a collection task is set to a type other than Any, the files in .gz formatcan be imported.

Procedure



You can choose Task Type > Import GSM Data from the navigation tree and then double-click ImportGSM Performance Data. The New Task dialog box is displayed. The Task Type parameter is set toImport GSM Performance Data by default.

Step 3 Set the basic information about the task.1. Type the name of the task in Task Name.2. Select the task of importing performance data from Task Type.



NOTE

Start Time must be later than the current server time.

2. Set Period and Run Times.

Step 5 Click Complete.The new task is displayed in the task list.

----End


If required, you can delete created tasks to save system resources.

NOTE




1. Choose Task Type from the navigation tree in the left pane of the TaskManagement window.

2. Select the timing task from the task list in the right pane.



7-13

3. Click Delete.

4. In the Confirm dialog box, click Yes.

Then, the task is deleted from the task list.

l Suspending a task



2. You can manually or automatically suspend a task that is in the idle state:

– Suspending a task manually

Select the timing task that is in the idle state from the task list in the right pane.Right-click and choose Suspend. In the Confirm dialog box, click Yes.

– Suspending a task automatically

Select a timing task to be suspended from the task list in the right pane. Right-clickand choose Timely Suspend/Resume. In the Timely Suspend/Resume dialogbox, select Suspend Time and set its value. Click OK.

To set the time for automatically suspending a task, see 7.8.13 Parameters forSetting the Time of a Timing Task.

l Resuming a task

You can resume a suspended task to the idle state. Then, the task can be scheduled by thesystem.

NOTE



2. You can manually or automatically resume a task that is in the suspended state:

– Resuming a task manually

Select the timing task that is in the suspended state from the task list in the rightpane. Right-click and choose Resume. In the Confirm dialog box, click Yes.

– Resuming a task automatically

Select a timing task to be resumed from the task list in the right pane. Right-clickand choose Timely Suspend/Resume. In the Timely Suspend/Resume dialogbox, select Resume Time and set its value. Click OK.

To set the time for automatically resuming a task, see 7.8.13 Parameters forSetting the Time of a Timing Task.

l Canceling a task

You can cancel a running task. After a task is canceled, its state is changed fromRunning to Idle.

NOTE




Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

2. Select the running task from the task list in the right pane. Right-click and chooseCancel.


l Viewing a logYou can view the system log related to an import task. For details, see 5.3.1 QueryingSystem Logs.

7.2.3 Creating a Task of Importing GSM Configuration DataA task of importing GSM configuration data is performed to import data from the configurationdata file in the specified directory on the server to the database at the preset time.




l The GSM configuration data is collected to the Nastar server.

Contextl A task of importing GSM configuration data is a user-defined timing task.

l The task can be executed only periodically. The options of the execution period areHour, Day, Week, and Month.


Procedure



You can choose Task Type > Import GSM Data from the navigation tree and then double-click ImportGSM CFG Data. The New Task dialog box is displayed. The Task Type parameter is set to Import GSMCFG Data by default.

Step 3 Set the basic information about the task.1. Type the name of the task in Task Name.2. From Task Type, select the task of importing configuration data.



NOTE



Step 5 Click Finish.



7-15

The new task is displayed in the task list.

----End



NOTE





2. Select the timing task from the task list in the right pane.3. Click Delete.4. In the Confirm dialog box, click Yes.








NOTE






Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



NOTE






7.2.4 Creating a Task of Importing GSM Uplink ARFCN ScanningData

A task of importing GSM uplink ARFCN scanning data is performed to import data from theuplink ARFCN scanning data file in the specified directory on the server to the database at thepreset time.




l The GSM uplink ARFCN scanning data is collected to the Nastar server.

Contextl A task of importing GSM uplink ARFCN scanning data is a user-defined timing task.



Procedure




7-17


You can choose Task Type > Import GSM Data from the navigation tree and then double-click ImportGSM Uplink Interference Analysis Data. The New Task dialog box is displayed. The Task Typeparameter is set to Import GSM Uplink Interference Analysis Data by default.

Step 3 Set the basic information about the task.1. Type the name of the task in Task Name.2. From Task Type, select the task of importing the uplink ARFCN scanning data.



NOTE




----End



NOTE













Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



l Resuming a task


NOTE









l Canceling a task


NOTE





Then, the task state is changed from Running to Idle.

l Viewing a log

You can view the system log related to an import task. For details, see 5.3.1 QueryingSystem Logs.

7.2.5 Creating a Task of Importing GSM Measurement-Task DataA task of importing GSM measurement-task data is performed to import data from themeasurement-task data file in the specified directory on the server to the database at the presettime.



7-19




l The GSM measurement-task data is collected to the Nastar server.

Contextl A task of importing GSM measurement-task data is a user-defined timing task.



Procedure



You can choose Task Type > Import GSM Data from the navigation tree and then double-click ImportGSM Measurement Task File for Neighbor Cell. The New Task dialog box is displayed. The TaskType parameter is set to Import GSM Measurement Task File for Neighbor Cell by default.

Step 3 Set the basic information about the task.1. Type the name of the task in Task Name.2. Select the task of importing measurement-task data from Task Type.



NOTE




----End



NOTE





Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)










NOTE







NOTE




7-21





l Viewing a log


7.2.6 Creating a Task of Importing GSM Engineering ParametersA task of importing GSM engineering parameters is performed to import data from theengineering parameter file in the specified directory on the server to the database at the presettime.




l The GSM engineering parameters are collected to the Nastar server.

Contextl A task of importing GSM engineering parameters is a user-defined timing task.



Procedure



Choose Task Type > GSM Data Import > GSM Engineering Parameter Import from the navigationtree. Double-click the node, the New Task dialog box is displayed. The Task Type parameter is set toGSM Engineering Parameter Import by default.

Step 3 Set the information about the task.

1. Enter the name of timing task in Task Name.

2. Select the task of importing performance data from Task Type.

Step 4 Click Next to set the time.



Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

NOTE




----End

Postrequisitel Delete a task.

You can delete created tasks to save the system resources.

NOTE

l Each user can delete only the tasks that are created by him. If you are a user in the administrator group,you can delete all the user-defined tasks.




2. Select a periodic task from the task list in the right part of the window.3. Click Delete.4. In the Confirm dialog box, click Yes.

Then the task is deleted from the task list.l Suspend a task.



2. You can manually or automatically suspend a task that is in the idle state:– Suspend a task manually.

Select an existing timing tasks that are in the idle state from the task list in the rightpane. Right-click the task and choose Suspend. In the Confirm dialog box, clickYes.

– Suspend a task automatically.Select a timing task to be suspended from the task list in the right pane. Right-clickand choose Timely Suspend/Resume. In the Timely Suspend/Resume dialogbox, select Suspend Time and set its value. Click OK.To set the time for automatically suspending a task, see 7.8.13 Parameters forSetting the Time of a Timing Task.

l Resume a task.You can restore a suspended task to wait for the dispatching. Then the status of the task ischanged to idle.

NOTE

Only idle tasks can wait to be used.



7-23


2. You can manually or automatically resume a task that is in the suspended state:– Resume a task manually.

Select an existing timing tasks that are in the suspended state from the task list inthe right pane. Right-click the task and choose Resume. In the Confirm dialogbox, click Yes.

– Resume a task automatically.Select a timing task to be resumed from the task list in the right pane. Right-clickthe task and choose Timely Suspend/Resume. In the Timely Suspend/Resumedialog box, select Resume Time and set its value. Click OK.To set the time for automatically resuming a task, see 7.8.13 Parameters forSetting the Time of a Timing Task.

l Cancel a task.You can cancel a running task. The task status is changed to idle after being cancelled.

NOTE



2. Select an existing running task in the task list in the right pane. Right-click the taskand choose Cancel.


l View a log.You can view the system log related to an import task. For details, see 5.3.1 QueryingSystem Logs.

7.3 Modifying a GSM User-Defined Timing TaskThe Nastar allows you to modify certain parameters of a GSM user-defined timing task. If theexecution of a GSM user-defined timing task is complete, you cannot modify the task.

7.3.1 Modifying a Data Collection TaskThis describes how to modify certain information about a data collection task.

7.3.2 Modifying a Task of Importing GSM Performance DataThis describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing GSM performancedata.

7.3.3 Modifying a Task of Importing GSM Configuration DataThis describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing GSM configurationdata.

7.3.4 Modifying a Task of Importing GSM Uplink ARFCN Scanning DataThis describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing GSM uplink ARFCNscanning data.

7.3.5 Modifying a Task of Importing GSM Measurement-Task File Data


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

This describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing GSM measurement-task file data.

7.3.6 Modifying a Task of Importing GSM Engineering ParametersThis section describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing GSMengineering parameters.

7.3.1 Modifying a Data Collection TaskThis describes how to modify certain information about a data collection task.


l A data collection task is created.

Contextl A data collection task is a user-defined timing task.

l A data collection task can be executed once or periodically. The options of the executionperiod are Minute, Hour, Day, Week, and Month.

Procedure


Step 2 Choose Task Type > Data Collection > Data Collection from the navigation tree on the left.

Step 3 Double-click the task or click Attribute. The Attribute dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Set relevant attributes on the Common Parameters and Extended Parameters tab pages.

NOTE


Step 5 Click OK.You can browse the latest information about the task in the task list.

NOTE

If the task is running, the modification takes effect at the next execution.

----End

7.3.2 Modifying a Task of Importing GSM Performance DataThis describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing GSM performancedata.


l A task of importing GSM configuration data is created.



7-25

Contextl A task of importing GSM performance data is a user-defined timing task.


Procedure


Step 2 Choose Task Type > Import GSM Data > Import GSM Performance Data from thenavigation tree on the left.


Step 4 Set relevant attributes on the Common Parameters tab page.

NOTE

The default names of system tasks are used. The system task name cannot be changed.


NOTE


----End

7.3.3 Modifying a Task of Importing GSM Configuration DataThis describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing GSM configurationdata.


l A task of importing GSM configuration data is created.

Contextl A task of importing GSM configuration data is a user-defined timing task.


Procedure


Step 2 Choose Task Type > Import GSM Data > Import GSM CFG Data from the navigation treeon the left.


Step 4 Set relevant attributes again on the Common Parameters tab page.

Step 5 Click OK.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

You can browse the latest information about the task in the task list.

NOTE


----End

7.3.4 Modifying a Task of Importing GSM Uplink ARFCNScanning Data

This describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing GSM uplink ARFCNscanning data.


l A task of importing GSM uplink ARFCN scanning data is created.

Contextl A task of importing GSM uplink ARFCN scanning data is a user-defined timing task.


Procedure


Step 2 Choose Task Type > Import GSM Data > Import GSM Uplink Interference AnalysisData from the navigation tree on the left.



NOTE



NOTE


----End

7.3.5 Modifying a Task of Importing GSM Measurement-Task FileData

This describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing GSM measurement-task file data.



7-27


l A task of importing GSM measurement-task file data is created.

Contextl A task of importing GSM measurement-task data is a user-defined timing task.


Procedure


Step 2 Choose Task Type > Import GSM Data > Import GSM Measurement Task File forNeighbor Cell from the navigation tree on the left.



NOTE



NOTE


----End

7.3.6 Modifying a Task of Importing GSM Engineering ParametersThis section describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing GSMengineering parameters.


l A task of importing GSM engineering parameters is created.

Contextl A task of importing GSM engineering parameters is a user-defined timing task.


Procedure


Step 2 Choose Task Type > GSM Data Import > GSM Engineering Parameter Import from thenavigation tree on the left.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Step 3 Double-click or click Attribute to view the Attribute dialog box.


Step 5 Click OK.You can browse the newest task information in the task list.

NOTE

If the task is running, the modified data takes effect at the next execution.

----End

7.4 Modifying a GSM Data Deletion TaskThis describes how to modify a GSM data deletion task. If data is periodically imported to theNastar database, the database resources may be insufficient. By performing the GSM datadeletion task, the Nastar can delete the data whose storage duration has expired from the databaseat the preset time to save system resources. A GSM data deletion task is a system timing task.You can modify only certain parameters of the task. To modify a GSM data deletion task, youmust be a user in the administrator group. If the execution of a GSM data deletion task iscomplete, you cannot modify the task.

7.4.1 Modifying the Task of Deleting GSM History DataThis describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of deleting GSMhistory data.

7.4.2 Modifying the Task of Deleting GSM Performance DataThis describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of deleting GSMperformance data.

7.4.3 Modifying the Task of Deleting GSM Configuration DataThis describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of deleting GSMconfiguration data.

7.4.4 Modifying a Task of Deleting GSM Uplink ARFCN Scanning DataThis describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of deleting GSMuplink ARFCN scanning data.

7.4.5 Modifying a Task of Deleting GSM Measurement-Task File DataThis describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of deleting GSMmeasurement-task file data.



l You are a member of the Administrators user group.



7-29

Contextl The task of deleting GSM history data is a system timing task. It can be executed only

periodically.

l You can modify the following parameters of the task: Start Time, Execution Period, andThe data files will be reserved in the server.

l Deleting history data refers to deleting the data files that are collected to certain file pathon the Nastar server.

Procedure


Step 2 Choose Task Type > Data Collection > Old Data Deletion from the navigation tree on the left.



NOTE



NOTE


----End

7.4.2 Modifying the Task of Deleting GSM Performance DataThis describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of deleting GSMperformance data.



Contextl The task of deleting GSM performance data is a system timing task. It can be executed only

periodically.

l You can modify the following parameters of the task: Start Time, Period, and DataReserve Days.

l Deleting performance data refers to deleting the performance data collected to theNASTAR server.

Procedure



Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Step 2 Choose Task Type > Delete GSM Data > GSM Performance Data Maintenance from thenavigation tree on the left.




NOTE


----End

7.4.3 Modifying the Task of Deleting GSM Configuration DataThis describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of deleting GSMconfiguration data.



Contextl The task of deleting GSM configuration data is a system timing task. It can be executed

only periodically.


l Deleting configuration data refers to deleting the configuration data collected to theNASTAR server.

Procedure


Step 2 Choose Task Type > Delete GSM Data > GSM CFG Data Maintenance from the navigationtree on the left.




NOTE


----End



7-31

7.4.4 Modifying a Task of Deleting GSM Uplink ARFCN ScanningData

This describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of deleting GSMuplink ARFCN scanning data.



Contextl The task of deleting uplink ARFCN scanning data is a system timing task. It can be executed

only periodically.


l Deleting scanning data of the uplink frequencies refers to deleting the scanning data of theuplink frequencies collected to the NASTAR server.

Procedure


Step 2 Choose Task Type > Delete GSM Data > GSM Uplink Interference Analysis DataMaintenance from the navigation tree on the left.




NOTE


----End

7.4.5 Modifying a Task of Deleting GSM Measurement-Task FileData

This describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of deleting GSMmeasurement-task file data.




Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Contextl The task of deleting GSM measurement-task file data is a system timing task. It can be

executed only periodically.l You can modify the following parameters of the task: Start Time, Period, and Data

Reserve Days.l Deleting data of neighboring measurement tasks refers to deleting the data of neighboring

measurement tasks collected to the NASTAR server.

Procedure


Step 2 Choose Task Type > Delete GSM Data > GSM Measurement Task File for Neighbor CellMaintenance from the navigation tree on the left.




NOTE


----End




Contextl The task of backing up data is a system timing task. It can be executed only periodically.

l You can modify the following parameters of the task: Start Time, Execution Period, FullBackup Time, Backup Mode, and Backup Path.

l Periodic backup refers to perform full backup on certain day within the period, and performincremental backup at other time. The Nastar services are not disrupted when you back updata.

Procedure


Step 2 Choose Task Type > Data Backup > Data Backup from the navigation tree on the left.



7-33



NOTE



NOTE


----End

7.6 Setting the Suspend or Resume Time of a Timing TaskYou can set an automatic suspend time or an automatic resume time for a timing task. In thissituation, the Nastar automatically suspends the task or resumes the task.


l At least one suspended or idle timing task exists.

Contextl The system suspends an idle task and delay the time for using this task. If the timing task

is not in the idle state at the specified time, it fails to be suspended.

l In the specified time, the system resumes a suspended task and then the task is in the idlestatus and wait to be dispatched. If the timing task is not in the idle state at the specifiedtime, it fails to be suspended.

l You are not allowed to set auto-suspend or auto-resume a running timing task.

Procedure


Step 2 In the navigation tree, select the task type of which you plan to suspend/restore.

Step 3 Select a task in the task list in the right pane. Right-click the task and select Suspend/Restore

Step 4 In the Timing Suspend/Resume dialog box, select Suspend Time or Resume Time as required.

Step 5 Set the suspend time or resume time.For details of setting an automatic suspend time or an automatic restore time, refer to 7.8.13Parameters for Setting the Time of a Timing Task.

----End


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


7.7.1 Browsing the Information of Timing TasksThe Nastar offers the integrated task browsing function, which allows the authorized users tobrowse tasks.


l At least one timing task exists.

Contextl Common users (non-administrator users) can browse all the user tasks and system tasks

but cannot create and modify system tasks.l The administrator can browse all tasks.

Procedure


Step 2 Select Task Type in the navigation tree.l In the task list, all the tasks are displayed.

l If you want to view the common parameters and extended parameters of each task, go toStep 3

Step 3 Double click a task, or select a task and click Attribute.The Attribute dialog box is displayed. In the Common Parameter tab and ExtendedParameter tab, you can view the task details.

NOTE

l If State of a task is Finished, you can view the task information only.

l If State of a task is Idle, Suspend, or Running, you can modify the task details in the Attribute dialog box.

----End

7.7.2 Checking the Task ProgressYou can view the progress of all the sub-tasks of a specific task.





7-35

ProcedureStep 1 Choose Maintenance > Task Management. The Task Management window is displayed.

Step 2 In the navigation tree, select the task whose progress you want to view. In the Progress columnof the task list on the right, you can view the task execution information.

----End

7.7.3 Checking the Task ExecutionYou can view the last execution results of a timing task.



Contextl During the creation of CME tasks, sub-tasks are created, which are executed in different

phases.l You can browse the execution progress of subtasks of CME tasks.


Step 2 Select Task Type in the navigation tree.l View the execution conditions in the Prev Execution Result column in the task list in the

right pane.l You can check the result details in the Result Info area.

----End

7.8 Reference for the GSM Centralized Task ManagementGUI

This describes the interface for the GSM centralized task management and related informationsuch as the parameters used in the centralized task management. This help you understand thefunctions of the GSM centralized task management.

7.8.1 Interface Description: Centralized Task ManagementThis part describes the Task Management interface and relevant parameters, which helps youperform the related operations.

7.8.2 Parameter for Setting Task Filter ConditionsThis section describes the parameters in the Task Filter Setting dialog box. When you set filterconditions for a task list, you can refer to this section.

7.8.3 Parameter for Setting Common Parameters for Timing TasksThis section describes the parameters on the Common Parameters tab on property panels ofall timing tasks. When you modify a timing task, you can refer to this section.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

7.8.4 Parameter for Setting the Time of a Common Periodic TaskThis section describes the time parameters in the New Task dialog box. When you set the timeof a periodic task, you can refer to this section.

7.8.5 Parameter for Setting the Time of a Common One-Time TaskThis section describes the time parameter in the New Task dialog box. When you modify thetime of a one-time task, you can refer to this section.

7.8.6 Parameters for Creating or Modifying a Data Collection TaskThis describes the parameters related to data collection tasks. You can refer to the descriptionwhen creating or modifying data collection tasks.

7.8.7 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting History DataThis describes the parameters related to the task of deleting history data. You can refer to thedescription when modifying the task of deleting history data.

7.8.8 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting GSM Performance DataThis describes the parameters related to the task of deleting GSM performance data. You canrefer to the description when modifying the task of deleting GSM performance data.

7.8.9 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting GSM Configuration DataThis describes the parameters related to the task of deleting GSM configuration data. You canrefer to the description when modifying the task of deleting GSM configuration data.

7.8.10 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting the GSM Uplink ARFCN Scanning DataThis describes the parameters related to the task of deleting the GSM uplink ARFCN scanningdata. You can refer to the description when modifying the task of deleting the GSM uplinkARFCN scanning data.

7.8.11 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting the GSM Measurement-Task File DataThis describes the parameters related to the task of deleting the GSM measurement-task filedata. You can refer to the description when modifying a task of deleting the GSM measurement-task file data.

7.8.12 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Backing Up DataThis describes the parameters related to the task of backing up data. You can refer to thedescription when modifying the task of backing up data.

7.8.13 Parameters for Setting the Time of a Timing TaskThis section describes the parameters of auto-suspend time and auto-resume time for timingtasks.


After you log in to the server, the Task Management interface is displayed, as shown in Figure7-2. Table 7-5 describes each element displayed in Figure 7-2.



7-37

Figure 7-2 Integrated Task Management interface

Table 7-5 Description of the Integrated Task Management interface


(1) Navigation tree You can precisely locate a timing taskthrough the navigation tree.

(2) Task result informationpanel

After a task is carried out, the task result isdisplayed. On the task result informationpanel, you can browse the result of the tasklast carried out. Only the result of thecurrently selected task is displayed on thetask result information panel. If multipletasks are selected in the task list, only theresult of the firstly selected task isdisplayed.

(3) Button panel The buttons used for carrying outintegrated task management are availableon the button panel.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


(4) Task list You can browse the timing tasks that existon the server side and the detailedinformation. In the task list, different colorsare used for indicate different states of tasks(gray: complete; orange: suspended; blue:active; white: idle). The selected color ofthe task is darker than the previous color ofthe task.


Parameters


UserName

Current User Description:Indicates the user that operates the client.

Other Users Description:Indicates other users except the current user.

Category

User Task Description:Indicates the task created by users.

System Task Description:Indicates the task created by OMC during the system installationor upgrade.

State Idle Description:Indicates that the task waits for being performed by the system.

Running Description:Indicates that the task is being performed by the system.

Suspend Description:The task is not ready to be scheduled.

Finished Description:Indicates that the task is completed by the system.

LastRunResult

Success Description:Indicates that the task is successfully carried out.

Processing Description:Indicates that the task is being processed by the system.



7-39


PartlySuccess

Description:Indicates that the task is partly successfully carried out.

Failed Description:Indicates that the task fails to carry out.

Miss RunTime

Description:Indicates that the task misses the previous performed time. If theserver is not running properly or the task is suspended before theexecution, the task may miss the previous execution.

Unknown Description:Indicates that the previous execution result in the server is lostcaused by improper service or sudden power cut. Thus, afterrecovery, the previous execution result cannot be determined.


ParametersParameter Description Value Range

Task Name Description:Refers to the name of a timing task

Value:l A maximum of 60

charactersl Allowed characters:

English letters,numbers, -, and _


l Case sensitive

Run Type Once Description:If you select this option, thesystem runs the created task onceat the defined time point.

-

Period Description:If you select this option, thesystem runs the created taskperiodically.

-


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Parameter Description Value Range

Start Time Description:This parameter sets the time forstarting a task. The start timeshould be later than the timedisplayed on the server.

Value:If you have selected RunAt Once, the StartTime parameter isinvalid. The task isperformed immediatelyafter the related settingsare complete.

Period Description:Interval between periodic tasks. Ithas two enlistments: unit andduration.

Value:l Tasks can be executed

in hours and days.l The valid values for

periods are as follows:Day (1 to 366), Hour(1 to 366 x 24)

Run Times Description:This parameter indicates the timesthat a periodic task is executed.

Value:0-65535


ParametersParameter Description Settings

TimeSetting

Start Time Description:Time range of a periodictask.

Setting method:You can set this parameterwith the following twomethods:l Enter the time in Start

Time.

l Click to select thedate and time in theDate/Time Selectiondialog box.



7-41


PeriodSetting

Period Description:Interval of periodic tasks.The value consists ofnumerals and units.

Value:l The period can be

represented in either ofthe following units:months, weeks, days,hours.

l The value range forperiod should be asfollows: Month (1 -12), Week (1 - 52), Day(1 - 366), Hour (1 - 366x 24).

Run Times Description:Number of times forexecuting periodic tasks

Value:0 - 65535NOTE

0 indicates that the numberof times for executingperiodic tasks is notrestricted.


Parameters


Time Setting Description:Time range of a one-timetask.

Setting method:You can set the time with the following twomethods:l Enter the time in Start Time.

l Click to select the date and time in theDate/Time Selection dialog box.

NOTEIf the Run At Once check box is selected, the taskis performed immediately after you set theparameters.

7.8.6 Parameters for Creating or Modifying a Data Collection TaskThis describes the parameters related to data collection tasks. You can refer to the descriptionwhen creating or modifying data collection tasks.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Parameter DescriptionParameter Value Range Description

OSS Select a parametervalue from the drop-down list box.

Indicates the name of an EMS.

Data Type Select an option fromthe drop-down list box.The options vary withthe OSS version. Fordetails, see thefollowing description:l The data types

corresponding to theOSS of theM2000V2R6 areConfig data andAny.

l The data typescorresponding to theOSS of theM2000V2R8,M2000V2R9 andM2000V2R10 areConfig data,NeighboringMeasurement TaskFile, Frqlog Data,Performance data,Any, and AdaptionLayer Data.

Indicates the type of the data that is collected fromthe EMS to the Nastar.

Period Select a parametervalue from the drop-down list box. Theoptions are 5 Minutes,15 Minutes, 30Minutes, 60 Minutes,24 Hours.

Period for collecting data. For example, if you setthe value to 5 Minutes, the Nastar collectsperformance data from the EMS at intervals of fiveminutes.

Specify thetime range

You can select or notselect the option.

Indicates whether to collect data during thespecified time period.

Start Time - Indicates the start time of the data collection period.

End Time - Indicates the end time of the data collection period.

Sourcedirectory

- Indicates the path for storing files in the EMS.

Source file - Indicates the name of the file to be collected fromthe EMS.



7-43

Parameter Value Range Description

Destinationdirectory

- Indicates the path for storing files on the Nastar.

Thefollowingfiles will becollectedfrom ***

- Indicates that the system collects the Sourcedirectory/Source file from the selected OSS.*** indicates the name of the OSS.

And save tothe serverpath

- Indicates that the collected file are stored in$DATAROOT/oss_folder name containing thestart time of a period/Destination directory/Source file on the Nastar server.

Get filesrepeatedly


Indicates that all the data in the M2000 is collectedto the Nastar each time when a periodic datacollection task is performed.

Get files allover


Indicates whether to traverse the files insubdirectories of the configured source data path.If this option is not selected, it indicates that the filesare not traversed.


Parameter DescriptionParameter Range Description

Config Data An integer from1 to 100Unit: day

Indicates the storage duration of the configuration datafiles in the relevant path on the Nastar server.The configuration data is limited to the GSM, CDMA,UMTS, and TD-SCDMA networks.

Performance Data

An integer from1 to 100Unit: day

Indicates the storage duration of the performance data filesin the relevant path on the Nastar server.The performance data is limited to the GSM network, andthe data related to all the analysis tasks of the CDMA,UMTS, and TD-SCDMA networks.

NeighborMeasurement Task File


Indicates the storage duration of the neighbormeasurement task files in the relevant file path on theNastar server.The neighbor measurement task files are limited to theGSM network.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Parameter Range Description

Frqlog Data An integer from1 to 100Unit: day

Indicates the storage duration of the files containing theuplink ARFCN scanning data in the relevant file path onthe Nastar server.The uplink ARFCN scanning data is limited to the GSMnetwork.

Other TypeData


Indicates the storage duration of the other type data files inthe relevant path on the Nastar server.

7.8.8 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting GSMPerformance Data

This describes the parameters related to the task of deleting GSM performance data. You canrefer to the description when modifying the task of deleting GSM performance data.


DataReserveDays

7, 15, 30, 45, 60,90, 180Unit: day

Assume that N refers to the preset Data Reserve Days. Allthe performance data N days ago is deleted from thedatabase. The latest date when the data needs to be deletedis calculated according to the save time of the latest dataamong all the performance data in the database.For example, among all the performance data in thedatabase, if the save time of the latest data is 2009-03-31,and Data Reserve Days is set to 7, the system deletes allthe performance data saved before 2009-03-24 from thedatabase.

7.8.9 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting GSMConfiguration Data

This describes the parameters related to the task of deleting GSM configuration data. You canrefer to the description when modifying the task of deleting GSM configuration data.



7-45


DataReserveDays

7, 15, 30, 45, 60,90, 180Unit: day

Assume that N refers to the preset Data Reserve Days. Allthe configuration data N days ago is deleted from thedatabase. The latest date when the data needs to be deletedis calculated according to the save time of the latest dataamong all the configuration data in the database.For example, among all the configuration data in thedatabase, if the save time of the latest data is 2009-03-31,and Data Reserve Days is set to 100, the system deletesall the configuration data saved before 2008-12-22 fromthe database.

7.8.10 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting the GSMUplink ARFCN Scanning Data

This describes the parameters related to the task of deleting the GSM uplink ARFCN scanningdata. You can refer to the description when modifying the task of deleting the GSM uplinkARFCN scanning data.


DataReserveDays

7, 15, 30, 45, 60,90, 180Unit: day

Assume that N refers to the preset Data Reserve Days. Thescanning data of all the uplink frequencies N days ago isdeleted from the database. The latest date when the dataneeds to be deleted is calculated according to the save timeof the latest data among the scanning data of all the uplinkfrequencies in the database.For example, among the scanning data of all the uplinkfrequencies in the database, if the save time of the latestdata is 2009-03-31, and Data Reserve Days is set to 7, thesystem deletes all the scanning data of uplink frequenciessaved before 2009-03-24 from the database.

7.8.11 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting the GSMMeasurement-Task File Data

This describes the parameters related to the task of deleting the GSM measurement-task filedata. You can refer to the description when modifying a task of deleting the GSM measurement-task file data.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


DataReserveDays

7, 15, 30, 45, 60,90, 180Unit: day

Assume that N refers to the preset Data Reserve Days. Thedata of all the measurement task files N days ago is deletedfrom the database. The latest date when the data needs tobe deleted is calculated according to the save time of thelatest data among the data of all the measurement task filesin the database.For example, among the data of all the measurement taskfiles in the database, if the save time of the latest data is2009-03-31, and Data Reserve Days is set to 7, the systemdeletes the data of all the measurement task files savedbefore 2009-03-24 from the database.



Full BackupTime

SUN, MON,TUE, WED,THU, FRI, SAT

Indicates the date when data backup is performed.

BackupMode

ALL, INC Indicates the mode of the data backup.

BackupPath

- Indicates the save path of backup files. By default, the pathis /export/home/backup.


Table 7-6 lists the parameters of auto-suspend time and auto-resume time for timing tasks.



7-47

Table 7-6 Time parameters of a timing task


Suspend Time Description:The system suspends an idle taskand delay the time for performingthis task. If the timing task is notin the idle state at the specifiedtime, the suspension fails.

Setting method:You can set the value manually.Alternatively, you can click and select the time from the timeselect panel.The default time format is DD/MM/YYYY HH:MM:SS.l yyyy stands for the year.

l MM stands for the month.

l DD stands for the date.

l HH stands for the hour.

l MM stands for the minute.

l SS stands for the second.

Resume Time Description:In the specified time, the systemresumes a suspended task andthen the task is in the idle statusand wait to be dispatched. If thetiming task is not in the idle stateat the specified time, thesuspension fails.

Setting method:For details on how to set theresume time, refer to thedescription of the Suspend Timeparameter.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

8 GSM MR Analysis

About This Chapter

This describes the GSM MR analysis. The GSM analysis supports the management of MRanalysis tasks, check of the MR overview report, check of the cell MR results, and comparisonbetween MR analysis results. In addition, the GSM MR analysis supports the direct display ofradio link information, provides analysis of and solutions to problems, and helps you to fastlocate the relevant problems on the radio network.

8.1 Basic Knowledge of GSM MR AnalysisThis describes the basic knowledge of the GSM measurement report (MR) analysis, such as theGSM MR analysis functions, function application scenarios, TopN counters, and types of MRtopic analysis. The basic knowledge helps you to perform the operations of GSM MR analysis.

8.2 Process of GSM MR AnalysisThis describes the process of GSM MR analysis.

8.3 Managing GSM MR Analysis TasksThis describes how to manage the GSM MR analysis tasks. You can create, modify, delete,suspend, and resume GSM MR analysis tasks. You can also view the status and executionprogress of a task.

8.4 Querying the GSM MR Overview ReportThis describes how to query the report of the GSM MR overview. You can query the relevantMR reports as required. An MR report includes the following information about themeasurement cell: uplink and downlink levels, quality, timing advance (TA), and link balance.You can know the transceiver (TRX) or cell coverage, quality, and user distribution directlyfrom the information in the report. The GSM MR reports are classified into GBSC reports, GSMcell group reports, TopN TRX reports, and GSM MR topic analysis reports.

8.5 Querying the MR Results of GSM CellsThis describes how to query the MR results of one or more GSM cells. If the MR results indicatethat certain cells have multiple TopN or problematic TRXs, you can query the details about theTopN or problematic TRXs in the MR results.

8.6 Comparing the GSM MR Analysis ResultsThis describes how to compare the results of the GSM MR analysis. After the networkoptimization and device upgrade, you can compare two MR analysis results generated in twotime segments to check the differences between the values of the same counters in the two time

NastarOperator Guide 8 GSM MR Analysis


8-1

segments. Thus, you can ascertain the detailed network performance differences in the two timesegments and quickly evaluate the network optimization results.

8.7 Reference for the GSM MR Analysis GUIThis describes the interface for GSM MR analysis and the relevant parameters. Beforeperforming relevant operations, familiarize yourself with GSM MR analysis functions.

8 GSM MR AnalysisNastar

Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

8.1 Basic Knowledge of GSM MR AnalysisThis describes the basic knowledge of the GSM measurement report (MR) analysis, such as theGSM MR analysis functions, function application scenarios, TopN counters, and types of MRtopic analysis. The basic knowledge helps you to perform the operations of GSM MR analysis.

8.1.1 GSM MR Analysis FunctionThis describes the GSM MR analysis function. The GSM MR includes the following informationabout the measurement cell: uplink and downlink levels, uplink and downlink quality, timingadvance (TA) distribution, and link balance information. You can know the TRX and cellcoverage, quality, and user distribution directly from the information. The processing and directdisplaying of the radio link information by the system can help you to solve many networkproblems.

8.1.2 TopN KPIsThis describes TopN KPIs related to the performance analysis. The KPIs include average qualityof the received signals at uplink and downlink (full rate), average quality of the received signalsat uplink and downlink (half rate), average levels received at uplink and downlink (full rate),average levels received at uplink and downlink (half rate), timing advance (TA) averagedistribution, and uplink and downlink balance.

8.1.3 GSM MR TopicsThis describes GSM MR topic analysis types such as the analysis of the uplink interference,downlink interference, uplink poor coverage, downlink poor coverage, TRX poor coverage,remote coverage, uplink imbalance , downlink imbalance, and other problems. This alsodescribes the solution to these problems.

8.1.1 GSM MR Analysis FunctionThis describes the GSM MR analysis function. The GSM MR includes the following informationabout the measurement cell: uplink and downlink levels, uplink and downlink quality, timingadvance (TA) distribution, and link balance information. You can know the TRX and cellcoverage, quality, and user distribution directly from the information. The processing and directdisplaying of the radio link information by the system can help you to solve many networkproblems.

MR Overview Report

An MR overview report contains the following information: an overview of the radio networkperformance, the distribution of TopN TRXs and problematic TRXs of each BSC and cell group,the TopN TRX for which the value of each radio link counter is the lowest, and the classificationof the problematic TRXs based on topic analysis.

You can view the overview report routinely generated to check the information about the TopNTRXs and problematic TRXs of each BSC, each cell group, and the entire network, and checkthe causes of the problematic TRXs. You can also check whether other problematic TRXs existin the cell that the selected TopN TRX or problematic TRX belongs to and analyze these TRXs.

The problem analysis topics are as follows:l Weak coverage analysis. TRXs with a low TA value, low level, and poor quality are listed.

l Interfered cells. Cells with high level and poor quality are listed.



8-3

l Over coverage analysis. You can compare the TA values and the number of MRs to analyzethe traffic distribution and check whether the cell is a over-coverage cell.

l Unbalance of the uplink and downlink. The cells whose uplink and downlink are obviouslyunbalanced are listed.

l Other problems. Problems occurring on the network, such as small number of MRs andnull or low traffic of a TRX, are listed.

The analysis results can be displayed in a table or a bar chart to provide the radio link quality,level, traffic distance distribution, and link balance. Analysis of the problems and recommendedsolutions are provided to help you to quickly analyze and locate the quality problems that occurin the radio network.

MR QueryDuring network performance analysis and optimization, when abnormal cells (such as a cellwhose call drop rate is high or the number of failed handover attempts is great) are found, youcan query the MR information about these cells and the radio links of the TRXs in the cellsthrough the Nastar performance analysis system.

You can set the time and cell objects before the query. The MR information about these cells isdisplayed in the window of results. In addition, you can use the Nastar performance analysissystem to further query the TRX information. Through the comparison and query of differentTRXs in cells, you can locate more complicated network problems effectively.

The query results are displayed in a table or a bar chart to provide the radio link quality and userdistribution of each TRX.

MR Comparison AnalysisAfter network upgrade and optimization such as the adjustment of antennas and modificationof parameter settings, you can compare the quality and coverage of the entire network, BSC,cell group, or cell with the quality and coverage obtained before the network upgrade andoptimization, or you can compare the quality and coverage of different time segments duringthe network upgrade and optimization.

The comparison results are displayed in a table or a bar chart.

8.1.2 TopN KPIsThis describes TopN KPIs related to the performance analysis. The KPIs include average qualityof the received signals at uplink and downlink (full rate), average quality of the received signalsat uplink and downlink (half rate), average levels received at uplink and downlink (full rate),average levels received at uplink and downlink (half rate), timing advance (TA) averagedistribution, and uplink and downlink balance.

Received Signal QualityThe quality of received signals is divided into eight levels from level 0 to level 7 according tothe bit error rate. Each level corresponds to different bit error rates. Higher level indicates thepoorer quality of the received signals. Level 0 indicates the minimum bit error rate and the bestquality of the received signals. Level 7 indicates the maximum bit error rate and the poorestquality of the received signal.

Table 8-1 describes the relation between the quality levels of the received signals and the biterror rate.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Table 8-1 Relation between the quality levels of the received signals and bit error rate.

QualityLevel ofReceivedSignals

Bit Error Rate ( %)

0 <0.2 %

1 0.2 %~0.4 %

2 0.4 %~0.8 %

3 0.8 %~1.6 %

4 1.6 %~3.2 %

5

6 6.4 %~12.8 %

7 >12.8 %

Received LevelThe received signal level is divided into eight levels according to level values. Each levelcorresponds to different ranges of received levels. Higher level indicates the higher receivedlevel. Level 0 indicates the lowest received level and level 7 indicates the highest received level.

Table 8-2 describes the relation between the received levels and the levels.

Table 8-2 Relation between the received levels and levels

Level ofReceivedLevel

Received Level (dBm)

0 <-100

1 (-100, -95]

2 (-95, -90]

3 (-90, -85]

4 (-85, -80]

5 (-80, -75]

6 (-75, -70]

7 >-70



8-5

TAThe TA is a counter used to describe the distance with time and is used for the coverage analysis.The header of the MR sent from a mobile station (MS) to a BTS is carried with the measurementdelay of the MS. The BTS must monitor the time when a call reaches and send an instruction tothe MS every 480 ms on the downlink channel to specify the advanced sending time for the MS.This time is termed TA, ranging from 1 to 63.

Uplink and Downlink BalanceThe MR received by the BSC contains the uplink receive level and downlink receive level. Theresult (in dB), which is obtained by subtracting the uplink receive level and the sensitivitydifference between the MS and the BTS from the downlink receive level, is classified into 11levels from level 1 to level 11. Table 8-3 describes the relations between levels and values ofthe Uplink and Downlink Balance Level counter.

Table 8-3 Description of link balance levels

Uplink andDownlinkBalanceLevel

Downlink Receive Level- Uplink Receive Level- 6 (dB)

1 ≤-15

2 -14, -13, -12, -11, -10

3 -9, -8, -7, -6

4 -5, -4, -3

5 -2, -1

6 0

7 1, 2

8 3, 4, 5

9 6, 7, 8, 9

10 10, 11, 12, 13, 14

11 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20

NOTE

The number 6 in the formula "Downlink receive level - Uplink receive level - 6 (dB)" refers to the sensitivitydifference between the MS and the BTS.

If the statistical result indicates that the uplink and downlink are mostly in balance level 1, thedownlink loss is excessively high or the downlink transmit power is excessively low. If thestatistical result indicates that the uplink and downlink are mostly in balance level 11, the uplinkloss is excessively high or the downlink transmit power is excessively low. According to thestatistical result, you can locate the faults that occur on the transmit and receive channels, suchas the TRX or antenna feeder.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

8.1.3 GSM MR TopicsThis describes GSM MR topic analysis types such as the analysis of the uplink interference,downlink interference, uplink poor coverage, downlink poor coverage, TRX poor coverage,remote coverage, uplink imbalance , downlink imbalance, and other problems. This alsodescribes the solution to these problems.

The GSM MR topics are classified into nine categories. The system provides different operationsuggestions for each category. For details, see Table 8-4.

Table 8-4 Topic categories and relevant operation suggestions

Topic Description Suggestion

Uplinkinterference

The uplink-interferenceresults in the high leveland poor quality.

Change the ARFCN and check whether radiointerference sources exist in the coverage area.After the ARFCN is changed, enable the functionof uplink-interference analysis to analyze theinterference according to the uplink frequencydistribution that is measured by TRXs.

Downlinkinterference

The downlink interferenceresults in the high leveland poor quality.

Change the ARFCN and check whether radiointerference sources exist in the coverage area.After the ARFCN is changed, use an MS to searchfor frequencies within the cell coverage where theTRX is transmitted, and observe the downlinkfrequency status.

Weakuplinkcoverage

The loss of the uplinkTRX is excessive.

Check the cable connections between the combinerand the TRX, and connections in the antennasystem. Ensure that the cable connections areproper and secure, and then locate the fault bychanging the cable ports, combiner, and TRX.

Weakdownlinkcoverage

The loss of the downlinkTRX is excessive.

Move an MS to a place near the TRX to measurethe actual power of the TRX. Check whether thedownlink level of the TRX is low. If the downlinklevel of the TRX is low, check the cableconnections between the combiner and the TRX,and connections in the antenna system. Then,check the level at the TRX entry and output entryof the combiner by using the power meter to locatethe fault.

WeakTRXcoverage

l The loss of the TRX isexcessive.

l The TRX coverage isremote, which causesthe low quality of theuplink.

l The TRX coverage isremote, which causesthe low quality of thedownlink.

l Check the cable connections between thecombiner and the TRX, and connections in theantenna system. Ensure that the cableconnections are proper and secure, and thenlocate the fault by changing the cable ports,combiner, and TRX.

l Check whether the actual azimuth of the antennais the same as the antenna azimuth in design. Ifthe antenna is omni-directional, check whetherthe coverage is excessively large.



8-7


Remotecoverage

l Remote TRX coverage

l The TRX coverage isremote, which causesthe low quality of theuplink and downlink.

l Check whether there are missing neighboringcells and cells whose coverage is remote.


upLinkimbalance

l Uplink and downlinkare not balanced. Thedownlink is stronger.

l The excessive loss ofthe uplink results in thelow received level andpoor signal quality ofthe BTS.

l Check whether the coverage complies with theplanning and whether the output power of theTRX and CDU is normal. You can adjust theuplink received threshold and the level of thedownlink static power to balance the uplink anddownlink.


downLinkimbalance

l Uplink and downlinkare not balanced, andthe uplink is stronger.

l The excessive loss ofthe downlink results inthe low received leveland poor signal qualityof the MS.

l Check whether the coverage complies with theplanning and whether the output power of theTRX and CDU is normal. You can adjust thethreshold of the receive power and the level ofthe static power on the uplink to balance theuplink and downlink.

l Move an MS to a place near the TRX to checkthe actual power of the TRX and check whetherthe downlink level of the TRX is low. If thedownlink level of the TRX is low, check thecable connections between the combiner and theTRX and connections in the antenna system, andcheck the level at the TRX entry and output entryof the combiner by using the power meter tolocate the fault.

Others l The performance of theTRX receive level isabnormal.

l The number of MRs isexcessively small.

Check whether the hardware or software of theTRX is faulty and whether only a small number ofMRs is reported. In addition, analyze whether thegeneration of a small number of MRs is proper.

8.2 Process of GSM MR AnalysisThis describes the process of GSM MR analysis.

Figure 8-1 shows the general process of GSM MR analysis.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Figure 8-1 Process of GSM MR analysis

Create an MR analysis task

End

Query the GSM MR overview report

Query the MR results of the GSM cells

Compare the GSM MR analysis results

Start

Create an E2E task

Table 8-5 describes the process of GSM MR analysis.

Table 8-5 Process of GSM MR analysis

Serial No.


1 Querying NEData

In the Analysis Task Management window on the Nastarclient, you can enter the data query window to query whether theraw data required for the VIP analysis is imported to thedatabase.

2 Create an end-to-end taskcorrespondingto aneighboring cellanalysis task

You can choose Maintenance > E2E Task Management onthe Nastar client to open the E2E Task Management window,and then create an end-to-end task corresponding to aneighboring cell analysis task. After the task is created, theNastar issues MML commands to M2000, and then M2000issues the received MML commands to the corresponding NE tostart the measurement task for all objects.NOTE

Starting the measurement task for all objects needs to be performed onlyonce. If this operation has been performed, you do not need to create anend-to-end task corresponding to a neighboring cell task again.

When you create an E2E task, the Nastar will automaticallycreate a data collection task.



8-9

Serial No.


3 Create an MRanalysis task

You can create an MR analysis task in the Analysis TaskManagement window of the main interface on the Nastar client.After the task is created, the Nastar periodically obtains therequired performance data from the Nastar database, and thengenerates an analysis report through the analysis.

4 l Query theGSM MRoverviewreport

l Query theMR results ofthe GSMcells

l Compare theGSM MRanalysisresults

You can view the analysis results of the MR analysis tasks thatare successfully performed and compare the results generated indifferent time segments.

8.3 Managing GSM MR Analysis TasksThis describes how to manage the GSM MR analysis tasks. You can create, modify, delete,suspend, and resume GSM MR analysis tasks. You can also view the status and executionprogress of a task.

8.3.1 Creating a GSM E2E TaskThis describes how to create an end-to-end (E2E) task. After you set an E2E task in the Nastar,the Nastar issues MML commands to the M2000. The M2000 then sends these MML commandsto the corresponding NEs. Finally, the NEs perform the measurement tasks and generate results.

8.3.2 Creating a GSM MR Analysis TaskThis describes how to create a GSM MR analysis task. By performing MR analysis tasks, theNastar performance analysis system analyzes the relevant data in the database at the preset time.By checking the analysis results, you can ascertain the network status and fast locate and solvethe network faults.

8.3.3 Modifying a GSM MR Analysis TaskYou can modify the attributes of a GSM MR analysis task to meet the new requirement.

8.3.4 Checking a GSM MR Analysis TaskThis describes how to check a GSM MR analysis task. You can check the attributes, executionprogress, and execution results of a GSM MR analysis task.



Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


l The OSS and NEs related to analysis tasks are created.

l The configuration data related to the analysis tasks is imported to the Nastar database.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Maintenance > E2E Task Management. The E2E Task Management window isdisplayed.

Step 2 Click New.... The New Task dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Perform the following operations as required.

If ... Then ...

You want to create a neighboring cell measurement task Perform Step 4.

You want to create a GSM uplink interference data task Perform Step 5.

Step 4 Perform the following operations to create a neighboring GSM cell measurement task.

1. Set the basic information about the task.

a. In Task Name, type the name of the neighboring cell measurement task.

b. From the OSS Name drop-down list box, select the OSS that is related to the E2Etask.

c. In E2E Task List, select GSM Neighbouring Cell Task.

2. Click Next. On the Measure Task tab page, set the time, objects, and frequency of theneighboring cell measurement task.

3. Set Persist Time (Minute), Period, and Measure Step.

l Persist Time (Minute) indicates the total duration that the measurement task isperformed.

l Period indicates the interval at which each group of frequencies is measured.

l Measure Step indicates the number of frequencies in a group.

4. From the object navigation tree, select the cell related to the task.The system enables you to search for the objects in the navigation tree. You can right-clickin the navigation area and then press Ctrl+F to display the Find dialog box. Type thekeywords, that is, the search condition, in the dialog box. Then, the system searches for theobjects that meet the search condition.

You can select Case sensitive to ensure that the typed keywords are case sensitive.

You can select Up or Down in the Direction area to define the search area.

5. Set the frequency.



8-11

NOTE

Before setting the frequency, set Measure Step. The frequencies that you select are organized intogroups according to Measure Step that you set. For example, if Measure Step is set to 2 and thefrequencies 59, 60, and 61 are selected, the frequencies are organized into two groups. One groupconsists of frequencies 59 and 60, and the other group consists of frequency 61.In a measurement period, the M2000 measures these frequency groups in turn. After setting thefrequency is complete, you can also modify the value of Measure Step to reorganize the frequencies.

6. Optional: Set the soft parameters of the neighboring cell measurement task.

a. Click the Soft Parameter tab.b. Select Soft Parameter Setting.

If you select this option, the soft parameters that you set are valid for only thismeasurement task.

c. Set the thresholds of the soft parameters as required.For the description of the soft parameters, see 8.7.2 Parameters for Creating GSME2E Tasks.

7. Click Complete.The new neighboring cell measurement task is displayed in the task list.

Step 5 Perform the following operations to create a GSM uplink frequency scanning task.1. Set the basic information about the task.

a. In Task Name, type the name of the uplink frequency scanning task.b. From the OSS Name drop-down list box, select the OSS that is related to the E2E

task.c. In E2E Task List, select GSM Uplink Interference Data Task.

2. Click Next to set Time (Minute), that is, the total duration that the measurement task isperformed.

3. In the Cell Parameter Setting area, select the cell and frequency band to be measured.

a. From the BSC Type drop-down list box, select the BSC type.b. From the Frequency Segment drop-down list box, select the frequency band that the

cell uses.c. From the object navigation tree, select the cell related to the task.

The system enables you to search for the objects in the navigation tree. You can right-click in the navigation area and then press Ctrl+F to display the Find dialog box.Type the keywords, that is, the search condition, in the dialog box. Then, the systemsearches for the objects that meet the search condition.You can select Case sensitive to ensure that the typed keywords are case sensitive.You can select Up or Down in the Direction area to define the search area.

4. In the Frequency Parameter Setting area, select the frequency to be measured.

a. From the Frequency Type drop-down list, select the required frequency type.b. When Frequency Typeis set to User Defined in The Frequency Segment, you need

to select a frequency from the frequency list. The selected frequencies are coloredyellow.

5. Click Complete.The new uplink frequency scanning task is displayed in the task list.

----End


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

PostrequisiteTo view the attributes of a created E2E task, perform the following operations:

1. From the task list in the right pane of the E2E Task Management window, select a taskrecord, and then click Attribute. The Attribute dialog box is displayed.

2. View relevant parameters.

To delete an unnecessary E2E task that is not running, perform the following operations:

1. In E2E Task Management, select a task record, and then click Delete.2. In the displayed Confirm dialog box, click Yes.

The attributes of a created E2E task cannot be modified. If you want to change certain parametervalues, you need to delete the original task and then create another one.

To update the task list, click Refresh in the lower-right corner of the E2E Task Managementwindow.

8.3.2 Creating a GSM MR Analysis TaskThis describes how to create a GSM MR analysis task. By performing MR analysis tasks, theNastar performance analysis system analyzes the relevant data in the database at the preset time.By checking the analysis results, you can ascertain the network status and fast locate and solvethe network faults.


l The import task is created and the data required for data analysis is imported in the Nastardatabase.

Contextl An MR analysis task can be performed once or periodically. You can set the execution

period of a periodical task to days.l The system supports a maximum of 50 tasks of this type. The time range of the data to be

analyzed cannot exceed 15 days.

Procedure

Step 1 Click in the Analysis Task Management window. The Analysis Task Management-NewTask dialog box is displayed.

Step 2 Set the basic task information such as Task Name, Task Type, Execution Type, and Note.

Step 3 Click Next.

Step 4 Set Analysis Task Management-New Task.

If ... Then ...

Once Task is selected in Step 2, you need to set only Time Setting for Once Task Data.



8-13

If ... Then ...

Cycle Task is selected in Step 2, you need to set Task Configuration and Time Setting forCycle Task Data.

Step 5 Click Next.

Step 6 Select one or multiple objects in the object navigation tree on the NE Object Selection tab page.l Choose BSC or Cell Group above the navigation tree to display the objects in the navigation

tree as required.l The system enables you to search for the objects in the navigation tree. You can click any

point of the navigation tree and then press Ctrl+F to display the Find dialog box. Type thekeywords, that is, the search condition, in the dialog box. Then, the system searches for thequery result that meets the search condition.– You can select Case sensitive to ensure that the keywords you typed are case sensitive.

– You can select Up or Down in the Direction area to define the search area.

Step 7 Set MR-related parameters on the Parameter Setting tab page.

Step 8 Click Complete.

----End


You can delete an MR analysis task that is not required so that you can save systemresources.

NOTE

The tasks in the Running state cannot be deleted.

1. Choose GSM MR Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis TaskManagement window.If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performanceanalysis tasks.

2. Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane, and then click .3. Click Yes in the displayed Confirm dialog box.

l Suspending a taskTo delay the task execution, you can suspend an MR analysis task that is in the Idle state.After this operation, the MR analysis task is in the suspended state.

NOTE

The system can schedule only the MR analysis tasks that are not suspended.


2. Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane, and then click .


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Only the tasks whose Status is Idle can be suspended. Otherwise, the button isunavailable.

l Resuming a taskYou can resume a suspended MR analysis task to the idle state. Then, the task can bescheduled by the system.

NOTE

Only the MR analysis tasks that are in the idle state can be scheduled by the system.


2. Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane, and then click .The task can be performed only when its Status is Suspend. If the task is not in thesuspended state, the button is unavailable.

8.3.3 Modifying a GSM MR Analysis TaskYou can modify the attributes of a GSM MR analysis task to meet the new requirement.


l A GSM MR analysis task is created.

ContextYou are not allowed to modify the parameters of the task whose Status is Running orComplete. You can only view the information about the task.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose GSM MR Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis TaskManagement window.If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysistasks.

Step 2 Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane. Double-click the task or click . TheAnalysis Task Management-Modify Task Information dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Modify the relevant parameter settings.l For details about the parameters, see 8.7.3 Parameters for Creating and Modifying GSM

MR Analysis Tasks.l For periodical tasks, you can modify the Note parameter in the basic information, the Begin

Date, Cycle, Execution Times, and Time parameters in the time information, theinformation about the navigation tree of objects, and the Parameter Setting for ExceptionalTRXs in the Case of MR Topic Analysis parameter.

l For the tasks that can be performed only once, you can modify the Note parameter in thebasic information, the Data Time Scope and Task Start At parameters in the time



8-15

information, the information about the navigation tree of objects, and the Parameter Settingfor Exceptional TRXs in the Case of MR Topic Analysis parameter.


----End

8.3.4 Checking a GSM MR Analysis TaskThis describes how to check a GSM MR analysis task. You can check the attributes, executionprogress, and execution results of a GSM MR analysis task.


l A GSM MR analysis task is created.

Procedure

Step 1 Click the GSM MR Analysis Task node from the navigation tree in the Analysis TaskManagement window.If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysistasks.



Check the attributes of an MR analysistask.

Select a task from the task list in the upper-right

pane. Double-click the task or click .

You can view the attributes of the selected taskand modify the relevant parameter settings. Fordetailed operations, see 8.3.3 Modifying aGSM MR Analysis Task.

Check the execution progress of a task. Select a task from the task list in the upper-rightpane. Then, you can view the executionprogress of the task in the Progress column.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


Check the task execution results. Select a task from the task list in the upper-rightpane. Then, you can view the results of theprevious execution of the selected task in theLast Running Result column.

You can check the results of the performedtasks in the result list in the lower-right pane.You can check the GSM MR overview reportand GSM cell MR results, and compare theGSM MR analysis results.NOTE

In the result list, if the result information about tasksthat fail to be executed at a certain period alreadyexists in the database, you can right-click the results,and then choose Analyze Result Again from theshortcut menu to analyze the results of this periodagain. Only the results of tasks that fail to be executedare analyzed again.

----End

Postrequisitel In the drop-down list boxes above the task list, you can set the filter conditions to filter the

tasks by the task status, task execution type, and task type. You can also type the keywordof a task name in the text box. Then, the system searches for the tasks by the keyword.

By clicking , you can restore the preset filtering conditions to the initial state, that is,all the task information is displayed.

l The system enables you to search for task information. You can click any line in the taskinformation list and then press Ctrl+F to display the Find dialog box. Type the keywords,that is, the search conditions, in the dialog box. Then, the system searches for the taskinformation that meets the search condition.You can select Case sensitive to ensure that the keywords you typed are case sensitive.You can select Up or Down in the Direction area to define the search area.

8.4 Querying the GSM MR Overview ReportThis describes how to query the report of the GSM MR overview. You can query the relevantMR reports as required. An MR report includes the following information about themeasurement cell: uplink and downlink levels, quality, timing advance (TA), and link balance.You can know the transceiver (TRX) or cell coverage, quality, and user distribution directlyfrom the information in the report. The GSM MR reports are classified into GBSC reports, GSMcell group reports, TopN TRX reports, and GSM MR topic analysis reports.

8.4.1 Querying the GBSC ReportThis describes how to query a GBSC report. You can query the distribution of TopN andproblematic TRXs on the entire network and the number of TRXs under each GBSC. You canalso query the TopN and problematic TRXs in each GBSC according to a certain radio linkcounter or analyze the problematic TRXs according to a topic.



8-17

8.4.2 Querying the GSM Cell Group ReportThis describes how to query the GSM cell group report. You can query the distribution of TopNand problematic TRXs on the entire network and the calculation result of all the TRXs undereach cell group. You can also query the TopN and problematic TRXs in each cell group accordingto certain radio link counter or analyze the problematic TRXs according to a topic.

8.4.3 Querying a GSM TopN TRX ReportThis describes how to query a GSM TopN TRX report. You can query the information about NTRXs (currently, N = 10) whose performance is the poorest as indicated by the selected counter.

8.4.4 Querying a GSM MR Topic Analysis ReportThis describes how to query a GSM MR topic analysis report. You can query the informationabout all the problematic TRXs that meet the requirements of certain MR topic.

8.4.1 Querying the GBSC ReportThis describes how to query a GBSC report. You can query the distribution of TopN andproblematic TRXs on the entire network and the number of TRXs under each GBSC. You canalso query the TopN and problematic TRXs in each GBSC according to a certain radio linkcounter or analyze the problematic TRXs according to a topic.


Procedure


Step 2 Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane.You can view all the analysis results of the selected task in the lower-right pane.

Step 3 Double-click a result, or right-click a result and choose MR Overview Report. The MROverview Report window is displayed.This operation can be performed only when Result Status of a task is Successful. Otherwise,the shortcut menu is unavailable.



Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Purpose Operation

Querying relevant information about theTopN and problematic TRXs on the entirenetwork

Choose BSC Overview Report from thenavigation tree in the MR Overview Reportwindow.

NOTE

l In Area (2), the system displays the number ofTopN and problematic TRXs in each GBSC on theentire network. In Area (3), the system displays thecalculation result of all the TRXs in each GBSC.In Area (4), the system displays the informationabout the selected item in Area (3) on a bar chart.

For the specific rules of dividing areas, see 8.7.1Interface Description: GSM MR Analysis.

l You can double-click the bar chart in Area (4) tozoom in the chart, and then double-click the chartagain to restore the chart to the original size.



8-19

Purpose Operation

Querying information about the TopNand problematic TRXs in a GBSC andanalyzing the problematic TRXsaccording to a topic

Choose BSC Overview Report > *** > ***from the navigation tree in the MR OverviewReport window.

The first *** indicates the GBSC name. AGBSC is named in the following format: NEname:NE ID. For example, BSC1:10. Thesecond *** indicates the counter name or topicname. A counter is named in the followingformat: counter name(number of problematicTRXs). A topic is named in the followingformat: topic name(number of problematicTRXs). For example, uplink interference(10).

NOTE

l If the number of TopN or problematic TRXs for acounter or topic is greater than that in the previousperiod, an upward arrow next to the correspondingcounter name or topic name in Area (1) is foundand the number of new TopN or problematic TRXsis displayed.

The information about the new TopN orproblematic TRXs is displayed in Area (2) and ishighlighted in yellow.

l If you select a counter node, Area (2) sorts all theTRXs in the selected GBSC according to thecounter. If you select a TopN TRX in Area (2), thefirst line in Area (3) displays the calculation resultof all the TRXs in the cell that the selected TopNTRX belongs to, and the other lines in Area (3)displays the information about each TRX in thecell. In Area (4), the system displays theinformation about the TRX selected in Area (3) ona bar chart.

l If you select a topic node, Area (2) lists all theproblematic TRXs that meets the requirements ofthe selected topic. If you select a problematic TRXin Area (2), the first line in Area (3) displays thecalculation result of all the TRXs in the cell thatthe selected problematic TRX belongs to, and theother lines in Area (3) displays the informationabout each TRX in the cell. In Area (4), the systemdisplays the information about the TRX selectedin Area (3) on a bar chart.




Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

For details about the relevant parameters, see 8.7.4 Parameters for Querying GBSCReports.

----End

Postrequisitel The system enables you to export the query results. Right-click the query result list and

choose Save As. After setting the save path and filename, click Save. Then, the query resultsare saved as a CSV or XLS file.

l To query chart properties, and save, print, and resize the chart in the chart area, performthe following operations:– Right-click the chart, and then choose Property from the shortcut menu. In the

displayed Chart Property dialog box, set the coordinate axes of and basic informationabout the chart.

– Right-click the chart, and then choose Save as from the shortcut menu. In the displayedSave dialog box, set the save path and file name, and then click Save to save the queriedchart as a file on the local PC.

– Right-click the chart, and then choose Print from the shortcut menu. In the displayedPage Setup dialog box, set print properties, and then click OK.

– If the chart is not clear due to an excessive number of dots, right-click the chart, andthen choose Zoom In > ***, Zoom Out > ***, or Auto Range > *** to adjust the sizeof the chart.Here, *** indicates a submenu item. It can be Both Axes, Horizontal Axis, or VerticalAxis, which indicates that you can adjust both axes, the horizontal axis, or the verticalaxis, respectively.

l The system enables you to search for the query results. You can click any line of the queryresult list and then press Ctrl+F to display the Find dialog box. Then, type the keywords,that is, the search conditions, in the dialog box. The system searches for the query resultthat meets the search condition.You can select Case sensitive to ensure that the keywords you typed are case sensitive.You can select Up or Down in the Direction area to define the search area.

8.4.2 Querying the GSM Cell Group ReportThis describes how to query the GSM cell group report. You can query the distribution of TopNand problematic TRXs on the entire network and the calculation result of all the TRXs undereach cell group. You can also query the TopN and problematic TRXs in each cell group accordingto certain radio link counter or analyze the problematic TRXs according to a topic.


Procedure




8-21




Purpose Operation

Querying relevant information about theTopN and problematic TRXs on the entirenetwork

Choose Cell Group Overview Report from thenavigation tree in the MR Overview Reportwindow.

NOTE

l In Area (2), the system displays the number ofTopN and problematic TRXs in each cell group onthe entire network. In Area (3), the system displaysthe calculation result of all the TRXs in each cellgroup. In Area (4), the system displays theinformation about the selected item in Area (3) ona bar chart.




Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Purpose Operation

Querying information about the TopNand problematic TRXs in a cell group andanalyzing the problematic TRXsaccording to a topic

Choose Cell Group Overview Report > *** >*** from the navigation tree in the MROverview Report window.

The first *** indicates the name of a cell group.A cell group is named in the following format:group name:group number. For example,Cell1:10. The second *** indicates the name ofa counter or topic. A counter is named in thefollowing format: counter name(number ofproblematic TRXs). A topic is named in thefollowing format: topic name(number ofproblematic TRXs). For example, uplinkinterference(10).

NOTE

l If the number of TopN or problematic TRXs for acounter or topic is greater than that in the previousperiod, an upward arrow next to the correspondingcounter name or topic name in Area (1) is foundand the number of new TopN or problematic TRXsis displayed.

The information about the new TopN orproblematic TRXs is displayed in Area (2) and ishighlighted in yellow.

l If you select a counter node, Area (2) sorts all theTRXs in the selected cell group according to thecounter. If you select a TopN TRX in Area (2), thefirst line in Area (3) displays the calculation resultof all the TRXs in the cell that the selected TopNTRX belongs to, and the other lines in Area (3)displays the information about each TRX in thecell. In Area (4), the system displays theinformation about the TRX selected in Area (3) ona bar chart.

l If you select a topic node, Area (2) lists all theproblematic TRXs that meet the requirements ofthe selected topic. If you select a problematic TRXin Area (2), the first line in Area (3) displays thecalculation result of all the TRXs in the cell thatthe selected problematic TRX belongs to, and theother lines in Area (3) displays the informationabout each TRX in the cell. In Area (4), the systemdisplays the information about the TRX selectedin Area (3) on a bar chart.





8-23

For details about the relevant parameters, see 8.7.5 Parameters for Querying the GSM CellGroup Reports.

----End









8.4.3 Querying a GSM TopN TRX ReportThis describes how to query a GSM TopN TRX report. You can query the information about NTRXs (currently, N = 10) whose performance is the poorest as indicated by the selected counter.


Procedure




Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


Step 4 Choose TopN > *** from the navigation tree in the MR Overview Report window.l Here, *** indicates a counter name. For example, Full-Rate Uplink Receive Level

Grade.l If the number of TopN TRXs for a TopN counter is greater than that in the previous period,

an upward arrow next to the corresponding TopN counter name in Area (1) is found and thenumber of increased TopN TRXs is displayed.The information about the increased TopN TRXs is displayed in Area (2) and is highlightedin yellow.

l Area (2) lists 10 TRXs whose performance is the poorest as indicated by the selected counter.If you select a TopN TRX in Area (2), the first line in Area (3) displays the calculation resultof all the TRXs in the cell which the selected TopN TRX belongs to, and the other lines inArea (3) displays the information about all the TRXs in the cell. In Area (4), the systemdisplays the information about the TRX selected in Area (3) on a bar chart.For the specific rules of dividing areas, see 8.7.1 Interface Description: GSM MRAnalysis.

l You can double-click the bar chart in Area (4) to zoom in the chart, and then double-clickthe chart again to restore the chart to the original size.

l For details about the relevant parameters, see 8.7.6 Parameters for Querying the GSMTopN TRX Reports.

----End








l The system enables you to search for the query results. You can click any line of the queryresult list and then press Ctrl+F to display the Find dialog box. Then, type the keywords,



8-25

that is, the search conditions, in the dialog box. The system searches for the query resultthat meets the search condition.

You can select Case sensitive to ensure that the keywords you typed are case sensitive.


8.4.4 Querying a GSM MR Topic Analysis ReportThis describes how to query a GSM MR topic analysis report. You can query the informationabout all the problematic TRXs that meet the requirements of certain MR topic.


Procedure




Step 4 Choose Topic > *** from the navigation tree in the MR Overview Report window.

l Here, *** indicates the name of an MR topic, for example, Uplink Weak Coverage.

l If the number of problematic TRXs for a topic is greater than that in the previous period, anupward arrow next to the corresponding topic name in Area (1) is found and the number ofincreased problematic TRXs is displayed.

The information about the increased problematic TRXs is displayed in Area (2) and ishighlighted in yellow.

l Area (2) lists the problematic TRXs meeting the requirements of the selected topic. If youselect a problematic TRX in Area (2), the first line in Area (3) displays the calculation resultof all the TRXs in the cell which the selected problematic TRX belongs to, and the otherlines in Area (3) displays the information about each TRX in the cell. In Area (4), the systemdisplays the information about the TRX selected in Area (3) on a bar chart.

For the specific rules of dividing areas, see 8.7.1 Interface Description: GSM MRAnalysis.


l For details about the relevant parameters, see 8.7.7 Parameters for Querying the GSM MRTopic Analysis Reports.

----End


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)









8.5 Querying the MR Results of GSM CellsThis describes how to query the MR results of one or more GSM cells. If the MR results indicatethat certain cells have multiple TopN or problematic TRXs, you can query the details about theTopN or problematic TRXs in the MR results.


Procedure



Step 3 Right-click a result and choose MR Query. The MR Query dialog box is displayed.



8-27

This operation can be performed only when Result Status of a task is Successful. Otherwise,the shortcut menu is unavailable.

Step 4 Select one or more cells to be queried.The system enables you to search for the objects in the navigation tree. You can right-click anypoint of the navigation tree and then press Ctrl+F to display the Find dialog box. Type thekeywords, that is, the search condition, in the dialog box. Then, the system searches for the queryresult that meets the search condition.



Step 5 Click OK. The MR Query Results dialog box is displayed.l In Area (8), the system displays the calculation result of all the TRXs in each cell. If you

select an item in Area (8), the system displays the information about each TRX in the cellthat the selected item belongs to in Area (9). In Area (10), the system displays the informationabout the TRX selected in Area (9) on a bar chart.For details about the rules for dividing areas, see 8.7.1 Interface Description: GSM MRAnalysis.


l For details about the parameters, see 8.7.8 Parameters for Querying the MR AnalysisResults of GSM Cells.

----End








l The system enables you to search for the query results. You can click any line of the queryresult list and then press Ctrl+F to display the Find dialog box. Then, type the keywords,that is, the search conditions, in the dialog box. The system searches for the query resultthat meets the search condition.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

You can select Case sensitive to ensure that the keywords you typed are case sensitive.You can select Up or Down in the Direction area to define the search area.

8.6 Comparing the GSM MR Analysis ResultsThis describes how to compare the results of the GSM MR analysis. After the networkoptimization and device upgrade, you can compare two MR analysis results generated in twotime segments to check the differences between the values of the same counters in the two timesegments. Thus, you can ascertain the detailed network performance differences in the two timesegments and quickly evaluate the network optimization results.


Procedure


Step 2 Select a period task from the task list in the upper-right pane.You can view all the analysis results of a selected task in the lower-right pane.

NOTE

The function of comparing the GSM MR analysis results supports only period task but does not supportonce task.

Step 3 Right-click two results and choose MR Comparison Analysis. The Object Selection dialogbox is displayed.This operation can be performed only when the Result Status of the task is Complete.Otherwise, the shortcut menu is unavailable.

Step 4 Select one or more objects.l If the current task is performed to analyze the cells under a BSC, you can select All, BSC,

or Cell above the navigation tree to sort the objects. If the current task is performed to analyzethe cells in a cell group, you can select All, Cell Group, or Cell above the navigation tree.

l The system enables you to search for the objects in the navigation tree. You can right-clickany point of the navigation tree and then press Ctrl+F to display the Find dialog box. Typethe keywords, that is, the search condition, in the dialog box. Then, the system searches forthe query result that meets the search condition.You can select Case sensitive to ensure that the keywords you typed are case sensitive.You can select Up or Down in the Direction area to define the search area.

Step 5 Click OK. The MR Comparison Analysis dialog box is displayed.l In Area (14), the system displays the differences between the values of the same counters of

each object in two time segments. In Area (15), the system displays the information that isselected in Area (14) on a bar chart.– For the specific rules of dividing areas, see 8.7.1 Interface Description: GSM MR

Analysis.



8-29

– The system can display the compared counter values that indicate performance trends inthe table in different colors. Red indicates that the performance deteriorates; greenindicates that the performance improves; gray indicates that no query result exists or thatthe performance does not change.


l For details about the parameters, see 8.7.9 Parameters for Comparing GSM MR AnalysisResults.

----End


choose Save As.... After setting the save path and filename, click Save. Then, the queryresults are saved as a CSV or XLS file.


8.7 Reference for the GSM MR Analysis GUIThis describes the interface for GSM MR analysis and the relevant parameters. Beforeperforming relevant operations, familiarize yourself with GSM MR analysis functions.

8.7.1 Interface Description: GSM MR AnalysisThis describes the interfaces for GSM MR analysis. The interfaces for GSM MR analysis consistof MR Overview Report, MR Query, and MR Comparison Analysis. Before performingrelevant operations, familiarize yourself with the rules for dividing areas on the interface.

8.7.2 Parameters for Creating GSM E2E TasksThis section describes the parameters for creating GSM E2E tasks. You can refer to thedescription when creating a GSM E2E task.

8.7.3 Parameters for Creating and Modifying GSM MR Analysis TasksThis describes the parameters for creating and modifying GSM MR analysis tasks. You can referto the description when creating or modifying a GSM MR analysis task.

8.7.4 Parameters for Querying GBSC ReportsThis describes the parameters related to querying the GBSC reports. You can refer to theseparameters when querying the GBSC reports.

8.7.5 Parameters for Querying the GSM Cell Group ReportsThis describes the parameters for querying the GSM cell group reports. You can refer to thedescription when querying the GSM cell group reports.

8.7.6 Parameters for Querying the GSM TopN TRX ReportsThis describes the parameters for querying the GSM TopN TRX reports. You can refer to thedescription when querying the GSM TopN carrier reports.

8.7.7 Parameters for Querying the GSM MR Topic Analysis Reports


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

This describes the parameters for querying the reports of the GSM MR topic analysis. You canrefer to the description when querying the GSM MR topic analysis reports.

8.7.8 Parameters for Querying the MR Analysis Results of GSM CellsThis describes the parameters for querying the MR analysis results of one or more GSM cells.You can refer to the description when querying the MR analysis results of GSM cells.

8.7.9 Parameters for Comparing GSM MR Analysis ResultsThis describes the parameters related to comparing GSM MR analysis results. You can refer tothese parameters when comparing GSM MR analysis results.

8.7.1 Interface Description: GSM MR AnalysisThis describes the interfaces for GSM MR analysis. The interfaces for GSM MR analysis consistof MR Overview Report, MR Query, and MR Comparison Analysis. Before performingrelevant operations, familiarize yourself with the rules for dividing areas on the interface.

Interface for MR Report and Interface Description

The MR comprehensive analysis results can be displayed in table or in histogram mode, as shownin Figure 8-2.

Figure 8-2 MR Overview Report


(1) Navigation tree of MR overview report You can accurately locate the objects of theMR report on the navigation tree.



8-31


(2) Area for TopN TRXs or problematicTRXs

Displays the information about the TopNTRXs or problematic TRXs in table.

Different information is displayed indifferent situations. For details, see thedescription of relevant task pages.

(3) Area for TRXs Displays the information about the TRXs intable.

Different information is displayed indifferent situations. For details, see thedescription of relevant task pages.

The system supports the function ofhighlighting MR summary reports indifferent colors. If a TRX is faulty, this TRXis highlighted in red.

(4) Area for counter charts Displays the counter information about theselected objects in histogram mode.

(5) Task information list Displays the basic information about thistask in table.

(6) Cell information list Displays the basic information about thecells corresponding to the selected TRXs intable.

(7) Area for problematic TRXs and operationadvice

Displays current problematic TRXs andoperation advice.

Interface for Displaying MR Results and Interface DescriptionThe MR results of a cell can be displayed in table or in histogram mode, as shown in Figure8-3.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Figure 8-3 MR Query Result


(8) Area for TopN TRXs and problematicTRXs

Displays the calculated values of all TRXsof each cell in table.

(9) Area for TRXs Displays the values of all TRXs of theselected cells in table.

The system supports the function ofhighlighting MR results in colors. If a TRXis faulty, this TRX is highlighted in red.


(11) Task information list Displays the basic information about thistask in table.

(12) Cell information list Displays the basic information about thecells corresponding to the selected TRXs intable.

(13) Area for problematic TRXs and operationadvice

Displays current problematic TRXs andoperation advice.



8-33

Interface for MR Comparison Analysis and Interface DescriptionThe MR comparison results of a cell can be displayed in table or in histogram mode, as shownin Figure 8-4.

Figure 8-4 MR Comparison Report


(14) Area for counter summary information Displays the differences of all summarizedcounters of each object within two periods intable.

The Nastar can display the compared countervalues that indicate performance trends in thetable in colors. Red indicates that theperformance deteriorates; green indicates thatthe performance improves; gray indicates thatno comparison result exists or that theperformance does not change.




Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Description of the parameters of GSM neighboring cell measurement tasksParameter Description

Basicinformation

Task Name Indicates the name of a neighboring cellmeasurement task.

OSS Name Indicates the name of the OSS related to the task.

E2E Task List Select the GSM Neighbour Cell Data Task node.

Measure taskinformation

Persist Time(Minute)

Indicates the total duration that a measurement taskis performed.The value is an integer from 1 to 10110.The duration time must be later than the timecalculated by (Measurement period ×15) × ([Totalnumber of test ARFCNs ÷ measurement step + 1]) +15.

Measurementperiod

Interval between the ARFCNs of each group.The value is an integer from 1 to 48. The unit is *15(minute), that is, the value must be multiples of 15minutes.For example, if this parameter is set to 2, themeasurement time of each ARFCN is 2×15 minutes,that is, 30 minutes.

Measurement steplength

Indicates the number of ARFCNs in the same group.The value is an integer from 1 to 32.The measurement step must be less than or equal tothe minimum rest step of the selected cell.

Cell Object Indicates the cell related to the neighboring cellmeasurement task.

Displays thefrequencyinformation.

Indicates the set of ARFCNs to be measured. TheARFCNs are classified by group. The number ofARFCNs of each group is determined by MeasureStep.NOTE

l You can select a maximum of 762 ARFCNs for a cell.If the number exceeds 762, the NE returns an errormessage after the corresponding MML command isexecuted, indicating that the task creation ormodification fails.

l Before setting this parameter, you must set MeasureStep.

Soft parameterinformation

Set the softparameters.

If you select this option, the soft parameters that youset are valid for this measurement task.



8-35


RSSThres The value is an integer from 0 to 127.When the difference between the levels of theneighboring cell and the serving cell in the MR isgreater than this value, the relevant traffic statisticalcounter is incremented by one.

ASSThres The value is an integer from 0 to 63.When the level of the neighboring cell in the MR isgreater than this value, the relevant traffic statisticalcounter is incremented by one.

NCELLINTERFLEVELTHRES 1-7

You can set the thresholds of interference level forseven neighboring cells.The value is an integer from 0 to 127.When the difference between the levels of theneighboring cell and the serving cell in the MR isgreater than this value, the relevant traffic statisticalcounter is incremented by one.

NOTE

l Level refers to the strength of the received or transmitted signal. It is generally used in power controland handover algorithm.

l ASSThres and RSSThres evaluate the reasonableness of the neighbor cell. According to the actualrequirements, you can modify the two values to adjust the evaluation standard.

l ADJINLVThres1 to ADJINLVThres7 evaluates the CIR distribution of neighboring cells and servingcells and the ratio among each segment. This parameter in combination with frequency configurationanalysis indicates the severity level of each frequency interference, and thus can be used to adjust theC/I distribution segment of neighboring cells and serving cells.

Carrier-to-interference ratio distribution refers to the distribution of the power of the carrier signalsand the power of the interference signals, that is, C/I distribution.

Description of the parameters of GSM uplink frequency scanning tasksParameter Description

Basicinformation

Task Name Indicates the name of a uplink frequency scanningtask.


E2E Task List Select the GSM Uplink Interference AnalysisData Task node.

Measureinformation

Time (Minute) Indicates the total duration that a measurementtask is performed.The value is an integer from 5 to 4320.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


BSC Type Indicates the BSC type of a uplink frequencyscanning task.

Band Indicates the frequency band used by a cell.The M2000 supports the scanning of thefollowing frequency bands:l DCS_1800

l EGSM_900

l GSM850

l P_GSM900

l PSC1900

l R_GSM900

Cell Object Indicates the name of a cell related to the uplinkfrequency scanning task.

Frequency Type Indicates the types of the test ARFCNs. Theoptions are as follows:l All Frequency In The Frequency Segment

Indicates that all the ARFCNs in the selectedfrequency band are measured.

l All Configuration In the Selected CellsIndicates the union of the ARFCNs of theselected cell.

l The User Defined in the Frequency SegmentIndicates that you need to manually select theARFCNs to be measured.

8.7.3 Parameters for Creating and Modifying GSM MR AnalysisTasks

This describes the parameters for creating and modifying GSM MR analysis tasks. You can referto the description when creating or modifying a GSM MR analysis task.



8-37


BasicInformation

Task Name Indicates the name of an MR analysis task.Value range:l A maximum of 60 characters

l The following characters are not allowed: ̀ ~ ! @# $ % ^ & * ( ) + = { } [ ] \ | ; ' : , . ? / < > "


l Case sensitive

Task Type You need to select GSM MR Analysis Task fromthe Task Type navigation tree.

Execution Type l Once task: The system executes the created tasksonly once at the specified time.

l Period task: The system executes the createdtasks at the preset time.

Note Indicates the description of the task.Value range:l A maximum of 200 characters

l The following characters are not allowed: ~ ! # $% ^ * + = | \ / , ' `

TimeInformation

Begin Date Indicates time for starting a task. The start timeshould be later than the current server time.You can either type the time value in this field, or

click to select the date and time in the DateSelection dialog box.This parameter is valid for only periodic tasks.

Cycle Indicates the interval between periodic tasks. Thisparameter involves the period unit and the interval.l Unit: day.

l Interval: 1 to 9999.

This parameter is valid for only periodic tasks.

Execution Times Indicates the times that a periodic task is executed.If this parameter is set to 0, you can infer that thetask is executed all the time.Value range: 0 to 9999.This parameter is valid for only periodic tasks.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


Data Time Scope The start time should precede the end time.You can either type the time value in this field, or

click to select the date and time in the DateSelection dialog box.This parameter is valid for only one-time tasks.

Task Start At Indicates the start time for executing analysis tasks.The parameter value must be later than the end timeof Data Time Scope.

Time l All day: The task is executed every day duringthe selected time range.

l Specify: The task is executed during the specifiedtime segment every day during the selected timerange.The time segment cannot overlap.The start time of the next time segment must belater than or the same as the end time of thecurrent time segment.

ObjectInformation

BSC If you select this option, the navigation tree displaysall the BSCs of the entire network.

Cell Group If you select this option, the navigation tree displaysall the cell groups of the entire network.

ParameterInformation

Uplink Quality ≥ XMR of a Value (%) ≥Y

If the number of MRs, in which the level of uplinkquality is not smaller than X, is greater than Y% ofthe total number of MRs, the TRX is problematic.X indicates the level of uplink quality. It is an integerbetween 1 and 7. The default value is 4.Y indicates the threshold. It is an integer from 1 to100. The default value is 10.

Downlink Quality ≥ XMR of a Value (%) ≥Y

If the number of MRs, in which the level ofdownlink quality is not smaller than X, is greaterthan Y% of the total number of MRs, the TRX isproblematic.X indicates the level of downlink quality. It is aninteger between 1 and 7. The default value is 4.Y indicates the threshold. It is an integer from 1 to100. The default value is 10.



8-39


Uplink Level ≤ X MRof dBm (%) ≥ Y

If the number of MRs, in which the value of uplinklevel is not greater than X (dBm), is greater than Y% of the total number of MRs, the TRX isproblematic.X indicates the value of uplink level. It can be -100,-95, -90, -85, -80, -75, or -70. The default value is-90.Y indicates the threshold. It is an integer from 1 to100. The default value is 70.

Downlink Level ≤ XMR of dBm (%) ≥ Y

If the number of MRs, in which the value ofdownlink level is not greater than X (dBm), isgreater than Y% of the total number of MRs, theTRX is problematic.X indicates the value of downlink level. It can be-100, -95, -90, -85, -80, -75, or -70. The defaultvalue is -90.Y indicates the threshold. It is an integer from 1 to100. The default value is 40.

TA ≥ X MR of a Value(%) ≥ Y

If the number of MRs, in which the TA value is notsmaller than X, is greater than Y% of the totalnumber of MRs, the TRX is problematic.X indicates the TA value. It is an integer from 1 to63. The default value is 6.Y indicates the threshold. It is an integer from 1 to100. The default value is 50.

Downlink Level -Uplink Level > X MR ofdB (%) ≥ Y

If the number of MRs, in which the differencebetween the downlink level and uplink level isgreater than X (dB), is greater than Y% of the totalnumber of MRs, the TRX is problematic.X indicates the level difference. It can be -15, -10,-6, -3, or -1. The default value is -15.Y indicates the threshold. It is an integer from 1 to100. The default value is 40.

Downlink Level -Uplink Level < X MR ofdB (%) ≥ Y

If the number of MRs, in which the differencebetween the downlink level and uplink level issmaller than X (dB), is greater than Y% of the totalnumber of MRs, the TRX is problematic.X indicates the level difference. It can be 1, 3, 6, 10,or 15. The default value is 15.Y indicates the threshold. It is an integer from 1 to100. The default value is 40.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


Total Number of MR <X

If the number of received MRs is smaller than X, theTRX is problematic.X indicates the threshold. It is an integer from 1 to9999. The default value is 200.

TopN =X Indicates the number of TopN counters. You canquery the information about X TRXs whoseperformance is the poorest as indicated by theselected counter.X indicates the number of TopN counters. It is aninteger from 1 to 99. The default value is 10.

8.7.4 Parameters for Querying GBSC ReportsThis describes the parameters related to querying the GBSC reports. You can refer to theseparameters when querying the GBSC reports.

NOTE

For details about the rules for dividing areas, see 8.7.1 Interface Description: GSM MR Analysis.

Parameters for Querying TRXs on the Entire Network

Area (2) displays the number of TopN TRXs and problematic TRXs in each GBSC on the entirenetwork. For details, see Table 8-6.

Table 8-6 Parameters related to the TRXs on the entire network (1)


BSC ID Indicates the ID of a BSC.

BSC Name Indicates the name of a BSC, for example, BSC_1.

TRX Count for Average UplinkReceive Quality (Full Rate)

Indicates the number of TopN TRXs with the averagereceived signal quality (full rate) values of the BTSsexceeding the threshold.

TRX Count for Average DownlinkReceive Quality (Full Rate)

Indicates the number of TopN TRXs with the averagereceived signal quality (full rate) values of the MSsexceeding the threshold.

TRX Count for Average UplinkReceive Quality (Half Rate)

Indicates the number of TopN TRXs with the averagereceived signal quality (half rate) values of the BTSsexceeding the threshold.

TRX Count for Average DownlinkReceive Quality (Half Rate)

Indicates the number of TopN TRXs with the averagereceived signal quality (half rate) values of the MSsexceeding the threshold.



8-41


TRX Count for Average UplinkReceive Level (Full Rate)

Indicates the number of TopN TRXs with the averagereceived levels (full rate) of the BTSs exceeding thethreshold.

TRX Count for Average DownlinkReceive Level (Full Rate)

Indicates the number of TopN TRXs with the averagereceived levels (full rate) of the MSs exceeding thethreshold.

TRX Count for Average UplinkReceive Level (Half Rate)

Indicates the number of TopN TRXs with the averagereceived levels (half rate) of the BTSs exceeding thethreshold.

TRX Count for Average DownlinkReceive Level (Half Rate)

Indicates the number of TopN TRXs with the averagereceived levels (half rate) of the MSs exceeding thethreshold.

TRX Count for Average TADistribution

Indicates the number of TopN TRXs with the values ofAverage TA Distribution exceeding the threshold.

TRX Count for Link Balance Indicates the number of TopN TRXs with the values ofLink Balance exceeding the threshold.

TRX Count for UplinkInterference

Indicates the number of problematic TRXs meeting therequirements of the Uplink Interference topic.

TRX Count for DownlinkInterference

Indicates the number of problematic TRXs meeting therequirements of the Downlink Interference topic.

TRX Count for Uplink WeakCoverage

Indicates the number of problematic TRXs meeting therequirements of the Uplink Weak Coverage topic.

TRX Count for Downlink WeakCoverage

Indicates the number of problematic TRXs meeting therequirements of the Downlink Weak Coverage topic.

TRX Count for Weak TRXCoverage

Indicates the number of problematic TRXs meeting therequirements of the Weak TRX Coverage topic.

TRX Count for Over-DistanceCoverage

Indicates the number of problematic TRXs meeting therequirements of the Over-Distance Coverage topic.

TRX Count for Link Balance(Uplink Problem)

Indicates the number of problematic TRXs meeting therequirements of the Link Balance (Uplink Problem)topic.

TRX Count for Link Balance(Downlink Problem)

Indicates the number of problematic TRXs meeting therequirements of the Link Balance (Downlink Problem)topic.

TRX Count for Other Problems Indicates the number of problematic TRXs meeting therequirements of other topics.

Area (3) displays the information about all the TRXs in each GBSC on the entire network. Fordetails, see Table 8-7.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)





Total Number of MeasurementReports for Full Rate

Indicates the number of MRs transferred over the full-ratechannel.

Total Number of MeasurementReports for Half Rate

Indicates the number of MRs transferred over the half-rate channel.

Average Uplink Receive Quality(Full Rate)

Indicates the value of the average received signal quality(full rate) of the BTS.

Average Downlink ReceiveQuality (Full Rate)

Indicates the value of the average received signal quality(full rate) of the MS.

Average Uplink Receive Quality(Half Rate)

Indicates the value of the average received signal quality(half rate) of the BTS.

Average Downlink ReceiveQuality (Half Rate)

Indicates the value of the average received signal quality(half rate) of the MS.

Average Uplink Receive Level(Full Rate)

Indicates the average received level (full rate) of the BTS.

Average Downlink ReceiveLevel (Full Rate)

Indicates the average received level (full rate) of the MS.

Average Uplink Receive Level(Half Rate)

Indicates the average received level (half rate) of the BTS.

Average Downlink ReceiveLevel (Half Rate)

Indicates the average received level (half rate) of the MS.

Average TA Distribution Indicates the weighted average TA that the MS uses toadvance its timings of transmissions to the BTS.

Link Balance Indicates the dB value calculated through this expression:Average received level of the MS - Average receivedlevel of the BTS - Difference between the values of theaverage sensitivity of the MS and BTS.

Parameters for Querying TRXs in a GBSCIf you select a counter node, the TRX frequencies in the GBSC are sorted by the counter in area(2). If you select a topic node, the problematic TRX frequencies meeting the requirements ofthe topic are displayed in area (2). For details, see Table 8-8.



8-43

Table 8-8 Parameters related to the TRXs in a GBSC (1)




Cell ID Indicates the number of the cell that the TRX belongsto.

Cell Name Indicates the name of the cell that the TRX belongs to.

TRX ID Indicates the number of the TRX controlled by the BSC.

TRX Name Indicates the name of the TRX controlled by the BSC.


Indicates the number of MRs transferred over the full-rate channel.



Average Uplink Receive Quality(Full Rate)

Indicates the average quality of received signals (fullrate) of the BTSs corresponding to the TopN TRXs orproblematic TRXs controlled by the BSC.


Indicates the average quality of received signals (fullrate) of the MSs corresponding to the TopN TRXs orproblematic TRXs controlled by the BSC.

Average Uplink Receive Quality(Half Rate)

Indicates the average quality of received signals (halfrate) of the BTSs corresponding to the TopN TRXs orproblematic TRXs controlled by the BSC.


Indicates the average quality of received signals (halfrate) of the MSs corresponding to the TopN TRXs orproblematic TRXs controlled by the BSC.


Indicates the average received levels (full rate) of theBTSs corresponding to the TopN TRXs or problematicTRXs controlled by the BSC.

Average Downlink Receive Level(Full Rate)

Indicates the average received levels (full rate) of theMSs corresponding to the TopN TRXs or problematicTRXs controlled by the BSC.


Indicates the average received levels (half rate) of theBTSs corresponding to the TopN TRXs or problematicTRXs controlled by the BSC.

Average Downlink Receive Level(Half Rate)

Indicates the average received levels (half rate) of theMSs corresponding to the TopN TRXs or problematicTRXs controlled by the BSC.



Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


Link Balance Indicates the dB value calculated through thisexpression: Average received level of the MScorresponding to the TopN TRX or problematic TRXcontrolled by the BSC - Average received level of theBTS corresponding to the TopN TRX or problematicTRX controlled by the BSC - Difference between thevalues of the average sensitivity of the MS and BTS.

Area (3) displays the information about all TRXs in the cell to which the TopN TRXs orproblematic TRXs selected in Area (2) belong. For details, see Table 8-9.

Table 8-9 Parameters related to the TRXs in a GBSC (2)




Cell ID Indicates the number of the cell that the TRX belongs to.

Cell Name Indicates the name of the cell that the TRX belongs to.

TRX ID Indicates the number of the TRX controlled by the BSC.

TRX Name Indicates the name of the TRX controlled by the BSC.




Indicates the number of MRs transferred over the half-ratechannel.

Average Uplink ReceiveQuality (Full Rate)

Indicates the average quality of received signals (full rate)of the BTSs corresponding to all TRXs.


Indicates the average quality of received signals (full rate)of the MSs corresponding to all TRXs.

Average Uplink ReceiveQuality (Half Rate)

Indicates the average quality of received signals (half rate)of the BTSs corresponding to all TRXs.


Indicates the average quality of received signals (half rate)of the MSs corresponding to all TRXs.


Indicates the average received levels (full rate) of the BTSscorresponding to all TRXs.


Indicates the average received levels (full rate) of the MSscorresponding to all TRXs.


Indicates the average received levels (half rate) of the BTSscorresponding to all TRXs.



8-45



Indicates the average received levels (half rate) of the MSscorresponding to all TRXs.


Link Balance Indicates the dB value calculated through this expression:Average received level of the MS corresponding to eachTRX - Average received level of the BTS corresponding toeach TRX - Difference between the values of the averagesensitivity of the MS and BTS.

Parameters related to the basic informationArea (5) displays the information about the queried performance analysis task. For details, seeTable 8-10.

Table 8-10 Parameters related to the task information


Task Name Indicates the name of the queried performance analysis task.

Start Time Indicates the time that the Nastar starts generating a task report.

End Time Indicates the time that the Nastar stops generating a task report.

Task Creator Indicates the creator's name of the queried performance analysistask.

Area (6) displays the information about the cell corresponding to the selected TRX. For details,see Table 8-11.

Table 8-11 Parameters related to the cell information


Cell Object ID Indicates internal ID of the cell where the selected TRX islocated.

Cell Name Indicates name of the cell where the selected TRX is located.

LAC Indicates location area code of the cell where the selected TRXis located.

CI Indicates the ID of the cell where the selected TRX is located.

BCCH Indicates the frequency transmitted on the BCCH.

BCC Indicates the base station color code.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


NCC Indicates the network color code.

Cell Layer Indicates the layer where the cell is located.

Cell Prior Indicates the cell priority.

Half Rate Supported Indicates whether the half rate is supported.

Frequency Hopping Type Indicates the type of the frequency hopping, such as the RFfrequency hopping and baseband frequency hopping.

GPS Supported Indicates whether the GPRS service is supported.

EDGE Supported Indicates whether the Edge service is supported.

Concentric CircleSupported

Indicates whether the intelligent underlay-overlay cell functionis supported.

Base Station Type Indicates the BTS type.

Area (7) displays the information about the problematic TRXs and the relevant operation advice.For details, see Table 8-12.



Uplinkinterference






Weakuplinkcoverage





8-47





WeakTRXcoverage






Remotecoverage





Linkbalance(uplink)






Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


Linkbalance(downlink)








8.7.5 Parameters for Querying the GSM Cell Group ReportsThis describes the parameters for querying the GSM cell group reports. You can refer to thedescription when querying the GSM cell group reports.

NOTE


Parameters Related to Querying the TRXs on the Entire NetworkThe number of TopN TRXs and problematic TRXs in each cell group is displayed in Area (2).For details, see Table 8-13.



Cell Group ID Indicates the ID of a cell group.

Cell Group Name Indicates the name of a cell group, for example, CELL_1.

TRX Count for AverageUplink Receive Quality (FullRate)

Indicates the number of TopN TRXs with the average qualityvalues of the received signals (full rate) of the BTSsexceeding the threshold.



8-49


TRX Count for AverageDownlink Receive Quality(Full Rate)

Indicates the number of TopN TRXs with the average qualityvalues of the received signals (full rate) of the MSs exceedingthe threshold.

TRX Count for AverageUplink Receive Quality (HalfRate)

Indicates the number of TopN TRXs with the average qualityvalues of the received signals (half rate) of the BTSsexceeding the threshold.

TRX Count for AverageDownlink Receive Quality(Half Rate)

Indicates the number of TopN TRXs with the average qualityvalues of the received signals (half rate) of the MSs exceedingthe threshold.

TRX Count for AverageUplink Receive Level (FullRate)

Indicates the number of TopN TRXs with the averagereceived levels (full rate) of the BTSs exceeding thethreshold.

TRX Count for AverageDownlink Receive Level(Full Rate)

Indicates the number of TopN TRXs with the averagereceived levels (full rate) of the MSs exceeding the threshold.

TRX Count for AverageUplink Receive Level (HalfRate)

Indicates the number of TopN TRXs with the averagereceived levels (half rate) of the BTSs exceeding thethreshold.

TRX Count for AverageDownlink Receive Level(Half Rate)

Indicates the number of TopN TRXs with the averagereceived levels (half rate) of the MSs exceeding the threshold.

TRX Count for Average TADistribution

Indicates the number of TopN TRXs with the values ofAverage TA Distribution exceeding the threshold.

TRX Count for Link Balance Indicates the number of TopN TRXs with the values of LinkBalance exceeding the threshold.

TRX Count for UplinkInterference

Indicates the number of problematic TRXs meeting therequirements of the Uplink Interference topic.

TRX Count for DownlinkInterference

Indicates the number of problematic TRXs meeting therequirements of the Downlink Interference topic.

TRX Count for Uplink WeakCoverage

Indicates the number of problematic TRXs meeting therequirements of the Uplink Weak Coverage topic.

TRX Count for DownlinkWeak Coverage

Indicates the number of problematic TRXs meeting therequirements of the Downlink Weak Coverage topic.

TRX Count for Weak TRXCoverage

Indicates the number of problematic TRXs meeting therequirements of the Weak TRX Coverage topic.

TRX Count for Over-Distance Coverage

Indicates the number of problematic TRXs meeting therequirements of the Over-Distance Coverage topic.

TRX Count for Link Balance(Uplink Problem)

Indicates the number of problematic TRXs meeting therequirements of the Link Balance (Uplink Problem) topic.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


TRX Count for Link Balance(Downlink Problem)

Indicates the number of problematic TRXs meeting therequirements of the Link Balance (Downlink Problem) topic.

TRX Count for OtherProblems

Indicates the number of problematic TRXs meeting therequirements of the Other Problem topic.

The calculation result of the TRXs in each cell group on the entire network is displayed in Area(3). For details, see Table 8-14.





Total Number ofMeasurement Reports forFull Rate


Total Number ofMeasurement Reports forHalf Rate



Indicates the average quality of received signals (full rate) ofthe BTS.


Indicates the average quality of received signals (full rate) ofthe MS.


Indicates the average quality of received signals (half rate) ofthe BTS.


Indicates the average quality of received signals (half rate) ofthe MS.

Average Uplink ReceiveLevel (Full Rate)

Indicates the average received level (full rate) of the BTS.


Indicates the average received level (full rate) of the MS.

Average Uplink ReceiveLevel (Half Rate)

Indicates the average received level (half rate) of the BTS.


Indicates the average received level (half rate) of the MS.

Average TA Distribution Indicates the weighted average TA that is used by the MS toadvance its timings of transmissions to the BTS.



8-51


Link Balance Indicates the dB value calculated through this expression:Average received level of the MS - Average received level ofthe BTS - Difference between the values of the averagesensitivity of the MS and BTS.

Parameters Related to Querying TRXs in a Cell GroupIf you select a counter node, the TRX frequencies in the selected cell group are sorted by thecounter in area (2). If you select a topic node, the problematic TRX frequencies meeting therequirements of the topic are displayed in Area (2). For details, see Table 8-15.

Table 8-15 Parameters related to the TRXs in a cell group (1)




Cell ID Indicates the ID of the cell where a TRX is located.

Cell Name Indicates the name of the cell where a TRX is located.

TRX ID Indicates the number of a TRX in a cell group.

TRX Name Indicates the name of a TRX in a cell group.

Total Number ofMeasurement Reportsfor Full Rate


Total Number ofMeasurement Reportsfor Half Rate


Average UplinkReceive Quality (FullRate)

Indicates the average quality of received signals (full rate) of theBTS corresponding to a TopN TRX or problematic TRX in the cellgroup.

Average DownlinkReceive Quality (FullRate)

Indicates the average quality of received signals (full rate) of theMS corresponding to a TopN TRX or problematic TRX in the cellgroup.

Average UplinkReceive Quality (HalfRate)

Indicates the average quality of received signals (half rate) of theBTS corresponding to a TopN TRX or problematic TRX in the cellgroup.

Average DownlinkReceive Quality (HalfRate)

Indicates the average quality of received signals (half rate) of theMS corresponding to a TopN TRX or problematic TRX in the cellgroup.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


Average UplinkReceive Level (FullRate)

Indicates the average received level value (full rate) of the BTScorresponding to a TopN TRX or problematic TRX in the cellgroup.

Average DownlinkReceive Level (FullRate)

Indicates the average received level value (full rate) of the MScorresponding to a TopN TRX or problematic TRX in the cellgroup.

Average UplinkReceive Level (HalfRate)

Indicates the average received level value (half rate) of the BTScorresponding to a TopN TRX or problematic TRX in the cellgroup.

Average DownlinkReceive Level (HalfRate)

Indicates the average received level value (half rate) of the MScorresponding to a TopN TRX or problematic TRX in the cellgroup.

Average TADistribution

Indicates the weighted average TA that is used by the MS toadvance its timings of transmissions to the BTS.

Link Balance Indicates the dB value, corresponding to a TopN TRX orproblematic TRX in the cell group, calculated through thisexpression: Average received level of the MS corresponding to theTopN TRX or problematic TRX - Average received level of theBTS corresponding to the TopN TRX or problematic TRX -Difference between the values of the average sensitivity of the MSand BTS.

All the TRXs in the cell where the selected TopN TRX or problematic TRX resides are displayedin Area (3). For details, see Table 8-16.

Table 8-16 Parameters related to the TRXs in a cell group (2)






TRX ID Indicates the number of a TRX in a cell group.

TRX Name Indicates the name of a TRX in a cell group.





8-53





Indicates the average quality of received signals (full rate) ofthe BTS corresponding to each TRX.


Indicates the average quality of received signals (full rate) ofthe MS corresponding to each TRX.


Indicates the average quality of received signals (half rate) ofthe BTS corresponding to each TRX


Indicates the average quality of received signals (half rate) ofthe MS corresponding to each TRX.


Indicates the average received level (full rate) of the BTScorresponding to each TRX


Indicates the average received level (full rate) of the MScorresponding to each TRX.


Indicates the average received level (half rate) of the BTScorresponding to each TRX.


Indicates the average received level (half rate) of the MScorresponding to each TRX.


Link Balance Indicates the dB value calculated through this expression:Average received level of the MS corresponding to each TRX- Average received level of the BTS corresponding to eachTRX - Difference between the values of the average sensitivityof the MS and BTS.

Parameters Related to the Basic InformationThe information about a selected performance analysis task is displayed in Area (5). For details,see Table 8-17.



Task Name Indicates the name of a selected performance analysis task.

Begin Time Indicates the time when the Nastar starts to generate a taskreport.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


End Time Indicates the time when the Nastar stops to generate a taskreport.

Task Creator Indicates the creator's name of the queried performanceanalysis task.

The information about the cell corresponding to the selected TRX is displayed in Area (6). Fordetails, see Table 8-18.



Cell Object ID Indicates the internal ID of the cell where the selected TRX islocated.

Cell Name Indicates the name of the cell where the selected TRX islocated.

LAC Indicates the location area code of the cell where the selectedTRX is located.



BCC Indicates the color code of a base station.




Half Rate Supported Indicates whether half rate is supported.

Frequency Hopping Type Indicates the type of the frequency hopping, such as the RFhopping and baseband frequency hopping.


EDGE Supported Indicates whether the EDGE service is supported.

Concentric Circle Supported Indicates whether the intelligent underlay-overlay cellfunction is supported.


The information about the problematic TRXs and the relevant operation suggestions aredisplayed in Area (7). For details, see Table 8-19.



8-55



Uplinkinterference






Weakuplinkcoverage






WeakTRXcoverage






Remotecoverage






Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


Linkbalance(uplink)













8.7.6 Parameters for Querying the GSM TopN TRX ReportsThis describes the parameters for querying the GSM TopN TRX reports. You can refer to thedescription when querying the GSM TopN carrier reports.

NOTE


Parameters Related to Querying TopN TRXs

In Area (2), the system displays the information about the 10 TRXs of which the selected counterindicates the poorest performance. For details, see Table 8-20.



8-57

Table 8-20 Parameters related to the TopN TRXs (1)




Cell ID Indicates the ID of the cell where a TopN TRX is located.

Cell Name Indicates the name of the cell where a TopN TRX is located.

TRX ID Indicates the number of a TopN TRX.

TRX Name Indicates the name of a TopN TRX.






Indicates the average quality of received signals (full rate) ofthe BTS corresponding to the TopN TRX.


Indicates the average quality of received signals (full rate) ofthe MS corresponding to the TopN TRX.


Indicates the average quality of received signals (half rate) ofthe BTS corresponding to the TopN TRX.


Indicates the average quality of received signals (half rate) ofthe MS corresponding to the TopN TRX.


Indicates the average received level (full rate) of the BTScorresponding to the TopN TRX.


Indicates the average received level (full rate) of the MScorresponding to the TopN TRX.


Indicates the average received level (half rate) of the BTScorresponding to the TopN TRX.


Indicates the average received level (half rate) of the MScorresponding to the TopN TRX.


Link Balance Indicates the dB value calculated through this expression:Average received level of the MS corresponding to the TopNTRX - Average received level of the BTS corresponding tothe TopN TRX - Difference between the values of the averagesensitivity of the MS and BTS.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

If you select a record of a TopN TRX in Area (2), the system displays the frequencies of all theTRXs in the cell where the selected TopN TRX resides in Area (3). For details, see Table8-21.

Table 8-21 Parameters related to the TopN TRXs (2)






TRX ID Indicates the number of a TRX.

TRX Name Indicates the name of a TRX.






Indicates the average quality of received signals (full rate) ofthe BTS corresponding to each TRX.


Indicates the average quality of received signals (full rate) ofthe MS corresponding to each TRX.


Indicates the average quality of received signals (half rate) ofthe BTS corresponding to each TRX


Indicates the average quality of received signals (half rate) ofthe MS corresponding to each TRX.


Indicates the average received level (full rate) of the BTScorresponding to each TRX










8-59


Link Balance Indicates the dB value calculated through this expression:Average received level of the MS corresponding to each TRX- Average received level of the BTS corresponding to eachTRX - Difference between the values of the averagesensitivity of the MS and BTS.

Parameters Related to the Basic Information

In Area (5), the system displays the information about a selected performance analysis task. Fordetails, see Table 8-22.



TaskName Indicates the name of a selected performance analysis task.

BEGINTIME Indicates the time when the Nastar starts to generate a taskreport.

ENDTIME Indicates the time when the Nastar stops to generate a taskreport.


In Area (6), the system displays the information about the cell corresponding to the selectedTRX. For details, see Table 8-23.











Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)




Half Rate Supported Indicates whether the half rate is supported.






In Area (7), the system displays the information about the problematic TRXs and the relevantoperation suggestions. For details, see Table 8-24.



Uplinkinterference






Weakuplinkcoverage





8-61





WeakTRXcoverage






Remotecoverage





Linkbalance(uplink)






Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)










8.7.7 Parameters for Querying the GSM MR Topic Analysis ReportsThis describes the parameters for querying the reports of the GSM MR topic analysis. You canrefer to the description when querying the GSM MR topic analysis reports.

NOTE


Parameters Related to Querying Problematic TRXs Involved in Topic AnalysisThe information about all the problematic TRXs involved in topic analysis is displayed in Area(2). For details, see Table 8-25.

Table 8-25 Parameters related to the problematic TRXs involved in topic analysis (1)




Cell ID Indicates the ID of the cell where a problematic TRX is located.

Cell Name Indicates the name of the cell where a problematic TRX is located.

TRX ID Indicates the number of a problematic TRX.

TRX Name Indicates the name of a problematic TRX.



8-63







Indicates the average quality of received signals (full rate) of theBTS corresponding to the problematic TRX.


Indicates the average quality of received signals (full rate) of theMS corresponding to the problematic TRX.


Indicates the average quality of received signals (half rate) of theBTS corresponding to the problematic TRX.


Indicates the average quality of received signals (half rate) of theMS corresponding to the problematic TRX.


Indicates the average received level (full rate) of the BTScorresponding to the problematic TRX.


Indicates the average received level (full rate) of the MScorresponding to the problematic TRX.


Indicates the average received level (half rate) of the BTScorresponding to the problematic TRX.


Indicates the average received level (half rate) of the MScorresponding to the problematic TRX.


Link Balance Indicates the dB value calculated through this expression:Average received level of the MS corresponding to theproblematic TRX - Average received level of the BTScorresponding to the problematic TRX - Difference between thevalues of the average sensitivity of the MS and BTS.

If you select a record of a problematic TRX in Area (2), the frequencies of all the TRXs in thecell where the selected problematic TRX resides is displayed in Area (3). For details, see Table8-26.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Table 8-26 Parameters related to the TRXs involved in topic analysis (2)






TRX ID Indicates the number of a TRX.







Indicates the average quality of received signals (full rate) of theBTS corresponding to each TRX.


Indicates the average quality of received signals (full rate) of theMS corresponding to each TRX.


Indicates the average quality of received signals (half rate) of theBTS corresponding to each TRX.


Indicates the average quality of received signals (half rate) of theMS corresponding to each TRX.


Indicates the average received level (full rate) of the BTScorresponding to each TRX.










8-65


Link Balance Indicates the dB value calculated through this expression:Average received level of the MS corresponding to each TRX -Average received level of the BTS corresponding to each TRX -Difference between the values of the average sensitivity of the MSand BTS.

Parameters Related to the Basic Information

The information about a selected performance analysis task is displayed in Area (5). For details,see Table 8-27.



TaskName Indicates the name of a performance analysis task.















Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)










The information about the problematic TRXs and the relevant operation suggestion are displayedin Area (7). For details, see Table 8-29.



Uplinkinterference






Weakuplinkcoverage





8-67





WeakTRXcoverage






Remotecoverage





Linkbalance(uplink)






Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)










8.7.8 Parameters for Querying the MR Analysis Results of GSMCells

This describes the parameters for querying the MR analysis results of one or more GSM cells.You can refer to the description when querying the MR analysis results of GSM cells.

NOTE


Parameters Related to Querying TopN TRXs and Problematic TRXs in the MRAnalysis Results

The calculation result of the TRXs in each cell is displayed in Area (8). For details, see Table8-30.

Table 8-30 Parameters related to querying TRXs in the MR analysis results of GSM cells


BSC ID Indicates the ID of the BSC that a TRX belongs to.






8-69






Average UplinkReceive Quality (FullRate)

Indicates the calculation result of the average quality values of thereceived signals (full rate) of the BTSs corresponding to all theTRXs.


Indicates the calculation result of the average quality values of thereceived signals (full rate) of the MSs corresponding to all theTRXs.

Average UplinkReceive Quality (HalfRate)

Indicates the calculation result of the average quality values of thereceived signals (half rate) of the BTSs corresponding to all theTRXs.


Indicates the calculation result of the average quality values of thereceived signals (half rate) of the MSs corresponding to all theTRXs.

Average UplinkReceive Level (FullRate)

Indicates the calculation result of the average received levels (fullrate) of the BTSs corresponding to all the TRXs.


Indicates the calculation result of the average levels (full rate) ofthe MSs corresponding to all the TRXs.

Average UplinkReceive Level (HalfRate)

Indicates the calculation result of the average received levels (halfrate) of the BTSs corresponding to all the TRXs.


Indicates the calculation result of the average received levels (halfrate) of the MSs corresponding to all the TRXs.

Average TADistribution

Indicates the weighted average TA that is used by the MS toadvance its timings of transmissions to the BTS.

Link Balance Indicates the dB value calculated through this expression: Averagereceived level of the MSs corresponding to all the TRXs - Averagereceived level of the BTSs corresponding to all the TRXs -Difference between the values of the average sensitivity of the MSand BTS.

If you select a record of a summarized TRX in Area (8), the information about all the TRXs inthe selected cell is displayed in Area (9). For details, see Table 8-31.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Table 8-31 Parameters related to querying TRXs in the MR analysis results of GSM cells (2)


BSC ID Indicates the ID of the BSC that a TRX belongs to.

BSC Name Indicates the name of the BSCs that a TRX of the selected cellbelongs to, for example, BSC_1.



TRX ID Indicates the number of a TRX in the selected cell.







Indicates the calculation result of the average quality values of thereceived signals (full rate) of the BTSs corresponding to all theTRXs.


Indicates the calculation result of the average quality values of thereceived signals (full rate) of the MSs corresponding to all theTRXs.


Indicates the calculation result of the average received signalquality (half rate) values of the BTSs corresponding to all theTRXs.


Indicates the calculation result of the average received signalquality (half rate) values of the MSs corresponding to all theTRXs.


Indicates the calculation result of the average levels (full rate) ofthe BTSs corresponding to all the TRXs.


Indicates the calculation result of the average received levels (fullrate) of the MSs corresponding to all the TRXs.


Indicates the calculation result of the average received levels (halfrate) of the BTSs corresponding to all the TRXs.


Indicates the calculation result of the average levels (half rate) ofthe MSs corresponding to all the TRXs.




8-71


Link Balance Indicates the dB value calculated through this expression:Average received level of the MSs corresponding to all the TRXs- Average received level of the BTSs corresponding to all theTRXs - Difference between the values of the average sensitivityof the MS and BTS.

Parameters Related to the Basic InformationThe information about a selected performance analysis task is displayed in Area (11). For details,see Table 8-32.



TaskName Indicates the name of a selected performance analysis task.








Cell Name Indicates name of the cell where the selected TRX is located.








Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)









The information about the problematic TRXs and the relevant operation suggestions aredisplayed in Area (13). For details, see Table 8-34.



Uplinkinterference






Weakuplinkcoverage





8-73





WeakTRXcoverage






Remotecoverage





Linkbalance(uplink)






Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)










8.7.9 Parameters for Comparing GSM MR Analysis ResultsThis describes the parameters related to comparing GSM MR analysis results. You can refer tothese parameters when comparing GSM MR analysis results.



Object Name Names of the objects to which two MR results to be comparedbelong

First Total Number ofMeasurement Reports(Full Rate)

Indicates the number of MRs transferred over the full-rate channelin the previous period.

Second Total Number ofMeasurement Reports(Full Rate)

Indicates the number of MRs transferred over the full-rate channelin the next period.

Difference of TotalMeasurement Reports(Full Rate)

Indicates the differences of the number of MRs transferred overthe full-rate channel in the previous and next periods.

First Total Number ofMeasurement Reports(Half Rate)

Indicates the number of MRs transferred over the half-ratechannel in the previous period.



8-75


Second Total Number ofMeasurement Reports(Half Rate)

Indicates the number of MRs transferred over the half-ratechannel in the next period.

Difference of TotalMeasurement Reports(Half Rate)

Indicates the differences of the number of MRs transferred overthe half-rate channel in the previous and next periods.

First Average UplinkReceive Quality (FullRate)

Indicates the average quality of received signals (full rate) of theBTSs corresponding to all the TRXs in the previous period.

Second Average UplinkReceive Quality (FullRate)

Indicates the average quality of received signals (full rate) of theBTSs corresponding to all the TRXs in the next period.

Average Uplink ReceiveQuality Difference (FullRate)

Indicates the differences of the average received signal quality(full rate) values of the BTSs corresponding to all the TRXs inthe previous and next periods.

First Average DownlinkReceive Quality (FullRate)

Indicates the average quality of received signals (full rate) of theMSs corresponding to all the TRXs in the previous period.

Second AverageDownlink ReceiveQuality (Full Rate)

Indicates the average quality of received signals (full rate) of theMSs corresponding to all the TRXs in the next period.

Average DownlinkReceive QualityDifference (Full Rate)

Indicates the differences of the average received signal quality(full rate) values of the MSs corresponding to all the TRXs in theprevious and next periods.

First Average UplinkReceive Quality (HalfRate)

Indicates the average quality of received signals (half rate) of theBTSs corresponding to all the TRXs in the previous period.

Second Average UplinkReceive Quality (HalfRate)

Indicates the average quality of received signals (half rate) of theBTSs corresponding to all the TRXs in the next period.

Average Uplink ReceiveQuality Difference (HalfRate)

Indicates the differences of the average received signal quality(half rate) values of the BTSs corresponding to all the TRXs inthe previous and next periods.

First Average DownlinkReceive Quality (HalfRate)

Indicates the average quality of received signals (half rate) of theMSs corresponding to all the TRXs in the previous period.

Second AverageDownlink ReceiveQuality (Half Rate)

Indicates the average quality of received signals (half rate) of theMSs corresponding to all the TRXs in the next period.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


Average DownlinkReceive QualityDifference (Half Rate)

Indicates the differences of the average received signal quality(half rate) values of the MSs corresponding to all the TRXs in theprevious and next periods.

First Average UplinkReceive Level (FullRate)

Indicates the average received signal levels (full rate) of the BTSscorresponding to all the TRXs in the previous period.

Second Average UplinkReceive Level (FullRate)

Indicates the average received signal levels (full rate) of the BTSscorresponding to all the TRXs in the next period.

Average Uplink ReceiveLevel Difference (FullRate)

Indicates the differences of the average received signal levels (fullrate) of the BTSs corresponding to all the TRXs in the previousand next periods.

First Average DownlinkReceive Level (FullRate)

Indicates the average received signal levels (full rate) of the MSscorresponding to all the TRXs in the previous period.

Second AverageDownlink Receive Level(Full Rate)

Indicates the average received signal levels (full rate) of the MSscorresponding to all the TRXs in the next period.

Average DownlinkReceive LevelDifference (Full Rate)

Indicates the differences of the average received signal levels (fullrate) of the MSs corresponding to all the TRXs in the previousand next periods.

First Average UplinkReceive Level (HalfRate)

Indicates the average received signal levels (half rate) of the BTSscorresponding to all the TRXs in the previous period.

Second Average UplinkReceive Level (HalfRate)

Indicates the average received signal levels (half rate) of the BTSscorresponding to all the TRXs in the next period.

Average Uplink ReceiveLevel Difference (HalfRate)

Indicates the differences of the average received signal levels(half rate) of the BTSs corresponding to all the TRXs in theprevious and next periods.

First Average DownlinkReceive Level (HalfRate)

Indicates the average received signal levels (half rate) of the MSscorresponding to all the TRXs in the previous period.

Second AverageDownlink Receive Level(Half Rate)

Indicates the average received signal levels (half rate) of the MSscorresponding to all the TRXs in the next period.

Average DownlinkReceive LevelDifference (Half Rate)

Indicates the differences of the average received signal levels(half rate) of the MSs corresponding to all the TRXs in theprevious and next periods.

First Average TADistribution

Indicates the weighted average TA that the MS uses to advanceits timings of transmissions to the BTS in the previous period.



8-77


Second Average TADistribution

Indicates the weighted average TA that the MS uses to advanceits timings of transmissions to the BTS in the next period.

Average TA DistributionDifference

Indicates the difference of the weighted average TAs that the MSuses to advance its timings of transmissions to the BTS in theprevious and next periods.

First Link Balance Indicates the dB value in the previous period, which is calculatedthrough this expression: Average received level of the MScorresponding to each TRX - Average received level of the BTScorresponding to each TRX - Difference between the values ofthe average sensitivity of the MS and BTS.

Second Link Balance Indicates the dB value in the next period, which is calculatedthrough this expression: Average received level of the MScorresponding to each TRX - Average received level of the BTScorresponding to each TRX - Difference between the values ofthe average sensitivity of the MS and BTS.

Link Balance Difference Indicates the difference between the value of First Link Balanceand the value of Second Link Balance.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

9 GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis

About This Chapter

This describes the GSM neighboring cell analysis. The GSM neighboring cell analysis supportsthe management of neighboring cell analysis tasks, check of the GSM neighboring cell analysisreports, and export of the GSM neighboring cell analysis reports. The Nastar performanceanalysis system supports the analysis of defined and undefined GSM neighboring cells. By usingthis function, you can identify and handle the problem of redundant or missing neighboring cellconfiguration of a cell. Direct display of the information can help you to solve network qualityproblems that are caused by the redundant or missing neighboring cell configuration.

9.1 Basic Knowledge of GSM Neighboring Cell AnalysisThis describes the basic knowledge of the GSM neighboring cell analysis, such as theneighboring cell analysis functions, function application scenarios, and algorithms forneighboring cell analysis. The basic knowledge helps you to perform the operations of GSMneighboring cell analysis.

9.2 Procedure for Using GSM Neighboring Cell AnalysisThis describes the process of the GSM neighboring cell analysis.

9.3 Managing GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis TasksThis describes how to manage the GSM neighboring cell analysis tasks. You can create, modify,delete, suspend, and resume GSM neighboring cell analysis tasks. You can also view the statusand execution progress of a task.

9.4 Querying a GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis ReportThis describes how to query a GSM neighboring cell analysis report. You can check for theredundant or missing neighboring cells under certain BSCs, and then delete the redundantneighboring cells or add missing neighboring cells.

9.5 Querying Co-BCCH and Co-BSIC GSM Cell Analysis ReportsThis section describes how to query co-BCCH and co-BSIC GSM cell analysis reports. You canquery all the neighboring cells of the specified cells. In addition, you can query whether co-BCCH and co-BSIC cells of the current test cell exist among all the cells within a specifieddistance. Based on the query result, you can determine whether to change the BCCH or BSICof the current test cell.

9.6 Querying Co-BCCH GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis ReportsThis section describes how to query the analysis reports of co-BCCH GSM neighboring cells.You can query whether any co-BCCH cells of the current test cell exists among all the

NastarOperator Guide 9 GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis


9-1

neighboring cells of the specified test cell. Based on the query result, you can determine whetherto change the BCCH ARFCN of the current test cell.

9.7 Exporting Neighboring Cell Analysis ReportsThis describes how to export the reports of GSM neighboring cell analysis. You can export thereports of neighboring cell analysis as CSV or XLS files. These files can be imported to theCME of Huawei to improve the neighboring relations on the network.

9.8 Reference for the GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis GUIThis describes the interface for GSM neighboring cell analysis and the relevant parameters.Before performing relevant operations, familiarize yourself with the functions of the GSMneighboring cell analysis.

9 GSM Neighboring Cell AnalysisNastar

Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

9.1 Basic Knowledge of GSM Neighboring Cell AnalysisThis describes the basic knowledge of the GSM neighboring cell analysis, such as theneighboring cell analysis functions, function application scenarios, and algorithms forneighboring cell analysis. The basic knowledge helps you to perform the operations of GSMneighboring cell analysis.

9.1.1 GSM Neighbor Cell Analysis FunctionThis describes the GSM neighboring cell analysis function. This function is used to analyzedefined and undefined GSM neighboring cells. By performing this task, you can check andhandle the problem of redundant or missing neighboring cell configuration of a cell. Directdisplay of the relevant analysis information can help you to solve network quality problems thatare caused by the redundant or missing neighboring cell configuration.

9.1.2 Algorithms for the GSM Neighboring Cell AnalysisThis describes the algorithms for the GSM neighboring cell analysis, such as the algorithms usedto check missing neighboring cells and redundant neighboring cells.

9.1.1 GSM Neighbor Cell Analysis FunctionThis describes the GSM neighboring cell analysis function. This function is used to analyzedefined and undefined GSM neighboring cells. By performing this task, you can check andhandle the problem of redundant or missing neighboring cell configuration of a cell. Directdisplay of the relevant analysis information can help you to solve network quality problems thatare caused by the redundant or missing neighboring cell configuration.

Neighboring Cell AnalysisAfter you set the conditions for checking the redundant or missing neighboring cellconfigurations, the Nastar performance analysis system analyzes the neighboring cells of aselected cell. The analysis results are displayed on a bar chart. In the results, the definedneighboring cells, undefined neighboring cells, redundant neighboring cells, and missingneighboring cells are displayed in different colors.

In addition, the Nastar performance analysis system enables you to export the results of theneighboring cell analysis as files. In the window of the neighboring cell analysis results, youcan add missing neighboring cells, delete the redundant neighboring cells, and create the analysisresult file. Then, the result file provides the optimization suggestions.

You can export the results of the neighboring cell analysis as a CSV or XLS file. The CSV orXLS file can help you to optimize the neighboring cell relations on the network.

Before the neighboring cell analysis, check whether a defined neighboring cell of the test cellis of co-channel and co-BSIC with other cells. If a defined neighboring cell or an undefinedneighboring cell close to the measurement cell is of co-channel and co-BSIC with other cells,the network stability and accuracy of frequency analysis cannot be guaranteed.

Requirements for the NetworkThe network must be stable during the period of collecting data for neighboring cell analysis.Otherwise, the accuracy of the analysis cannot be guaranteed. Table 9-1 describes the networkchanges and their impacts.



9-3

Table 9-1 Network changes and their impacts

Network Change Impact

Adding or deleting BTSs Affects the cell handover and network coverage. In this case, theanalysis result cannot correctly reflect the current network status.

Antenna data changessuch as the changes of theazimuth, tilt angle, andheight

Results in the changes of the cell coverage and networkinterference.

Changes of the transmitpower and the relatedparameters such as thediscontinuoustransmission and powercontrol


Frequency planningchange. For example, anew frequency planningis added to the network.

The change of the configuration data affects the identification ofdefined cells and undefined cells. In this case, the analysis resultcannot correctly reflect the current network status. You areadvised to keep the network stable during the data collectionperiod.

Change of handoverrelations and parameters

Affects the statistical results during the period of collecting andoptimizing the neighboring relation data.

Change of BSC topologyor other NE topology

The BSC is responsible for collecting statistical results. Thus, themeasurement task cannot be normally performed if the networktopology is changed. You are advised to keep the networktopology unchanged during the data collection period.

9.1.2 Algorithms for the GSM Neighboring Cell AnalysisThis describes the algorithms for the GSM neighboring cell analysis, such as the algorithms usedto check missing neighboring cells and redundant neighboring cells.

The algorithms for the GSM neighboring cell analysis are used to check missing neighboringcells and redundant neighboring cells. For details, see Figure 9-1.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Figure 9-1 Algorithms for the GSM neighboring cell analysis

l The algorithms for checking the missing GSM neighboring cells are as follows:

1. Calculate the integrated priority of all the neighboring cells of the measurement cell.The neighboring cells are sorted in descending order of integrated priority. Thesequence numbers of neighboring cells are inversely proportional to integratedpriorities.

2. If the sequence number of a neighboring cell is smaller than or equal to the value ofNo. 1, as shown in Area (1) in Figure 9-1, you can infer that the sequence number ofthis cell is relatively small among the neighboring cells of the measurement cell andthat this cell is the direct neighboring cell of the measurement cell. You are advisedto configure this cell as a neighboring cell.

3. If the integrated priority of a neighboring cell is higher than TH or is TH, and thesequence number of this cell is between the value of No. 1 and the value of No. 2, asshown in Area (2) in Figure 9-1, you can infer that the sequence number of this cellis relatively small in a certain measurement period and that the level of the cell ishigher than the relative level and absolute level. In this case, configure this cell as aneighboring cell.

4. If an undefined cell meets either of the second and third requirements, configure thecell as a missing neighboring cell. Otherwise, do not configure the cell.

l The algorithms for checking the redundant GSM neighboring cells are as follows:

1. Calculate the integrated priority of the neighboring cells of the measurement cell. Theneighboring cells are sorted in descending order of integrated priority. The sequencenumbers of neighboring cells are inversely proportional to integrated priorities.

2. If the sequence number of a neighboring cell is greater than the value of No. 2, asshown in Area (3) in Figure 9-1, you can infer that the sequence number of this cellis relatively large in a certain measurement period and that the level of the cell is rarelyhigher than the relative level and absolute level. In this case, regard this cell as aredundant neighboring cell and delete it.

3. If an undefined cell meets the second requirement, regard this cell as a redundantneighboring cell and delete it. Otherwise, do not configure the cell.



9-5

9.2 Procedure for Using GSM Neighboring Cell AnalysisThis describes the process of the GSM neighboring cell analysis.

Figure 9-2 shows the general process of GSM neighboring cell analysis.

Figure 9-2 Process of GSM neighboring cell analysis

Start

Create a neighboring analysis task

End

Create an E2E task

Query the neighboring cell analysis report

Export the neighboring cell analysis report

Table 9-2 describes the process of GSM neighboring cell analysis.

Table 9-2 Process of GSM neighboring cell analysis

Serial No.


1 Querying NEData



Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Serial No.



You can choose Maintenance > E2E Task Management onthe Nastar client to open the E2E Task Management window,and then create an end-to-end task corresponding to aneighboring cell analysis task. After the task is created, theNastar issues MML commands to M2000, and then M2000issues the received MML commands to the corresponding NE.At last, the NE that receives the MML commands performs themeasurement task and generates measurement results.When you create an E2E task, the Nastar will automaticallycreate a data collection task.

3 Create aneighboringanalysis task

You can create a neighboring cell analysis task in the AnalysisTask Management window of the main interface on the Nastarclient. After the task is created, the Nastar periodically obtainsthe required performance data and neighboring measurementdata from the Nastar database, and then generates an analysisreport through the analysis.

4 Query theneighboring cellanalysis report

You can view the analysis results of the neighboring cell analysistasks that are successfully performed, add missing neighboringcells, and delete redundant neighboring cells.

5 Export theneighboring cellanalysis report

You can export a frequency analysis report from the Nastar.

9.3 Managing GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis TasksThis describes how to manage the GSM neighboring cell analysis tasks. You can create, modify,delete, suspend, and resume GSM neighboring cell analysis tasks. You can also view the statusand execution progress of a task.


9.3.2 Creating a GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis TaskThis describes how to create a GSM neighboring cell analysis task. By performing neighboringcell analysis tasks, the Nastar performance analysis system analyzes the relevant data in thedatabase at the preset time. By checking the analysis results, you can ascertain the network statusand fast locate and solve the network faults.

9.3.3 Modifying a GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis TaskYou can modify the attributes of a GSM neighboring cell analysis task to meet the newrequirement.

9.3.4 Checking a GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis TaskThis describes how to check a GSM neighboring cell analysis task. You can check the attributes,execution progress, and execution results of a GSM neighboring cell analysis task.



9-7





Procedure




If ... Then ...



Step 4 Perform the following operations to create a neighboring GSM cell measurement task.1. Set the basic information about the task.

a. In Task Name, type the name of the neighboring cell measurement task.b. From the OSS Name drop-down list box, select the OSS that is related to the E2E

task.c. In E2E Task List, select GSM Neighbouring Cell Task.


3. Set Persist Time (Minute), Period, and Measure Step.l Persist Time (Minute) indicates the total duration that the measurement task is

performed.l Period indicates the interval at which each group of frequencies is measured.





Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

You can select Up or Down in the Direction area to define the search area.5. Set the frequency.

NOTE

Before setting the frequency, set Measure Step. The frequencies that you select are organized intogroups according to Measure Step that you set. For example, if Measure Step is set to 2 and thefrequencies 59, 60, and 61 are selected, the frequencies are organized into two groups. One groupconsists of frequencies 59 and 60, and the other group consists of frequency 61.

In a measurement period, the M2000 measures these frequency groups in turn. After setting thefrequency is complete, you can also modify the value of Measure Step to reorganize the frequencies.



















9-9


----End








9.3.2 Creating a GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis TaskThis describes how to create a GSM neighboring cell analysis task. By performing neighboringcell analysis tasks, the Nastar performance analysis system analyzes the relevant data in thedatabase at the preset time. By checking the analysis results, you can ascertain the network statusand fast locate and solve the network faults.



Contextl Tasks of this type can be performed only once.

l The system supports a maximum of 50 tasks of this type. The time range of the data to beanalyzed cannot exceed 15 days.

Procedure


Step 2 Set the basic task information such as Task Name, Task Type, and Note.The value of Execution Type can be only Once Task.

Step 3 Click Next.

Step 4 Set Time Setting for Once Task Data.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Step 5 Click Next.



point of the navigation tree and then press Ctrl+F to display the Find dialog box. Type thekeywords, that is, the search condition, in the dialog box. Then, the system searches for thequery result that meets the search condition.– You can select Case sensitive to ensure that the keywords you typed are case sensitive.– You can select Up or Down in the Direction area to define the search area.

Step 7 Set Neighboring Optimization Parameter. on the Parameter Setting tab page.


----End


You can delete a neighboring cell analysis task that is not required so that you can savesystem resources.

NOTE


1. Choose GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis Task from the navigation tree in theAnalysis Task Management window.If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performanceanalysis tasks.


l Suspending a taskThis describes how to suspend a neighboring cell analysis task. To delay the task execution,you can suspend a neighboring cell analysis task that is in the Idle state. After this operation,the neighboring cell analysis task is in the suspended state.

NOTE

The system can schedule only the neighboring cell analysis tasks that are not suspended.




l Resuming a taskYou can resume a suspended neighboring cell analysis task to the idle state. Then, the taskcan be scheduled by the system.



9-11

NOTE

Only the neighboring cell analysis tasks that are in the idle state can be scheduled by the system.



9.3.3 Modifying a GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis TaskYou can modify the attributes of a GSM neighboring cell analysis task to meet the newrequirement.


l A GSM neighboring cell analysis task is created.


Procedure

Step 1 Choose GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis TaskManagement window.If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysistasks.


Step 3 Modify the relevant parameter settings.l For details about the parameters, see 9.8.3 Parameters for Creating and Modifying GSM

Neighboring Cell Analysis Tasks.l You can modify the Note parameter in the basic information, the Data Time Scope and

Task Start At parameters in the time information, the information about the navigation treeof objects, and the Neighboring Optimization Parameter parameter.


----End

9.3.4 Checking a GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis TaskThis describes how to check a GSM neighboring cell analysis task. You can check the attributes,execution progress, and execution results of a GSM neighboring cell analysis task.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


l A GSM neighboring cell analysis task is created.

Procedure



Purpose Operation

Checking the attributes of a neighboringcell analysis task

Select a task from the task list in the upper-

right pane. Double-click the task or click .

You can check the attributes of the selectedtask and modify the relevant parametersettings. For detailed operations, see 9.3.3Modifying a GSM Neighboring CellAnalysis Task.

Checking the execution progress of theactive task

Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane. Then, you can view the executionprogress of the task in the Progress column.

Checking the task execution results Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane. Then, you can view the results ofthe previous execution of the selected task inthe Last Running Result column.

You can view all the analysis results of aselected task in the lower-right pane.NOTE

In the result list, if the result information about tasksthat fail to be executed at a certain period alreadyexists in the database, you can right-click the results,and then choose Analyze Result Again from theshortcut menu to analyze the results of this periodagain. Only the results of tasks that fail to beexecuted are analyzed again.

----End





9-13



9.4 Querying a GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis ReportThis describes how to query a GSM neighboring cell analysis report. You can check for theredundant or missing neighboring cells under certain BSCs, and then delete the redundantneighboring cells or add missing neighboring cells.


Procedure



Step 3 Double-click a result, or right-click a result and choose Analysis Report from the shortcut menu.The Neighboring Cell Analysis window is displayed.This operation can be performed only when Result Status of a task is Successful. Otherwise,the shortcut menu is unavailable.

Step 4 Select a cell from the measurement cell list in Area (1) in the Neighboring Cell Analysiswindow.l For the specific rules of dividing areas, see 9.8.1 Interface Description: GSM Neighboring

Cell Analysis.l The defined neighboring cells of the selected cell are displayed in the defined neighboring

cell list in Area (2). The undefined neighboring cells of the selected cell are displayed in theundefined neighboring cell list in Area (3).The system determines the redundant neighboring cells, missing neighboring cells, co-channel neighboring cells, and neighboring cells requiring no operations according to theneighboring cell analysis algorithms. It also provides the relevant operations.For details about the neighboring cell analysis algorithms, see 9.1.2 Algorithms for theGSM Neighboring Cell Analysis.You can double-click the defined neighboring cell list area or the undefined neighboring celllist to zoom in the area, and then double-click the area again to restore the area to the originalsize.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

l In the lower pane, that is, Area (4), the undefined neighboring cells, defined neighboringcells, redundant neighboring cells, and missing neighboring cells are displayed in legends indifferent colors. You can select a parameter from the drop-down list box above Area (4).Then, the parameter values corresponding to each neighboring cell are displayed on a linechart.The chart in Area (4) displays only the top 32 neighboring cells with the highest integratedpriorities.

----End









9.5 Querying Co-BCCH and Co-BSIC GSM Cell AnalysisReports

This section describes how to query co-BCCH and co-BSIC GSM cell analysis reports. You canquery all the neighboring cells of the specified cells. In addition, you can query whether co-BCCH and co-BSIC cells of the current test cell exist among all the cells within a specifieddistance. Based on the query result, you can determine whether to change the BCCH or BSICof the current test cell.




9-15

Procedure



Step 3 Right-click a result and choose Same BCCH & BSIC Checking from the shortcut menu. TheSame BCCH & BSIC Checking Result window is displayed.This operation can be performed only when Result Status of a task is Successful. Otherwise,the shortcut menu is unavailable.

Step 4 In the Same BCCH & BSIC Checking Result window, view the co-BCCH and co-BSICanalysis result of all the cells involved in the task.

----End




9.6 Querying Co-BCCH GSM Neighboring Cell AnalysisReports

This section describes how to query the analysis reports of co-BCCH GSM neighboring cells.You can query whether any co-BCCH cells of the current test cell exists among all theneighboring cells of the specified test cell. Based on the query result, you can determine whetherto change the BCCH ARFCN of the current test cell.


Procedure



Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


Step 3 Right-click a result and choose Same BCCH With Neighboring Cells Analysis from theshortcut menu. The Same BCCH With Neighboring Cells Analysis Result window isdisplayed.This operation can be performed only when Result Status of a task is Successful. Otherwise,the shortcut menu is unavailable.

Step 4 In the Same BCCH With Neighboring Cells Analysis Result window, view the co-BCCHneighboring cell analysis result of all the cells involved in the task.

----End




9.7 Exporting Neighboring Cell Analysis ReportsThis describes how to export the reports of GSM neighboring cell analysis. You can export thereports of neighboring cell analysis as CSV or XLS files. These files can be imported to theCME of Huawei to improve the neighboring relations on the network.


l You have checked the reports of GSM neighboring cell analysis.

Procedurel Perform the following operations as required:



9-17


Export the overview information aboutneighboring cells

1. Click in the Neighboring CellAnalysis window. The Save As dialog boxis displayed.

2. Set the name, type and save path of the file.Then, click Save.After being saved, a CSV or XLS file isautomatically open so that you can view thefile conveniently.The CSV or XLS file contains thefollowing information: the task name,creator, start time and end time of theresults, and measurement cell.

Export the results of optimizing theneighboring relations of ameasurement cell


2. Set the name, type and save path of the file.Then, click Save.After being saved, a CSV or XLS file isautomatically open so that you can view thefile conveniently.The CSV or XLS file contains thefollowing information: the task name,creator, start time and end time of theresults, BSC where the measurement cell islocated, ID of the measurement cell,defined neighboring cells, and undefinedneighboring cells.

Export the information about thepossible neighboring cells of ameasurement cell


2. Set the name, type and save path of the file.Then, click Save.After being saved, a CSV or XLS file isautomatically open so that you can view thefile conveniently.The CSV or XLS file contains thefollowing information: the task name,creator, start time and end time of theresults, and possible neighboring cells ofthe measurement cell.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


Export all neighboring celloptimization results

1. Click in the Neighboring CellAnalysis window. The Save As dialog boxis displayed.If the analysis result data amount of all theneighboring cells is large, it takes sometime for the dialog box to be displayed.

2. Set the save path of the file. Then, clickSave.You are allowed to save only the analysisresults of all neighboring cells as XLS filesby BSC. The analysis result of theneighboring cells of each cell correspondsto one XLS file.The naming convention is task name_NEname_NCS.xls.

NOTE

l Exporting neighboring cell overview results refers to exporting the information about all themeasurement cells involved in the selected analysis task.

l Exporting the optimization results of the neighboring cells of a measurement cell refers toexporting the information about the defined and undefined neighboring cells of a measurementcell.

l Exporting the analysis results of possible neighboring cells refers to exporting the informationabout the possible neighboring cells of of each measurement cell.

l Exporting the analysis results of all neighboring cells refers to exporting the information aboutall defined and undefined neighboring cells of each measurement cell.

----End

9.8 Reference for the GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis GUIThis describes the interface for GSM neighboring cell analysis and the relevant parameters.Before performing relevant operations, familiarize yourself with the functions of the GSMneighboring cell analysis.

9.8.1 Interface Description: GSM Neighboring Cell AnalysisThis describes the interface for GSM neighboring cell analysis. Before performing relevantoperations, familiarize yourself with the rules for dividing areas on the interface.


9.8.3 Parameters for Creating and Modifying GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis TasksThis describes the parameters for creating and modifying GSM neighboring cell analysis tasks.You can refer to the description when creating or modifying a GSM neighboring cell analysistask.



9-19

9.8.4 Parameters for Querying the Analysis Reports of GSM Neighboring CellsThis describes the parameters for querying the Analysis Reports of GSM Neighboring Cells.You can refer to the description when querying the analysis reports of GSM neighboring cells.

9.8.5 Parameters for Querying Co-BCCH and Co-BSIC GSM Cell Analysis ReportThis section describes the parameters for querying the co-BCCH and co-BSIC GSM cell analysisreports. You can refer to the description when querying the co-BCCH and co-BSIC GSM cellanalysis reports.

9.8.6 Parameters for Querying the Co-BCCH GSM Neighboring Cell Analysis ReportsThis section describes the parameters for querying the analysis reports of co-BCCH GSMneighboring cells. You can refer to the description when querying the analysis reports of co-BCCH GSM neighboring cells.

9.8.1 Interface Description: GSM Neighboring Cell AnalysisThis describes the interface for GSM neighboring cell analysis. Before performing relevantoperations, familiarize yourself with the rules for dividing areas on the interface.

The neighboring cell analysis results can be displayed in table or in histogram mode, as shownin Figure 9-3.

Figure 9-3 Interface for the neighboring cell analysis


(1) List of current measurement cellinformation

Displays the information about the currentmeasurement cell.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


(2) List of defined neighboring cells Displays all the defined neighboring cells ofthe cell selected in Area (1)

(3) List of undefined neighboring cells Displays all the undefined neighboring cellsof the cell selected in Area (1)

(4) Chart area Displays the information about all theneighboring cells of the selected measurementcell in histogram mode or in line chart

NOTE

l If the names of two or more cells are the same,the cell names on the X-Axis are displayed asCellName(BCCH,BSIC).

l If the cell names cannot be found, the cell nameson the X-Axis are displayed as(BCCH,BSIC).

(5) Button area Four buttons are provided to export allinformation about the neighboring cell, theneighboring cell optimization results of themeasurement cell, the analysis results ofpossible neighboring cells, and allneighboring cell optimization results.


Description of the parameters of GSM neighboring cell measurement tasks


Basicinformation









9-21


Measurementperiod

















Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

NOTE






Basicinformation




Measureinformation




l EGSM_900

l GSM850

l P_GSM900

l PSC1900

l R_GSM900




9-23






9.8.3 Parameters for Creating and Modifying GSM NeighboringCell Analysis Tasks

This describes the parameters for creating and modifying GSM neighboring cell analysis tasks.You can refer to the description when creating or modifying a GSM neighboring cell analysistask.


BasicInformation

Task Name Indicates the name of a neighboring cell analysistask.Value range:l A maximum of 60 characters



l Case sensitive

Task Type You need to select GSM Neighboring CellAnalysis Task from the Task Type navigation tree.

Execution Type Such a task can be executed only once in a timesegment.




Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


TimeInformation




ObjectInformation




Display Number ofUndefinedNeighboring Cells

Indicates that only the TopN frequencies ofundefined neighboring cells are displayed.N can be any integer from 20 to 150. The defaultvalue is 30.

Neighboring Cell RankNo.1

Indicates the lower threshold of the neighboring cellsequence numbers. Undefined neighboring cellswhose sequence number is smaller than or equal tothe value of this parameter are missing neighboringcells.This parameter can be set to any integer from 1 to32. The default value is 6.This parameter must be set to a value smaller thanthe value of Neighboring Cell Rank No.2.

Neighboring Cell RankNo.2

Indicates the upper threshold of the neighboring cellsequence numbers. Defined cells whose sequencenumber is greater than or equal to the value of thisparameter are redundant neighboring cells.This parameter can be set to any integer from 1 to32. The default value is 22.This parameter must be set to a value greater thanthe value of Neighboring Cell Rank No.1.



9-25


Neighboring CellIntegrated Priority TH

Indicates the threshold of the integrated priority ofneighboring cells. Undefined neighboring cellswhose sequence number is smaller than the value ofNeighboring Cell Rank No.1 or whose integratedpriority is greater than this threshold and sequencenumber is between Neighboring Cell Rank No.1and Neighboring Cell Rank No.2 are missingneighboring cells. Defined neighboring cells whosesequence number is greater than the value ofNeighboring Cell Rank No.2 are redundantneighboring cells.This parameter can be set to a floating numberbetween 0 and 100. It can be a floating number withfour digits after the decimal point. The default valueis 2.

Omni Gain Indicates the omnidirectional gain of an antenna.This parameter can be set to any integer from 0 to15. The default value is 11.Unit: dbi

Directive Gain Indicates the directional gain of an antenna.This parameter can be set to any integer from 0 to25. The default value is 17.Unit: dbi

9.8.4 Parameters for Querying the Analysis Reports of GSMNeighboring Cells

This describes the parameters for querying the Analysis Reports of GSM Neighboring Cells.You can refer to the description when querying the analysis reports of GSM neighboring cells.

NOTE

For details about the rules for dividing areas, see 9.8.1 Interface Description: GSM Neighboring CellAnalysis.

Parameters Related to the Information About a Test CellParameter Description

BSC Where Test CellIs Located

Indicates the name of the BSC that a measurement cell belongs to, forexample, BSC_1.

Test Cell Name Indicates the name of a measurement cell, for example, Cell_1.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


Total Number ofMeasurementReports

Indicates the total number of MRs received by a measurement cell.

Number ofRedundantNeighboring Cells

Indicates the number of redundant neighboring cells of the selectedmeasurement cell.

Percentage ofMeasurement Reporton RedundantNeighboring Cells(%)

Indicates the sum of the integrated priority of the redundantneighboring cells of the selected measurement cell in Area (2).

Number of NotConfiguredNeighboring Cells

Indicates the number of missing neighboring cells of the selectedmeasurement cell.

Percentage ofMeasurement Reporton Not ConfiguredNeighboring Cells(%)

Indicates the sum of the integrated priority of the missing neighboringcells of the selected measurement cell in Area (2).

LAC Indicates the location area code of the selected measurement cell.

CI Indicates the ID of the selected measurement cell.

BCCH Indicates the broadcast control channel of the selected measurementcell.

BSIC Indicates the base station identity code of the selected measurementcell.

Test Cell ID Indicates the ID of the selected measurement cell.

Parameters Related to the Defined Neighboring Cell InformationParameter Description

DefinedNeighboring CellName

Indicates the name of a defined neighboring cell of the selectedmeasurement cell.

CGI Indicates the global ID of a defined neighboring cell.

Neighboring CellBCCH

Indicates the broadcast control channel of a defined neighboring cell.

Neighboring CellBSIC

Indicates the base station identity code of a defined neighboring cell.



9-27


Whether ExteriorNeighboring Cell

Indicates whether the defined neighboring cell and the test cell arecontrolled by different BSCs.

Suggested Operation Indicates the operation suggestions that the Nastar provides.The options are Redundant Neighboring Cell, Co-ChannelNeighboring Cell, or No Operation.

User Modify Indicates whether the user operations are recommended.If this option is selected, you can infer that you are advised to performmodification according to Suggested Operation. Otherwise, no useroperation is recommended.

Integrated PriorityTH (%)

Indicates the integrated priority of the neighboring cell, which iscalculated according to the following expression: Number of MRsrelated to the neighboring cell level that is higher than the relativelevel and absolute level/Total number of MRs of the test cell x 100%

Priority Indicates the sequence number of the defined neighboring cell of theselected measurement cell. The sequence number is obtained after allthe neighboring cells of the selected measurement cell are sortedaccording to the integrated priority.

Distance (km) Indicates the distance from the selected measurement cell to a definedneighboring cell.

In BA Time(min) Indicates the duration that a defined neighboring cell is measured.

Number ofNeighboringMeasurementReports

Indicates the number of MRs of a defined neighboring cell.

Test Cell SignalStrength (dBm)

Indicates the average signal strength of the selected test cell.

Neighboring CellSignal Strength(dBm)

Indicates the average signal strength of the defined neighboring cell.

Mean S-NDifference

Indicates the average difference between the signal strength of theselected measurement cell and the signal strength of the definedneighboring cell.

>Relative TH MRs Indicates the number of MRs related to the information that thedifference between the signal strength of the defined neighboring celland the signal strength of the measurement cell is greater than thethreshold of the relative level.

>Absolute TH MRs Indicates the number of MRs related to the information that the signalstrength of the defined neighboring cell is greater than the thresholdof the absolute level.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Parameters Related to the Undefined Neighboring Cell InformationParameter Description

UndefinedNeighboring CellName

Indicates the name of an undefined neighboring cell of the selectedmeasurement cell.

CGI Indicates the global ID of an undefined neighboring cell.

Neighboring CellBCCH

Indicates the broadcast control channel of an undefined neighboringcell.

Neighboring CellBSIC

Indicates the base station identity code of an undefined neighboringcell.

Whether ExteriorNeighboring Cell

Indicates whether an undefined neighboring cell and a test cell arecontrolled by different BSCs.

Suggested Operation Indicates the operation suggestions that the Nastar provides.The options are Not Configured Neighboring Cell, Co-ChannelNeighboring Cell, or No Operation.

User Modify Indicates whether the user operations are recommended.If this option is selected, you can infer that you are advised to performmodification according to Suggested Operation. Otherwise, no useroperation is recommended.

Integrated PriorityTH (%)

Indicates the integrated priority of the neighboring cell, which iscalculated according to the following expression: Number of MRsrelated to the neighboring cell level that is higher than the relativelevel and absolute level/Total number of MRs of the test cell x 100%

Priority Indicates the sequence number of an undefined neighboring cell ofthe selected measurement cell. The sequence number is obtained afterall the neighboring cells of the selected measurement cell are sortedaccording to the integrated priority.

Distance (km) Indicates the distance from the selected measurement cell to anundefined neighboring cell.

In BA Time(min) Indicates the duration that an undefined neighboring cell is measured.

Number ofNeighboringMeasurementReports

Indicates the number of MRs of an undefined neighboring cell.

Test Cell SignalStrength (dBm)

Indicates the average signal strength of the selected test cell.

Neighboring CellSignal Strength(dBm)

Indicates the average signal strength of an undefined neighboring cell.



9-29


Mean S-NDifference

Indicates the average difference between the signal strength of theselected measurement cell and the signal strength of the undefinedneighboring cell.

>Relative TH MRs Indicates the number of MRs related to the information that thedifference between the signal strength of the undefined neighboringcell and the signal strength of the measurement cell is greater than therelative level threshold.

>Absolute TH MRs Indicates the number of MRs related to the information that the signalstrength of the undefined neighboring cell is greater than the thresholdof the absolute level.

9.8.5 Parameters for Querying Co-BCCH and Co-BSIC GSM CellAnalysis Report

This section describes the parameters for querying the co-BCCH and co-BSIC GSM cell analysisreports. You can refer to the description when querying the co-BCCH and co-BSIC GSM cellanalysis reports.


SBSC Indicates the name of the BSC that a measurement cell belongs to, forexample, BSC_1.

SCELL Indicates the name of a measurement cell, for example, Cell_1.

CGI Indicates the global ID of a measurement cell.

BCCH Indicates the broadcast control channel of a measurement cell.

BSIC Indicates the base station identity code of a measurement cell.

NCELL Indicates the name of a neighboring cell of the selected measurementcell.

NCGI Indicates the global ID of a neighboring cell of the selectedmeasurement cell.

ANGLE Indicates the antenna azimuth of a measurement cell.

DISTANCE Indicates the distance between the measurement cell and the currentneighboring cell.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

9.8.6 Parameters for Querying the Co-BCCH GSM NeighboringCell Analysis Reports

This section describes the parameters for querying the analysis reports of co-BCCH GSMneighboring cells. You can refer to the description when querying the analysis reports of co-BCCH GSM neighboring cells.


SBSC Indicates the name of the BSC that a measurement cell belongs to, forexample, BSC_1.

SCELL Indicates the name of a measurement cell, for example, Cell_1.

CGI Indicates the global ID of a measurement cell.



NCELL Indicates the name of a neighboring cell of the selected measurementcell.

NBSC Indicates the name of the BSC that a neighboring cell of the selectedmeasurement cell belongs to.

NCGI Indicates the global ID of a neighboring cell of the selectedmeasurement cell.

NBCCH Indicates the broadcast control channel of a neighboring cell of theselected measurement cell.

NBSIC Indicates the base station identity code of a neighboring cell of theselected measurement cell.



9-31

10 GSM Frequency Analysis

About This Chapter

GSM frequency analysis involves the following operations on GSM frequencies: managinganalysis tasks, querying analysis reports, exporting analysis reports, and querying optimizationreports. The system allows for analysis of MR-based interference matrix frequency interferencematrix, which helps you adjust the frequencies. You can also create frequency optimizationsolutions based on the frequency interference matrix and identify the feasibility of a solution byanalyzing the frequency optimization results.

10.1 Basic Knowledge of GSM Frequency AnalysisThis provides the basic knowledge of the GSM frequency analysis, which covers the followingaspects: frequency analysis functions, function application scenarios, frequency analysisalgorithms, frequency optimization algorithms, and ARFCN spacing rules. The basic knowledgehelps you analyze and optimize the GSM frequencies more efficiently.

10.2 Procedure for Using GSM Frequency AnalysisThis describes the process of GSM frequency analysis.

10.3 Managing GSM Frequency Analysis TasksThis describes how to manage the GSM frequency analysis tasks. You can create, modify, delete,suspend, and resume GSM frequency analysis tasks. You can also view the status and executionprogress of a task.

10.4 Querying GSM Frequency Analysis ReportsThis describes how to query the GSM frequency analysis reports. You can query the relevantfrequency analysis reports as required. Through the information about the interference matrixand frequency interference matrix in the reports, you can know the cells and frequencies withstrong interference. The GSM frequency reports can be classified into reports of measurementcells, reports of GSM cell interference matrix, and reports of GSM cell frequency interferencematrix.

10.5 Querying the GSM Frequency Optimization ReportThe Nastar performance analysis system allows you to query GSM frequency optimizationreports. You can select the automatic frequency optimization or enable the Nastar to performthe frequency optimization by manually setting the related parameters.

10.6 Exporting GSM Interference Analysis Reports

NastarOperator Guide 10 GSM Frequency Analysis


10-1

This describes how to export the reports of GSM interference analysis. You can export the reportsof frequency analysis as CSV or XLS files. These files can be imported to the CME of Huaweito reduce the cell frequency interference on the network.

10.7 Exporting GSM Frequency Optimization ReportsThe Nastar performance analysis system allows you to export GSM frequency optimizationreports. You can export the queried frequency optimization results to a CSV or an XLS file forfuture comparison and analysis.

10.8 Reference for the GSM Frequency Analysis GUIThis describes the interface for GSM frequency analysis and the relevant parameters. Beforeperforming relevant operations, familiarize yourself with the GSM frequency analysis functions.

10 GSM Frequency AnalysisNastar

Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

10.1 Basic Knowledge of GSM Frequency AnalysisThis provides the basic knowledge of the GSM frequency analysis, which covers the followingaspects: frequency analysis functions, function application scenarios, frequency analysisalgorithms, frequency optimization algorithms, and ARFCN spacing rules. The basic knowledgehelps you analyze and optimize the GSM frequencies more efficiently.

10.1.1 GSM Frequency Analysis FunctionThis describes the GSM frequency analysis function. By using this function, you can analyzethe cell interference matrix and frequency interference matrix, check the interference betweena cell and its neighboring cells, evaluate the results of the frequency planning, and analyze thestrongly interfered cells and frequency.

10.1.2 Process of GSM Frequency AnalysisThis describes the process of GSM frequency analysis, which helps you perform frequencyanalysis more efficiently.

10.1.3 Process of GSM Frequency OptimizationThis describes the process of GSM frequency optimization, which helps you perform frequencyoptimization more efficiently.

10.1.4 Spacing Rules of GSM ARFCNsThis describes the spacing rules of GSM ARFCNs, which help you optimize the frequenciesmore efficiently.

10.1.1 GSM Frequency Analysis FunctionThis describes the GSM frequency analysis function. By using this function, you can analyzethe cell interference matrix and frequency interference matrix, check the interference betweena cell and its neighboring cells, evaluate the results of the frequency planning, and analyze thestrongly interfered cells and frequency.

Frequency AnalysisThe Nastar performance analysis system provides the interference traffic of each neighboringcell of the measurement cell, and exports the interference matrix of each cell in a report.

The output of the interference matrix is based on the real traffic of the network. The system canaccurately calculate the ratio of the interference traffic to the cell traffic during the frequencyadjustment.

Before the frequency analysis, check whether a defined neighboring cell of the measurementcell is of co-channel and co-BSIC with other cells. If a defined neighboring cell or an undefinedneighboring cell close to the measurement cell is of co-channel and co-BSIC with other cells, itaffects the network stability and accuracy of the frequency analysis.

In addition, the Nastar performance analysis system enables you to export the frequency analysisresults as a CSV or XLS file.

Requirements for the NetworkThe network must be stable during the period of collecting data for frequency analysis.Otherwise, the accuracy of the analysis cannot be guaranteed. Table 10-1 describes the networkchanges and their impacts.



10-3






Changes of the transmitpower and the relatedparameters such as thediscontinuoustransmission and powercontrol


Frequency planningchange. For example, anew frequency planningis added to the network

The change of the configuration data affects the identification ofdefined cells and undefined cells. In this case, the analysis resultcannot correctly reflect the current network status. You areadvised to keep the network stable during the data collectionperiod.

Change of handoverrelations and parameters


Change of the BSCtopology or other NEtopologies

The BSC is responsible for collecting statistical results. Thus, themeasurement task cannot be normally performed if the networktopology is changed. You are advised to keep the networktopology unchanged during the data collection period.

10.1.2 Process of GSM Frequency AnalysisThis describes the process of GSM frequency analysis, which helps you perform frequencyanalysis more efficiently.

The mechanism of frequency analysis is as follows: The system identifies the interferencebetween a measurement cell and its intra-frequency cells and cells on a neighboring frequency,estimates the result of frequency planning, analyzes the cells and ARFCNs with stronginterference on the current network. For more information about the mechanism, see Figure10-1.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Figure 10-1 Flow chart for frequency analysis

Start

Check the validity and name of an undefined

neighboring cell

Calculate the interference matrices of co-frequency

cells

Calculate the matrix of interference from a

configured frequency to neighboring cells

End

Pre-process data for frequency optimization

Check the name of an undefined neighboring cell

Calculate the frequency interference matrices of a

test cell

Calculate the ICDM matrices of a test cell

10.1.3 Process of GSM Frequency OptimizationThis describes the process of GSM frequency optimization, which helps you perform frequencyoptimization more efficiently.

The mechanism for frequency optimization is as follows: The system identifies the frequencyinterference when a measurement cell in a frequency interference matrix is configured with thecurrent BCCH and TCH among the candidate ARFCNs. Then, it assigns a proper BCCH andproper TCHs for each measurement cell. For more information about the mechanism, see Figure10-2.



10-5

Figure 10-2 Flow chart for frequency optimization

Start

Generate interference matrix through frequency

analysis task

Calculate interference of configured ARFCN

End

Obtain interference matrix of selected cell

Calculate interference over VIP cell

Calculate interference of candidate ARFCNs

10.1.4 Spacing Rules of GSM ARFCNsThis describes the spacing rules of GSM ARFCNs, which help you optimize the frequenciesmore efficiently.

The spacing rules are as follows:l Spacing rules between BCCHs, TCHs, or between a BCCH and a TCH of co-site cells

For example, you select three co-site cells: cell A, cell B, and cell C. The space betweenBCCHs of each cell is set to 2. If you select cell A as the measurement cell, and the BCCHsof cell B and cell C are respectively 16 and 20, the BCCH of cell A should not be 15, 16,17, 19, 20, or 21. If these ARFCNs are present in the candidate BCCHs, the informationabout these ARFCNs are highlighted in pink.

l Spacing rules between BCCHs, TCHs, or between a BCCH and a TCH of one cellEach cell has only one BCCH, and therefore no spacing rules are required between BCCHsof one cell. The space is 0 by default, that is, no restriction exists.For example, the space between TCHs of one cell is set to 2. If the TCHs of the selectedmeasurement cell are 27, 51, and 61, the TCH of this cell should not be 26, 28, 50, 52, 60,or 62. If these ARFCNs are present in the candidate TCHs, the information about theseARFCNs are highlighted in red.

l Spacing rules between BCCHs, TCHs, or between a BCCH and a TCH of a selected celland its defined neighboring cellsFor example, the selected cell, namely, cell A, has cell B, cell C, and cell D as its definedneighboring cells. The BCCH space between cell A and its defined neighboring cells is setto 2. If the BCCHs of the neighboring cells are respectively 16, 19, and 27, the BCCH of


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

cell A should not be 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 26, 27, or 28. If these ARFCNs are present inthe candidate BCCHs, the information about these ARFCNs are highlighted in orange.

The spacing rules between ARFCNs provide a highlighting function. Information aboutARFCNs that violate the co-cell rules is highlighted in red, and the legend is .Information about ARFCNs that violate the co-site rules is highlighted in pink, and the legendis . Information about ARFCNs that violate the neighboring cell rules are highlightedin orange, and the legend is . The system arranges the highlighting of ARFCNsby priority in the following descending order: co-cell ARFCNs, co-site ARFCNs, andneighboring cell ARFCNs. If an ARFCN meets multiple conditions, the information about thisARFCN is highlighted in the color with a higher or the highest priority.

10.2 Procedure for Using GSM Frequency AnalysisThis describes the process of GSM frequency analysis.

Figure 10-3 shows the general process of GSM frequency analysis.

Figure 10-3 Process of GSM frequency analysis

Start

Create a frequency analysis task

End

Create an E2E task

Check the report of the test cell

interference matrix

Check the overview report of a test cell

Check the report of the test cell frequency

interference matrix

Export the frequency analysis report

Table 10-2 describes the process of GSM frequency analysis.



10-7

Table 10-2 Process of GSM frequency analysis

Serial No.


1 Querying NEData



You can choose Maintenance > E2E Task Management onthe Nastar client to open the E2E Task Management window,and then create an end-to-end task corresponding to aneighboring cell analysis task. After the task is created, theNastar issues MML commands to M2000, and then M2000issues the received MML commands to the corresponding NE tostart the measurement task for all objects.NOTE

Starting the measurement task for all objects needs to be performed onlyonce. If this operation has been performed, you do not need to create anend-to-end task corresponding to a neighboring cell task again.


3 Create afrequencyanalysis task

You can create a frequency analysis task in the Analysis TaskManagement window of the main interface on the Nastar client.After the task is created, the Nastar periodically obtains therequired performance data and configuration data from theNastar database, and then generates an analysis report throughthe analysis.

4 l Check theoverviewreport ofmeasurement cells

l Check thereport of thecellinterferencematrix

l Check thereport of thecellfrequencyinterferencematrix

You can view the analysis results of the tasks that aresuccessfully performed, identify the strongly interfered cells andfrequency, and evaluate the frequency planning results.

5 Export thefrequencyanalysis report

You can export a frequency analysis report from the Nastar.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

10.3 Managing GSM Frequency Analysis TasksThis describes how to manage the GSM frequency analysis tasks. You can create, modify, delete,suspend, and resume GSM frequency analysis tasks. You can also view the status and executionprogress of a task.


10.3.2 Creating a GSM Frequency Analysis TaskThis describes how to create a GSM frequency analysis task. By performing frequency analysistasks, the Nastar performance analysis system analyzes the relevant data in the database at thepreset time. By checking the analysis results, you can ascertain the network status and fast locateand solve the network faults.

10.3.3 Modifying a GSM Frequency Analysis TaskYou can modify the attributes of a GSM frequency analysis task to meet the new requirement.

10.3.4 Checking a GSM Frequency Analysis TaskThis describes how to check a GSM frequency analysis task. You can check the attributes,execution progress, and execution results of a GSM frequency analysis task





Procedure




If ... Then ...





10-9











NOTE










task.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

c. In E2E Task List, select GSM Uplink Interference Data Task.2. Click Next to set Time (Minute), that is, the total duration that the measurement task is

performed.3. In the Cell Parameter Setting area, select the cell and frequency band to be measured.








----End

Postrequisite

To view the attributes of a created E2E task, perform the following operations:







10.3.2 Creating a GSM Frequency Analysis TaskThis describes how to create a GSM frequency analysis task. By performing frequency analysistasks, the Nastar performance analysis system analyzes the relevant data in the database at thepreset time. By checking the analysis results, you can ascertain the network status and fast locateand solve the network faults.



10-11



Contextl A frequency analysis task can be performed only once.


Procedure



Step 3 Click Next.


Step 5 Click Next.





Step 7 Set Frequency Analysis Parameter on the Parameter Setting tab page.


----End


You can delete a frequency analysis task that is not required so that you can save systemresources.

NOTE


1. Choose GSM Frequency Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the AnalysisTask Management window.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performanceanalysis tasks.


3. Click Yes in the displayed Confirm dialog box.

l Suspending a task

To delay the task execution, you can suspend a frequency analysis task that is in the idlestate. After this operation, the frequency analysis task is in the suspended state.

NOTE

The system can schedule only the frequency analysis tasks that are not suspended.





l Resuming a task

You can resume a suspended frequency analysis task to the idle state. Then, the task canbe scheduled by the system.

NOTE

Only the frequency analysis task that is in the idle state can be scheduled by the system.




The task can be performed only when its Status is Suspend. If the task is not in thesuspended state, the button is unavailable.

10.3.3 Modifying a GSM Frequency Analysis TaskYou can modify the attributes of a GSM frequency analysis task to meet the new requirement.


l A GSM frequency analysis task is created.




10-13

Procedure

Step 1 Choose GSM Frequency Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis TaskManagement window.If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysistasks.


Step 3 Modify the relevant parameter settings.

l For details about the parameters, see 10.8.4 Parameters for Creating and Modifying GSMFrequency Analysis Tasks.

l You can modify the Note parameter in the basic information, the Data Time Scope andTask Start At parameters in the time information, the information about the navigation treeof objects, and the Frequency Analysis Parameter parameter.


----End

10.3.4 Checking a GSM Frequency Analysis TaskThis describes how to check a GSM frequency analysis task. You can check the attributes,execution progress, and execution results of a GSM frequency analysis task


l A GSM frequency analysis task is created.

Procedure



Purpose Operation

Checking the attributes of a frequencyanalysis task



You can check the attributes of the selected taskand modify the relevant parameter settings. Fordetailed operations, see 10.3.3 Modifying aGSM Frequency Analysis Task.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Purpose Operation


Select a task from the task list in the upper-rightpane. Then, you can view the executionprogress of the task in the Progress column.

Checking the task execution results Select a task from the task list in the upper-rightpane. Then, you can view the results of theprevious execution of the selected task in theLast Running Result column.

You can view all the analysis results of theselected task in the lower-right pane.NOTE


----End





10.4 Querying GSM Frequency Analysis ReportsThis describes how to query the GSM frequency analysis reports. You can query the relevantfrequency analysis reports as required. Through the information about the interference matrixand frequency interference matrix in the reports, you can know the cells and frequencies withstrong interference. The GSM frequency reports can be classified into reports of measurementcells, reports of GSM cell interference matrix, and reports of GSM cell frequency interferencematrix.

10.4.1 Querying the Interference Matrix Report of GSM Measurement CellsThis describes how to query the interference matrix report of the GSM measurement cells. Youcan query the information about the cells involved in a frequency analysis task. With this



10-15

function, you can ascertain the information about the interference from co-channel or adjacent-channel cells to a measurement cell and the interference from a measurement cell to the co-channel or adjacent-channel cells. The Nastar automatically sorts the analyzed cells, determinesthe cells to be optimized, and uses the optimized cells as the basis for later frequency analysis.

10.4.2 Querying the Report of the GSM Cell Interference MatrixThis describes how to query the report of the GSM cell interference matrix. You can query thevolume and proportion of the traffic that is affected by the interference from the measurementcell to a neighboring cell with a co-channel or adjacent-channel, and the volume and proportionof the traffic that is affected by the interference from a neighboring cell with a co-channel oradjacent-channel to the measurement cell. The analysis result of the interference matrix helpsyou learn about the information about the interference between cells and serves as a referencefor frequency optimization.

10.4.3 Querying the Report of the GSM Cell Frequency Interference MatrixThis describes how to query the report of the GSM cell frequency interference matrix. You canquery the traffic that is affected by the interference between a certain frequency of a measurementcell and the BCCH of its neighboring cell. When querying the interference matrix, you can querythe traffic that is affected by the interference between a certain frequency of a measurement celland the co-channel and adjacent channels of its neighboring cells.

10.4.1 Querying the Interference Matrix Report of GSMMeasurement Cells

This describes how to query the interference matrix report of the GSM measurement cells. Youcan query the information about the cells involved in a frequency analysis task. With thisfunction, you can ascertain the information about the interference from co-channel or adjacent-channel cells to a measurement cell and the interference from a measurement cell to the co-channel or adjacent-channel cells. The Nastar automatically sorts the analyzed cells, determinesthe cells to be optimized, and uses the optimized cells as the basis for later frequency analysis.


ProcedureStep 1 Choose GSM Frequency Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task

Management window.If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysistasks.


Step 3 Double-click a result, or right-click a result and choose Analysis Report. The FrequencyAnalysis window is displayed.This operation can be performed only when Result Status of a task is Successful. Otherwise,the shortcut menu is unavailable.

Step 4 View the list of measurement cells in the left pane in the displayed window.For details about the relevant parameters, see 10.8.5 Parameters for Querying the OverviewReport of the GSM Test Cells.

----End


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)









10.4.2 Querying the Report of the GSM Cell Interference MatrixThis describes how to query the report of the GSM cell interference matrix. You can query thevolume and proportion of the traffic that is affected by the interference from the measurementcell to a neighboring cell with a co-channel or adjacent-channel, and the volume and proportionof the traffic that is affected by the interference from a neighboring cell with a co-channel oradjacent-channel to the measurement cell. The analysis result of the interference matrix helpsyou learn about the information about the interference between cells and serves as a referencefor frequency optimization.


Procedure


Step 2 Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane.



10-17

You can view all the analysis results of the selected task in the lower-right pane.


Step 4 Select a measurement cell from the measurement cell list in the left pane and click theInterference Matrix tab in the right pane. Then, view the information about the interface matrix.For details about the relevant parameters, see 10.8.6 Parameters for Querying the Report ofGSM Cell Interference Matrix.

----End




10.4.3 Querying the Report of the GSM Cell Frequency InterferenceMatrix

This describes how to query the report of the GSM cell frequency interference matrix. You canquery the traffic that is affected by the interference between a certain frequency of a measurementcell and the BCCH of its neighboring cell. When querying the interference matrix, you can querythe traffic that is affected by the interference between a certain frequency of a measurement celland the co-channel and adjacent channels of its neighboring cells.


Context

The adjacent channels refer to the frequencies before and after a certain frequency of themeasurement cell. For example, if a BCCH frequency of a measurement cell is 113, its adjacentchannels are 112 and 114.

Procedure



Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Step 4 Select a measurement cell from the measurement cell list in the left pane and click the FrequencyInterference Matrix tab in the right pane. Then, view the information about the frequencyinterference matrix.For details about the relevant parameters, see 10.8.7 Parameters for Querying the Report ofthe GSM Cell Frequency Interference Matrix.

----End






10.5 Querying the GSM Frequency Optimization ReportThe Nastar performance analysis system allows you to query GSM frequency optimizationreports. You can select the automatic frequency optimization or enable the Nastar to performthe frequency optimization by manually setting the related parameters.


Context

Automatic frequency optimization: The Nastar automatically selects ARFCNs to performfrequency optimization. This greatly improves the optimization efficiency and reduces manualoperations.

Manual frequency optimization: You can select certain cells from the interference matrix of afrequency analysis task and then set the algorithm parameters for frequency optimization. Afterthat, you can identify the frequency interference when certain candidate ARFCNs are configuredas the BCCH ARFCN and TCH ARFCN of the measurement cell. In this manner, you can selectproper BCCH and TCH ARFCNs for each measurement cell.



10-19

Procedure



Step 3 In the result information list of the lower right pane, right-click a result, and then chooseFrequency Optimization from the shortcut menu. The GSM Frequency Optimization dialogbox is displayed.l This operation can be performed only when Result Status of a task is Successful. Otherwise,

the shortcut menu is unavailable.l If the query of the GSM frequency optimization report is performed, the default query

conditions in this dialog box are the same as the query conditions set in the last query. Thesedefault query conditions are saved in the \client\plugins\NastarPA\style\conf\FreqConfdirectory of the installation path on the client. Each frequency analysis task corresponds toone file.

Step 4 On the Algorithm Parameter tab page, set the rules for spacing between ARFCNs, BCCHfrequency range, TCH frequency range, VIP cell group, the ARFCNs used by the algorithm.Then, click OK.l In the ARFCN Spacing Rule Setting area, double-click each pane to set the ARFCN spacing

rules. For the relevant rules, see 10.1.4 Spacing Rules of GSM ARFCNs.

l Click on the right of Set the BCCH ARFCN range, Set the TCH ARFCN range, orSet a VIP cell group to select a candidate ARFCN of the BCCH/TCH or select a VIP cellgroup.

l The system allows you to set duplicate ARFCNs serving as both BCCH ARFCNs and TCHARFCNs. That is, the range of BCCH ARFCNs and TCH ARFCNs can be overlapped. Ifduplicate ARFCNs exist, the Nastar analyzes and optimize ARFCNs and does not filter outthe duplicate ARFCNs.

l The system provides a highlighting function for spacing rules of ARFCNs. For details, see10.1.4 Spacing Rules of GSM ARFCNs.

l You can perform frequency optimization based on the current frequency configuration onthe existing network or based on the last modified and submitted frequency ARFCNconfiguration.

l Click in the upper left corner of the window to open the Frequency Usage Analysisdialog box to view the usage of the current BCCH and TCH frequencies, thus helping toimprove the spectrum usage.

Step 5 Select the frequency optimization mode as required.


Select automatic frequency optimization Perform Step 6 through Step 7.

Select manual frequency optimization Perform Step 8 through Step 9.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Step 6 Click in the upper left corner of the window. The GSM Automatic FrequencyOptimization dialog box is displayed.

Step 7 On the Optimize Parameters tab page, set Phase Optimize Range, ARFCN Type, andOptimize Loop Count. Then, click OK.The system automatically selects the ARFCNs and performs frequency optimization.

Step 8 Select a cell from area (1) in the GSM Frequency Optimization window.

l For the rules of dividing areas, see 10.8.2 Interface Description: GSM FrequencyOptimization.

l Area (3) displays all the configured and candidate BCCHs and TCHs of the measurementcell selected in area (1).

Based on the user-defined algorithm parameters, the system calculates and identifies theARFCNs that meet the co-cell rules, co-site rules, and neighboring cell rules, respectively.This information is fundamental for frequency optimization.

l Area (4) displays the interfered traffic, external interference traffic, latest total interferencetraffic, original interference traffic, and total interference traffic in legends of different colors.

Step 9 Optional: Perform either of the following operations on the BCCH or TCH tab page as required:

Purpose Operation

Adding an ARFCN 1. Select an unconfigured ARFCN, and then select the corresponding

option in the Configured column. You can also click in theupper-left corner of the window.

2. Click for the settings to take effect.

Deleting an ARFCN 1. Select a configured ARFCN, and then clear the corresponding option

in the Configured column. You can also click in the upper-leftcorner of the window.

2. Click for the settings to take effect.

After the submission, you can click and to view the interference on each ARFCN beforeand after the submission, respectively. Thus, you can analyze the change of interference on eachARFCN before and after the frequency optimization and identify the feasibility of this frequencyoptimization.

NOTE

l If an ARFCN is already configured as the BCCH in the selected cell, according to Spacing Rules ofARFCNs, this ARFCN cannot be configured as the TCH even if it is within the range of candidateTCH ARFCNs. Otherwise, the Nastar displays an error message, indicating that the ARFCN is alreadyconfigured.

l If you have configured an ARFCN as a TCH of the measurement cell, the neighboring ARFCNs ofthis ARFCN should not be configured as TCHs of this cell.

l For the ARFCNs that violate the spacing rules, a dialog box is displayed during the ARFCN additionoperation. Click Yes to proceed with the operation.

----End



10-21




10.6 Exporting GSM Interference Analysis ReportsThis describes how to export the reports of GSM interference analysis. You can export the reportsof frequency analysis as CSV or XLS files. These files can be imported to the CME of Huaweito reduce the cell frequency interference on the network.


l You have checked the reports of GSM frequency analysis.

Procedurel Perform the following operations as required:


Export the frequency overviewinformation

1. Click in the Frequency Analysiswindow. The Save As dialog box isdisplayed.

2. Set the name, type and save path of thefile. Then, click Save.After being saved, a CSV or XLS file isautomatically open so that you can viewthe file conveniently.

Export the interference informationabout a specified cell




Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


Export the details about the interferencematrix on the entire network



Export the information about thepossible neighboring cells of ameasurement cell



Export an interference comparisonanalysis report

1. Click in the Frequency Analysiswindow. The Select Two Task toCompare dialog box is displayed.

2. Click , and then enter the names of twotasks.

3. Click OK. The Interference CompareResult window is displayed.The window contains three tabs, namely,Overview Compare, BSC Compare,and Cell Compare.

4. After you right-click in the query resultarea and then choose Save as, the Savedialog box is displayed.

5. Set the file name, file type, and save path.Then, click Save.The saved .csv or .xls file is openedautomatically so that you can view itconveniently.



10-23

NOTE

l Exporting frequency overview results refers to exporting the information about all themeasurement cells involved in the selected analysis task.

l Exporting the interference information about a specified cell refers to exporting the mutualinterference information about a measurement cell and its neighboring cells, and the informationabout the frequency interference matrix involved in this measurement cell.

l Exporting the details about the interference matrixes on the entire network refers to exportingthe information about frequency interference matrixes involved in all the measurement cells.

l Exporting the analysis results of possible neighboring cells refers to exporting the informationabout the possible neighboring cells of a measurement cell.

l Exporting the interference comparison analysis report refers to exporting the information aboutthe interference of two frequency analysis tasks.

----End

10.7 Exporting GSM Frequency Optimization ReportsThe Nastar performance analysis system allows you to export GSM frequency optimizationreports. You can export the queried frequency optimization results to a CSV or an XLS file forfuture comparison and analysis.

Prerequisitel You have logged in to the Nastar performance analysis client.

l You have checked the GSM frequency optimization reports.

Procedure

Step 1 In the GSM Frequency Optimization window, click . The Save As dialog box is displayed.

Step 2 Set the filename, file type, and save path. Then, click Save.The saved CSV or XLS file can be open automatically so that you can view it conveniently.

Step 3 (Optional) Export a frequency analysis prediction report.Exporting a frequency analysis prediction report refers to exporting a prediction report of aspecified measurement cell before and after frequency optimization.

1. In the GSM Frequency Optimization window, click . The Interference CompareResult window is displayed.

The window contains three tabs, namely, Overview Compare, BSC Compare, and CellCompare.

2. Right-click in the query result area, and then choose Save as from the shortcut menu. TheSave dialog box is displayed.

3. Set the file name, file type, and save path. Then, click Save.The saved .csv or .xls file is opened automatically so that you can view it conveniently.

----End


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

10.8 Reference for the GSM Frequency Analysis GUIThis describes the interface for GSM frequency analysis and the relevant parameters. Beforeperforming relevant operations, familiarize yourself with the GSM frequency analysis functions.

10.8.1 Interface Description: GSM Frequency AnalysisThis describes the interface for GSM frequency analysis. Before performing relevant operations,familiarize yourself with the rules for dividing areas on the interface.

10.8.2 Interface Description: GSM Frequency OptimizationThis describes the interface for GSM frequency optimization. You can familiarize yourself witheach area to facilitate the operations on this interface.


10.8.4 Parameters for Creating and Modifying GSM Frequency Analysis TasksThis describes the parameters for creating and modifying GSM frequency analysis tasks. Youcan refer to the description when creating or modifying a GSM frequency analysis task.

10.8.5 Parameters for Querying the Overview Report of the GSM Test CellsThis describes the parameters related to querying the overview report of the GSM measurementcells. You can refer to the description when querying the overview report of the GSMmeasurement cells.

10.8.6 Parameters for Querying the Report of GSM Cell Interference MatrixThis describes the parameters for querying the report of the GSM cell interference matrix. Youcan refer to the description when querying the report of the GSM cell interference matrix.

10.8.7 Parameters for Querying the Report of the GSM Cell Frequency Interference MatrixThis describes the parameters for querying the report of the GSM cell frequency interferencematrix. You can refer to the description when querying the report of the GSM cell frequencyinterference matrix.

10.8.8 Parameters for Querying GSM Frequency Optimization ReportsThis describes the parameters for querying the reports of the GSM frequency optimization.

10.8.1 Interface Description: GSM Frequency AnalysisThis describes the interface for GSM frequency analysis. Before performing relevant operations,familiarize yourself with the rules for dividing areas on the interface.

The frequency analysis results can be displayed in a table. The list of summary information aboutthe measurement cells, list of information about interference matrix, and list of information aboutfrequency interference matrix are contained, as shown in Figure 10-4 and Figure 10-5.



10-25

Figure 10-4 Frequency analysis interface (1)


(1) Measurement Cell Overview Information Displays the information about all task-related measurement cells.

(2) Neighboring Cell-Measurement CellInterference Matrix Detail

Displays the traffic interfered by theneighboring cells of the measurement cellselected in Area (1).

(3) Measurement Cell-Neighboring CellInterference Matrix Detail

Displays the traffic affected by theinterference from the measurement cellselected in Area (1) to the defined andundefined neighboring cells.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Figure 10-5 Frequency analysis interface (2)


(4) Frequency Interference Matrix Displays the traffic affected by the interferencebetween the measurement cell selected in Area(1) and its neighboring cells by frequencies.

(5) BCCH Configured Frequency Cell List Displays the interfered traffic between themeasurement cell and its neighboring cells onthe same BCCH or between the measurementcell and its neighboring cells with the adjacentBCCH when the frequency selected in Area (4)is set to be the BCCH of the measurement cell.

(6) Button area Five buttons are provided to export theoverview information about frequencyanalysis, the interference of specified cell, theinterference matrix, the possible neighboringcell analysis results, and the interferancecompare analysis results.



10-27

10.8.2 Interface Description: GSM Frequency OptimizationThis describes the interface for GSM frequency optimization. You can familiarize yourself witheach area to facilitate the operations on this interface.

The frequency optimization results can be tabulated into general information, BCCHinformation, and TCH information, respectively. Figure 10-6 shows the interface.

Figure 10-6 Frequency optimization interface

SN Name Description

(1) General information Shows the information about all themeasurement cells selected in the currenttask.

(2) Button area Provides nine buttons respectively for addinga frequency, deleting a frequency, returningto the previous operation results, switching tothe next operation result, exporting thefrequency optimization results, submittingthe operation, checking frequency usage ratio,interference compare analysing and autofrequency optimizing.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

SN Name Description

(3) BCCH information and TCH information l The BCCH table shows all the configuredand candidate BCCHs of the measurementcell selected in area (1).

l The TCH table shows all the configuredand candidate TCHs of the measurementcell selected in area (1).

At the top of the ARFCN, Total InterferenceTraffic, Interfered Traffic, ExternalInterference Traffic, Interference Trafficto VIP Cells, Latest Total InterferenceTraffic, and Original Total InterferenceTraffic columns, set the ascending order ordescending order. Area (4) displays theimages in a new order.

(4) Image area Shows the information about frequencyinterference in the selected cell in acombination of bar charts and line charts.

(5) Legends of the highlighting function Displays the ARFCNs in different colors thatviolate the related rules of co-cells, co-sites,and neighboring cells.

(6) Algorithm parameter area Displays the algorithm parameters set whenfrequency optimization is queried. Rules forspacing between frequencies, and VIP cellgroups are contained in this area.

By default, this area is hidden. You need to

click on the right of the window to displaythis area.

(7) Current status area Displays the Current Loop Times and theAutomatic Optimize Percent.




10-29


Basicinformation







Measurementperiod













Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)






NOTE






Basicinformation




Measureinformation




10-31




l EGSM_900

l GSM850

l P_GSM900

l PSC1900

l R_GSM900






10.8.4 Parameters for Creating and Modifying GSM FrequencyAnalysis Tasks

This describes the parameters for creating and modifying GSM frequency analysis tasks. Youcan refer to the description when creating or modifying a GSM frequency analysis task.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


BasicInformation

Task Name Indicates the name of a frequency analysis task.Value range:l A maximum of 60 characters



l Case sensitive

Task Type You need to select GSM Frequency AnalysisTask from the Task Type navigation tree.




TimeInformation




ObjectInformation



FrequencyAnalysisParameter

Display Number ofUndefinedNeighboring Cells

Indicates that only the TopN frequencies ofundefined neighboring cells are displayed.N can be any integer from 20 to 999. The defaultvalue is 30.

Co-ChannelInterference C/I

Indicates the threshold of co-channel interference.This parameter can be set to any integer from 6 to15. The default value is 12.Unit: dB



10-33


Adjacent-ChannelInterference C/A

Indicates the threshold of adjacent-channelinterference.This parameter can be set to any integer from -12 to0. The default value is -6.Unit: dB

Omni Gain Indicates the omnidirectional gain of an antenna.This parameter can be set to any integer from 0 to15. The default value is 11.Unit: dbi

Directive Gain Indicates the directional gain of an antenna.This parameter can be set to any integer from 0 to25. The default value is 17.Unit: dbi

Max Distance of theSame BCCH &BSICCheck of NeighboringCells (km)

Indicates the distance of the search for cells with thesame BCCH ARFCN and BSIC as the test cell.If you set this parameter to 0, it indicates that theco-BCCH and co-BSIC check is not performedwhen the BCCH ARFCN is changed.Value range: floating numbers from 0.0 to 20.0.Default value: 5.0.Unit: km

10.8.5 Parameters for Querying the Overview Report of the GSMTest Cells

This describes the parameters related to querying the overview report of the GSM measurementcells. You can refer to the description when querying the overview report of the GSMmeasurement cells.


BSC Name Indicates the name of the BSC that the measurement cell belongs to, forexample, BSC_1.

Test Cell Indicates the name of the measurement cell, for example, Cell_1.

Test Cell CGI Indicates the measurement cell CGI.




Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


Number of Co-BCCHNeighboring Cells(Co-BCCHdefined neighborsand Co-BCCHdefined neighborsof tested cell'sdefined cells.)

Indicates the number of co-channel neighboring cells of a measurementcell, including the defined neighboring cells and undefined neighboringcells.

Probable Co-InterferencedTraffic by neighbor

Indicates the number of MRs received by the measurement cell fromthe co-channel neighboring cells.

Probable Adj-InterferencedTraffic by neighbor

Indicates the number of MRs received by the measurement cell fromthe adjacent-channel cells.

Probable Co-InterferencedTraffic to neighbor

Indicates the number of MRs received by the co-channel neighboringcells from the measurement cell.

Probable Adj-InterferencedTraffic to neighbor

Indicates the number of MRs received by the adjacent-channel cellsfrom the measurement cell.

Total Number ofMeasurementReports on TestCells

Indicates the total number of downlink MRs received by themeasurement cell within the measurement period.

Proximate Co-ChannelNeighboring CellDistance (km)

Indicates the distance from the measurement cell to the nearest co-channel neighboring cell.

10.8.6 Parameters for Querying the Report of GSM Cell InterferenceMatrix

This describes the parameters for querying the report of the GSM cell interference matrix. Youcan refer to the description when querying the report of the GSM cell interference matrix.

Parameter related to the matrix of the interference from other cells to themeasurement cell


Interference Cell Indicates the name of a cell that interferes the measurement cell.



10-35


Interference CellBCCH Frequency

Indicates the broadcast control channel of an interfering cell.

Interference CellBSIC

Indicates the base station identity code of an interfering cell.

Neighboring CellProperty

Indicates the attributes of an interfering cell, such as DefinedNeighboring Cell and Undefined Neighboring Cell.

OverlappingTraffic

Indicates the number of MRs received by the measurement cell fromthe co-channel cells and adjacent-channel cells.

Percentage of Co-InterferencedTraffic byNeighbor(%)

If the BCCH of the measurement cell is set to be the same as that of aneighboring cell, the value of this parameter is calculated according tothe formula: Value = Traffic affected by the interference from a co-channel neighboring cell to the measurement cell/Number ofreports generated by the measurement cell during measurementperiod x 100%

Percentage of Adj-InterferencedTraffic byNeighbor(%)

If the BCCH of the measurement cell is set to the frequency adjacent tothe BCCH of a neighboring cell, the value of this parameter is calculatedaccording to the formula: Value = Traffic affected by the interferencefrom an adjacent-channel neighboring cell to the measurementcell/Number of reports generated by the measurement cell duringmeasurement period x 100%

Probable Co-InterferencedTraffic byNeighbor

Indicates the total traffic affected by the interference from a neighboringcell to the measurement cell when the BCCH of the test cell is the sameas that of the neighboring cell.

Probable Adj-InterferencedTraffic byNeighbor

Indicates the total traffic affected by the interference from a neighboringcell to the measurement cell when the BCCH of the test cell is adjacentto the BCCH of the neighboring cell.

Distance (km) Distance from the measurement cell to a neighboring cell.

Parameter related to the matrix of the interference from the measurement cell to itsneighboring cells


Interfered Cell Indicates the name of a cell interfered by the measurement cell

Interfered CellBCCH

Indicates the broadcast control channel of an interfered cell.

Interfered CellBSIC

Indicates the base station identity code of an interfered cell.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Indicates the attributes of an interfered cell, such as DefinedNeighboring Cell and Undefined Neighboring Cell.

OverlappingTraffic

Indicates the number of MRs received by the co-channel cells andadjacent-channel cells from the measurement cell.

Percentage of Co-InterferencedTraffic to Neighbor(%)

If the BCCH of the measurement cell is set to be the same as that of aneighboring cell, the value of this parameter is calculated according tothe formula: Value = Traffic affected by the interference from themeasurement cell to the co-channel neighboring cell/Number ofreports generated by the measurement cell during measurementperiod x 100%

Percentage of Adj-InterferencedTraffic to Neighbor(%)

If the BCCH of the measurement cell is set to the frequency adjacent tothe BCCH of a neighboring cell, the value of this parameter is calculatedaccording to the formula: Value = Traffic affected by the interferencefrom the measurement cell to the adjacent-channel neighboringcell/Number of reports generated by the test cell duringmeasurement period x 100%

Probable Co-InterferencedTraffic to Neighbor

Indicates the total traffic affected by the interference from themeasurement cell to a neighboring cell when the BCCH of the test cellis the same as that of the neighboring cell.

Probable Adj-InterferencedTraffic to Neighbor

Indicates the total traffic affected by the interference from themeasurement cell to a neighboring cell when the BCCH of the test cellis adjacent to the BCCH of the neighboring cell.

Distance (km) Distance from the measurement cell to an interfered cell.

10.8.7 Parameters for Querying the Report of the GSM CellFrequency Interference Matrix

This describes the parameters for querying the report of the GSM cell frequency interferencematrix. You can refer to the description when querying the report of the GSM cell frequencyinterference matrix.

Parameters Related to Frequency Interference MatrixParameter Description

BCCH Frequency Indicates the BCCHs of the defined and undefined neighboring cells ofthe measurement cell

Traffic of Test CellCaused byNeighboring CellInterference

If the BCCH of the measurement cell is set to the value of BCCHFrequency, the value of this parameter is the total volume of theinterfered traffic of the measurement cell. The interfered traffic iscaused by the co-channel and adjacent-channel neighboring cells of thetest cell.



10-37


Traffic ofNeighboring CellCaused by TestCell Interference

If the BCCH of the measurement cell is set to the value of BCCHFrequency, the value of this parameter is the total volume of theinterfered traffic of the co-channel and adjacent-channel neighboringcells. The interfered traffic is caused by the measurement cell.

Proximate Co-ChannelNeighboring CellDistance (km)

Indicates the distance from the measurement cell to the nearest co-channel cell when the BCCH of the measurement cell is configured tothe value of BCCH Frequency.

Parameters Related to the Cells Whose BCCHs Specified by BCCH FrequencyParameter Description

Interference CellBCCH Frequency

Indicates the broadcast control channel of an interfering cell.

Interference CellBSIC Frequency

Indicates the base station identity code of an interfering cell.

Interference CellID.

Indicates the number of an interfering cell.

Interference CellName

Indicates the name of a cell that interferes the measurement cell.


Indicates the attributes of an interfering cell, such as DefinedNeighboring Cell and Undefined Neighboring Cell.

OverlappingTraffic

Indicates the total number of reports sent from a co-channel cell to themeasurement cell and reports sent from the measurement cell to the co-channel cell.

Percentage of Co-InterferencedTraffic by neighbor(%)

If the BCCH of the measurement cell is the same as that of a neighboringcell, the value of this parameter is calculated according to the formula:Value = Traffic affected by the interference from the co-channelneighboring cell to the measurement cell/Number of reportsgenerated by the measurement cell during measurement period x100%

Percentage of Adj-InterferencedTraffic by neighbor(%)

If the BCCH of the measurement cell is set to the frequency adjacent tothe BCCH of a neighboring cell, the value of this parameter is calculatedaccording to the formula: Value = Traffic affected by the interferencefrom the adjacent-channel neighboring cell to the measurementcell/Number of reports generated by the measurement cell duringmeasurement period x 100%

Probable Co-InterferencedTraffic by neighbor

Indicates the total traffic affected by the interference from a neighboringcell to the measurement cell when the BCCH of the test cell is the sameas that of the neighboring cell.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


Probable Adj-InterferencedTraffic by neighbor

Indicates the total traffic affected by the interference from a neighboringcell to the measurement cell when the BCCH of the test cell is adjacentto the BCCH of the neighboring cell.

Percentage of Co-InterferencedTraffic to neighbor(%)

If the BCCH of the measurement cell is set to be the same as that of aneighboring cell, the value of this parameter is calculated according tothe formula: Value = Traffic affected by the interference from themeasurement cell to the co-channel neighboring cell/Number ofreports generated by the measurement cell during measurementperiod x 100%

Percentage of Adj-InterferencedTraffic to neighbor(%)

If the BCCH of the measurement cell is set to a BCCH adjacent to theBCCH of a neighboring cell, the value of this parameter is calculatedaccording to the formula: Value = Traffic affected by the interferencefrom the measurement cell to the adjacent-channel neighboringcell/Number of reports generated by the test cell duringmeasurement period x 100%

Probable Co-InterferencedTraffic to neighbor

Indicates the total traffic affected by the interference from themeasurement cell to a neighboring cell when the BCCH of the test cellis the same as that of the neighboring cell.

Probable Adj-InterferencedTraffic to neighbor

Indicates the total traffic affected by the interference from themeasurement cell to a neighboring cell when the BCCH of the test cellis adjacent to the BCCH of the neighboring cell.

Distance (km) Indicates the distance from the measurement cell to a neighboring cell.

10.8.8 Parameters for Querying GSM Frequency OptimizationReports

This describes the parameters for querying the reports of the GSM frequency optimization.

Parameter Description of the Current Measurement CellParameter Description

BSC Name Refers to the BSC to which the measurement cell belongs. For example,the BSC is named BSC_1.

Cell Name Refers to the name of the measurement cell. For example, the cell isnamed Cell_1.

BCCH Refers to the broadcast control channel of the current test cell.

LAC Refers to the location code of the current measurement cell.

CI Refers to the cell identity of the current measurement cell.

TCH Refers to the traffic channel of the current measurement cell.



10-39


Total MR Refers to the total number of measurement reports (MRs) of the currentmeasurement cell.

Parameter Description of BCCH/TCH ARFCNsParameter Description

Configured Indicates whether the current ARFCN is configured as the BCCHARFCN or a TCH ARCFN of the selected cell.

ARFCN Indicates the configured and candidate BCCH and TCH ARFCNs ofthe measurement cell.

Cell with theStrongestInterference

Indicates the name of the cell that has the strongest interference overthe measurement cell.This parameter might be null in the following cases:l The system identifies the BCCH and BSIC values of the cell with the

strongest interference but cannot locate the cell according to thesevalues.

l The system fails to identify the BCCH or BSIC value of the cell withthe strongest interference, and these values are displayed as 0, thatis, the cell with the strongest interference is not within theinterference matrix, and thus it cannot be measured.

Cell Measured orNot

Indicates whether the cell with the strongest interference over themeasurement cell is within the interference matrix and causesinterference on the measurement cell, that is, whether the cell with thestrongest interference is measured.The value can be Yes or No.l Yes indicates that the cell with the strongest interference over the

measurement cell is within the interference matrix, that is, the cellwith the strongest interference is measured. In such a case, ExternalInterference Traffic of this ARFCN is reliable.

l No indicates that the cell with the strongest interference over themeasurement cell is not within the interference matrix, that is, thecell with the strongest interference is not measured. In such a case,External Interference Traffic of this ARFCN is unreliable.

MaximumInterferenceTraffic

Indicates the maximum interference traffic received by themeasurement cell when the BCCH/TCH of the measurement cell isconfigured as the current candidate ARFCN.

Total InterferenceTraffic

Indicates the total interference traffic received from and caused to othercells when the BCCH/TCH of the measurement cell is configured asthe current candidate ARFCN.

Interfered Traffic Indicates the total interference traffic received from other cells whenthe BCCH/TCH of the measurement cell is configured as the currentcandidate ARFCN.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


ExternalInterferenceTraffic

Indicates the total interference traffic caused to other cells when theBCCH/TCH of the measurement cell is configured as the currentcandidate ARFCN.

InterferenceTraffic to VIPCells

Indicates the total interference traffic caused to other VIP cells whenthe BCCH/TCH of the measurement cell is configured as the currentcandidate ARFCN.

Latest TotalInterferenceTraffic

Indicates the total interference traffic received from and caused to othercells when the BCCH/TCH of the measurement cell is configured asthe current candidate ARFCN after the latest frequency optimization isperformed.

Original TotalInterferenceTraffic

Indicates the total interference traffic received from and caused to othercells when the BCCH/TCH of the measurement cell is configured asthe ARFCN of the existing network.



10-41

11 GSM Uplink Interference Analysis

About This Chapter

This describes the GSM uplink interference analysis. The GSM uplink interference analysisinvolves the management and query of GSM uplink interference analysis tasks. The Nastarmeasures the uplink levels. By checking the analysis results, you can know the strength of themeasured frequencies received in a certain cell and choose a proper frequency to be used.

11.1 Basic Knowledge of GSM Uplink Interference AnalysisThis describes the GSM uplink interference analysis. The GSM uplink interference analysisfunction is used to analyze the diverse average interference strength and main averageinterference strength of uplink levels. In the network planning, this function enables the networkplanners to look for the frequency resources that are not interfered on the network. In the networkoptimization, this function enables the network planners to look for the frequency resources withbetter quality for the cells with interference sources according to the analysis of the measurementresults. In the network monitoring, this function can be used to monitor the interference levelsof the network.

11.2 Procedure for Using GSM Uplink Interference AnalysisThis describes the process of GSM uplink interference analysis.

11.3 Managing GSM Uplink Interference Analysis TasksThis describes how to manage the GSM uplink interference analysis tasks. You can create,modify, delete, suspend, and resume GSM uplink interference analysis tasks. You can also viewthe status and the execution progress of a task.

11.4 Querying a GSM Uplink Interference Analysis ReportThis describes how to query a GSM uplink-interference analysis report. You can query the signalstrength of the measured frequency received and choose the proper operating frequency basedon the result.

11.5 Reference for the GSM Uplink Interference Analysis GUIThis describes the interface for GSM uplink interference analysis and the relevant parameters.Before performing relevant operations, familiarize yourself with the functions of GSM uplinkinterference analysis.

NastarOperator Guide 11 GSM Uplink Interference Analysis


11-1

11.1 Basic Knowledge of GSM Uplink Interference AnalysisThis describes the GSM uplink interference analysis. The GSM uplink interference analysisfunction is used to analyze the diverse average interference strength and main averageinterference strength of uplink levels. In the network planning, this function enables the networkplanners to look for the frequency resources that are not interfered on the network. In the networkoptimization, this function enables the network planners to look for the frequency resources withbetter quality for the cells with interference sources according to the analysis of the measurementresults. In the network monitoring, this function can be used to monitor the interference levelsof the network.

The uplink frequency analysis aims at testing uplink levels. The analysis results reflect thestrength of the signals received by the measurement cell at the test frequencies. The engineerscan select appropriate work frequencies according to the analysis results.

The frequency planning of the BSCs is different. The following part describes the frequencyplanning of the BSC6000. The Huawei BTS can scan the received levels at uplink of allfrequencies in the following frequency bands: GSM850 frequency band (869 MHz to 893 MHz),GSM900 frequency band (890 MHz to 915 MHz), GSM1800/PCS1900 frequency band (1805MHz to 1880 MHz/1930 MHz to 1989 MHz), E-GSM extended frequency band (880 MHz to890 MHz), and R-GSM extended frequency band (876 MHz to 880 MHz). That is, the HuaweiBTS can scan the strength of the interference signals in the frequency bands ranging from 876MHz to 915 MHz and from 1805 MHz to 1880 MHz.

The principles of the frequency analysis for the BTS of the Huawei BTS3X series are as follows:In the case of not affecting normal calls, the uplink frequency analysis function is used to performthe cycling test by using the IDLE frame of a TCH within the measurement cell and scan thereceived levels at uplink of the specified frequencies (When the BSC allocates this channel, theTCH at the TRX where the BCCH is located is preferred).

The TCH channel adopts the structure of 26 multiframes. Each TCH multiframe contains anIDLE frame. The period of the IDLE frame on the TCH channel is 26 multiframes x 0.577 (Burstlength) x 8 (TDMA frame) = 120 ms. During the application, each frequency is measured 10times, and about one minute is spent on measuring 50 frequencies. An uplink interferenceanalysis task records a maximum of 124 measurement frequencies. Thus, about three minutesare spent on measuring these 124 frequencies.

After you set the conditions of uplink interference analysis, the Nastar performance analysissystem starts to analyze the uplink interference for the selected cells. The analysis results aredisplayed in histogram mode or in line chart to show the diverse average interference strengthand main average interference strength of each frequency at different time and in different colors.

11.2 Procedure for Using GSM Uplink Interference AnalysisThis describes the process of GSM uplink interference analysis.

Figure 11-1 shows the general process of GSM uplink interference analysis.

11 GSM Uplink Interference AnalysisNastar

Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Figure 11-1 Process of GSM uplink interference analysis

Start

Create an uplink interference analysis

task

End

Create an E2E task

Query an uplink interference analysis

report

Table 11-1 describes the process of GSM uplink interference analysis.

Table 11-1 Process of GSM uplink interference analysis

Serial No.


1 Querying NEData


2 Create an end-to-end taskcorrespondingto an uplinkfrequencyscanning task

You can choose Maintenance > E2E Task Management onthe Nastar client to open the E2E Task Management window,and then create an end-to-end task corresponding to an uplinkfrequency scanning task. After the task is created, the Nastarissues MML commands to M2000, and then M2000 issues thereceived MML commands to the corresponding NE. At last, theNE that receives the MML commands performs themeasurement task and generates measurement results.NOTE

If no end-to-end task corresponding to a neighboring cell analysis taskis created, first you need to create an end-to-end task corresponding to aneighboring cell analysis task to enable the measurement of all theobjects.




11-3

Serial No.


3 Create anuplinkinterferenceanalysis task

You can create an uplink interference analysis task in theAnalysis Task Management window of the main interface onthe Nastar client. After the task is created, the Nastar periodicallyobtains the required uplink ARFCN scanning data from theNastar database, and then generates an analysis report throughthe analysis.

4 Query the GSMuplinkinterferenceanalysis report

You can browse the analysis result when the uplink interferenceanalysis task is successfully performed. The system sortsinterference signals on the BCCH and TCH frequencies in allcells and determines whether the uplink signal interferenceexists in some cells, thus providing references for you to selectproper operating frequencies.

11.3 Managing GSM Uplink Interference Analysis TasksThis describes how to manage the GSM uplink interference analysis tasks. You can create,modify, delete, suspend, and resume GSM uplink interference analysis tasks. You can also viewthe status and the execution progress of a task.


11.3.2 Creating a GSM Uplink Interference Analysis TaskThis describes how to create a GSM uplink-interference analysis task. By performing uplink-interference analysis tasks, the Nastar performance analysis system analyzes the uplink-leveldata in the database at the preset time. By checking the analysis results, you can ascertain thesignal strength of the measurement ARFCNs received in certain cells and choose a properoperating ARFCN.

11.3.3 Modifying a GSM Uplink Interference Analysis TaskYou can modify the attributes of a GSM uplink-interference analysis task to meet the newrequirement.

11.3.4 Checking a GSM Uplink Interference Analysis TaskThis describes how to check a GSM uplink-interference analysis task. You can check theattributes, execution progress, and execution results of a GSM uplink-interference analysis task.




Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Procedure




If ... Then ...













NOTE





11-5


















----End




Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)






11.3.2 Creating a GSM Uplink Interference Analysis TaskThis describes how to create a GSM uplink-interference analysis task. By performing uplink-interference analysis tasks, the Nastar performance analysis system analyzes the uplink-leveldata in the database at the preset time. By checking the analysis results, you can ascertain thesignal strength of the measurement ARFCNs received in certain cells and choose a properoperating ARFCN.





Procedure



Step 3 Click Next.


Step 5 Click Next.



point of the navigation tree and then press Ctrl+F to display the Find dialog box. Type thekeywords, that is, the search condition, in the dialog box. Then, the system searches for thequery result that meets the search condition.



11-7

– You can select Case sensitive to ensure that the keywords you typed are case sensitive.


Step 7 Set Uplink Interference Analysis Parameter on the Parameter Setting tab page.


----End


You can delete an uplink-interference analysis task that is not required so that you can savesystem resources.

NOTE


1. Choose GSM Uplink Interference Analysis Task from the navigation tree in theAnalysis Task Management window.If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performanceanalysis tasks.


l Suspending a taskTo delay the task execution, you can suspend an uplink-interference analysis task that is inthe Idle state. After this operation, the uplink-interference analysis task is in the suspendedstate.

NOTE

The system can schedule only the uplink-interference analysis tasks that are not suspended.




l Resuming a taskYou can resume a suspended uplink-interference analysis task to the idle state. Then, thetask can be scheduled by the system.

NOTE

Only the uplink-interference analysis task that is in the idle state can be scheduled by the system.



Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



11.3.3 Modifying a GSM Uplink Interference Analysis TaskYou can modify the attributes of a GSM uplink-interference analysis task to meet the newrequirement.


l A GSM uplink-interference analysis task is created.


Procedure

Step 1 Choose GSM Uplink Interference Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the AnalysisTask Management window.If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysistasks.



l For details about the parameters, see 11.5.3 Parameters for Creating and Modifying GSMUplink Interference Analysis Tasks.

l You can modify the Note parameter in the basic information, the Data Time Scope andTask Start At parameters in the time information, the information about the objectnavigation tree, and the Uplink Interference Analysis parameter.


----End

11.3.4 Checking a GSM Uplink Interference Analysis TaskThis describes how to check a GSM uplink-interference analysis task. You can check theattributes, execution progress, and execution results of a GSM uplink-interference analysis task.


l A GSM uplink-interference analysis task is created.



11-9

Procedure



Purpose Operation

Checking the attributes of an uplink-interference analysis task



You can check the attributes of the selectedtask and modify the relevant parametersettings. For detailed operations, see 11.3.3Modifying a GSM Uplink InterferenceAnalysis Task.






----End




l The system enables you to search for task information. You can click any line in the taskinformation list and then press Ctrl+F to display the Find dialog box. Type the keywords,


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

that is, the search conditions, in the dialog box. Then, the system searches for the taskinformation that meets the search condition.You can select Case sensitive to ensure that the keywords you typed are case sensitive.You can select Up or Down in the Direction area to define the search area.

11.4 Querying a GSM Uplink Interference Analysis ReportThis describes how to query a GSM uplink-interference analysis report. You can query the signalstrength of the measured frequency received and choose the proper operating frequency basedon the result.


Procedure



Step 3 Double-click a result, or right-click a result and choose Analysis Result. The GSM UplinkFrequency Interference Analysis window is displayed.This operation can be performed only when Result Status of a task is Successful. Otherwise,the shortcut menu is unavailable.

Step 4 Optional: To view the counter chart corresponding to a frequency, select a frequency and chooseCell Uplink Interference Analysis from the navigation tree on the left. Alternatively, right-click the frequency and choose Cell Uplink Interference Analysis.l The counter bar chart shows the interference strength of all the measured frequencies in the

measurement cell at a certain time. The counter line chart shows the interference strength ofa certain frequency in the selected cell during the measurement period.

l You can choose Cell Uplink Interference Overview from the navigation tree in the leftpane to switch to the list of measured frequencies.

----End







11-11



– If the chart is not clear due to an excessive number of dots, right-click the chart, andthen choose Zoom In > ***, Zoom Out > ***, or Auto Range > *** to adjust the sizeof the chart.

Here, *** indicates a submenu item. It can be Both Axes, Horizontal Axis, or VerticalAxis, which indicates that you can adjust both axes, the horizontal axis, or the verticalaxis, respectively.




11.5 Reference for the GSM Uplink Interference AnalysisGUI

This describes the interface for GSM uplink interference analysis and the relevant parameters.Before performing relevant operations, familiarize yourself with the functions of GSM uplinkinterference analysis.

11.5.1 Interface Description: GSM Uplink Interference AnalysisThis describes the interface for GSM uplink interference analysis. Before performing relevantoperations, familiarize yourself with the functions of the areas on the interface.


11.5.3 Parameters for Creating and Modifying GSM Uplink Interference Analysis TasksThis describes the parameters for creating and modifying GSM uplink-interference analysistasks. You can refer to the description when creating or modifying a GSM uplink-interferenceanalysis task.

11.5.4 Parameters for Querying the Uplink Interference Analysis Reports of GSM CellsThis describes the parameters for querying the uplink interference analysis reports of GSM cells.You can refer to the description when querying the uplink interference analysis reports of GSMcells.

11.5.1 Interface Description: GSM Uplink Interference AnalysisThis describes the interface for GSM uplink interference analysis. Before performing relevantoperations, familiarize yourself with the functions of the areas on the interface.

The analysis results of the uplink interference can be displayed in tables or in counter charts, asshown in Figure 11-2 and Figure 11-3.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Figure 11-2 Interface for the overview of the uplink interference of cells

Figure 11-2 shows the signal strength of all the cell frequencies in a selected cell group or undera selected BSC. To view the counter chart corresponding to a frequency, select a frequency, andthen click Cell Uplink Interference Analysis in the navigation tree in the left pane.Alternatively, right-click the frequency and choose Cell Uplink Interference Analysis.

Figure 11-3 Interface for the uplink interference analysis of a cell

In Figure 11-3, the counter bar chart shows the interference strength of all the measuredfrequencies in the measurement cell at a certain time; the counter line chart shows the interferencestrength of a certain frequency in the selected cell during the measurement period. In the bar



11-13

chart, each value on the vertical coordinate is the sum of 110 and the interference strength ofthe measured frequency, which ensures that the values on the vertical coordinate are positive.

For details about the parameters on the interface, see 11.5.4 Parameters for Querying theUplink Interference Analysis Reports of GSM Cells.



Basicinformation







Measurementperiod






Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)













NOTE







11-15


Basicinformation




Measureinformation




l EGSM_900

l GSM850

l P_GSM900

l PSC1900

l R_GSM900







Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

11.5.3 Parameters for Creating and Modifying GSM UplinkInterference Analysis Tasks

This describes the parameters for creating and modifying GSM uplink-interference analysistasks. You can refer to the description when creating or modifying a GSM uplink-interferenceanalysis task.


BasicInformation

Task Name Indicates the name of an uplink-interferenceanalysis task.Value range:l A maximum of 60 characters



l Case sensitive

Task Type You need to select GSM Uplink InterferenceAnalysis Task from the Task Type navigation tree.




TimeInformation




ObjectInformation





11-17



Frequency band of thecurrent cell is

Indicates the band of the current cell.The value of this parameter can be PGSM 900,EGSM 900, RGSM 900, DSC 1800, PCS 1900,GSM 450, GSM 480, and GSM 850. The defaultvalue is PGSM 900.

Minimum DiversityThreshold

Indicates the threshold of the average interferencestrength of the uplink diversity antenna.This parameter can be set to any integer from -115to 0. The default value is -115.Unit: dBm

Minimum MainThreshold

Indicates the threshold of the average interferencestrength of the uplink main antenna.This parameter can be set to any integer from -115to 0. The default value is -115.Unit: dBm

Frequency TypeSetting

Indicates an ARFCN type.The value can be BCCH or TCH.

Arithmetic of Average Indicates the method for calculating the averagevalue.The value can be Signal Strength Average orPower Average. If the parameter is set to SignalStrength Average, the average value is calculateddirectly based on the signal strength. If theparameter is set to Power Average, the averagevalue is calculated based on the power that isconverted from the signal strength and then theaverage value is converted to a value in the unit ofsignal strength.

11.5.4 Parameters for Querying the Uplink Interference AnalysisReports of GSM Cells

This describes the parameters for querying the uplink interference analysis reports of GSM cells.You can refer to the description when querying the uplink interference analysis reports of GSMcells.

Parameters Related to the Uplink Interference of GSM Cells


BSC Sequence Number Indicates the ID of the BSC that a measured TRX belongs to.



Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


Cell Name Indicates the name of the cell that a measured TRX belongs to.

Frequency Indicates the frequency of a measured TRX.

Type Indicates the type of a measured TRX. The options are BCCH andTCH.

Diverse AverageInterference Strength(dBm)

Indicates the diverse average interference strength of a measuredTRX.

Main AverageInterference Strength(dBm)

Indicates the main average interference strength of a measuredTRX.

Parameters Related to the Uplink Interference Analysis of GSM CellsParameter Description

Cell Name Indicates the name of the cell that a measured TRX belongs to.


Time Scope Indicates the time range in which an uplink interference analysistask is performed.

BCCH Frequency Indicates a BCCH of the selected cell.

Frequency HoppingMode

Indicates the type of the frequency hopping.The options are No Frequency Hopping, Baseband FrequencyHopping, Radio Frequency Hopping, and BCCH SynthesizedBaseband Frequency Hopping.

TCH List Indicates all the TCH frequencies of the selected cell.

Time Point Indicates the counter bar chart of the selected cell at a certain time.

Sort Type Indicates the data displayed in the bar chart.The options are Frequency, Diversity, and Main. Diversityindicates the diverse average interference strength, and Mainindicates the main average interference strength.

Frequency Indicates the trend of the strength of a frequency in the selected cellin a certain time segment. The trend is displayed on a line chart.



11-19

12 UMTS Centralized Task Management

About This Chapter

The Nastar provides centralized management for the UMTS timing tasks. By setting UMTStiming tasks, you can collect data from the EMS periodically, save the data as a file in certainpath on the Nastar system, and import the data from the file to the database periodically for futurequery and analysis. In addition, you can delete the data whose storage duration has expired fromthe database at the preset time to save system resources. By using the function of UMTScentralized task management, you can create, modify, delete, suspend, resume, or cancel aUMTS timing task. In addition, you can view information such as status and progress of a task.


12.2 Creating a UMTS User-Defined Timing TaskThe Nastar allows you to create UMTS timing tasks. Thus, you can create UMTS timing tasksby setting common parameters and extended parameters based on the requirements of networkmaintenance.

12.3 Modifying a UMTS User-Defined Timing TaskThe Nastar allows you to modify certain parameters of a UMTS user-defined timing task. If theexecution of a UMTS user-defined timing task is complete, you cannot modify the task.

12.4 Modifying a UMTS Data Deletion TaskThis describes how to modify a UMTS data deletion task. If data is periodically imported to theNastar database, the database resources may be insufficient. By performing the UMTS datadeletion task, the Nastar can delete the data whose storage duration has expired from the databaseat the preset time to save system resources. A UMTS data deletion task is a system timing task.You can modify only certain parameters of the task. To modify a UMTS data deletion task, youmust be a user in the administrator group. If the execution of a UMTS data deletion task iscomplete, you cannot modify the task.



NastarOperator Guide 12 UMTS Centralized Task Management


12-1



12.8 Reference to the UMTS Centralized Task Management InterfaceThis describes the interface for the UMTS centralized task management and related informationsuch as the parameters used in the centralized task management. This help you understand thefunctions of the UMTS centralized task management.

12 UMTS Centralized Task ManagementNastar

Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)











System Timing Tasks System timing tasks are necessary for the Nastar system torun properly. For details, see 12.1.2 System TimingTasks.






12-3

NOTE
















For example, if the scheduling parameters of the data collection task are:l Execution type = Periodicity

l Start time = 2006-10-21 09:07:28

l Execution period = 1 day

l Period execution times = 0


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Infer that the system starts to carry out the data collection task every day from 2006-10-2109:07:28.




State transition of a timing task is as follows:l A timing task is in the idle state after it is initially created.










12-5


Procedure








Step 3 Click OK.

----End

12.2 Creating a UMTS User-Defined Timing TaskThe Nastar allows you to create UMTS timing tasks. Thus, you can create UMTS timing tasksby setting common parameters and extended parameters based on the requirements of networkmaintenance.

Context

If you need to ... the initial installationversion is ...

Then ...

l Creating a Task ofImporting UMTS Uplink-Interference Data,

l Creating a Task ofImporting UMTSNeighboring-CellAnalysis Data,




Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


Then ...

l Creating a Task ofImporting UMTSConfiguration Data,

l Creating a Task ofImporting UMTSCoverage Analysis Data,



Creating a Task of ImportingUMTS EngineeringParameters,

- You need to create this taskmanually.

12.2.1 Creating a Task of Importing UMTS Uplink-Interference DataA task of importing UMTS uplink-interference data is performed to import data from the uplink-interference data file in a specified directory on the server to the database at a preset time. Thisdescribes how to create a task of importing UMTS uplink-interference data.

12.2.2 Creating a Task of Importing UMTS Neighboring-Cell Analysis DataA task of importing UMTS neighboring-cell analysis data is performed to import data from theneighboring-cell analysis data file in a specified directory on the server to the database at a presettime. This describes how to create a task of importing UMTS neighboring-cell analysis data.

12.2.3 Creating a Task of Importing UMTS Configuration DataA task of importing UMTS configuration data is performed to import data from the configurationdata file in the specified directory on the server to the database at a preset time. This describeshow to create a task of importing UMTS configuration data.

12.2.4 Creating a Task of Importing UMTS Coverage Analysis DataA task of importing UMTS coverage analysis data is performed to import data from the coverageanalysis data file in a specified directory on the server to the database at a preset time. Thisdescribes how to create a task of importing UMTS coverage analysis data.

12.2.5 Creating a Task of Importing UMTS Engineering ParametersA task of importing UMTS engineering parameters is performed to import data from theengineering parameter file in the specified directory on the server to the database at the presettime.

12.2.1 Creating a Task of Importing UMTS Uplink-InterferenceData

A task of importing UMTS uplink-interference data is performed to import data from the uplink-interference data file in a specified directory on the server to the database at a preset time. Thisdescribes how to create a task of importing UMTS uplink-interference data.



12-7




l The UMTS uplink-interference data is collected to the Nastar server.

Contextl A task of importing UMTS uplink-interference data is a user-defined timing task.


l For the user-defined timing tasks of the same type, the system can create only one.

Procedure



You can choose Task Type > Import UMTS Data from the navigation tree and then double-click ImportUMTS Uplink Interference Analysis Data. The New Task dialog box is displayed. The Task Typeparameter is set to Import UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis Data by default.

Step 3 Set the basic information about the task.1. Type the name of the task in Task Name.2. Select the task of importing uplink-interference data from Task Type.

Step 4 Click Next to set the execution time of the task and other related parameters.

1. Click . In the displayed Date/Time Selection dialog box, set the start time.You can also set the start time in the Start Time area.

NOTE




----End



NOTE





Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)










NOTE







NOTE




12-9





12.2.2 Creating a Task of Importing UMTS Neighboring-CellAnalysis Data

A task of importing UMTS neighboring-cell analysis data is performed to import data from theneighboring-cell analysis data file in a specified directory on the server to the database at a presettime. This describes how to create a task of importing UMTS neighboring-cell analysis data.




l The UMTS neighboring-cell analysis data is collected to the Nastar server.

Contextl A task of importing UMTS neighboring-cell analysis data is a user-defined timing task.



Procedure



You can choose Task Type > Import UMTS Data from the navigation tree and then double-click ImportUMTS Intra-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Data. The New Task dialog box is displayed. TheTask Type parameter is set to Import UMTS Intra-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Data bydefault.

Step 3 Set the basic information about the task.1. Type the name of the task in Task Name.2. Select the neighboring-cell analysis data import task from Task Type.




Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

NOTE




----End



NOTE













NOTE





12-11





NOTE






12.2.3 Creating a Task of Importing UMTS Configuration DataA task of importing UMTS configuration data is performed to import data from the configurationdata file in the specified directory on the server to the database at a preset time. This describeshow to create a task of importing UMTS configuration data.




l The UMTS configuration data is collected to the Nastar server.For details of creating the performance data collection task, see 7.2.1 Creating a DataCollection Task.

Contextl A task of importing UMTS configuration data is a user-defined timing task.



Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


Procedure



You can choose Task Type > Import UMTS Data from the navigation tree and then double-click ImportUMTS CFG Data. The New Task dialog box is displayed. The Task Type parameter is set to ImportUMTS CFG Data by default.




NOTE




----End



NOTE











12-13

2. You can manually or automatically suspend a task that is in the idle state:

– Suspending a task manually





l Resuming a task


NOTE









l Canceling a task


NOTE






l Viewing a log



Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

12.2.4 Creating a Task of Importing UMTS Coverage Analysis DataA task of importing UMTS coverage analysis data is performed to import data from the coverageanalysis data file in a specified directory on the server to the database at a preset time. Thisdescribes how to create a task of importing UMTS coverage analysis data.




l The UMTS coverage analysis data is collected to the Nastar server.

Contextl A task of importing UMTS coverage analysis data is a user-defined timing task.



Procedure



You can choose Task Type > Import UMTS Data from the navigation tree and then double-click ImportUMTS Coverage Analysis Data. The New Task dialog box is displayed. The Task Type parameter isset to Import UMTS Coverage Analysis Data by default.

Step 3 Set the basic information about the task.1. Type the name of the task in Task Name.2. Select the coverage analysis data import task from Task Type.



NOTE




----End





12-15

NOTE













NOTE






l Canceling a task


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


NOTE






12.2.5 Creating a Task of Importing UMTS Engineering ParametersA task of importing UMTS engineering parameters is performed to import data from theengineering parameter file in the specified directory on the server to the database at the presettime.




l The UMTS engineering parameters are collected to the Nastar server.

Contextl A task of importing UMTS engineering parameters is a user-defined timing task.



Procedure



Choose Task Type > UMTS Data Import > UMTS Engineering Parameter Import from the navigationtree. Double-click the node, the New Task dialog box is displayed. The Task Type parameter is set toUMTS Engineering Parameter Import by default.

Step 3 Set the information about the task.1. Enter the name of timing task in Task Name.2. Select the task of importing engineering parameters from Task Type.



12-17

Step 4 Click Next to set the time.


NOTE




----End

Postrequisitel Delete a task.

You can delete created tasks to save the system resources.

NOTE

l Each user can delete only the tasks that are created by him. If you are a user in the administrator group,you can delete all the user-defined tasks.




2. Select a periodic task from the task list in the right part of the window.3. Click Delete.4. In the Confirm dialog box, click Yes.

Then the task is deleted from the task list.l Suspend a task.



2. You can manually or automatically suspend a task that is in the idle state:– Suspend a task manually.

Select an existing timing tasks that are in the idle state from the task list in the rightpane. Right-click the task and choose Suspend. In the Confirm dialog box, clickYes.

– Suspend a task automatically.Select a timing task to be suspended from the task list in the right pane. Right-clickthe task and choose Timely Suspend/Resume. In the Timely Suspend/Resumedialog box, select Suspend Time and set its value. Click OK.To set the time for automatically suspending a task, see 12.8.12 Parameters forSetting the Time of a Timing Task.

l Resume a task.You can restore a suspended task to wait for the dispatching. Then the status of the task ischanged to idle.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

NOTE

Only idle tasks can wait to be used.


2. You can manually or automatically resume a task that is in the suspended state:– Resume a task manually.

Select an existing timing tasks that are in the suspended state from the task list inthe right pane. Right-click the task and choose Resume. In the Confirm dialogbox, click Yes.

– Resume a task automatically.Select a timing task to be resumed from the task list in the right pane. Right-clickthe task and choose Timely Suspend/Resume. In the Timely Suspend/Resumedialog box, select Resume Time and set its value. Click OK.To set the time for automatically resuming a task, see 12.8.12 Parameters forSetting the Time of a Timing Task.

l Cancel a task.You can cancel a running task. The task status is changed to idle after being cancelled.

NOTE



2. Select an existing running task in the task list in the right pane. Right-click the taskand choose Cancel.


l View a log.You can view the system log related to an import task. For details, see 5.3.1 QueryingSystem Logs.

12.3 Modifying a UMTS User-Defined Timing TaskThe Nastar allows you to modify certain parameters of a UMTS user-defined timing task. If theexecution of a UMTS user-defined timing task is complete, you cannot modify the task.

12.3.1 Modifying a Task of Importing UMTS Uplink Interference DataThis describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing UMTS uplink-interference data.

12.3.2 Modifying a Task of Importing UMTS Neighboring-Cell Analysis DataThis describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing UMTS neighboring-cell analysis data.

12.3.3 Modifying a Task of Importing UMTS Configuration DataThis describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing UMTS configurationdata.

12.3.4 Modifying a Task of Importing UMTS Coverage Analysis Data



12-19

This describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing UMTS coverageanalysis data.

12.3.5 Modifying a Task of Importing UMTS Engineering ParametersThis section describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing UMTSengineering parameters.

12.3.1 Modifying a Task of Importing UMTS Uplink InterferenceData

This describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing UMTS uplink-interference data.


l A task of importing UMTS uplink-interference data is created.

Contextl A task of importing UMTS uplink-interference data is a user-defined timing task.


Procedure


Step 2 Choose Task Type > Import UMTS Data > Import UMTS Uplink Interference Data fromthe navigation tree on the left.


Step 4 Set relevant attributes again on the Common Parameters and the Extended Parameterstabpage.


NOTE


----End

12.3.2 Modifying a Task of Importing UMTS Neighboring-CellAnalysis Data

This describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing UMTS neighboring-cell analysis data.



Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

l A task of importing UMTS neighboring-cell analysis data is created.

Contextl The task is a user-defined timing task.


Procedure


Step 2 Choose Task Type > Import UMTS Data > Import UMTS Intra-Frequency NeighboringCell Analysis Data from the navigation tree on the left.



Step 5 Click OK.You can browse the latest task information in the task list.

NOTE


----End

12.3.3 Modifying a Task of Importing UMTS Configuration DataThis describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing UMTS configurationdata.


l A task of importing UMTS configuration data is created.



Procedure


Step 2 Choose Task Type > Import UMTS Data > Import UMTS CFG Data from the navigationtree on the left.






12-21

NOTE


----End

12.3.4 Modifying a Task of Importing UMTS Coverage AnalysisData

This describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing UMTS coverageanalysis data.


l A task of importing UMTS coverage analysis data is created.



Procedure


Step 2 Choose Task Type > Import UMTS Data > Import UMTS Coverage Analysis Data fromthe navigation tree on the left.




NOTE


----End

12.3.5 Modifying a Task of Importing UMTS EngineeringParameters

This section describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing UMTSengineering parameters.


l A task of importing UMTS engineering parameters is created.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Contextl A task of importing UMTS engineering parameters is a user-defined timing task.


Procedure


Step 2 Choose Task Type > UMTS Data Import > UMTS Engineering Parameter Import fromthe navigation tree on the left.

Step 3 Double-click or click Attribute to view the Attribute dialog box.


Step 5 Click OK.You can browse the newest task information in the task list.

NOTE

If the task is running, the modified data takes effect at the next execution.

----End

12.4 Modifying a UMTS Data Deletion TaskThis describes how to modify a UMTS data deletion task. If data is periodically imported to theNastar database, the database resources may be insufficient. By performing the UMTS datadeletion task, the Nastar can delete the data whose storage duration has expired from the databaseat the preset time to save system resources. A UMTS data deletion task is a system timing task.You can modify only certain parameters of the task. To modify a UMTS data deletion task, youmust be a user in the administrator group. If the execution of a UMTS data deletion task iscomplete, you cannot modify the task.


12.4.2 Modifying a Task of Deleting UMTS Uplink Interference DataThis describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of deletingUMTS uplink-interference data.

12.4.3 Modifying the Task of Deleting UMTS Neighboring-Cell Analysis DataThis describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of deletingUMTS neighboring-cell analysis data.

12.4.4 Modifying the Task of Deleting UMTS Configuration DataThis describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of deletingUMTS configuration data.

12.4.5 Modifying the Task of Deleting UMTS Coverage Analysis DataThis describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of deletingUMTS coverage analysis data.



12-23





periodically.

l You can modify the following parameters of the task: Start Time, Execution Period, andThe data files will be reserved in the server.

l Deleting history data refers to deleting the data files that are collected to certain file pathon the Nastar server.

Procedure





NOTE



NOTE


----End

12.4.2 Modifying a Task of Deleting UMTS Uplink InterferenceData

This describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of deletingUMTS uplink-interference data.




Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Contextl The task of deleting UMTS uplink-interference data is a system timing task. It can be

executed only periodically.l You can modify the following parameters of the task: Start Time and Period.

l Deleting uplink-interference data refers to deleting the uplink-interference data collectedto the NASTAR server.

Procedure


Step 2 Choose Task Type > Delete UMTS Data > Delete UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis DataMaintenance from the navigation tree on the left.


Step 4 Set relevant attributes again on the Common Parameters and Extended Parameters tab pages.


NOTE


----End

12.4.3 Modifying the Task of Deleting UMTS Neighboring-CellAnalysis Data

This describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of deletingUMTS neighboring-cell analysis data.



Contextl The task of deleting UMTS neighboring-cell analysis data is a system timing task. It can

be executed only periodically.l You can modify the following parameters of the task: Start Time and Period.

l Deleting neighboring-cell analysis data refers to deleting the neighboring-cell analysis datacollected to the NASTAR server.

Procedure


Step 2 Choose Task Type > Delete UMTS Data > UMTS Intra-Frequency Neighboring CellAnalysis Data Maintenance from the navigation tree on the left.




12-25



NOTE


----End

12.4.4 Modifying the Task of Deleting UMTS Configuration DataThis describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of deletingUMTS configuration data.



Contextl The task of deleting UMTS configuration data is a system timing task. It can be executed

only periodically.

l You can modify the following parameters of the task: Start Time and Period.


Procedure


Step 2 Choose Task Type > Delete UMTS Data > UMTS CFG Data Maintenance from thenavigation tree on the left.




NOTE


----End

12.4.5 Modifying the Task of Deleting UMTS Coverage AnalysisData

This describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of deletingUMTS coverage analysis data.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Contextl The task of deleting UMTS coverage analysis data is a system timing task. It can be executed

only periodically.


l Deleting coverage analysis data refers to deleting the coverage analysis data collected tothe NASTAR server.

Procedure


Step 2 Choose Task Type > Delete UMTS Data > UMTS Coverage Analysis Data Maintenancefrom the navigation tree on the left.




NOTE


----End









12-27

Procedure





NOTE



NOTE


----End





is not in the idle state at the specified time, it fails to be suspended.l In the specified time, the system resumes a suspended task and then the task is in the idle

status and wait to be dispatched. If the timing task is not in the idle state at the specifiedtime, it fails to be suspended.


Procedure






----End


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)







Procedure





NOTE



----End






12-29



----End









----End

12.8 Reference to the UMTS Centralized Task ManagementInterface

This describes the interface for the UMTS centralized task management and related informationsuch as the parameters used in the centralized task management. This help you understand thefunctions of the UMTS centralized task management.





Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)




12.8.7 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting UMTS Uplink Interference DataThis section describes the parameters related to the task of deleting UMTS uplink interferencedata. You can refer to the description when modifying the task of deleting UMTS uplinkinterference data.

12.8.8 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting Neighboring UMTS Cell Analysis DataThis section describes the parameters related to the task of deleting neighboring UMTS cellanalysis data. You can refer to the description when modifying the task of deleting neighboringUMTS cell analysis data.

12.8.9 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting UMTS Configuration DataThis section describes the parameters related to the task of deleting UMTS configuration data.You can refer to the description when modifying a task of deleting UMTS configuration data.

12.8.10 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting UMTS Coverage Analysis DataThis section describes the parameters related to the task of deleting UMTS coverage analysisdata. You can refer to the description when modifying the task of deleting UMTS coverageanalysis data.







12-31









Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)




Parameters


UserName



Category







LastRunResult





12-33


PartlySuccess



Miss RunTime










l Case sensitive


-


-


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Parameter Description Value Range








Value:0-65535



TimeSetting



Time.




12-35


PeriodSetting






Value:0 - 65535NOTE



Parameters








Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)




Performance Data








Other TypeData



12.8.7 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting UMTSUplink Interference Data

This section describes the parameters related to the task of deleting UMTS uplink interferencedata. You can refer to the description when modifying the task of deleting UMTS uplinkinterference data.



12-37

Parameter DescriptionParameter Value Range Item

DataReserveDays

7, 15, 30, 45, 60,90, 180Unit: day

Assume that N refers to the preset Data Reserve Days. Allthe uplink interference data that is saved N days before thetime of saving the latest data is deleted from the database.For example, among all the uplink interference data in thedatabase, if the time of saving the latest data is 2009-03-31,and Data Reserve Days is set to 7, the system deletes allthe uplink interference data saved before 2009-03-24 fromthe database.

12.8.8 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting NeighboringUMTS Cell Analysis Data

This section describes the parameters related to the task of deleting neighboring UMTS cellanalysis data. You can refer to the description when modifying the task of deleting neighboringUMTS cell analysis data.


DataReserveDays

7, 15, 30, 45, 60,90, 180Unit: day

Assume that N refers to the preset Data Reserve Days. Allthe neighboring cell analysis data that is saved N daysbefore the time of saving the latest data is deleted from thedatabase.For example, among all the neighboring cell analysis datain the database, if the time of saving the latest data is2009-03-31, and Data Reserve Days is set to 7, the systemdeletes all the VIP analysis data saved before 2009-03-24from the database.

12.8.9 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting UMTSConfiguration Data

This section describes the parameters related to the task of deleting UMTS configuration data.You can refer to the description when modifying a task of deleting UMTS configuration data.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


DataReserveDays

7, 15, 30, 45, 60,90, 180Unit: day

Assume that N refers to the preset Data Reserve Days. Allthe configuration data that is saved N days before the timeof saving the latest data is deleted from the database.For example, among all the configuration data in thedatabase, if the time of saving the latest data is 2009-03-31,and Data Reserve Days is set to 7, the system deletes allthe configuration data saved before 2009-03-24 from thedatabase.

12.8.10 Parameters for Modifying the Task of Deleting UMTSCoverage Analysis Data

This section describes the parameters related to the task of deleting UMTS coverage analysisdata. You can refer to the description when modifying the task of deleting UMTS coverageanalysis data.


DataReserveDays

7, 15, 30, 45, 60,90, 180Unit: day

Assume that N refers to the preset Data Reserve Days. Allthe coverage analysis data that is saved N days before thetime of saving the latest data is deleted from the database.For example, among all the coverage analysis data in thedatabase, if the time of saving the latest data is 2009-03-31,and Data Reserve Days is set to 7, the system deletes allthe VIP analysis data saved before 2009-03-24 from thedatabase.



Full BackupTime



BackupMode




12-39


BackupPath
















Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

13 UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis

About This Chapter

UMTS uplink-interference analysis involves managing uplink-interference analysis tasks andquerying UMTS uplink-interference analysis reports. The system analyzes the received totalwideband power (RTWP) data that is sent by the NodeB. It initially locates the interfered basestation by using the interference ranking function. Then, you can analyze whether the values ofthe main and diversity antennas are correct based on the overall RTWP trend of the selected cell.In this way, you can determine the interference features. You can also determine whether themain and diversity antenna are connected contrarily by browsing the distribution chart of thedifferences between the RTWPs of the main and diversity antennas.

13.1 Basic Knowledge of UMTS Uplink-Interference AnalysisThe UMTS uplink-interference analysis function is performed to analyze the RTWP datareported by NodeBs. Based on uplink-interference analysis results, you can determine whetherthe carriers on the existing network are experiencing interference. You can also locate antennafeeder problems by analyzing the signal strength of the main and diversity antennas of the uplink.

13.2 Process of UMTS Uplink-Interference AnalysisThis describes the process of UMTS uplink-interference analysis.

13.3 Managing UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis TasksThis describes how to manage UMTS uplink-interference analysis tasks. You can create, modify,delete, suspend, and resume UMTS uplink-interference analysis tasks. You can also view thestatus and execution progress of a task.

13.4 Querying a UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis ReportThis describes how to query the UMTS uplink-interference analysis report. You can query theRTWP data reported by the NodeB and initially locate the BTS that is interfered. Then, you cananalyze whether the values of the main and diversity antennas are correct based on the overallRTWP trend of the selected cell. In this way, you can determine the interference features. Youcan also determine whether the main and diversity antenna are connected contrarily by browsingthe distribution chart of the differences between the RTWPs of the main and diversity antennas.

13.5 Reference for the UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis GUIThis describes the interface for UMTS uplink-interference analysis and the relevant parameters.Before performing relevant operations, familiarize yourself with the functions of UMTS uplink-interference analysis.

NastarOperator Guide 13 UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis


13-1

13.1 Basic Knowledge of UMTS Uplink-InterferenceAnalysis

The UMTS uplink-interference analysis function is performed to analyze the RTWP datareported by NodeBs. Based on uplink-interference analysis results, you can determine whetherthe carriers on the existing network are experiencing interference. You can also locate antennafeeder problems by analyzing the signal strength of the main and diversity antennas of the uplink.

Uplink interference is a key factor that affects the QoS of networks with respect to the followingaspects: conversation quality, call drop, handover, congestion, network coverage, and networkcapacity. If interference and load cannot be distinguished, load control cannot work properly.

The uplink-interference analysis function is applicable to the RTWP data reported by NodeBs.Through the uplink-interference-ranking function, you can locate the NodeB experiencinginterference initially. Then, by checking the overall RTWP trend of the selected cell, you cananalyze whether the values of the main and diversity antennas are correct. In this way, you candetermine the interference features. You can also determine whether the main and diversityantenna are connected contrarily by browsing the distribution chart of the differences betweenthe RTWPs of the main and diversity antennas.

After the conditions for uplink-interference analysis are set, the Nastar performs uplink-interference analysis on the selected cells. The analysis results are displayed in a line chart. Thechart displays the values of the main and diversity antennas of each cell at each time point indifferent colors and shows overall RTWP trend and detailed trend of the selected cell.

13.2 Process of UMTS Uplink-Interference AnalysisThis describes the process of UMTS uplink-interference analysis.

Figure 13-1 shows the general process of UMTS uplink-interference analysis.

13 UMTS Uplink Interference AnalysisNastar

Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Figure 13-1 Workflow of uplink-interference analysis

Start

Create an uplink interference analysis

task

End

Create an E2E task

Query an uplink interference analysis

report

Table 13-1 describes the items listed in Figure 13-1.

Table 13-1 Description of the workflow of uplink-interference analysis

No. Procedure Description

1 Querying NEData


2 Create an end-to-end taskcorrespondingto an uplink-interferenceanalysis task

You can choose Maintenance > E2E Task Management onthe Nastar client to open the E2E Task Management window,and then create an end-to-end task corresponding to an uplink-interference analysis task. After the task is created, the Nastarissues MML commands to M2000, and then M2000 issues thereceived MML commands to the corresponding NE. At last, theNE that receives the MML commands performs themeasurement task and generates measurement results.When you create an E2E task, the Nastar will automaticallycreate a data collection task.



13-3


3 Create anuplink-interferenceanalysis task

You can create an uplink-interference analysis task in theAnalysis Task Management window of the main interface onthe Nastar client. After the task is created, the Nastar periodicallyobtains the required configuration data and RTWP data from theNastar database, and then generates an analysis report throughthe analysis.

4 Query anuplink-interferenceanalysis report

You can view the analysis results of the uplink-interferenceanalysis task that is successfully performed and initially locatethe BTS that experiences interference. You can analyze whetherthe values of the main and diversity antennas are correct basedon the overall RTWP trend and detailed trend of the selected cell.In this way, you can determine the interference features. You canalso determine whether the main and diversity antenna areconnected contrarily by browsing the distribution chart of thedifferences between the RTWPs of the main and diversityantennas.

13.3 Managing UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis TasksThis describes how to manage UMTS uplink-interference analysis tasks. You can create, modify,delete, suspend, and resume UMTS uplink-interference analysis tasks. You can also view thestatus and execution progress of a task.

13.3.1 Creating a UMTS E2E TaskThis describes how to create an end-to-end (E2E) task. After you set an E2E task in the Nastar,the Nastar issues MML commands to the M2000. The M2000 then sends these MML commandsto the corresponding NEs. Finally, the NEs perform the measurement tasks and generate results.

13.3.2 Creating a UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis TaskThis describes how to create a UMTS uplink-interference analysis task. By performing UMTSuplink-interference analysis tasks, the Nastar performance analysis system analyzes the RTWPdata of each NodeB in the database at the preset time. Based on the analysis result, you can learnabout the signal strength of the main and diversity antennas and the trend of the signal strengthrelated to the selected cell, which helps you to detect abnormal interference on the network.

13.3.3 Modifying a UMTS Uplink-Interference Analysis TaskYou can modify the attributes of a UMTS uplink-interference analysis task to meet the newrequirement.

13.3.4 Checking a UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis TaskThis describes how to check a UMTS uplink-interference analysis task. You can check theattributes, execution progress, and execution results of a UMTS uplink-interference analysistask.



Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)




Procedure



Step 3 Set the basic information about the task.1. In Task Name, type the name of the E2E task.2. From the OSS Name drop-down list box, select the OSS that is related to the E2E task.

3. In E2E Task List, select a task.Table 13-2 describes the mapping between E2E tasks and analysis tasks.

Table 13-2 Mapping between E2E tasks and analysis tasks

E2E Tasks Analysis tasks

RTWP data task Uplink interference analysis task

Neighboring cell data task Co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task

Coverage data task Coverage analysis task

Step 4 Click Next to set Begin Time and End Time, and select one or multiple NEs from the NE list.The system enables you to search for the objects in the navigation tree. You can right-click inthe navigation area and then press Ctrl+F to display the Find dialog box. Type the keywords,that is, the search condition, in the dialog box. Then, the system searches for the objects thatmeet the search condition.



Step 5 Click Complete.The MML Preview dialog box is displayed, showing the MML commands related to the currenttheme analysis E2E task. The MML commands can be exported for future use.

Step 6 Click OK.The new E2E task is displayed in the task list.

----End

PostrequisiteAfter an E2E task is created, in the Task Management window, you can view the correspondingcollection task that has been created by the system. After the collection task is executed, youcan perform the corresponding data import task.



13-5








13.3.2 Creating a UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis TaskThis describes how to create a UMTS uplink-interference analysis task. By performing UMTSuplink-interference analysis tasks, the Nastar performance analysis system analyzes the RTWPdata of each NodeB in the database at the preset time. Based on the analysis result, you can learnabout the signal strength of the main and diversity antennas and the trend of the signal strengthrelated to the selected cell, which helps you to detect abnormal interference on the network.




l The system supports a maximum of 50 tasks of this type. The time range of the data to beanalyzed cannot exceed seven days.

Procedure



Step 3 Click Next.


Step 5 Click Next.

Step 6 Select one or multiple objects in the object navigation tree on the NE Object Selection tab page.l Choose RNC or Cell Group above the navigation tree to display the objects in the navigation

tree as required.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

l The system enables you to search for the objects in the navigation tree. You can click anypoint of the navigation tree and then press Ctrl+F to display the Find dialog box. Type thekeywords, that is, the search condition, in the dialog box. Then, the system searches for thequery result that meets the search condition.– You can select Case sensitive to ensure that the keywords you typed are case sensitive.



----End

Postrequisitel Deleing a task

You can delete an uplink-interference analysis task that is not required so that you can savesystem resources.

NOTE


1. Choose UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis Task from the navigation tree in theAnalysis Task Management window.If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performanceanalysis tasks.

2. Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane, and then click or right-click Delete Task.

3. Click Yes in the displayed Confirm dialog box.l Suspending a task

To delay the task execution, you can suspend an uplink-interference analysis task that is inthe idle state. After this operation, the uplink-interference analysis task is in the suspendedstate.

NOTE

The system can schedule only the uplink-interference analysis tasks that are not suspended.

1. Choose UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis Task from the navigation tree in theAnalysis Task Management window.If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performanceanalysis tasks.

2. Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane, and then click .Only the tasks whose Status is Idle can be suspended. Otherwise, the button isunavailable.

l Resuming a taskYou can resume a suspended uplink-interference analysis task to the idle state. Then, thetask can be scheduled by the system.

NOTE

Only the uplink-interference analysis task that is in the idle state can be scheduled by the system.

1. Choose UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis Task from the navigation tree in theAnalysis Task Management window.



13-7



13.3.3 Modifying a UMTS Uplink-Interference Analysis TaskYou can modify the attributes of a UMTS uplink-interference analysis task to meet the newrequirement.


l A UMTS uplink-interference analysis task is created.


Procedure

Step 1 Choose UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the AnalysisTask Management window.If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysistasks.


Step 3 Modify the relevant parameter settings.l For details about the relevant parameters, see 13.5.3 Parameters for Creating or Modifying

a UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis Task.l You can modify the Note parameter in the basic information, the Data Time Scope and

Task Start At parameters in the time information, the information about the objectnavigation tree.


----End

13.3.4 Checking a UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis TaskThis describes how to check a UMTS uplink-interference analysis task. You can check theattributes, execution progress, and execution results of a UMTS uplink-interference analysistask.



Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

l A UMTS uplink-interference analysis task is created.

Procedure



Purpose Operation

Checking the attributes of an uplink-interference analysis task



For detailed operations, see 13.3.3 Modifyinga UMTS Uplink-Interference AnalysisTask.






----End







13-9

that is, the search conditions, in the dialog box. Then, the system searches for the taskinformation that meets the search condition.



13.4 Querying a UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis ReportThis describes how to query the UMTS uplink-interference analysis report. You can query theRTWP data reported by the NodeB and initially locate the BTS that is interfered. Then, you cananalyze whether the values of the main and diversity antennas are correct based on the overallRTWP trend of the selected cell. In this way, you can determine the interference features. Youcan also determine whether the main and diversity antenna are connected contrarily by browsingthe distribution chart of the differences between the RTWPs of the main and diversity antennas.


Procedure



Step 3 Double-click a result, or right-click a result and choose Uplink Interference Analysis Task.The UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis window is displayed.This operation can be performed only when Result Status of a task is Successful. Otherwise,the shortcut menu is unavailable.

Step 4 Select a cell from the left list. Then, you can view the overall RTWP trend and the difference ofthe main and diversity antennas of the selected cell on the right area.

l In the area on the right,

– the upper part displays the trend chart of the interference signal strength of the main anddiversity antennas related to the selected cell during a time range.

– The chart at the lower part displays the distribution of the differences between the RTWPsof the main and diversity antennas of the selected cell. The difference between the RTWPsof the main and diversity antennas at each time point is calculated first. Then, the systemcalculates the percentage of a difference to the total number of differences.

You can zoom in or zoom out the chart by dragging it with the mouse.

l The RTWP data displayed on the overall RTWP trend chart of the cell is not the originaldata. It is refreshed every minute.

----End


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



l To query chart properties, and save, print, and resize the chart in the chart area, performthe following operations:

– Right-click the chart, and then choose Property from the shortcut menu. In thedisplayed Chart Property dialog box, set the coordinate axes of and basic informationabout the chart.








13.5 Reference for the UMTS Uplink Interference AnalysisGUI

This describes the interface for UMTS uplink-interference analysis and the relevant parameters.Before performing relevant operations, familiarize yourself with the functions of UMTS uplink-interference analysis.

13.5.1 Interface for UMTS Uplink Interference AnalysisThis describes the interface for UMTS uplink-interference analysis. Before performing relevantoperations, familiarize yourself with the functions of the areas on the interface.

13.5.2 Parameters for Creating or Modifying a UMTS E2E TaskThis describes the parameters of UMTS E2E tasks. You can refer to the description when creatingor modifying a UMTS E2E task.

13.5.3 Parameters for Creating or Modifying a UMTS Uplink Interference Analysis TaskThis describes the parameters for creating and modifying UMTS uplink-interference analysistasks. You can refer to the description when creating or modifying a UMTS uplink-interferenceanalysis task.

13.5.4 Parameters for Querying the Uplink Interference Analysis Reports of UMTS Cells



13-11

This describes the parameters for querying the uplink-interference analysis reports of UMTScells. You can refer to the description when querying the uplink-interference analysis reports ofUMTS cells.

13.5.1 Interface for UMTS Uplink Interference AnalysisThis describes the interface for UMTS uplink-interference analysis. Before performing relevantoperations, familiarize yourself with the functions of the areas on the interface.

The uplink-interference analysis result interface displays the trends of the RTWP data in a linechart, as shown in Figure 13-2.

Figure 13-2 Interface for the uplink-interference analysis of a cell


(1) Cell information list Displays the basic information about all thecells involved in an analysis task in a table.

(2) Overall RTWP trend chart of a cell Displays the trends of the RTWPs of themain and diversity antennas of a selectedcell in a time segment in a line chart.

(3) Distribution chart of the differencesbetween the RTWPs of the main anddiversity antennas

Displays the distribution of the differencebetween the RTWPs of the main anddiversity antennas of the selected cell incolumn charts.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


Parameter description


BasicInformation

Task Name Indicates the name of an E2E task.


E2E Task List Indicates the types of E2E tasks. You can selectone of the following E2E tasks: RTWP data task,neighboring cell data task, or coverage data task.

MeasurementInformation

Begin Time Indicates the time when the task starts to run.The format is the same as that in the districtsetting, for example, DD/MM/YYYY.

End Time Indicates the time when the task stops running.The format is the same as that in the districtsetting, for example, DD/MM/YYYY.The start time must be earlier than the end time.

NE Object Indicates the NE related to the E2E task.

13.5.3 Parameters for Creating or Modifying a UMTS UplinkInterference Analysis Task

This describes the parameters for creating and modifying UMTS uplink-interference analysistasks. You can refer to the description when creating or modifying a UMTS uplink-interferenceanalysis task.



BasicInformation

Task Name Indicates the name of an uplink-interferenceanalysis task.Value range:l A maximum of 60 characters



l Case sensitive



13-13


Task Type You need to select UMTS Uplink InterferenceAnalysis Task from the Task Type navigation tree.




TimeInformation




ObjectInformation

RNC If you select this option, the navigation tree displaysall the RNCs of the entire network.


13.5.4 Parameters for Querying the Uplink Interference AnalysisReports of UMTS Cells

This describes the parameters for querying the uplink-interference analysis reports of UMTScells. You can refer to the description when querying the uplink-interference analysis reports ofUMTS cells.


RNC ID Indicates the ID of an RNC.

Cell ID Indicates the ID of a cell.

Cell Name Indicates the name of a cell, for example, Cell_1.

P-SC Indicates the primary scrambling code (p-SC) of a cell.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


Main Average Strength(dBm)

Indicates the average value of the interference strength of mainantennas.

Diversity AverageStrength (dBm)

Indicates the average value of the interference strength of diversityantennas.

Average Difference(Main-Diversity) (dB)

Indicates the value calculated by dividing the sum of the differencesbetween the RTWPs of the main and diversity antennas at each timepoint in the selected time range by the total number of time points.

Standard Deviation(Main-Diversity)

Indicates the square root of the value calculated through thefollowing steps:1. Calculate the difference between the main and diversity values

within the specified time range.2. Calculate the average value of all the differences between the

main and diversity values.3. Calculate the sum value after squaring the values calculated after

the difference between the main and diversity values at each timepoint subtracts the average value.

4. Calculate the square root value after the sum value is divided bythe total number of time points.



13-15

14 UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring CellAnalysis

About This Chapter

This describes the UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis. The UMTS co-frequencyneighboring cell analysis involves managing neighboring cell analysis tasks, querying UMTSneighboring cell analysis reports, and exporting UMTS neighboring cell analysis reports. Withthe configuration data and engineering parameters, the Nastar determines the missingneighboring cells, redundant neighboring cells, and the priorities that need to be adjusted of ameasurement cell based on MRs and events reported by UEs. If this information exists, thesystem displays the information. This helps you to solve the problems relating to the networkquality that are caused by redundant or missing neighboring cell configuration, or by incorrectpriority.

14.1 Basic Knowledge of UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell AnalysisThis provides the basic knowledge of the UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis, suchas the neighboring cell analysis functions, application scenarios, and algorithms for theneighboring cell analysis. The basic knowledge helps you perform the operations related to theUMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis.

14.2 Process of UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell AnalysisThis describes the process of UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis.

14.3 Managing UMTS Neighboring Cell Analysis TasksThis describes how to manage UMTS neighboring cell analysis tasks. You can create, modify,delete, suspend, and resume UMTS neighboring cell analysis tasks. You can also view the statusand execution progress of the tasks.

14.4 Querying a UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis ReportThe Nastar provides the function of querying UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysisreports. You can query the missing and redundant neighboring cells and the neighboring cellpriorities that need to be adjusted of a best cell. Then, you can configure the missing neighboringcells, delete the redundant cells, and adjust the neighboring cell priorities based on the queryresults.

14.5 Exporting a UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis ReportThis describes how to export a UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis report. Afterquerying the co-frequency neighboring cell analysis results, you can export the found analysis

NastarOperator Guide 14 UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis


14-1

results and save them in .csv files or .xls files. Based on the exported analysis results, you canconfigure neighboring relations on the network to optimize the neighboring relations betweenthe cells on the network.

14.6 Reference for the UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis GUIThis describes the interface for UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis and the relevantparameters. Before performing relevant operations, you can familiarize yourself with thefunctions of the UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis.

14 UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell AnalysisNastar

Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

14.1 Basic Knowledge of UMTS Co-Frequency NeighboringCell Analysis

This provides the basic knowledge of the UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis, suchas the neighboring cell analysis functions, application scenarios, and algorithms for theneighboring cell analysis. The basic knowledge helps you perform the operations related to theUMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis.

14.1.1 UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis FunctionThe MRs of UEs reflect the actual propagation status of radio signals. Based on the MRs andevents reported by UEs, the Nastar can determine the missing neighboring cells, redundantneighboring cells, and the neighboring-cell priorities that need to be adjusted of a measurementcell. If this information exists, the system displays the information. This helps you to solve theproblems relating to the network quality that are caused by redundant or missing neighboringcell configuration, or by incorrect priority.

14.1.2 UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis AlgorithmsThis describes the algorithms related to the analysis of UMTS co-frequency neighboring cells.The algorithms help determine the missing neighboring cells, redundant neighboring cells, andrecommended priorities of neighboring cells.

14.1.1 UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis FunctionThe MRs of UEs reflect the actual propagation status of radio signals. Based on the MRs andevents reported by UEs, the Nastar can determine the missing neighboring cells, redundantneighboring cells, and the neighboring-cell priorities that need to be adjusted of a measurementcell. If this information exists, the system displays the information. This helps you to solve theproblems relating to the network quality that are caused by redundant or missing neighboringcell configuration, or by incorrect priority.

Neighboring Cell AnalysisCorrect neighboring relations ensure that UEs located at the service boundary of a cell can betimely switched to the neighboring cell that has optimal signals. In this case, the handover gaincan be obtained and internal interference of the network can be reduced. Thus, QoS andperformance of the network are enhanced.

Using the configuration data and engineering parameters, the Nastar can analyze the neighboringcells of a selected cell on the basis of the MRs and events reported by a UE. Based on themeasurement data, the Nastar can determine the missing and redundant neighboring cells andthe neighboring cell priorities that need to be adjusted of the selected cell. In addition, the systemcan sequence the recommended priorities of the neighboring cells. By comparing therecommended priorities and the actually configured priorities, you can adjust the final prioritiesof the neighboring cells on the Nastar client.

The Nastar displays results in a line or bar chart. It displays the neighboring cells of differenttypes in different colors and the sequence of finally ascertained priorities.

You can export the neighboring cell analysis results as a file in .csv or .xls format. Then, youcan refer to this file when optimizing the neighboring relations.

In measurement results, undefined neighboring cells are identified first by frequencies andprimary scrambling codes (PSCs). On the network, cells that have the same frequency and same



14-3

PSC may exist around a best cell. You need to predict the signal strength based on the sitelocation, antenna azimuth, and antenna gain of these cells and then determine the possibleneighboring cells. In addition, you need to export the analysis report on the possible neighboringcells through the Nastar client.

Limitation and ImpactThe accuracy of neighboring cell analysis results may be affected in the following cases:l Engineering parameters are incorrect.

l The network is not stable during the data collection for neighboring cell analysis. Forexample, the air interface parameters or the network topology is not stable.Table 14-1 describes the network changes and their impacts.






Change of handoverparameters


Change of the RNCtopology or othertopologies

Affects the execution of measurement tasks. The RNC isresponsible for collecting statistical results. Thus, measurementtasks cannot be normally performed if the network topology ischanged. You are advised to keep the network topologyunchanged during the data collection.

NOTE

The Nastar can only be used for measuring and analyzing the UMTS co-frequency neighboring cells in thecase of soft handover or softer handover.

14.1.2 UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis AlgorithmsThis describes the algorithms related to the analysis of UMTS co-frequency neighboring cells.The algorithms help determine the missing neighboring cells, redundant neighboring cells, andrecommended priorities of neighboring cells.

The neighboring cell analysis algorithms are the basis for determining the missing neighboringcells, redundant neighboring cells, and recommended priorities of neighboring cells.

l The algorithm for calculating the recommended priority of a neighboring cell is as follows:

1. Calculate the overall score of a neighboring cell.The overall score of a neighboring cell is determined together by the appearance timesof the neighboring cell, the relative difference between the Ec/No of the neighboring


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

cell and the Ec/No of the best cell, and the absolute difference between the Ec/No ofthe neighboring cell and the Ec/No of the best cell.

2. Sequence the total scores in descending order. The higher the total score is, the higherthe recommended priority is.

The recommended highest priority is 0.

l The algorithm for determining a missing neighboring cell is as follows:

In the case of an undefined neighboring cell, if the recommended priority of the neighboringcell is smaller than the recommended number of neighboring cells, you can infer that theneighboring cell is a missing neighboring cell.

l The algorithm for determining a redundant neighboring cell is as follows:

In the case of a defined neighboring cell, if the recommended priority of the neighboringcell is not smaller than the recommended number of neighboring cells, you can infer thatthe neighboring cell is a redundant neighboring cell.

14.2 Process of UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring CellAnalysis

This describes the process of UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis.

Figure 14-1 shows the general process of co-frequency neighboring cell analysis.

Figure 14-1 Workflow of co-frequency neighboring cell analysis

Start

Create a co-frequency neighboring cell

analysis task

End

Create an E2E task

Query a co-frequency neighboring cell analysis report

Export a co-frequency neighboring cell analysis report



14-5


Table 14-2 Description of the workflow of co-frequency neighboring cell analysis


1 Querying NEData


2 Create an end-to-end taskcorrespondingto a co-frequencyneighboring cellanalysis task

You can choose Maintenance > E2E Task Management onthe Nastar client to open the E2E Task Management window,and then create an end-to-end task corresponding to a co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task. After the task iscreated, the Nastar issues MML commands to M2000, and thenM2000 issues the received MML commands to thecorresponding NE. At last, the NE that receives the MMLcommands performs the measurement task and generatesmeasurement results.When you create an E2E task, the Nastar will automaticallycreate a data collection task.

3 Create a co-frequencyneighboring cellanalysis task

You can create a co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task inthe Analysis Task Management window of the main interfaceon the Nastar client. After the task is created, the Nastarperiodically obtains the required measurement reports from theNastar database, and then generates an analysis report throughthe analysis.

4 Query a co-frequencyneighboring cellanalysis report

You can view the analysis results of the co-frequencyneighboring cell analysis task that is successfully performed,configure missing neighboring cells, delete redundantneighboring cells, and adjust neighboring cell priorities.

5 Export a co-frequencyneighboring cellanalysis report

You can export a complaint assistant analysis report from theNastar.

14.3 Managing UMTS Neighboring Cell Analysis TasksThis describes how to manage UMTS neighboring cell analysis tasks. You can create, modify,delete, suspend, and resume UMTS neighboring cell analysis tasks. You can also view the statusand execution progress of the tasks.



Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

14.3.2 Creating a UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis TaskThis describes how to create a UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task. After a UMTSco-frequency neighboring cell analysis task is created, the Nastar, based on the configurationdata and the engineering parameters, periodically analyzes the MRs that are reported by UEsand saved in the Nastar database to check for the redundant and missing neighboring cellconfiguration of a test carrier and to check for the priorities that need to be adjusted. By queryingthe results of an analysis task, you can learn about the overall status of the network and locatethe network quality problems that are caused by redundant or missing neighboring cellconfiguration, or by incorrect priority.

14.3.3 Modifying a UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis TaskThis describes how to modify the attributes of a UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysistask. You can modify the attributes of a UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task asrequired.

14.3.4 Checking a UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis TaskThis describes how to check a UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task. You cancheck the attributes of the UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task, executionprogress of the task, and the execution results.





Procedure











14-7








----End









14.3.2 Creating a UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell AnalysisTask

This describes how to create a UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task. After a UMTSco-frequency neighboring cell analysis task is created, the Nastar, based on the configurationdata and the engineering parameters, periodically analyzes the MRs that are reported by UEsand saved in the Nastar database to check for the redundant and missing neighboring cellconfiguration of a test carrier and to check for the priorities that need to be adjusted. By querying


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

the results of an analysis task, you can learn about the overall status of the network and locatethe network quality problems that are caused by redundant or missing neighboring cellconfiguration, or by incorrect priority.




l The system supports a maximum of 50 tasks of this type. The time range of the data to beanalyzed must within seven days.

Procedure



Step 3 Click Next.


Step 5 Click Next.





Step 7 Set Number of Configured Neighboring Cells on the Parameter Setting tab page.


----End


This describes how to delete a neighboring cell analysis task. You can delete theunnecessary neighboring cell analysis tasks to save system resources.

NOTE

The tasks in Running state cannot be deleted.



14-9

1. Choose UMTS Intra-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Task from thenavigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window.If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performanceanalysis tasks.



This describes how to suspend a neighboring cell analysis task. To delay the task execution,you can suspend a neighboring cell analysis task that is in idle state. After this operation,the neighboring cell analysis task is in suspended state.

NOTE




Only the tasks whose Status are Idle can be suspended. Otherwise, the buttonunavailable.


NOTE

Only the neighboring cell analysis tasks that are in idle state can be scheduled by the system.


2. Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane, and then click .The task can be performed only when its Status is Suspend. If the task is not insuspended state, the button is unavailable.

14.3.3 Modifying a UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring CellAnalysis Task

This describes how to modify the attributes of a UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysistask. You can modify the attributes of a UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task asrequired.



Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

l A UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task is created.


Procedure

Step 1 Choose UMTS Intra-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Task from the navigation tree inthe Analysis Task Management window.If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysistasks.



l For details about the relevant parameters, see 14.6.3 Parameters for Creating andModifying UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Tasks.

l You can modify the Note parameter in the basic information, the Data Time Scope andTask Start At parameters in the time information, the information about the objectnavigation tree, and the Number of Configured Neighboring Cells parameter.


----End

14.3.4 Checking a UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell AnalysisTask

This describes how to check a UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task. You cancheck the attributes of the UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task, executionprogress of the task, and the execution results.


l A UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task is created.

Procedure





14-11

Purpose Operation

Checking the attributes of a neighboringcell analysis task



You can check the attributes of the selectedtask or modify the relevant parameter settings.For detailed operations, see 14.3.3 Modifyinga UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring CellAnalysis Task.






----End






Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

14.4 Querying a UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring CellAnalysis Report

The Nastar provides the function of querying UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysisreports. You can query the missing and redundant neighboring cells and the neighboring cellpriorities that need to be adjusted of a best cell. Then, you can configure the missing neighboringcells, delete the redundant cells, and adjust the neighboring cell priorities based on the queryresults.


Procedure


Step 2 Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane.All the analysis results of the selected task are displayed in the lower right pane.

Step 3 Double-click a result, or right-click a result and choose Analysis Report from the shortcut menu.The Neighboring Cell Analysis window is displayed.This operation can be performed only when Result Status of a task is Successful. Otherwise,the shortcut menu is unavailable.

Step 4 Select a cell from the list of best cells in Area (2) in the Neighboring Cell Analysis window.l For the rules of dividing areas, see 14.6.1 Interface Description: UMTS Co-Frequency

Neighboring-Cell Analysis.l The neighboring cell list in Area (4) displays all the neighboring cells of the selected cell.

The Nastar determines the redundant neighboring cells, the missing neighboring cells, theneighboring cells whose priorities need to be adjusted, and the neighboring cells that requireno operations based on the neighboring cell analysis algorithms. It also provides the relevantoperation suggestions.For details about the neighboring cell analysis algorithms, see 14.1.2 UMTS Co-FrequencyNeighboring Cell Analysis Algorithms.If a neighboring cell of the selected cell is unknown, the Nastar adds cellid:p-sc to identifythe unknown neighboring cell.The system highlights the information about undefined neighboring cells in grey.

l In the figure of Area (5), the normal neighboring cells, redundant neighboring cells, andmissing neighboring cells of the selected cell are displayed in legends in different colors.You can select a parameter from the drop-down list box above Area (5). Then, the parametervalues corresponding to each neighboring cell are displayed in a line chart.In the figure, the left axis represents the total scores, the right axis represents the value of theline chart, and the horizontal coordinate represents names of the neighboring cells. Theneighboring cells are sequenced in descending order of the total scores from left to right.



14-13

Step 5 Select a neighboring cell whose priority needs to be adjusted in Area (4), and then click the upor down icon above the list to adjust the priority.

----End












14.5 Exporting a UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring CellAnalysis Report

This describes how to export a UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis report. Afterquerying the co-frequency neighboring cell analysis results, you can export the found analysisresults and save them in .csv files or .xls files. Based on the exported analysis results, you canconfigure neighboring relations on the network to optimize the neighboring relations betweenthe cells on the network.


l You have queried UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis reports.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Procedurel Perform the following operations as required.

If ... Then ...

You want to export the overviewinformation about neighboring cells

1. Click in the UMTS Intra-FrequencyNeighboring Cell Analysis window. TheSave dialog box is displayed.

2. Set the filename, file type, and save path,and then click Save.The saved .csv or .xls file is openedautomatically so that you can view theinformation in it.The information in the .csv or .xls fileconsists of the task name, task creator,execution result, start time, end time, andbest cell information.

You want to export all neighboring celloptimization results

1. Click in the UMTS Intra-FrequencyNeighboring Cell Analysis window. TheSave dialog box is displayed.If the analysis result data amount of all theneighboring cells is large, it takes some timefor the dialog box to be displayed.

2. Set the save path, and then click Save.You are allowed to save only the analysisresults of all neighboring cells as CSV filesby RNC. The analysis result of theneighboring cells of each cell correspondsto one CSV file.The naming convention is task name_NEname_NCS.csv.

Export the information about thepossible neighboring cells of a best cell

1. Click in the UMTS Intra-FrequencyNeighboring Cell Analysis window. TheSave dialog box is displayed.

2. Set the name, type and save path of the file.Then, click Save.After being saved, a CSV or XLS file isautomatically open so that you can view thefile conveniently.The CSV or XLS file contains the followinginformation: the task name, creator, starttime and end time of the results, andpossible neighboring cells of the best cell.



14-15

NOTE

l Exporting overview information about neighboring cells refers to exporting the information aboutall the best cells involved in the selected analysis task.

l Exporting all neighboring cell optimization results refers to exporting the information about theneighboring cells of each best cell.

l Exporting the analysis results of possible neighboring cells refers to exporting the informationabout the possible neighboring cells of of each best cell.

----End

14.6 Reference for the UMTS Co-Frequency NeighboringCell Analysis GUI

This describes the interface for UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis and the relevantparameters. Before performing relevant operations, you can familiarize yourself with thefunctions of the UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis.

14.6.1 Interface Description: UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring-Cell AnalysisThis describes the interface for UMTS co-frequency neighboring-cell analysis. Beforeperforming relevant operations, you can familiarize yourself with the functions of the areas onthe interface.


14.6.3 Parameters for Creating and Modifying UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell AnalysisTasksThis describes the parameters for creating and modifying UMTS co-frequency neighboring cellanalysis tasks. You can refer to the description when creating or modifying a UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task.

14.6.4 Parameters for Querying UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis ReportsThis describes the parameters for querying UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysisreports. You can refer to the description when querying UMTS co-frequency neighboring cellanalysis reports.

14.6.1 Interface Description: UMTS Co-Frequency Neighboring-Cell Analysis

This describes the interface for UMTS co-frequency neighboring-cell analysis. Beforeperforming relevant operations, you can familiarize yourself with the functions of the areas onthe interface.

The analysis results of co-frequency neighboring cells can be displayed in tables or in columncharts, as shown in Figure 14-2.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Figure 14-2 UMTS co-frequency neighboring-cell analysis interface


(1) Button area Consists of three buttons that are used for exportingthe overview information about neighboring cells, allneighboring cell optimization results, and all possibleneighboring cells of a best cell.

(2) Current best cell information list Displays the information related to the current bestcell.

(3) Button area Consists of three buttons used for adjusting thepriorities of neighboring cells and restoring defaultpriority.

(4) Neighboring cell list Displays all the co-frequency neighboring cells of thecell selected in area (2).



14-17


(5) Image area Displays the information about all the neighboringcells of the selected best cell in the combination ofcolumn charts and line charts.

NOTEIf the name of a missing neighboring cell of the best cell isunknown, the neighboring cell is marked cellid:p-sc.


Parameter descriptionParameter Description

BasicInformation








14.6.3 Parameters for Creating and Modifying UMTS Co-FrequencyNeighboring Cell Analysis Tasks

This describes the parameters for creating and modifying UMTS co-frequency neighboring cellanalysis tasks. You can refer to the description when creating or modifying a UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


BasicInformation




l Case sensitive

Task Type Choose UMTS Intra-Frequency NeighboringCell Analysis Task from the Task Type navigationtree.




TimeInformation

Data Time Scope The start time must be earlier than the end time.You can either type the time in this field, or click

to select the date and time in the DateSelection dialog box.This parameter is valid for only one-time tasks.

Task Start At Indicates the time when the analysis task isexecuted.This start time must be equal to or later than the endtime specified by Data Time Scope.

ObjectInformation

RNC If you select this option, the navigation tree displaysall the RNCs on the entire network.

Cell Group If you select this option, the navigation tree displaysall the cell groups on the entire network.


Number of ConfiguredNeighboring Cells

Indicates the number of neighboring cells that youare recommended to configure.N can be any integer ranging from 0 to 32. Thedefault value is 30.



14-19

14.6.4 Parameters for Querying UMTS Co-Frequency NeighboringCell Analysis Reports

This describes the parameters for querying UMTS co-frequency neighboring cell analysisreports. You can refer to the description when querying UMTS co-frequency neighboring cellanalysis reports.

NOTE

For details about the rules of dividing areas, see 14.6.1 Interface Description: UMTS Co-FrequencyNeighboring-Cell Analysis.

Parameters related to the general information about a best cellParameter Description

RNC ID Indicates the ID of the RNC.

Cell ID Indicates the ID of the best cell.

Cell Name Indicates the name of the best cell, for example, Cell_1.

P-SC Indicates the primary scrambling code (P-SC) of the best cell.

Downlink ARFCN Indicates the downlink absolute radio frequency channel number(ARFCN) of the best cell.

Number ofMeasurementReports

Indicates the number of MRs received by the best cell.

Average Ec/No (dB) Indicates the average Ec/No of the best cell.

Average RSCP(dBm)

Indicates the average Received Signal Code Power (RSCP) of the bestcell.

Number of the 1A1CEvents

Indicates the total number of 1A/1C events triggered by neighboringcells.

Number of MissingNeighboring Cells

Indicates the number of missing intra-frequency neighboring cellsamong the undefined neighboring cells of the best cell.


Indicates the number of redundant intra-frequency neighboring cellsamong the defined neighboring cells of the best cell.

Number ofConfigured Intra-FrequencyNeighboring Cells

Indicates the number of defined intra-frequency neighboring cells ofthe best cell.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Parameters related to the detailed information about neighboring cellsParameter Description

Neighboring RNCID

Indicates the number of the RNC that the neighboring cell belongs to.

Neighboring Cell ID Indicates the ID of a neighboring cell.

Neighboring CellName

Indicates the name of a neighboring cell, for example, Cell_1.

P-SC Indicates the P-SC of a neighboring cell.

Neighboring CellType

Indicates the type of a neighboring cell. The options are DefinedNeighboring Cell (reserved), Defined Neighboring Cell (redundant),Undefined Neighboring Cell (missing), and Undefined NeighboringCell (non-operation).

Total Score Indicates the total score of each neighboring cell. The total score iscalculated through the neighboring cell algorithm based on eachmeasurement result.

Final Priority Indicates the final priority after the manual adjustment based on therecommended priority.

RecommendedPriority

Indicates the recommended priority of a neighboring cell based on thetotal score of the neighboring cell. The higher the total score, thehigher is the recommended priority.

Configured Priority Indicates the priority of an intra-frequency neighboring cell in theconfiguration data.

Average RSCP ofNeighboring Cells(dBm)

Indicates the average RSCP of a neighboring cell in all the MRs thatcontain the information about this neighboring cell.

Average ECNO ofNeighboring Cells(dB)

Indicates the average Ec/No of a neighboring cell in all the MRs thatcontain the information about this neighboring cell.

Average ECNO ofPrimary Cells (dB)

Indicates the average Ec/No of the best cell in all the MRs thatcontains the current neighboring cell.

Average RSCP ofPrimary Cells (dBm)

Indicates the average RSCP of the best cell in all the measurementreports that contains the current neighboring cell.

MR Number of theNeighboring Cell inthe Monitor Set/Detective Set

Indicates the number of MRs that contain the current neighboring cellin the monitor set or detective set.

MR Number of theNeighboring Cell inthe Active Set

Indicates the number of MRs that contain the current neighboring cellin the active set.



14-21


Number of the 1A/1C Events

Indicates the number of 1A/1C events triggered by the currentneighboring cell.

Number of the 1DEvents

Indicates the number of 1D events triggered by the currentneighboring cell.

Distance (km) Indicates the distance between the best cell and the currentneighboring cell.

Neighboring CellService Type

Indicates the type of the neighboring cell. The options are indoor andoutdoor. By knowing the types of neighboring cells, you can avoiddeleting important neighboring cells.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

15 UMTS Coverage Analysis

About This Chapter

UMTS coverage analysis involves managing UMTS coverage analysis tasks, querying UMTScoverage analysis reports, and exporting UMTS coverage analysis reports. The Nastar analyzesthe MRs sent by a UE and directly displays the information about coverage status, signal quality,and user distribution of the measurement cell through the GUI. It helps you to quickly locate theproblems such as weak cell coverage, cross coverage, and poor QoS on the radio network.

15.1 Basic Knowledge of UMTS Coverage AnalysisThe UMTS coverage analysis function enables you to analyze the MR sent by a UE. The analysisresults help you to check the coverage status of the measurement cell on the network anddetermine whether problems such as weak cell coverage, cross coverage, and poor QoS occuron the network.

15.2 Process of UMTS Coverage AnalysisThis describes the process of UMTS coverage analysis.

15.3 Managing a UMTS Coverage Analysis TaskThis describes how to manage UMTS coverage analysis tasks. You can create, modify, delete,suspend, and resume a UMTS coverage analysis task. You can also view the status and executionprogress of such a task.

15.4 Querying a UMTS Coverage Analysis ReportThis describes how to query a UTMS coverage analysis report. You can query the MRs sent bya UE in a time segment. The query results help you to check the coverage status of themeasurement cell on the network and determine whether problems such as weak cell coverage,cross coverage, and poor QoS occur on the network.

15.5 Exporting a UMTS Coverage Analysis ReportThis describes how to export a UMTS coverage analysis report and how to export a UMTScoverage analysis original data. After querying coverage analysis results, you can export thefound analysis results as .csv files. Based on the exported analysis results, you can determinethe coverage of the measurement cells on the network. Also, you can export the original data tocompare with the analysis results.

15.6 Reference for the UMTS Coverage Analysis GUI

NastarOperator Guide 15 UMTS Coverage Analysis


15-1

This describes the interface for UMTS coverage analysis and the relevant parameters. Beforeperforming relevant operations, familiarize yourself with the functions of UMTS coverageanalysis.

15 UMTS Coverage AnalysisNastar

Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

15.1 Basic Knowledge of UMTS Coverage AnalysisThe UMTS coverage analysis function enables you to analyze the MR sent by a UE. The analysisresults help you to check the coverage status of the measurement cell on the network anddetermine whether problems such as weak cell coverage, cross coverage, and poor QoS occuron the network.

The MR sent by an UE consists of downlink RSCP and Ec/No, and the TP when the UE isconnected.

After you specify the conditions for coverage analysis, the Nastar analyzes the coverage of theselected cell and then displays the analysis results in a two-dimensional chart, a three-dimensional chart, and a table.l The two-dimensional chart displays the AMR(Adaptive MultiRate), VP(Video Phone), BE

(Backround Interactive), AMR+BE, and OTHER services. For each service, three counters,namely, RSCP_DL, Ec/No_DL, and TP counters.

l The three-dimensional chart displays the PS(Packet Switched) and CS(Circuit Switching)services. For each service, three counters, namely, RSCP_DL, Ec/No_DL, and TP, areinvolved.

l The summary table displays the statistics on the counters that correspond to the services inthe two-dimensional chart.

The analysis results can be exported as a .csv file. You can optimize the cell coverage based onthe analysis results.

15.2 Process of UMTS Coverage AnalysisThis describes the process of UMTS coverage analysis.

Figure 15-1 shows the general process of coverage analysis.



15-3

Figure 15-1 Workflow of coverage analysis

Start

Create a coverage analysis task

End

Create an E2E task

Query a coverage analysis report

Export a coverage analysis report


Table 15-1 Description of the workflow of coverage analysis


1 Querying NEData


2 Create an end-to-end taskcorrespondingto a coverageanalysis task

You can choose Maintenance > E2E Task Management onthe Nastar client to open the E2E Task Management window,and then create an end-to-end task corresponding to a coverageanalysis task. After the task is created, the Nastar issues MMLcommands to M2000, and then M2000 issues the received MMLcommands to the corresponding NE. At last, the NE that receivesthe MML commands performs the measurement task andgenerates measurement results.When you create an E2E task, the Nastar will automaticallycreate a data collection task.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


3 Create acoverageanalysis task

You can create a coverage analysis task in the Analysis TaskManagement window of the main interface on the Nastar client.After the task is created, the Nastar periodically obtains therequired measurement data and configuration data from theNastar database, and then generates an analysis report throughthe analysis.

4 Query acoverageanalysis report

You can view the analysis results of the coverage analysis taskthat is successfully performed, learn about the coverage of theselected measurement cell on the network, and determinewhether the problems such as weak coverage, cross coverage,and poor QoS on the existing network.

5 Export acoverageanalysis report

You can export a coverage analysis report from the Nastar orexport coverage analysis original datas.

15.3 Managing a UMTS Coverage Analysis TaskThis describes how to manage UMTS coverage analysis tasks. You can create, modify, delete,suspend, and resume a UMTS coverage analysis task. You can also view the status and executionprogress of such a task.


15.3.2 Creating a UMTS Coverage Analysis TaskThis describes how to create a UMTS coverage analysis task. By creating UMTS coverageanalysis tasks, you can enable the Nastar to periodically analyze the MRs sent by a UE. Basedon the analysis results, you can learn about the coverage status of the measurement cell on thenetwork and determine whether problems such as weak cell coverage, cross coverage, and poorQoS occur on the network.

15.3.3 Modifying a UMTS Coverage Analysis TaskThis describes how to modify the attributes of a UMTS coverage analysis task. You can modifythe attributes of a UMTS coverage analysis task as required.

15.3.4 Checking a UMTS Coverage Analysis TaskThis describes how to check a UMTS coverage analysis task. You can check the attributes ofthe UMTS coverage analysis task, execution progress of the task, and the execution results.




15-5




Procedure















----End



Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)








15.3.2 Creating a UMTS Coverage Analysis TaskThis describes how to create a UMTS coverage analysis task. By creating UMTS coverageanalysis tasks, you can enable the Nastar to periodically analyze the MRs sent by a UE. Basedon the analysis results, you can learn about the coverage status of the measurement cell on thenetwork and determine whether problems such as weak cell coverage, cross coverage, and poorQoS occur on the network.





Procedure



Step 3 Click Next.


Step 5 Click Next.


tree as required.



15-7

l The system enables you to search for the objects in the navigation tree. You can right-clickany point of the navigation tree and then press Ctrl+F to display the Find dialog box. Typethe keywords, that is, the search condition, in the dialog box. Then, the system searches forthe query result that meets the search condition.– You can select Case sensitive to ensure that the keywords you typed are case sensitive.

– You can select Up or Down in the Direction area to define the search range.

Step 7 On the Parameter Setting tab page, set filtering conditions.By default, the system provides 12 filtering conditions. You can add or modify filteringconditions.l Adding a filtering condition

Select a counter under a type of service. Set the formula related to the filtering condition,and then click Add.The two-dimensional chart supports the setting of the formula with either one counter or twocounters. The three-dimensional chart supports the setting of the formula with only twocounters.

l Modifying a filtering conditionIn the area of the filtering conditions, select the target formula, and then modify the formulain the condition setting area. Then, click Apply.

l Deleting a filtering conditionIn the area of the filtering conditions, select a target formula, and then click Delete.

Modifying or deleting the filtering condition of a task whose Status is Running or Completeis not allowed.


----End


You can delete a coverage analysis task that is not required so that you can save systemresources.

NOTE

The tasks that are in the Running status cannot be deleted.

1. Choose UMTS Coverage Analysis Task from the navigation tree in theAnalysisTask Management window.If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performanceanalysis tasks.



To delay the task execution, you can suspend a coverage analysis task that is in the idlestate. After this operation, the coverage analysis task is in the suspended state.

NOTE

The system can schedule only the coverage analysis tasks that are not suspended.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

1. Choose UMTS Coverage Analysis Task from the navigation tree in theAnalysisTask Management window.




l Resuming a task

You can resume a suspended coverage analysis task to the idle state. Then, the task can bescheduled by the system.

NOTE

Only the coverage analysis tasks that are in the idle state can be scheduled by the system.

1. Choose UMTS Coverage Analysis Task from the navigation tree in theAnalysisTask Management window.




15.3.3 Modifying a UMTS Coverage Analysis TaskThis describes how to modify the attributes of a UMTS coverage analysis task. You can modifythe attributes of a UMTS coverage analysis task as required.


l A UMTS coverage analysis task is created.


Procedure

Step 1 Choose UMTS Coverage Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis TaskManagement window.If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysistasks.





15-9

l For details about the relevant parameters, see 15.6.3 Parameters for Creating andModifying UMTS Coverage Analysis Tasks.

l You can modify the Note parameter in the basic information, the Data Time Scope andTask Start At parameters in the time information, the information about the objectnavigation tree, and the filtering conditions of the analysis task.


----End

15.3.4 Checking a UMTS Coverage Analysis TaskThis describes how to check a UMTS coverage analysis task. You can check the attributes ofthe UMTS coverage analysis task, execution progress of the task, and the execution results.


l A UMTS coverage analysis task is created.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose UMTS Coverage Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis TaskManagement window.If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysistasks.


Purpose Operation

Checking the attributes of a coverageanalysis task



You can check the attributes of the selected taskand modify the relevant parameter settings. Fordetailed operations, see 15.3.3 Modifying aUMTS Coverage Analysis Task.




Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Purpose Operation


You can view all the analysis results of theselected task in the lower-right pane.NOTE


----End




l The system enables you to search for task information. You can click any line in the taskinformation list and then press Ctrl+F to display the Find dialog box. Type the keywords,that is, the search conditions, in the dialog box. Then, the system searches for the taskinformation that meets the search condition.



15.4 Querying a UMTS Coverage Analysis ReportThis describes how to query a UTMS coverage analysis report. You can query the MRs sent bya UE in a time segment. The query results help you to check the coverage status of themeasurement cell on the network and determine whether problems such as weak cell coverage,cross coverage, and poor QoS occur on the network.


Procedure

Step 1 Choose UMTS Coverage Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis TaskManagement window.



15-11

If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysistasks.


Step 3 Double-click a result, or right-click a result and choose Coverage Analysis from the shortcutmenu. The UMTS Coverage Analysis window is displayed.This operation can be performed only when Result Status of a task is Successful. Otherwise,the shortcut menu is unavailable.

Step 4 Select a cell under RNC Overview Report or Cell Group Overview Report from the list onthe left pane. View the two-dimensional chart, three-dimensional chart, and summary table onthe right pane.

l In the two-dimensional chart, the information about the AMR, VP, BE, AMR+BE, and Otherservices is displayed on five tab pages, respectively. Each tab page displays the RSCP,ECNO, and TP counters of the corresponding service in a column chart and a counteraccumulation distribution line chart.

The two-dimensional chart contains two vertical axes and one horizontal axis. The horizontalaxis represents the value of each counter. The left vertical axis represents the percentage ofthe number of MRs of each counter to the total number of MRs. The right vertical axisrepresents the value in the line chart. The value of any counter on the horizontal axis is takenas the benchmark. The values (indicating the sum of the MR percentage of each counter) thatare equal to or smaller than the benchmark value are displayed on the right vertical axis.

l In the three-dimensional chart, each two of the three counters (RSCP, ECNO, and TP) aregrouped for the PS and CS services. Therefore, you can find six tabs in the chart.

The distribution of different counters is identified in different colors.

After you type the value ranges of the counters corresponding to the horizontal and verticalaxes in the formula area, the system automatically calculates the sum of the density of thecounter distribution in this overlapped area.

l The summary table displays the statistics on the counters that correspond to the services inthe two-dimensional chart.

----End








Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



15.5 Exporting a UMTS Coverage Analysis ReportThis describes how to export a UMTS coverage analysis report and how to export a UMTScoverage analysis original data. After querying coverage analysis results, you can export thefound analysis results as .csv files. Based on the exported analysis results, you can determinethe coverage of the measurement cells on the network. Also, you can export the original data tocompare with the analysis results.


l You have queried UMTS coverage analysis reports.

ContextExporting the overview information about coverage analysis refers to exporting the generalinformation about all the measurement cells involved in the selected analysis task.

Procedurel Export UMTS coverage aAnalysis overview.

Click in the UMTS Coverage Analysis window. The Save dialog box is displayed.l Export UMTS coverage analysis original data.

Click in the UMTS Coverage Analysis window. The Save dialog box is displayed.l Set the save path, and then click Save.

The saved .csv file is opened automatically so that you can view the information in it.

The information in the .csv file consists of the coverage information about a measurementcell.

----End



15-13

15.6 Reference for the UMTS Coverage Analysis GUIThis describes the interface for UMTS coverage analysis and the relevant parameters. Beforeperforming relevant operations, familiarize yourself with the functions of UMTS coverageanalysis.

15.6.1 Interface for UMTS Coverage AnalysisThis describes the interface for UMTS coverage analysis. Before performing relevant operations,familiarize yourself with the functions of the areas on the interface.


15.6.3 Parameters for Creating and Modifying UMTS Coverage Analysis TasksThis describes the parameters for creating and modifying UMTS coverage analysis tasks. Youcan refer to the description when creating or modifying a UMTS coverage analysis task.

15.6.4 Parameters for Querying UMTS Coverage Analysis ReportsThis describes the parameters for checking UMTS coverage analysis reports. You can refer tothe description when querying a UMTS coverage analysis report.

15.6.1 Interface for UMTS Coverage AnalysisThis describes the interface for UMTS coverage analysis. Before performing relevant operations,familiarize yourself with the functions of the areas on the interface.

The analysis results of coverage analysis can be displayed in a two-dimensional chart, a three-dimensional chart, and a summary table, as shown in Figure 15-2, Figure 15-3 and Figure15-4.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Figure 15-2 Interface for the coverage analysis (1)


(1) Button area The buttons used for export UMTS Coverage AnalysisOverview and export UMTS Coverage AnalysisOriginal Data.

(2) Cell object navigation tree You can precisely locate a cell object through thenavigation tree.

(3) Search panel You can precisely locate a cell object through the searchcondition.

(4) Filtering condition area The system filters counters according to the filteringformula that is set during the creation of analysis tasks andthen displays the result counters.



15-15


(5) Two-dimensional chart area The information about the AMR, VP, BE, AMR+BE, andOther services is displayed on five tab pages, respectively.Each tab page displays the RSCP, ECNO, and TP countersof the corresponding service in a column chart and acounter accumulation distribution line chart.



(6) Three-dimensional chart area In the three-dimensional chart, each two of the threecounters (RSCP, ECNO, and TP) are grouped for the PSand CS services. Therefore, you can find six tabs in thechart.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


(7) Formula area After you type the values of the counters correspondingto the horizontal and vertical axes in area (6), the systemautomatically calculates the sum of the density of thecounter distribution in this overlapped area.



(8) Summary table area The summary table displays the statistics on the counters thatcorrespond to the services in the two-dimensional chart.




15-17


BasicInformation








15.6.3 Parameters for Creating and Modifying UMTS CoverageAnalysis Tasks

This describes the parameters for creating and modifying UMTS coverage analysis tasks. Youcan refer to the description when creating or modifying a UMTS coverage analysis task.


BasicInformation

Task Name Indicates the name of a coverage analysis task.Value range:l A maximum of 60 characters



l Case sensitive

Task Type Choose UMTS Coverage Analysis Task from thenavigation tree.



Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)




TimeInformation



Task Start At Indicates the time when the analysis task isexecuted.The time specified in this field should not precedethe end time specified in the Data Time Scopefield.

ObjectInformation

RNC If you select this option, the navigation tree displaysall the RNCs of the entire network.


Parameters The system provides 12 default filtering conditions.You can add, delete, or apply the filteringconditions.

15.6.4 Parameters for Querying UMTS Coverage Analysis ReportsThis describes the parameters for checking UMTS coverage analysis reports. You can refer tothe description when querying a UMTS coverage analysis report.


Service Type Indicates the type of service. The coverage analysis involves thefollowing types of services: AMR, VP, BE, AMR+BE, andOTHER.

Total Number of TPMeasurement Reports

Indicates the total number of TP MRs of the selected cell, which iscalculated based on the service type.

Total Number of RSCPMeasurement Reports

Indicates the total number of RSCP MRs of the selected cell, whichis calculated based on the service type.



15-19


Total Number ofECNO MeasurementReports

Indicates the total number of Ec/No MRs of the selected cell, whichis calculated based on the service type.

Average TP Indicates the average TP of the selected cell in the selected timesegment, which is calculated based on the service type.

Average RSCP(dBm) Indicates the average RSCP of the selected cell in the selected timesegment, which is calculated based on the service type.

Average ECNO(dB) Indicates the average Ec/No of the selected cell in the selected timesegment, which is calculated based on the service type.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

16 CDMA Centralized Task Management

About This Chapter

The Nastar provides centralized management for the CDMA timing tasks. By setting CDMAtiming tasks, you can collect data from the EMS periodically, save the data as a file in certainpath on the Nastar system, and import the data from the file to the database periodically for futurereference. In addition, you can delete the data whose storage duration has expired from thedatabase at the preset time to save resource space of the system. By using the function of CDMAcentralized task management, you can create, modify, delete, suspend, resume, or cancel aCDMA timing task. In addition, you can view information such as status and progress of a task.


16.2 Creating a CDMA User-Defined Timing TaskThe Nastar allows you to create CDMA timing tasks. Thus, you can create CDMA timing tasksby setting common parameters and extended parameters based on the requirements of networkmaintenance.

16.3 Modifying a CDMA User-Defined Timing TaskThe Nastar allows you to modify certain parameters of a CDMA user-defined timing task. If theexecution of a CDMA user-defined timing task is complete, you cannot modify the task.

16.4 Modifying a CDMA Data Deletion TaskThis describes how to modify a CDMA data deletion task. If data is periodically imported to theNastar database, the database resources may be insufficient. By performing the CDMA datadeletion task, the Nastar can delete the data whose storage duration has expired from the databaseat the preset time to save system resources. A CDMA data deletion task is a system timing task.You can modify only certain parameters of the task. To modify a CDMA data deletion task, youmust be a user in the administrator group. If the execution of a CDMA data deletion task iscomplete, you cannot modify the task.



NastarOperator Guide 16 CDMA Centralized Task Management


16-1



16.8 Reference to the CDMA Centralized Task Management InterfaceThis describes the interface for the CDMA centralized task management and related informationsuch as the parameters used in the centralized task management. This help you understand thefunctions of the CDMA centralized task management.

16 CDMA Centralized Task ManagementNastar

Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)











System Timing Tasks System timing tasks are necessary for the Nastar system torun properly. For details, see 16.1.2 System TimingTasks.






16-3

NOTE
















For example, if the scheduling parameters of the data collection task are:l Execution type = Periodicity

l Start time = 2006-10-21 09:07:28

l Execution period = 1 day

l Period execution times = 0


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Infer that the system starts to carry out the data collection task every day from 2006-10-2109:07:28.




State transition of a timing task is as follows:l A timing task is in the idle state after it is initially created.










16-5


Procedure








Step 3 Click OK.

----End

16.2 Creating a CDMA User-Defined Timing TaskThe Nastar allows you to create CDMA timing tasks. Thus, you can create CDMA timing tasksby setting common parameters and extended parameters based on the requirements of networkmaintenance.

Context


Then ...

l Creating a Task ofImporting CDMA VIPKPI Analysis Data,

l Creating a Task ofImporting CDMA Uplink-Interference- RankingAnalysis Data,

l Creating a Task ofImporting the CDMA




Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


Then ...

Uplink- Interference-Spectrum Analysis Data,

l Creating a Task ofImporting CDMANeighboring-CellAnalysis Data,

l Creating a Task ofImporting CDMAConfiguration Data,



16.2.1 Creating a Task of Importing CDMA VIP KPI Analysis DataA task of importing CDMA VIP KPI analysis data is performed to import data from the VIPKPI analysis data file in a specified directory on the server to the database at a preset time. Thisdescribes how to create a task of importing CDMA VIP KPI analysis data.

16.2.2 Creating a Task of Importing CDMA Uplink-Interference-Ranking Analysis DataA task of importing CDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis data is performed to importdata from the uplink-interference-ranking analysis data file in a specified directory on the serverto the database at a preset time. This describes how to create a task of importing CDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis data.

16.2.3 Creating a Task of Importing the CDMA Uplink-Interference-Spectrum Analysis DataA task of importing the CDMA uplink-interference-spectrum analysis data is performed toimport data from the uplink-interference-spectrum analysis data file in a specified directory onthe server to the database. This describes how to create a task of importing the CDMA uplink-interference-spectrum analysis data.

16.2.4 Creating a Task of Importing CDMA Neighboring-Cell Analysis DataA task of importing CDMA neighboring-cell analysis data is performed to import data from theneighboring-cell analysis data file in a specified directory on the server to the database at a presettime. This describes how to create a task of importing CDMA neighboring-cell analysis data.

16.2.5 Creating a Task of Importing CDMA Configuration DataA task of importing CDMA configuration data is performed to import data from the configurationdata file in the specified directory on the server to the database at a preset time. This describeshow to create a task of importing CDMA configuration data.

16.2.1 Creating a Task of Importing CDMA VIP KPI Analysis DataA task of importing CDMA VIP KPI analysis data is performed to import data from the VIPKPI analysis data file in a specified directory on the server to the database at a preset time. Thisdescribes how to create a task of importing CDMA VIP KPI analysis data.



16-7




l The data related to CDMA VIP KPI analysis is collected to the Nastar server.

Contextl A task of importing CDMA VIP KPI analysis data is a user-defined timing task.



Procedure



You can choose Task Type > Import CDMA Data from the navigation tree and then double-click ImportCDMA VIP KPI Analysis Data. The New Task dialog box is displayed. The Task Type parameter is setto Import CDMA VIP KPI Analysis Data by default.

Step 3 Set the basic information about the task.1. Type the name of the task in Task Name.2. Select the VIP KPI analysis data import task from Task Type.



NOTE




----End



NOTE





Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)










NOTE







NOTE




16-9





16.2.2 Creating a Task of Importing CDMA Uplink-Interference-Ranking Analysis Data

A task of importing CDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis data is performed to importdata from the uplink-interference-ranking analysis data file in a specified directory on the serverto the database at a preset time. This describes how to create a task of importing CDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis data.




l The CDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis data is collected to the Nastar server.

Contextl A task of importing the CDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis data is a user-defined

timing task.l The task can be executed only periodically. The options of the execution period are

Hour, Day, Week, and Month.l For the user-defined timing tasks of the same type, the system can create only one.

Procedure



You can choose Task Type > Import CDMA Data from the navigation tree and then double-click ImportCDMA Uplink Interference Analysis - TopN Analysis Data. The New Task dialog box is displayed.The Task Type parameter is set to Import CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis - TopN AnalysisData by default.

Step 3 Set the basic information about the task.1. Type the name of the task in Task Name.2. From Task Type, select the task of importing uplink-interference-ranking analysis data.



Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


NOTE




----End


If required, you can delete created tasks to save system resources.NOTE













NOTE




16-11






NOTE






16.2.3 Creating a Task of Importing the CDMA Uplink-Interference-Spectrum Analysis Data

A task of importing the CDMA uplink-interference-spectrum analysis data is performed toimport data from the uplink-interference-spectrum analysis data file in a specified directory onthe server to the database. This describes how to create a task of importing the CDMA uplink-interference-spectrum analysis data.




l The CDMA uplink-interference-spectrum analysis data is collected to the Nastar server.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Contextl A task of importing the CDMA uplink-interference-spectrum analysis data is a user-defined


Hour, Day, Week, and Month.l For the user-defined timing tasks of the same type, the system can create only one.

Procedure



You can choose Task Type > Import CDMA Data from the navigation tree and then double-click ImportCDMA Uplink Interference Analysis - Spectrum Analysis Data. The New Task dialog box is displayed.The Task Type parameter is set to Import CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis - Spectrum AnalysisData by default.

Step 3 Set the basic information about the task.1. Type the name of the task in Task Name.2. From Task Type, select the task of importing the uplink-interference-spectrum analysis

data.



NOTE




----End



NOTE





2. Select the timing task from the task list in the right pane.3. Click Delete.



16-13

4. In the Confirm dialog box, click Yes.Then, the task is deleted from the task list.

l Suspending a taskTo delay the execution of a task, you can suspend a timing task that is in the idle state.






NOTE







NOTE





Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



16.2.4 Creating a Task of Importing CDMA Neighboring-CellAnalysis Data

A task of importing CDMA neighboring-cell analysis data is performed to import data from theneighboring-cell analysis data file in a specified directory on the server to the database at a presettime. This describes how to create a task of importing CDMA neighboring-cell analysis data.




l The data related to CDMA neighboring-cell analysis is collected to the Nastar server.

Contextl A task of importing CDMA neighboring-cell analysis data is a user-defined timing task.



Procedure



You can choose Task Type > Import CDMA Data from the navigation tree and then double-click ImportCDMA Intra-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Data (1X) or Import CDMA Intra-FrequencyNeighboring Cell Analysis Data (DO). The New Task dialog box is displayed. The Task Type parameteris set to Import CDMA Intra-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Data (1X) or Import CDMAIntra-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Data (DO) by default.

Step 3 Set the basic information about the task.1. Type the name of the task in Task Name.2. Select the neighboring-cell analysis data import task from Task Type.



NOTE





16-15


----End



NOTE













NOTE





Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)





l Canceling a task


NOTE






l Viewing a log


16.2.5 Creating a Task of Importing CDMA Configuration DataA task of importing CDMA configuration data is performed to import data from the configurationdata file in the specified directory on the server to the database at a preset time. This describeshow to create a task of importing CDMA configuration data.




l The CDMA configuration data is collected to the Nastar server.

For details of creating the performance data collection task, see 7.2.1 Creating a DataCollection Task.

Contextl A task of importing CDMA configuration data is a user-defined timing task.





16-17

Procedure



You can choose Task Type > Import CDMA Data from the navigation tree and then double-click ImportCDMA CFG Data. The New Task dialog box is displayed. The Task Type parameter is set to ImportCDMA CFG Data by default.




NOTE




----End



NOTE











Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)




NOTE







NOTE






16.3 Modifying a CDMA User-Defined Timing TaskThe Nastar allows you to modify certain parameters of a CDMA user-defined timing task. If theexecution of a CDMA user-defined timing task is complete, you cannot modify the task.



16-19

16.3.1 Modifying a Task of Importing CDMA VIP KPI Analysis DataThis describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing CDMA VIP KPIanalysis data.

16.3.2 Modifying a Task of Importing CDMA Uplink-Interference-Ranking Analysis DataThis describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing CDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis data.

16.3.3 Modifying a Task of Importing CDMA Uplink-Interference-Spectrum Analysis DataThis describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing CDMA uplink-interference-spectrum analysis data.

16.3.4 Modifying a Task of Importing CDMA Neighboring Cell Analysis DataThis describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing CDMA neighboringcell analysis data.

16.3.5 Modifying a Task of Importing CDMA Configuration DataThis describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing CDMA configurationdata.

16.3.1 Modifying a Task of Importing CDMA VIP KPI AnalysisData

This describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing CDMA VIP KPIanalysis data.


l A task of importing CDMA VIP KPI analysis data is created.



Procedure


Step 2 Choose Task Type > Import CDMA Data > Import CDMA VIP KPI Analysis Data fromthe navigation tree on the left.




NOTE


----End


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

16.3.2 Modifying a Task of Importing CDMA Uplink-Interference-Ranking Analysis Data

This describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing CDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis data.


l A task of importing CDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis data is created.

Contextl A task of importing the CDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis data is a user-defined


Hour, Day, Week, and Month.

Procedure


Step 2 Choose Task Type > Import CDMA Data > Import CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis- TopN Analysis Data from the navigation tree on the left.




NOTE


----End

16.3.3 Modifying a Task of Importing CDMA Uplink-Interference-Spectrum Analysis Data

This describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing CDMA uplink-interference-spectrum analysis data.


l A task of importing CDMA uplink-interference-spectrum analysis data is created.

Contextl A task of importing the CDMA uplink-interference-spectrum analysis data is a user-defined

timing task.



16-21


Procedure


Step 2 Choose Task Type > Import CDMA Data > Import CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis- Spectrum Analysis Data from the navigation tree on the left.




NOTE


----End

16.3.4 Modifying a Task of Importing CDMA Neighboring CellAnalysis Data

This describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing CDMA neighboringcell analysis data.


l A task of importing CDMA neighboring cell analysis data is created.



Procedure


Step 2 Choose Task Type > Import CDMA Data > Import CDMA Intra-Frequency NeighboringCell Analysis Data (1X) or Task Type > Import CDMA Data > Import CDMA Intra-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Data (DO) from the navigation tree on the left.





Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

NOTE


----End

16.3.5 Modifying a Task of Importing CDMA Configuration DataThis describes how to modify certain information about a task of importing CDMA configurationdata.


l A task of importing CDMA configuration data is created.



Procedure


Step 2 Choose Task Type > Import CDMA Data > Import CDMA CFG Data from the navigationtree on the left.




NOTE


----End

16.4 Modifying a CDMA Data Deletion TaskThis describes how to modify a CDMA data deletion task. If data is periodically imported to theNastar database, the database resources may be insufficient. By performing the CDMA datadeletion task, the Nastar can delete the data whose storage duration has expired from the databaseat the preset time to save system resources. A CDMA data deletion task is a system timing task.You can modify only certain parameters of the task. To modify a CDMA data deletion task, youmust be a user in the administrator group. If the execution of a CDMA data deletion task iscomplete, you cannot modify the task.




16-23

16.4.2 Modifying a Task of Deleting CDMA VIP KPI Analysis DataThis describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of deletingCDMA VIP KPI analysis data.

16.4.3 Modifying a Task of Deleting CDMA Uplink-Interference-Ranking Analysis DataThis describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of deletingCDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis data.

16.4.4 Modifying a Task of Deleting CDMA Uplink-Interference-Spectrum Analysis DataThis describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of deletingCDMA uplink-interference-spectrum analysis data.

16.4.5 Modifying a Task of Deleting CDMA Neighboring Cell Analysis DataThis describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of deletingCDMA neighboring cell analysis data.

16.4.6 Modifying a Task of Deleting CDMA Configuration DataThis describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of deletingCDMA configuration data.





periodically.l You can modify the following parameters of the task: Start Time, Execution Period, and

The data files will be reserved in the server.l Deleting history data refers to deleting the data files that are collected to certain file path

on the Nastar server.

Procedure





NOTE




Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

NOTE


----End

16.4.2 Modifying a Task of Deleting CDMA VIP KPI Analysis DataThis describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of deletingCDMA VIP KPI analysis data.



Contextl The task of deleting CDMA VIP KPI analysis data is a system timing task. It can be executed

only periodically.l You can modify the following parameters of the task: Start Time and Period.

l Deleting VIP KPI analysis data refers to deleting the VIP KPI analysis data collected tothe NASTAR server.

Procedure


Step 2 Choose Task Type > Delete CDMA Data > CDMA VIP KPI Analysis Data Maintenancefrom the navigation tree on the left.




NOTE


----End

16.4.3 Modifying a Task of Deleting CDMA Uplink-Interference-Ranking Analysis Data

This describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of deletingCDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis data.





16-25

Contextl The task of deleting CDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis data is a system timing

task. It can be executed only periodically.l You can modify the following parameters of the task: Start Time and Period.

l Deleting uplink-interference-ranking analysis data refers to deleting the uplink-interference-ranking analysis data collected to the NASTAR server.

Procedure


Step 2 Choose Task Type > Delete CDMA Data > CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis - TopNAnalysis Data Maintenance from the navigation tree on the left.




NOTE


----End

16.4.4 Modifying a Task of Deleting CDMA Uplink-Interference-Spectrum Analysis Data

This describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of deletingCDMA uplink-interference-spectrum analysis data.



Contextl The task of deleting CDMA uplink-interference-spectrum analysis data is a system timing

task. It can be executed only periodically.l You can modify the following parameters of the task: Start Time and Period.

l Deleting uplink-interference-spectrum analysis data refers to deleting the uplink-interference-spectrum analysis data collected to the NASTAR server.

Procedure


Step 2 Choose Task Type > Delete CDMA Data > CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis - SpectrumAnalysis Data Maintenance from the navigation tree on the left.



Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



NOTE


----End

16.4.5 Modifying a Task of Deleting CDMA Neighboring CellAnalysis Data

This describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of deletingCDMA neighboring cell analysis data.



Contextl The task of deleting CDMA neighboring cell analysis data is a system timing task. It can

be executed only periodically.l You can modify the following parameters of the task: Start Time and Period.

l Deleting neighboring cell analysis data refers to deleting the neighboring cell analysis datacollected to the NASTAR server.

Procedure


Step 2 Choose Task Type > Delete CDMA Data > CDMA Intra-Frequency Neighboring CellAnalysis Data (1X) Maintenance or Task Type > Delete CDMA Data > CDMA Intra-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Data (DO) Maintenance from the navigation tree onthe left.




NOTE


----End

16.4.6 Modifying a Task of Deleting CDMA Configuration DataThis describes how to modify certain information about the system-created task of deletingCDMA configuration data.



16-27



Contextl The task of deleting CDMA configuration data is a system timing task. It can be executed

only periodically.



Procedure


Step 2 Choose Task Type > Delete CDMA Data > CDMA CFG Data Maintenance from thenavigation tree on the left.




NOTE


----End








Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Procedure





NOTE



NOTE


----End





is not in the idle state at the specified time, it fails to be suspended.l In the specified time, the system resumes a suspended task and then the task is in the idle

status and wait to be dispatched. If the timing task is not in the idle state at the specifiedtime, it fails to be suspended.


Procedure






----End



16-29







Procedure





NOTE



----End





Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



----End









----End

16.8 Reference to the CDMA Centralized Task ManagementInterface

This describes the interface for the CDMA centralized task management and related informationsuch as the parameters used in the centralized task management. This help you understand thefunctions of the CDMA centralized task management.






16-31










Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)









Parameters


UserName



Category





16-33






LastRunResult



PartlySuccess



Miss RunTime





Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)







l Case sensitive


-


-








Value:0-65535




16-35


TimeSetting



Time.


PeriodSetting






Value:0 - 65535NOTE




Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)










Performance Data










16-37


Other TypeData





Full BackupTime



BackupMode


BackupPath





Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)














16-39

17 CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis

About This Chapter

CDMA uplink interference analysis consists of uplink-interference-ranking analysis and uplink-interference-spectrum analysis. By using the uplink-interference-ranking analysis function, youcan know the overall interference status of the selected carrier. This helps you to check whetherany external interference exists on the network. If a carrier has external interference, you canenable the Nastar to display the relevant spectrum data in a chart by using the uplink-interference-spectrum analysis function. Thus, you can check the interference features.

17.1 Basic Knowledge of CDMA Uplink-Interference AnalysisThe CDMA uplink-interference analysis function is performed to analyze the uplink levelmeasurement data reported by BTSs. The analysis is classified into two types: uplink-interference-ranking analysis and uplink-interference-spectrum analysis. Based on uplink-interference-ranking analysis results, you can determine whether the carriers on a network areexperiencing external interference. The distribution chart of the difference between the RSSIsof the main and diversity antennas of the uplink can help you to locate antenna feeder problems.If any carrier is experiencing external interference, the network optimization engineers canperform the uplink-interference-spectrum analysis function to analyze the spectrum and periodof the external interference. As a result, interference problems can be located quickly.

17.2 Process of CDMA Uplink Interference AnalysisThis describes the process of CDMA uplink interference analysis.

17.3 Managing CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis TasksThis describes how to manage CDMA uplink interference analysis tasks. You can create, modify,delete, suspend, and resume CDMA uplink interference analysis tasks. You can also view thestatus and execution progress of a task.

17.4 Querying the CDMA Uplink-Interference-Ranking Analysis ReportThis describes how to query the CDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis report. By queryingthe CDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis report, you can analyze the uplink-levelmeasurement data reported by the BTS during a time segment, obtain the RSSIs of the main anddiversity antennas and the number of concurrent users of the selected carriers during a timerange, and learn about the trends of the RSSIs and the number of concurrent users. The Nastarranks the selected carriers according to the query result and then helps you to determine whetherany external interference exists on the network.

17.5 Querying the CDMA Uplink-Interference-Spectrum Analysis Report

NastarOperator Guide 17 CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis


17-1

This describes how to query the CDMA uplink-interference-spectrum analysis task. By queryingthe CDMA uplink-interference-spectrum analysis task, you can analyze the scanning data(reported by the BTS) about 10 MHz or 20 MHz bands and enables the Nastar to display thedistribution and trend of the spectrum data in charts. Then, you can analyze the spectral andperiodical features of the external interference to quickly locate interference-related problems.

17.6 Reference for the CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis GUIThis describes the interface for CDMA uplink-interference analysis and the relevant parameters.Before performing relevant operations, familiarize yourself with the functions of CDMA uplink-interference analysis.

17 CDMA Uplink Interference AnalysisNastar

Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

17.1 Basic Knowledge of CDMA Uplink-InterferenceAnalysis

The CDMA uplink-interference analysis function is performed to analyze the uplink levelmeasurement data reported by BTSs. The analysis is classified into two types: uplink-interference-ranking analysis and uplink-interference-spectrum analysis. Based on uplink-interference-ranking analysis results, you can determine whether the carriers on a network areexperiencing external interference. The distribution chart of the difference between the RSSIsof the main and diversity antennas of the uplink can help you to locate antenna feeder problems.If any carrier is experiencing external interference, the network optimization engineers canperform the uplink-interference-spectrum analysis function to analyze the spectrum and periodof the external interference. As a result, interference problems can be located quickly.

Uplink interference is a key factor that affects the QoS of networks with respect to the followingaspects: conversation quality, call drop, handover, congestion, network coverage, and networkcapacity. If interference and load cannot be distinguished, load control cannot work properly.

After the conditions for uplink-interference-ranking analysis are set, the Nastar performs uplink-interference-ranking analysis on the selected carriers. The analysis results are displayed in a linechart. The chart displays the values and trends of the RSSIs of the main and diversity antennasand the number of subscribers of each carrier in different colors.

After the conditions for uplink-interference-spectrum analysis are set, the Nastar performsuplink-interference-spectrum analysis on the selected carriers. The analysis results are displayedin a line chart. In the chart, the average interference strength of all the frequency sampling pointsof each carrier in a time segment is displayed in a color. In addition, the values and trends of theRSSIs of the main and diversity antennas of each sampling frequency point at each time pointwithin a selected time segment are displayed in different colors.

17.2 Process of CDMA Uplink Interference AnalysisThis describes the process of CDMA uplink interference analysis.

Figure 17-1 shows the process of CDMA uplink interference analysis.



17-3

Figure 17-1 Workflow of uplink interference analysis

Start

Create an uplink-interference-ranking

analysis task

End

Create an E2E task

Querying a uplink-interference-ranking

analysis report

Whether external interference exists

No

Yes

Create an uplink-interference-spectrum

analysis task

Query an uplink-interference-spectrum

analysis report



Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Table 17-1 Description of the workflow of uplink interference analysis


1 Querying NEData


2 Create an end-to-end taskcorrespondingto an uplinkinterferenceanalysis task

You can choose Maintenance > E2E Task Management onthe Nastar client to open the E2E Task Management window,and then create an end-to-end task corresponding to an uplinkinterference analysis task. After the task is created, the Nastarissues MML commands to M2000, and then M2000 issues thereceived MML commands to the corresponding NE. At last, theNE that receives the MML commands performs themeasurement task and generates measurement results.When you create an E2E task, the Nastar will automaticallycreate a data collection task.

3 Create anuplink-interference-rankinganalysis task

You can create an uplink-interference-ranking analysis task inthe Analysis Task Management window of the main interfaceon the Nastar client. After the task is created, the Nastarperiodically obtains the required uplink spectrum scanning log,uplink RSSI measurement data, and configuration data from theNastar database, and then generates an analysis report throughthe analysis.

4 Querying auplink-interference-rankinganalysis report

You can view the analysis results of the uplink-interference-ranking analysis task that is successfully performed. In addition,you can query the RSSIs of the main and diversity antennas ofthe selected test carrier on the network, the number ofsubscribers, and the trend of subscribers. The Nastar ranks theselected carriers according to the query result and thus helps youto determine whether any external interference exists on thenetwork.

5 Create anuplink-interference-spectrumanalysis task

You can create an uplink-interference-spectrum analysis task inthe Analysis Task Management window of the main interfaceon the Nastar client. After the task is created, the Nastarperiodically obtains the required uplink spectrum scanning log,uplink RSSI measurement data, and configuration data from theNastar database, and then generates an analysis report throughthe analysis.

5 Query anuplink-interference-spectrumanalysis report

You can view the analysis results of the uplink-interference-spectrum analysis task that is successfully performed. TheNastar analyzes the scanning data about 10 MHz or 20 MHzbands in the database at a preset time and displays thedistribution and trend of the spectrum data in charts. Based onthe information, you can analyze the spectral and periodicalfeatures of the external interference to quickly locateinterference-related problems.



17-5

17.3 Managing CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis TasksThis describes how to manage CDMA uplink interference analysis tasks. You can create, modify,delete, suspend, and resume CDMA uplink interference analysis tasks. You can also view thestatus and execution progress of a task.

17.3.1 Creating a CDMA E2E TaskThis describes how to create an end-to-end (E2E) task. After you set an E2E task in the Nastar,the Nastar issues MML commands to the M2000. The M2000 then sends these MML commandsto the corresponding NEs. Finally, the NEs perform the measurement tasks and generate results.

17.3.2 Creating a CDMA Uplink-Interference-Ranking Analysis TaskThis describes how to create a CDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis task. By performingCDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis tasks, the Nastar performance analysis systemanalyzes the uplink-level measurement data reported by the BTS in the database at the presettime. By querying the analysis results of a selected carrier, you can learn about the correspondingRSSIs of the main and diversity antennas and the number of concurrent users during a timerange, and you can also learn about the trends of the RSSIs and the number of concurrent users.Then, you can determine whether any external interference exists on the network.

17.3.3 Creating a CDMA Uplink-Interference-Spectrum Analysis TaskThis describes how to create a CDMA uplink-interference-spectrum analysis task. Byperforming uplink-interference-spectrum analysis tasks, the Nastar performance analysis systemanalyzes the scanning data about 10 MHz or 20 MHz bands in the database at the preset timeand displays the distribution and trend of the spectrum data in charts. Then, you can analyze thespectral and periodical features of the external interference to quickly locate interference-relatedproblems.

17.3.4 Modifying a CDMA Uplink-Interference-Ranking Analysis TaskYou can modify the attributes of a CDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis task to meet thenew requirement.

17.3.5 Modifying a CDMA Uplink-Interference-Spectrum Analysis TaskYou can modify the attributes of a CDMA uplink-interference-spectrum analysis task to meetthe new requirement.

17.3.6 Checking a CDMA Uplink-Interference-Ranking Analysis TaskThis describes how to check a CDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis task. You can checkthe attributes, execution progress, and execution results of a CDMA uplink-interference-rankinganalysis task.

17.3.7 Checking a CDMA Uplink-Interference-Spectrum Analysis TaskThis describes how to check a CDMA uplink-interference-spectrum analysis task. You can checkthe attributes, execution progress, and execution results of a CDMA uplink-interference-spectrum analysis task.



Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)




Procedure







VIP subscriber monitoring task VIP KPI analysis task

Interference data task Uplink-interference-ranking analysis task

Spectrum data task Uplink-interference-spectrum analysis task

1x neighboring cell data task Co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task

DO neighboring cell data task Co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task

Complaint analysis data task Complaint assistant analysis task






----End



17-7









17.3.2 Creating a CDMA Uplink-Interference-Ranking AnalysisTask

This describes how to create a CDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis task. By performingCDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis tasks, the Nastar performance analysis systemanalyzes the uplink-level measurement data reported by the BTS in the database at the presettime. By querying the analysis results of a selected carrier, you can learn about the correspondingRSSIs of the main and diversity antennas and the number of concurrent users during a timerange, and you can also learn about the trends of the RSSIs and the number of concurrent users.Then, you can determine whether any external interference exists on the network.





Procedure




Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Step 3 Click Next.


Step 5 Click Next.

Step 6 Select one or multiple objects in the object navigation tree on the NE Object Selection tab page.l Choose BSC or Carrier Group above the navigation tree to display the objects in the

navigation tree as required.l The system enables you to search for the objects in the navigation tree. You can right-click

any point of the navigation tree and then press Ctrl+F to display the Find dialog box. Typethe keywords, that is, the search condition, in the dialog box. Then, the system searches forthe query result that meets the search condition.– You can select Case sensitive to ensure that the keywords you typed are case sensitive.


Step 7 Set Filtering Conditions of Datasource for TopN Analysis on the Parameter Setting tabpage.You can flexibly set the main interference threshold and the diversity interference threshold.That is, you can set either of the thresholds or set both thresholds.


----End


You can delete an uplink-interference-ranking analysis task that is not required so that youcan save system resources.

NOTE


1. Choose CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis - TopN Analysis Task from thenavigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window.If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performanceanalysis tasks.


l Suspending a taskTo delay the task execution, you can suspend an uplink-interference-ranking analysis taskthat is in the idle state. After this operation, the uplink-interference-ranking analysis taskis in the suspended state.

NOTE

Only the uplink-interference-ranking analysis tasks that are not suspended can be scheduled by thesystem.




17-9



l Resuming a taskYou can resume a suspended uplink-interference-ranking analysis task to the idle state.Then, the task can be scheduled by the system.

NOTE

Only the uplink-interference-ranking analysis task that is in the idle state can be scheduled by thesystem.



17.3.3 Creating a CDMA Uplink-Interference-Spectrum AnalysisTask

This describes how to create a CDMA uplink-interference-spectrum analysis task. Byperforming uplink-interference-spectrum analysis tasks, the Nastar performance analysis systemanalyzes the scanning data about 10 MHz or 20 MHz bands in the database at the preset timeand displays the distribution and trend of the spectrum data in charts. Then, you can analyze thespectral and periodical features of the external interference to quickly locate interference-relatedproblems.





Procedure




Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Step 3 Click Next.


Step 5 Click Next.






----End


You can delete an uplink-interference-spectrum analysis task that is not required so thatyou can save system resources.

NOTE


1. Choose CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis - Spectrum Analysis Task from thenavigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window.If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performanceanalysis tasks.


l Suspending a taskTo delay the task execution, you can suspend an uplink-interference-spectrum analysis taskthat is in the idle state. After this operation, the uplink-interference-spectrum analysis taskis in the suspended state.

NOTE

The system can schedule only the uplink-interference-spectrum analysis tasks that are not suspended.






17-11

l Resuming a taskYou can resume a suspended uplink-interference-spectrum analysis task to the idle state.Then, the task can be scheduled by the system.

NOTE

Only the uplink-interference-spectrum analysis task that is in the idle state can be scheduled by thesystem.



17.3.4 Modifying a CDMA Uplink-Interference-Ranking AnalysisTask

You can modify the attributes of a CDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis task to meet thenew requirement.


l A CDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis task is created.


Procedure

Step 1 Choose CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis - TopN Analysis Task from the navigation treein the Analysis Task Management window.If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysistasks.


Step 3 Modify the relevant parameter settings.l For details about the relevant parameters, see 17.6.4 Parameters for Creating and

Modifying CDMA Uplink-Interference-Ranking Analysis Tasks.l You can modify the Note parameter in the basic information, the Data Time Scope and

Task Start At parameters in the time information, the information about the objectnavigation tree, and the Filtering Conditions of Datasource for TopN Analysis parameter.


----End


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

17.3.5 Modifying a CDMA Uplink-Interference-Spectrum AnalysisTask

You can modify the attributes of a CDMA uplink-interference-spectrum analysis task to meetthe new requirement.


l A CDMA uplink-interference-spectrum analysis task is created.


Procedure

Step 1 Click the CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis Task node from the navigation tree in theAnalysis Task Management window.If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysistasks.



l For details about the relevant parameters, see 17.6.4 Parameters for Creating andModifying CDMA Uplink-Interference-Ranking Analysis Tasks.

l You can modify the Note parameter in the basic information, the Data Time Scope andTask Start At parameters in the time information, and the information about the objectnavigation tree.


----End

17.3.6 Checking a CDMA Uplink-Interference-Ranking AnalysisTask

This describes how to check a CDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis task. You can checkthe attributes, execution progress, and execution results of a CDMA uplink-interference-rankinganalysis task.


l A CDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis task is created.



17-13

Procedure




Checking the attributes of an uplink-interference-ranking analysis task



You can view the attributes of the selected taskand modify the relevant parameter settings.For detailed operations, see 17.3.4 Modifyinga CDMA Uplink-Interference-RankingAnalysis Task.

Check the execution progress of a task. Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane. Then, you can view the executionprogress of the task in the Progress column.

Check the task execution results. Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane. Then, you can view the results ofthe previous execution of the selected task inthe Last Running Result column.



----End






Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


17.3.7 Checking a CDMA Uplink-Interference-Spectrum AnalysisTask

This describes how to check a CDMA uplink-interference-spectrum analysis task. You can checkthe attributes, execution progress, and execution results of a CDMA uplink-interference-spectrum analysis task.


l A CDMA uplink-interference-spectrum analysis task is created.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis - Spectrum Analysis Task from the navigationtree in the Analysis Task Management window.If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysistasks.


Purpose Operation

Checking the attributes of an uplink-interference-spectrum analysis task



You can check the attributes of the selectedtask and modify the relevant parametersettings. For detailed operations, see 17.3.5Modifying a CDMA Uplink-Interference-Spectrum Analysis Task.





17-15

Purpose Operation




----End




l The system enables you to search for task information. You can click any line in the taskinformation list and then press Ctrl+F to display the Find dialog box. Type the keywords,that is, the search conditions, in the dialog box. Then, the system searches for the taskinformation that meets the search condition.



17.4 Querying the CDMA Uplink-Interference-RankingAnalysis Report

This describes how to query the CDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis report. By queryingthe CDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis report, you can analyze the uplink-levelmeasurement data reported by the BTS during a time segment, obtain the RSSIs of the main anddiversity antennas and the number of concurrent users of the selected carriers during a timerange, and learn about the trends of the RSSIs and the number of concurrent users. The Nastarranks the selected carriers according to the query result and then helps you to determine whetherany external interference exists on the network.



Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Procedure



Step 3 Double-click a result, or right-click a result and choose CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis- TopN Analysis Task. The CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis - TopN Analysis Taskwindow is displayed.This operation can be performed only when Result Status of a task is Successful. Otherwise,the shortcut menu is unavailable.

Step 4 Select a test carrier from the list on the left of the window. Then, you can view the RSSIs of themain and diversity antennas of the selected carrier, the number of concurrent users, the trendsof the RSSIs and the number of concurrent users, and the distribution chart of the differencesbetween the RSSIs of the main and diversity antennas in the area on the right.

l The left area displays the minimum average values of the RSSIs. By default, the minimumaverage values are in a sequence of descending order. You can adjust the sequence asrequired.

l In the area on the right:

– The chart at the upper part displays the RSSIs of the main and diversity antennas of theselected carrier during the measurement period, the number of concurrent users, and thetrends of the RSSIs and the number of concurrent users.

– The chart at the lower part displays the distribution of the differences between the RSSIsof the main and diversity antennas of the selected carrier. The difference between theRSSIs of the main and diversity antennas at each time point is calculated first. Then, thesystem calculates the percentage of a difference to the total number of differences.

You can zoom in or zoom out the trend chart by dragging it with the mouse.

----End









17-17



17.5 Querying the CDMA Uplink-Interference-SpectrumAnalysis Report

This describes how to query the CDMA uplink-interference-spectrum analysis task. By queryingthe CDMA uplink-interference-spectrum analysis task, you can analyze the scanning data(reported by the BTS) about 10 MHz or 20 MHz bands and enables the Nastar to display thedistribution and trend of the spectrum data in charts. Then, you can analyze the spectral andperiodical features of the external interference to quickly locate interference-related problems.


ProcedureStep 1 Choose CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis - Spectrum Analysis Task from the navigation

tree in the Analysis Task Management window.If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysistasks.


Step 3 Double-click a result, or right-click a result and choose CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis- Spectrum Analysis Task. The CDMA Uplink Interference Analysis - Spectrum AnalysisTask window is displayed.This operation can be performed only when Result Status of a task is Successful. Otherwise,the shortcut menu is unavailable.

Step 4 Select a carrier from the list on the left. Then, view the distribution chart of the spectrum scanningdata and the frequency-interference time sequence chart of the selected carrier in the area on theright.In the area on the right, the chart above, by default, displays the average signal strength of themain and diversity antennas of all the frequency sampling points of a selected carrier in a certaintime segment. Select a time point from the drop-down list box in the upper-right part the chart.Then, you can view the signal strength of the main and diversity antennas of all the frequencysampling points at the selected time. From the drop-down list box in the lower-right part of thedistribution chart, select a frequency sampling point. Then, the chart below displays the values


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

of the signal interference strength of the main and diversity antennas of the selected frequencysampling point in a certain time segment, and the trends of the values.

You can zoom in or zoom out the distribution chart and sequence chart by dragging them usingthe mouse.

----End












17.6 Reference for the CDMA Uplink Interference AnalysisGUI

This describes the interface for CDMA uplink-interference analysis and the relevant parameters.Before performing relevant operations, familiarize yourself with the functions of CDMA uplink-interference analysis.

17.6.1 Interface Description: CDMA Uplink-Interference-Ranking AnalysisThis describes the interface for CDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis. Before performingrelevant operations, familiarize yourself with the functions of the areas on the interface.

17.6.2 Interface Description: CDMA Uplink-Interference-Spectrum Analysis



17-19

This describes the interface for CDMA uplink-interference-spectrum analysis. Beforeperforming relevant operations, familiarize yourself with the functions of the areas on theinterface.

17.6.3 Parameters of CDMA E2E TasksThis describes the parameters of CDMA E2E tasks. You can refer to the description whencreating or modifying a CDMA E2E task.

17.6.4 Parameters for Creating and Modifying CDMA Uplink-Interference-Ranking AnalysisTasksThis describes the parameters for creating and modifying CDMA uplink-interference-rankinganalysis tasks. You can refer to the description when creating or modifying a CDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis task.

17.6.5 Parameters for Creating and Modifying CDMA Uplink-Interference-Spectrum AnalysisTasksThis describes the parameters for creating and modifying CDMA uplink-interference-spectrumanalysis tasks. You can refer to the description when creating or modifying a CDMA uplink-interference-spectrum analysis task.

17.6.6 Parameters for Querying the Uplink-Interference-Ranking Analysis Reports of CDMACellsThis describes the parameters for querying the uplink-interference-ranking analysis reports ofCDMA cells. You can refer to the description when querying the uplink-interference-rankinganalysis reports of CDMA cells.

17.6.7 Parameters for Querying the Uplink-Interference-Spectrum Analysis Reports of CDMACellsThis describes the parameters for querying the uplink-interference-spectrum analysis reports ofCDMA cells. You can refer to the description when querying the uplink-interference-spectrumanalysis reports of CDMA cells.

17.6.1 Interface Description: CDMA Uplink-Interference-RankingAnalysis

This describes the interface for CDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis. Before performingrelevant operations, familiarize yourself with the functions of the areas on the interface.

The analysis results of the uplink-interference-ranking can be displayed in tables or in line charts,as shown in Figure 17-2.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Figure 17-2 Interface for the uplink-interference-ranking analysis


(1) Current test carrier information list Displays the basic information about all thecarriers involved in an analysis task in atable.

(2) Detailed information about the RSSIs ofthe main and diversity antennas and thenumber of users

Displays the RSSIs of the main and diversityantennas of the selected carrier during themeasurement period, the number ofconcurrent users, and the trends of the RSSIsand the number of concurrent users in charts.

(3) Distribution chart of the differencesbetween the RSSIs of the main anddiversity antennas

Displays the distribution of the differencesbetween the RSSIs of the main and diversityantennas of the selected carrier in columncharts.

17.6.2 Interface Description: CDMA Uplink-Interference-SpectrumAnalysis

This describes the interface for CDMA uplink-interference-spectrum analysis. Beforeperforming relevant operations, familiarize yourself with the functions of the areas on theinterface.

The analysis results of the uplink-interference-spectrum can be displayed in line charts, as shownin Figure 17-3.



17-21

Figure 17-3 Interface for the uplink-interference-spectrum analysis

In Figure 17-3, the chart above, by default, displays the average signal strength of the main anddiversity antennas of all the frequency sampling points of a selected carrier in a certain timesegment. Select a time point from the drop-down list box in the upper-right part the chart. Then,you can view the signal strength of the main and diversity antennas of all the frequency samplingpoints at the selected time. From the drop-down list box in the lower-right part of the distributionchart, select a frequency sampling point. Then, the chart below displays the values of the signalinterference strength of the main and diversity antennas of the selected frequency sampling pointin a certain time segment, and the trends of the values.



BasicInformation



E2E Task List Indicates the types of E2E tasks. You can selectone of the following E2E tasks: VIP subscribermonitoring task, interference data task, spectrumdata task, 1x neighboring cell data task, DOneighboring cell data task, or complaint analysisdata task.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)



Begin Time Indicates the time when the task starts to run.The format is the same as that in the districtsetting, for example, YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss.

End Time Indicates the time when the task stops running.The format is the same as that in the districtsetting, for example, YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss.The start time must be earlier than the end time.


17.6.4 Parameters for Creating and Modifying CDMA Uplink-Interference-Ranking Analysis Tasks

This describes the parameters for creating and modifying CDMA uplink-interference-rankinganalysis tasks. You can refer to the description when creating or modifying a CDMA uplink-interference-ranking analysis task.


BasicInformation

Task Name Indicates the name of an uplink-interference-ranking analysis task.Value range:l A maximum of 60 characters



l Case sensitive

Task Type You need to select CDMA Uplink InterferenceAnalysis - TopN Analysis Task from the TaskType navigation tree.






17-23


TimeInformation




ObjectInformation


Carrier Group If you select this option, the navigation tree displaysall the carrier groups of the entire network.


Filtering Conditions ofDatasource for TopNAnalysis

Indicates the minimum interference strengththreshold of the uplink main and diversity antennas.This parameter can be set to any integer from -120to 0. The default value is -90.Unit: dBm

17.6.5 Parameters for Creating and Modifying CDMA Uplink-Interference-Spectrum Analysis Tasks

This describes the parameters for creating and modifying CDMA uplink-interference-spectrumanalysis tasks. You can refer to the description when creating or modifying a CDMA uplink-interference-spectrum analysis task.



BasicInformation

Task Name Indicates the name of an uplink-interference-spectrum analysis task.Value range:l A maximum of 60 characters



l Case sensitive

Task Type You need to select CDMA Uplink InterferenceAnalysis - Spectrum Analysis Task from the TaskType navigation tree.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)





TimeInformation




ObjectInformation


Carrier Group If you select this option, the navigation tree displaysall the carrier groups of the entire network.

17.6.6 Parameters for Querying the Uplink-Interference-RankingAnalysis Reports of CDMA Cells

This describes the parameters for querying the uplink-interference-ranking analysis reports ofCDMA cells. You can refer to the description when querying the uplink-interference-rankinganalysis reports of CDMA cells.


Carrier Name Indicates the name of the test carrier, for example, Carrier_1.

Average RSSI of Main(dBm)

Indicates the average RSSI of the main antennas of the carriers ina selected time segment.

Average RSSI ofDiversity (dBm)

Indicates the average RSSI of the diversity antennas of the carriersin a selected time segment.

Maximum Number ofUser Legs

Indicates the maximum number of subscriber-occupied trafficchannels of each carrier in a selected time segment.



17-25


Minimum RSSIAverage of the Mainand Diversity (dBm)

Indicates the average value of the minimum RSSI of the mainantenna and of the diversity antenna of each carrier in a selectedtime segment.

Average Difference(Main-Diversity) (dB)

Indicates the value calculated by dividing the sum of the differencesbetween the RTWPs of the main and diversity antennas at each timepoint in the selected time range by the total number of time points.

Standard Deviation(Main-Diversity)

Indicates the square root of the value calculated by dividing the sumof the square of the difference between the RTWPs of the main anddiversity antennas at each time point in the selected time range bythe total number of time points.

17.6.7 Parameters for Querying the Uplink-Interference-SpectrumAnalysis Reports of CDMA Cells

This describes the parameters for querying the uplink-interference-spectrum analysis reports ofCDMA cells. You can refer to the description when querying the uplink-interference-spectrumanalysis reports of CDMA cells.


Central frequency Indicates the frequency of the selected carrier.

BSCName Indicates the name of the BSC that a carrier belongs to, for example,BSC_1.

Site name Indicates the name of the BTS that a carrier belongs to.The naming rule is BTS name - BTS ID.

CellName Indicates the name of the cell that a carrier belongs to.The naming rule is cell name - cell ID.

Sector Name Indicates the name of the sector that a carrier belongs to.The naming rule is sector name - sector ID.

Band Indicates the band of a carrier.

Center Frequency Indicate the frequency of the selected carrier.

Bandwidth Spectrum Indicates the frequency range corresponding to a spectrum.

RBW Indicates the resolution bandwidth.

Time Span Indicates the time segment of the data selected for the analysis task.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

18 CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring CellAnalysis

About This Chapter

This describes the CDMA co-frequency neighboring cell analysis. The CDMA co-frequencyneighboring cell analysis function enables you to manage neighboring cell analysis tasks, checkCDMA neighboring cell analysis reports, and export the CDMA neighboring cell analysisreports. Based on the configuration data and the engineering parameters, the Nastar analyzes thePilot Strength Measurement Message (PSMM)/Route Update message (RU) reported by UEson the network to check for the redundant and missing neighboring cell configuration of ameasurement cell and the priorities that need to be adjusted. If this information exists, the systemdisplays the information. This helps you to solve the problems relating to the network qualitythat are caused by redundant or missing neighboring cell configuration, or by incorrect priority.

18.1 Basic Knowledge of CDMA Neighboring Cell AnalysisThis provides the basic knowledge of the CDMA neighboring cell analysis, such as theneighboring cell analysis functions, application scenarios, and algorithms for the neighboringcell analysis. The basic knowledge helps you perform the operations related to the CDMAneighboring cell analysis.

18.2 Process of CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring-Cell AnalysisThis describes the process of CDMA co-frequency neighboring-cell analysis.

18.3 Managing CDMA Neighboring Cell Analysis TasksThis describes how to manage CDMA neighboring cell analysis tasks. You can create, modify,delete, suspend, and resume CDMA neighboring cell analysis tasks. You can also view the statusand execution progress of the tasks.

18.4 Query a CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis ReportThe Nastar provides the function of querying CDMA co-frequency neighboring cell analysisreports. You can query the missing and redundant neighboring cells and the neighboring cellpriorities that need to be adjusted of a test carrier. Then, you can configure the missingneighboring cells, delete the redundant cells, and adjust the neighboring cell priorities based onthe query results.

18.5 Exporting a CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis ReportThis describes how to export a CDMA co-frequency neighboring cell analysis report. Afterquerying the co-frequency neighboring cell analysis results, you can export the found analysis

NastarOperator Guide 18 CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis


18-1

results and save them in .csv files or .xls files or export the found analysis results as MML scripts.Based on the exported analysis results or generated MML scripts, you can configure neighboringrelations on the network to optimize the neighboring relations between the carriers on thenetwork.

18.6 Reference for the CDMA Neighboring Cell Analysis GUIThis describes the interface for CDMA neighboring cell analysis and the relevant parameters.Before performing relevant operations, you can familiarize yourself with the functions of theCDMA neighboring cell analysis.

18 CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell AnalysisNastar

Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

18.1 Basic Knowledge of CDMA Neighboring Cell AnalysisThis provides the basic knowledge of the CDMA neighboring cell analysis, such as theneighboring cell analysis functions, application scenarios, and algorithms for the neighboringcell analysis. The basic knowledge helps you perform the operations related to the CDMAneighboring cell analysis.

18.1.1 CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis FunctionsThe MRs of MSs reflect the actual propagation status of radio signals. By using the CDMA co-frequency neighboring cell analysis functions, the Nastar can summarize and analyze the PSMM/RU messages reported by MSs on the network to check for the redundant and missingneighboring cell configuration of a test carrier and to check for the priorities that need to beadjusted. If this information exists, the system displays the information. This helps you to solvethe problems relating to the network quality that are caused by redundant or missing neighboringcell configuration, or by incorrect priority.

18.1.2 CDMA Neighboring Cell Analysis AlgorithmsThis describes the algorithms related to the analysis of CDMA co-frequency neighboring cells.The algorithms help determine the missing neighboring cells, redundant neighboring cells, andrecommended priorities of neighboring cells.

18.1.1 CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis FunctionsThe MRs of MSs reflect the actual propagation status of radio signals. By using the CDMA co-frequency neighboring cell analysis functions, the Nastar can summarize and analyze the PSMM/RU messages reported by MSs on the network to check for the redundant and missingneighboring cell configuration of a test carrier and to check for the priorities that need to beadjusted. If this information exists, the system displays the information. This helps you to solvethe problems relating to the network quality that are caused by redundant or missing neighboringcell configuration, or by incorrect priority.

Neighboring Cell AnalysisWhen an overlapped coverage area with strong signals exists between sectors, handovers mayoccur between the sectors. In this case, you need to configure neighboring relations. Correctneighboring relations ensure that MSs located at the service boundary of a cell can be switchedin time to the neighboring cell that has optimal signals. In this case, handover gains can beobtained and the transmit power of the terminals on the network can be reduced. Thus, QoS andperformance of the network are enhanced.

Using the configuration data and engineering parameters, the Nastar can analyze the neighboringcells of a selected carrier on the basis of the PSMM/RU messages reported by a MS. By collectingweighted statistics based on handover relations, the Nastar can determine the redundant andmissing neighboring cell configuration of a test carrier and the priorities that need to be adjusted.In addition, the Nastar can sequence the recommended priorities of the neighboring cells. Bycomparing the recommended priorities and the actually configured priorities, you can adjust thefinal priorities of the neighboring cells on the Nastar client.

The Nastar displays results in line or bar chart. It displays both the neighboring cells of differenttypes and the sequence of finally ascertained priorities in different colors.

The results of neighboring cell analysis can be exported as a file in .csv or .xls format or be usedto generate a script that can be directly used for the network. You can configure neighboring



18-3

relations based on the exported file or the generated script to optimize the neighboring relationsof the carrier on the network.

In measurement results, undefined neighboring cells are identified first by frequencies andpseudo number (PN). On the network, cells that have the same frequency and same PN mayexist around a best cell. You need to predict the signal strength based on the site location, antennaazimuth, and antenna gain of these cells and then determine the possible neighboring cells. Inaddition, you need to export the analysis report on the possible neighboring cells through theNastar client.

Limitation and Impact

The PSMM message may fail to meet the requirements due to improper PN planning of theexisting network, incorrect site configuration and installation, or impacts of geographicallocations. Thus, the accuracy of neighboring cell optimization results is affected. In this case,you need to manually confirm or adjust the optimization results (especially at the BSC boundaryarea or the area where different network modes are adopted) based on the results of neighboringcell analysis. Here, network modes can be GSM, CDMA, and WCDMA.

The accuracy of neighboring cell analysis results may be affected in the following cases:l Engineering parameters are incorrect.

l The air interface parameters during data collection for neighboring cell analysis are notstable.

l PN-related problems occur. For example, the reuse distance of a same or near PN isexcessively short, neighboring cells of the same PN are incorrectly configured, or the PNOneway/Twoway problem occurs.

l Neighboring cell data of less than three days (seven days are recommended) is collected.

NOTE

The Nastar can only be used for measuring and analyzing the CDMA co-frequency neighboring cells inthe case of soft handover or softer handover.

18.1.2 CDMA Neighboring Cell Analysis AlgorithmsThis describes the algorithms related to the analysis of CDMA co-frequency neighboring cells.The algorithms help determine the missing neighboring cells, redundant neighboring cells, andrecommended priorities of neighboring cells.

The neighboring cell analysis algorithms are the basis for determining the missing neighboringcells, redundant neighboring cells, and recommended priorities of neighboring cells.

l The algorithm for calculating the recommended priority of a neighboring cell is as follows:

1. Calculate the weighted value of the neighboring cell.The overall score of a neighboring cell is determined together by the appearance timesof the neighboring cell, the relative difference between the Ec/Io of the neighboringcell and the Ec/Io of the measurement cell, and the absolute difference between theEc/Io of the neighboring cell and the Ec/Io of the measurement cell.

2. Sequence the weighted values in descending order. The higher the weighted value is,the higher the priority is.The recommended highest priority is 0.

3. Determine whether the priority of the neighboring cell needs to be adjusted.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Handovers occur in the neighboring cell. In addition, the neighboring cell is configuredin the BAM. When Abs (Recommended priority - Configured priority) ≥ 4, you caninfer that the priority of the neighboring cell needs to be adjusted.

l The algorithm for determining a missing neighboring cell is as follows:Handovers occur in the neighboring cell. In addition, the neighboring cell is not configuredin the BAM. If the recommended priority of the neighboring cell is smaller than therecommended number of neighboring cells, you can infer that the neighboring cell is amissing neighboring cell.

l The algorithm for determining a redundant neighboring cell is as follows:No handover occurs in the neighboring cell. In addition, the neighboring cell is configuredin the BAM. If the recommended priority of the neighboring cell is not smaller than therecommended number of neighboring cells, you can infer that the neighboring cell is aredundant neighboring cell.

18.2 Process of CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring-CellAnalysis

This describes the process of CDMA co-frequency neighboring-cell analysis.

Figure 18-1 shows the process of co-frequency neighboring-cell analysis.

Figure 18-1 Workflow of co-frequency neighboring-cell analysis

Start

Create a co-frequency neighboring cell

analysis task

End

Create an E2E task

Query a co-frequency neighboring cell analysis report

Export a co-frequency neighboring cell analysis report



18-5


Table 18-1 Description of the workflow of co-frequency neighboring-cell analysis


1 Querying NEData


2 Create an end-to-end taskcorrespondingto a co-frequencyneighboring cellanalysis task

You can choose Maintenance > E2E Task Management onthe Nastar client to open the E2E Task Management window,and then create an end-to-end task corresponding to a co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task. After the task iscreated, the Nastar issues MML commands to M2000, and thenM2000 issues the received MML commands to thecorresponding NE. At last, the NE that receives the MMLcommands performs the measurement task and generatesmeasurement results.When you create an E2E task, the Nastar will automaticallycreate a data collection task.

3 Create a co-frequencyneighboring cellanalysis task

You can create a co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task inthe Analysis Task Management window of the main interfaceon the Nastar client. After the task is created, the Nastarperiodically obtains the required measurement reports from theNastar database, and then generates an analysis report throughthe analysis.

4 Query a co-frequencyneighboring cellanalysis report

You can view the analysis results of the co-frequencyneighboring-cell analysis task that is successfully performed,configure missing neighboring cells, delete redundantneighboring cells, and adjust neighboring cell priorities.

5 Export a co-frequencyneighboring cellanalysis report

You can export a co-frequency neighboring-cell analysis reportfrom the Nastar.

18.3 Managing CDMA Neighboring Cell Analysis TasksThis describes how to manage CDMA neighboring cell analysis tasks. You can create, modify,delete, suspend, and resume CDMA neighboring cell analysis tasks. You can also view the statusand execution progress of the tasks.


18.3.2 Creating a CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Task


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

This describes how to create a CDMA co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task. After aCDMA co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task is created, the Nastar, based on theconfiguration data and the engineering parameters, periodically analyzes the PSMMs/RUsreported by UEs on the network to check for the redundant and missing neighboring cellconfiguration of a test carrier and to check for the priorities that need to be adjusted. By queryingthe results of an analysis task, you can learn about the overall status of the network and locatethe network quality problems that are caused by redundant or missing neighboring cellconfiguration, or by incorrect priority.

18.3.3 Modifying a CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis TaskThis describes how to modify the attributes of a CDMA co-frequency neighboring cell analysistask. You can modify the attributes of a CDMA neighboring cell analysis task as required.

18.3.4 Checking a CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis TaskThis describes how to check a CDMA co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task. You cancheck the attributes, execution progress, and execution results of a CDMA co-frequencyneighboring cell analysis task as required.





Procedure












18-7










----End









18.3.2 Creating a CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell AnalysisTask

This describes how to create a CDMA co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task. After aCDMA co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task is created, the Nastar, based on the


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

configuration data and the engineering parameters, periodically analyzes the PSMMs/RUsreported by UEs on the network to check for the redundant and missing neighboring cellconfiguration of a test carrier and to check for the priorities that need to be adjusted. By queryingthe results of an analysis task, you can learn about the overall status of the network and locatethe network quality problems that are caused by redundant or missing neighboring cellconfiguration, or by incorrect priority.




l The system supports a maximum of 50 tasks of this type. The time range of the data to beanalyzed must be within seven days.

Procedure



Step 3 Click Next.


Step 5 Click Next.





Step 7 Set Recommended Number of Neighboring Cells on the Parameter Setting tab page.


----End


This describes how to delete a neighboring cell analysis task. You can delete theunnecessary neighboring cell analysis tasks to save system resources.



18-9

NOTE

The tasks in Running state cannot be deleted.

1. Choose CDMA Intra-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Task from thenavigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window.If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performanceanalysis tasks.


l Suspending a taskThis describes how to suspend a neighboring cell analysis task. To delay the task execution,you can suspend a neighboring cell analysis task that is in idle state. After this operation,the neighboring cell analysis task is in suspended state.

NOTE






NOTE

Only the neighboring cell analysis tasks that are in idle state can be scheduled by the system.


2. Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane, and then click .The task can be performed only when its Status is Suspend. If the task is not insuspended state, the button is unavailable.

18.3.3 Modifying a CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring CellAnalysis Task

This describes how to modify the attributes of a CDMA co-frequency neighboring cell analysistask. You can modify the attributes of a CDMA neighboring cell analysis task as required.



Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

l A CDMA co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task is created.


Procedure

Step 1 Choose CDMA Intra-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Task from the navigation treein the Analysis Task Management window.If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysistasks.



l For details about the relevant parameters, see 18.6.3 Parameters for Creating andModifying CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Tasks.

l You can modify the Note parameter in the basic information, the Data Time Scope andTask Start At parameters in the time information, the information about the objectnavigation tree, and the Recommended Number of Neighboring Cells parameter.


----End

18.3.4 Checking a CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell AnalysisTask

This describes how to check a CDMA co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task. You cancheck the attributes, execution progress, and execution results of a CDMA co-frequencyneighboring cell analysis task as required.


l A CDMA co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task is created.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose CDMA Intra-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Task from the navigation treein the Analysis Task Management window.If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysistasks.




18-11


Check the attributes of a neighboring cellanalysis task.



You can view the attributes of the selected taskand modify the relevant parameter settings.For detailed operations, see 18.3.3 Modifyinga CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring CellAnalysis Task.

Check the execution progress of a task. Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane. Then, you can view the executionprogress of the task in the Progress column.

Check the task execution results. Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane. Then, you can view the results ofthe previous execution of the selected task inthe Last Running Result column.



----End






Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

18.4 Query a CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring CellAnalysis Report

The Nastar provides the function of querying CDMA co-frequency neighboring cell analysisreports. You can query the missing and redundant neighboring cells and the neighboring cellpriorities that need to be adjusted of a test carrier. Then, you can configure the missingneighboring cells, delete the redundant cells, and adjust the neighboring cell priorities based onthe query results.


ProcedureStep 1 Choose CDMA Intra-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Task from the navigation tree

in the Analysis Task Management window.If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysistasks.

Step 2 Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane.You can view all the analysis results of a selected task in the lower-right pane.

Step 3 Double-click a result, or right-click a result and choose CDMA Intra-Frequency NeighboringCell Analysis from the shortcut menu. The CDMA Intra-Frequency Neighboring CellAnalysis window is displayed.This operation can be performed only when Result Status of a task is Successful. Otherwise,the shortcut menu is unavailable.

Step 4 Select a carrier from the list of test carriers in Area (2) in the CDMA Intra-FrequencyNeighboring Cell Analysis window.l For details about the rules for dividing areas, see 18.6.1 Interface Description: CDMA Co-

Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis.l The neighboring cell list in Area (4) displays all the neighboring cells of the selected carrier.

Based on the neighboring cell analysis algorithms, the Nastar determines the redundantneighboring cells, the missing neighboring cells, the neighboring cells whose priorities needto be adjusted, and the neighboring cells that require no operations. It also provides therelevant operation suggestions.For details about the neighboring cell analysis algorithms, see 18.1.2 CDMA NeighboringCell Analysis Algorithms.

l If a neighboring cell of the selected carrier is unknown, the Nastar calculates the possiblelocation of the neighboring cell and adds Unknow PN to the corresponding name of theselected carrier in Area (4) to identify the unknown neighboring cell.

l The figure in Area (5), displays the normal neighboring cells, redundant neighboring cells,missing neighboring cells, and the neighboring cells whose priorities need to be adjusted ofthe selected carrier in legends in different colors. You can select a parameter from the drop-down list box above Area (5). Then, the parameter values corresponding to each neighboringcell are displayed in a line chart.In the figure, the left axis represents the weighted values of the neighboring cells, the rightaxis represents the value of the line chart, and the horizontal coordinate represents the names



18-13

of the neighboring cells. In the figure, the neighboring cells are sequenced in descendingorder of the weighted values from left to right.

Step 5 Select a neighboring cell whose priority needs to be adjusted in Area (4), and then click the upor down icon above the list to adjust the priority.The adjustment result is saved as a .dat file in the local installation directory.

l Click above the list. A dialog box for adding new neighboring cells is displayed. Selecta carrier and set its priority. Then, click OK.The selected carrier is added to the neighboring cell list according to the preset priority.

l After you adjust the priority of a neighboring cell, you can click above the list to restorethe original priority and then the corresponding .dat file is deleted from the local installationdirectory accordingly.

----End









18.5 Exporting a CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring CellAnalysis Report

This describes how to export a CDMA co-frequency neighboring cell analysis report. Afterquerying the co-frequency neighboring cell analysis results, you can export the found analysis


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

results and save them in .csv files or .xls files or export the found analysis results as MML scripts.Based on the exported analysis results or generated MML scripts, you can configure neighboringrelations on the network to optimize the neighboring relations between the carriers on thenetwork.


l You have queried CDMA co-frequency neighboring cell analysis reports.

Procedurel Perform the following operations as required.

If ... Then ...

You want to export the generalinformation about a test carrier

1. Click in the CDMA Intra-FrequencyNeighboring Cell Analysis window. TheSave dialog box is displayed.

2. Set the filename, file type, and save path, andthen click Save.The saved .csv or .xls file is openedautomatically so that you can view theinformation in it.The information in the .csv or .xls file consistsof the task name, task creator, executionresult, start time, end time, and test carrierinformation.



18-15

If ... Then ...

You want to export the neighboringcell optimization results of a testcarrier

l Exporting the results as a .csv file or an .xlsfile


2. Set the filename, file type, and save path.Then, click Save.The saved .csv or .xls file is openedautomatically so that you can view theinformation in it.The information in the .csv or .xls fileconsists of the task name, task creator,execution result, start time, end time, andtest carrier information.

l Exporting the results as MML scripts

1. Click in the CDMA Intra-FrequencyNeighboring Cell Analysis window.Choose Export Optimized Script. TheExport Script - Export OptimizedScript dialog box is displayed.

2. Set the save path of the scripts and theneighboring-cell analysis results to beexported, and then click OK.The system saves the neighboring-cellanalysis results as MML scripts.

You want to export the manuallyadjusted neighboring celloptimization results of a test carrier

1. Click in the CDMA Intra-FrequencyNeighboring Cell Analysis window. ChooseExport Manually Adjusted Script. TheExport Script - Export Manually AdjustedScript dialog box is displayed.

2. Set the save path of the scripts and scriptobjects, and then click OK.The system saves the neighboring-cellanalysis results as MML scripts.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

If ... Then ...

You want to export all neighboringcell analysis results

1. Click in the CDMA Intra-FrequencyNeighboring Cell Analysis window. TheSave dialog box is displayed.If the data amount of the analysis results ofall the neighboring cells is large, you need towait for a while for the dialog box to appear.

2. Set the filename and save path, and then clickSave.You are allowed to save all the neighboring-cell analysis results only as .xls files by testcarrier. The analysis results of each testcarrier corresponds to one .xls file.The file is named task name_test carriername_NbrInfo.xls.

Export the information about thepossible neighboring cells of a bestcell


2. Set the name, type and save path of the file.Then, click Save.After being saved, a CSV or XLS file isautomatically open so that you can view thefile conveniently.The CSV or XLS file contains the followinginformation: the task name, creator, start timeand end time of the results, and possibleneighboring cells of the test carrier.

NOTE

l Exporting the general information about a test carrier refers to exporting the information aboutall the test carriers involved in the selected analysis task.

l Exporting the neighboring cell optimization results of a test carrier refers to exporting theinformation about the neighboring cells of a specified test carrier.

l Exporting the manually adjusted neighboring cell optimization results of a test carrier refers toexporting the neighboring cell optimization results that are manually adjusted from all theneighboring cell analysis results of a specified test carrier.

l Exporting all neighboring cell analysis results refers to exporting the information about all thetest carriers and the information about the neighboring cells of the test carriers.

l Exporting the analysis results of possible neighboring cells refers to exporting the informationabout the possible neighboring cells of of the test carriers.

----End



18-17

18.6 Reference for the CDMA Neighboring Cell AnalysisGUI

This describes the interface for CDMA neighboring cell analysis and the relevant parameters.Before performing relevant operations, you can familiarize yourself with the functions of theCDMA neighboring cell analysis.

18.6.1 Interface Description: CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell AnalysisThis describes the interface for CDMA co-frequency neighboring cell analysis. Beforeperforming relevant operations, familiarize yourself with the rules for dividing areas on theinterface.


18.6.3 Parameters for Creating and Modifying CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell AnalysisTasksThis describes the parameters for creating and modifying CDMA co-frequency neighboring cellanalysis tasks. You can refer to the description when creating or modifying a CDMA co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task.

18.6.4 Parameters for Querying CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis ReportsThis describes the parameters for querying CDMA co-frequency neighboring cell analysisreports. You can refer to the description when querying CDMA co-frequency neighboring cellanalysis reports.

18.6.1 Interface Description: CDMA Co-Frequency NeighboringCell Analysis

This describes the interface for CDMA co-frequency neighboring cell analysis. Beforeperforming relevant operations, familiarize yourself with the rules for dividing areas on theinterface.

The analysis results of co-frequency neighboring cells can be displayed in tables or in line charts,as shown in Figure 18-2.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Figure 18-2 Interface for the co-frequency neighboring cell analysis


(1) Button area Consists of five buttons that are used for exportingoverview data of measured carrier, neighboring cellanalysis data, all neighboring analysis data,neighboring cell script and analysis results ofpossible neighboring cells.

(2) Current test carrier information list Displays the information related to the current testcarrier.

(3) Button area Consists of three buttons used for adjusting thepriorities of neighboring cells and savingadjustment results.

(4) Neighboring cell list Displays all the co-frequency neighboring cells ofthe carrier selected in area (2).



18-19


(5) Image area Displays the information about all the neighboringcells of the selected test carrier in the combinationof line charts.

NOTEIf a neighboring cell of the selected carrier is unknown,the Nastar calculates the possible location of theneighboring cell and adds Unknow PN to thecorresponding name of the selected carrier in Area (2) toidentify the unknown neighboring cell.



BasicInformation








18.6.3 Parameters for Creating and Modifying CDMA Co-Frequency Neighboring Cell Analysis Tasks

This describes the parameters for creating and modifying CDMA co-frequency neighboring cellanalysis tasks. You can refer to the description when creating or modifying a CDMA co-frequency neighboring cell analysis task.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


BasicInformation




l Case sensitive

Task Type Choose CDMA Intra-Frequency NeighboringCell Analysis Task from the Task Type navigationtree.




TimeInformation

Data Time Scope The start time must be earlier than the end time.You can either type the time in this field, or click

to select the date and time in the DateSelection dialog box.This parameter is valid for only one-time tasks.

Task Start At Indicates the time when the analysis task isexecuted.This start time must be equal to or later than the endtime specified by Data Time Scope.

ObjectInformation

BSC If you select this option, the navigation tree displaysall the BSCs on the entire network.

Carrier Group If you select this option, the navigation tree displaysall the carrier groups on the entire network.


RecommendedNumber ofNeighboring Cells

Indicates the number of neighboring cells that youare recommended to configure.This parameter can be any integer ranging from 1to 40. The default value is 20.



18-21

18.6.4 Parameters for Querying CDMA Co-Frequency NeighboringCell Analysis Reports

This describes the parameters for querying CDMA co-frequency neighboring cell analysisreports. You can refer to the description when querying CDMA co-frequency neighboring cellanalysis reports.

Parameters related to the general information about a test carrierParameter Description

MSC Where TestCarrier Is Located

Indicates the name of the MSC that the test carrier belongs to.

BSC Where TestCarrier Is Located

Indicates the name of the BSC that the test carrier belongs to, forexample, BSC_1.

Test Carrier Name Indicates the name of the test carrier, for example, Carrier_1.


Indicates the number of missing intra-frequency neighboring cellsamong the undefined neighboring cells of the test carrier.


Indicates the number of redundant intra-frequency neighboring cellsamong the defined neighboring cells of the test carrier.

Number ofNeighboring CellsWhose Priorities AreAdjusted

Indicates the number of neighboring cells that are specified asAdjusted Priority in the detailed neighboring cell list of the testcarrier.



Indicates the name of a neighboring cell.

Weighted Value Indicates the weighted value calculated through the neighboring cellweighted algorithm.

Handoff Count Indicates the number of handovers of a neighboring cell.

Suggestion by Tool Lists the recommended operations on a neighboring cell and displayswhether the neighboring cell is defined.

RecommendedPriority

Indicates the recommended priority of a neighboring cell based on theweighted value of the neighboring cell. The higher the weightedvalue, the higher is the recommended priority.

Configured Priority Indicates the priority of an intra-frequency neighboring cell in theconfiguration data.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


Adjusted Priority Indicates the final priority after the manual adjustment based on therecommended priority.

Average EcIo Indicates the average Ec/Io of a neighboring cell in all the MRs thatcontain the information about this neighboring cell.

Distance (km) Indicates the distance between the test carrier and the currentneighboring cell.

MSC ID Indicates the ID of the MSC that a neighboring cell belongs to.

BTS ID Indicates the ID of the BTS that a neighboring cell belongs to.

Cell ID Indicates the ID of a neighboring cell.

Sector ID Indicates the ID of the sector that a neighboring cell belongs to.

ARFCN Indicates the ARFCN of a neighboring cell.

Band Indicates the band of a neighboring cell.The value 0 represents 800 MHz, the value 1 represents 1900 MHz,and the value 5 represents 450 MHz.



18-23

19 CDMA VIP KPI Analysis

About This Chapter

CDMA VIP KPI analysis involves managing the tasks of analyzing the QoS of CDMA VIPsubscribers and querying the analysis reports about the QoS of CDMA VIP subscribers. TheNastar filters the call events records of the VIP subscribers among all the user call events recordsof the entire network and thus obtains the related counters about the voice service and data serviceof the VIP subscribers. By monitoring the QoS-related KPIs of the VIP subscribers every day,the Nastar enables you to locate and solve the network problems, which may incur complaints,beforehand. Then, you can provide good services to VIP subscribers and improve satisfactionof VIP subscribers.

19.1 Basic Knowledge of CDMA VIP KPI AnalysisThe CDMA VIP KPI analysis function enables you to routinely monitor the calls of the selectedVIP subscribers on the network. By analyzing the monitor reports, you can learn about the QoSof the VIP subscribers. The CDMA VIP KPI analysis function can also help network engineersto analyze and solve, actively and beforehand, the potential network problems that may affectVIP subscriber services, thus improving the satisfaction of VIP subscribers.

19.2 Process of CDMA VIP KPI AnalysisThis describes the process of CDMA VIP KPI analysis.

19.3 Managing CDMA VIP KPI Analysis TasksThis describes how to manage CDMA VIP KPI analysis tasks. You can create, modify, delete,suspend, and resume CDMA VIP KPI analysis tasks. You can also view the status and executionprogress of such tasks.

19.4 Querying the Analysis Reports About the QoS of CDMA VIP SubscribersThe Nastar provides the function of querying the analysis reports about the QoS of CDMA VIPsubscribers. By checking the KPI reports related to the voice service and data service of theselected VIP subscribers every day, you can learn about the QoS of the VIP subscribers andlocate and solve network problems beforehand.

19.5 Reference for the CDMA VIP KPI Analysis GUIThis describes the interface for CDMA VIP KPI analysis and the relevant parameters. Beforeperforming relevant operations, familiarize yourself with the functions of CDMA VIP KPIanalysis.

NastarOperator Guide 19 CDMA VIP KPI Analysis


19-1

19.1 Basic Knowledge of CDMA VIP KPI AnalysisThe CDMA VIP KPI analysis function enables you to routinely monitor the calls of the selectedVIP subscribers on the network. By analyzing the monitor reports, you can learn about the QoSof the VIP subscribers. The CDMA VIP KPI analysis function can also help network engineersto analyze and solve, actively and beforehand, the potential network problems that may affectVIP subscriber services, thus improving the satisfaction of VIP subscribers.

You can group VIP subscribers based on the requirements on services so that you can monitorthe calls of the VIP subscribers of the same group in a unified manner.

The analysis report on the VIP KPIs contains the information about the KPIs such as the 1Xvoice service, 1X data service, EVDO service, and wireless environment measurement.

19.2 Process of CDMA VIP KPI AnalysisThis describes the process of CDMA VIP KPI analysis.

Figure 19-1 shows the process of VIP KPI analysis.

Figure 19-1 Workflow of VIP KPI analysis

Start

Create a VIP KPI analysis task

End

Create an E2E task

Query a VIP KPI analysis report

Export a VIP KPI analysis report


19 CDMA VIP KPI AnalysisNastar

Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Table 19-1 Description of the workflow of VIP KPI analysis


1 Querying NEData


2 Create an end-to-end taskcorrespondingto a VIP KPIanalysis task

You can choose Maintenance > E2E Task Management onthe Nastar client to open the E2E Task Management window,and then create an end-to-end task corresponding to a VIP KPIanalysis task. After the task is created, the Nastar issues MMLcommands to M2000, and then M2000 issues the received MMLcommands to the corresponding NE. At last, the NE that receivesthe MML commands performs the measurement task andgenerates measurement results.When you create an E2E task, the Nastar will automaticallycreate a data collection task.

3 Create a VIPKPI analysistask

You can create a VIP KPI analysis task in the Analysis TaskManagement window of the main interface on the Nastar client.After the task is created, the Nastar periodically obtains therequired user call events records from the Nastar database, andthen generates an analysis report through the analysis.

4 Query a VIPKPI analysisreport

You can view the analysis results of the VIP KPI analysis taskthat is successfully performed. The Nastar monitors the KPIreports related to the voice service and data service of VIPsubscribers daily. This helps you to learn about the quality ofservice (QoS) of VIP subscribers. In addition, you can locate andsolve the network problems, which may incur complaints,beforehand.

5 Export a VIPKPI analysisreport

You can export a VIP KPI analysis report from the Nastar.

19.3 Managing CDMA VIP KPI Analysis TasksThis describes how to manage CDMA VIP KPI analysis tasks. You can create, modify, delete,suspend, and resume CDMA VIP KPI analysis tasks. You can also view the status and executionprogress of such tasks.

19.3.1 Managing CDMA VIP GroupsThis section describes how to manage the CDMA VIP groups. You can create VIP groups asrequired and add certain VIP subscribers to a VIP group to monitor the service quality of theseVIP subscribers simultaneously. In addition, you can modify the attributes of a VIP group, delete,or export a VIP group.

19.3.2 Creating a CDMA E2E Task



19-3

This describes how to create an end-to-end (E2E) task. After you set an E2E task in the Nastar,the Nastar issues MML commands to the M2000. The M2000 then sends these MML commandsto the corresponding NEs. Finally, the NEs perform the measurement tasks and generate results.

19.3.3 Creating CDMA VIP KPI Analysis TasksBy creating CDMA VIP KPI analysis tasks, you can enable the Nastar to periodically analyzethe user call events records of the selected VIP subscribers. Then, you can obtain relevantcounters about the voice service and data service of the VIP subscriber. By monitoring the QoS-related KPIs of the VIP subscribers every day, the Nastar enables you to locate and solve thenetwork problems, which may incur complaints, beforehand. Then, you can provide goodservices to VIP subscribers and improve satisfaction of VIP subscribers.

19.3.4 Modifying CDMA VIP KPI Analysis TasksThis describes how to modify the attributes of CDMA VIP KPI analysis tasks. You can modifythe attributes of a CDMA VIP KPI analysis task as required.

19.3.5 Checking CDMA VIP KPI Analysis TasksThis describes how to check CDMA VIP KPI analysis tasks. You can check the attributes, theexecution progress, and the execution result of a CDMA VIP KPI analysis task.

19.3.1 Managing CDMA VIP GroupsThis section describes how to manage the CDMA VIP groups. You can create VIP groups asrequired and add certain VIP subscribers to a VIP group to monitor the service quality of theseVIP subscribers simultaneously. In addition, you can modify the attributes of a VIP group, delete,or export a VIP group.


l You have the rights to create VIP subscribers and VIP groups.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Function List > System Function > VIP Group Management from the navigationtree in the Analysis Task Management window. The VIP Group Management dialog box isdisplayed.



Create a VIP group by adding one Perform Step 3.

Create a VIP group by importing one Perform Step 4.

Step 3 To create a VIP group by adding one, do as follows:1. Click the CDMA VIP Group Name tab. Then, click New to open the VIP Group

Management - Create VIP Group dialog box.2. Set Group Name, Priority, and Description.

If the * character is present on the right of a parameter, it indicates that the setting of thisparameter is mandatory.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

3. Select one or multiple VIP subscribers from the Group Member list.You can add new VIP subscribers to this list as required or import VIP subscribers to thislist, delete the existing VIP subscribers from the list, or export the VIP subscriberinformation in the list to .csv or .xls files.l Adding a VIP subscriber

a. Click New below the Group Member list to open the VIP User Managementdialog box.

b. Set User Name, Phone Number, IMSI, IMSI, ESN, and Description.If the * character is present on the right of a parameter, it indicates that the settingof this parameter is mandatory.

c. Click Confirm.l Importing a VIP subscriber

a. Click Import below the Group Member list to open the Open dialog box.b. Select an edited VIP subscriber file, and then click Open.

If a VIP subscriber file in .xls format is selected and the file contains multipleworksheets, a prompt is displayed. In this case, select the worksheet to be imported.

c. After the import is complete, perform the operations as prompted.The number of new records, the number of updated records, and the number offailed records are displayed.– Click Close to complete the import operation.

– Click Export Failing Result to export the error information as files so that youcan learn the cause of the import failures.

l Deleting a VIP subscriber

a. Select one or multiple VIP subscribers from the Group Member list and then clickDelete below the list.

b. In the displayed Confirm dialog box, click Confirm.l Exporting the VIP subscriber information to .csv or .xls files

a. Click Export below the Group Member list.b. Set a file name and specify the save path and file type in the displayed Save dialog

box, and then click Save.

You can also select all records, find a record, or save a record through the shortcut menuprompted by right-clicking in the Group Member list.

4. Click Confirm.

Step 4 To create a VIP group by importing one, do as follows:1. Click Import on the CDMA VIP Group Name tab page to open the Open dialog box.2. Select an edited VIP group file, and then click Open.

If a VIP group file in .xls format is selected and the file contains multiple worksheets, aprompt is displayed. In this case, select the worksheet to be imported.

NOTE

If multiple lines of descriptions regarding a VIP group are inconsistent in the edited VIP group file,the system displays the last line of description on the Description title bar of the CDMA VIP GroupName tab page. It is recommended that the description in different lines regarding a VIP group beconsistent when you define VIP group information.



19-5

3. After the import is complete, perform the operations as prompted.The number of new records, the number of updated records, and the number of failedrecords are displayed.

l Click Close to complete the import operation.

l Click Export Failing Result to export the error information as files so that you canlearn the cause of the import failures.

----End

Postrequisitel Modifying the attributes of a VIP group

1. Select a VIP group on the CDMA VIP Group Name tab page and then clickModified to open the CDMA VIP user group management - Modify VIP usergroup dialog box.

2. Modify the relevant parameters.

For description of the parameters, see 19.5.2 Parameters for Creating andModifying CDMA VIP Subscribers and VIP Groups.

3. Click Confirm.

If the VIP group is used by certain tasks, the modification does not affect the ongoingtasks. If the VIP group is used by a periodic task, the related information is updatedin the next period after the modification.

l Viewing the information about members of a VIP group

On the CDMA VIP Group Name tab page, double-click a VIP group to view the detailedinformation about the members of the VIP group.

l Deleting a VIP group

1. Select a VIP group on the CDMA VIP Group Name tab page, and then clickDelete.

2. In the displayed Confirm dialog box, click Confirm.

If the VIP group is used by certain tasks, the modification does not affect the ongoingtasks. If the VIP group is used by a periodic task, the related information is updatedin the next period after the modification.

l Exporting the VIP group information to .csv or .xls files

1. On the CDMA VIP Group Name tab page, click Export.

2. Set a file name and specify the save path and file type in the displayed Save dialogbox, and then click Save.

You can also select all VIP groups, and find or save a VIP group through the shortcut menuprompted by right-clicking on the CDMA VIP Group Name tab page.



Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)




Procedure


















----End



19-7









19.3.3 Creating CDMA VIP KPI Analysis TasksBy creating CDMA VIP KPI analysis tasks, you can enable the Nastar to periodically analyzethe user call events records of the selected VIP subscribers. Then, you can obtain relevantcounters about the voice service and data service of the VIP subscriber. By monitoring the QoS-related KPIs of the VIP subscribers every day, the Nastar enables you to locate and solve thenetwork problems, which may incur complaints, beforehand. Then, you can provide goodservices to VIP subscribers and improve satisfaction of VIP subscribers.



Contextl Such tasks can be performed once or periodically. You can set the execution period of a

periodic task to days.l The system supports a maximum of 50 tasks of this type. The time range of the data to be

analyzed cannot exceed 30 days.

Procedure


Step 2 Set the basic task information such as Task Name, Task Type, Execution Type, and Note.

Step 3 Click Next.

Step 4 Set Analysis Task Management-New Task.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

If ... Then ...

Once Task is selected in Step 2, you need to set only Time Setting for Once Task Data.

Cycle Task is selected in Step 2, you need to set Task Configuration and Time Setting forCycle Task Data.

Step 5 Click Next.

Step 6 Select one or multiple VIP subscribers or VIP subscriber groups from the navigation tree on theUser Object Selection tab page.l Choose VIPs or VIP Groups above the navigation tree to display the objects in the navigation

tree as required.l The system enables you to search for the objects in the navigation tree. You can right-click


– You can select Up or Down in the Direction area to define the search range.


----End


You can delete a VIP KPI analysis task that is not required for saving the system resources.NOTE


1. Choose CDMA VIP KPI Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the AnalysisTask Management window.If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performanceanalysis tasks.


l Suspending a taskTo delay the task execution, you can suspend a VIP KPI analysis task that is in the idlestate. After this operation, the VIP KPI analysis task is in the suspended state.

NOTE

The system can schedule only the VIP KPI analysis tasks that are not suspended.





19-9


l Resuming a taskYou can resume a suspended VIP KPI analysis task to the idle state. Then, the task can bescheduled by the system.

NOTE

Only the VIP KPI analysis task that is in the idle state can be scheduled by the system.



19.3.4 Modifying CDMA VIP KPI Analysis TasksThis describes how to modify the attributes of CDMA VIP KPI analysis tasks. You can modifythe attributes of a CDMA VIP KPI analysis task as required.


l A CDMA VIP KPI analysis task is created.


ProcedureStep 1 Choose CDMA VIP KPI Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task

Management window.If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysistasks.


Step 3 Modify the relevant parameter settings.l For details about the relevant parameters, see 19.5.4 Parameters for Creating and

Modifying CDMA VIP KPI Analysis Tasks.l You can modify the Note parameter in the basic information, the Data Time Scope and

Task Start At parameters in the time information, and the information about the objectnavigation tree.


----End


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

19.3.5 Checking CDMA VIP KPI Analysis TasksThis describes how to check CDMA VIP KPI analysis tasks. You can check the attributes, theexecution progress, and the execution result of a CDMA VIP KPI analysis task.


l A CDMA VIP KPI analysis task is created.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose CDMA VIP KPI Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis TaskManagement window.If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysistasks.


Purpose Operation

Checking the attributes of a CDMA VIPKPI analysis task



You can check the attributes of the selected taskand modify the relevant parameter settings. Fordetailed operations, see 19.3.4 ModifyingCDMA VIP KPI Analysis Tasks.






----End



19-11





19.4 Querying the Analysis Reports About the QoS ofCDMA VIP Subscribers

The Nastar provides the function of querying the analysis reports about the QoS of CDMA VIPsubscribers. By checking the KPI reports related to the voice service and data service of theselected VIP subscribers every day, you can learn about the QoS of the VIP subscribers andlocate and solve network problems beforehand.


Procedure

Step 1 Choose CDMA VIP KPI Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the Analysis TaskManagement window.If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysistasks.


Step 3 Double-click a result, or right-click a result and choose CDMA VIP KPI Analysis from theshortcut menu. The CDMA VIP KPI Analysis window is displayed.This operation can be performed only when Result Status of a task is Successful. Otherwise,the shortcut menu is unavailable.

Step 4 Select a counter from the counter list in Area (1) of the CDMA VIP KPI Analysis window.l For details about the rules for dividing areas, see 19.5.1 Interface for CDMA KPI

Analysis.l The result display area, namely, Area (2) and (4), displays the distribution of the counters of

corresponding VIP subscribers in a subscriber distribution chart and a subscriber distributiontable.In the subscriber distribution chart, data about the counter is calculated as per day. Thehorizontal coordinate represents the IDs of the VIP subscribers. The vertical coordinaterepresents the values of the counter corresponding to each ID. If you select a date, the


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

subscriber distribution chart displays the calculation result of the counter for each VIPsubscriber.In the subscriber distribution table, the counter data is calculated as per day. The data of thecounter, which is calculated during the selected time range, is displayed for each VIPsubscriber as per day. In this area, right-click a record about VIP subscriber, and then chooseComplaint Assistant Analysis from the shortcut menu. After certain settings, the ComplaintAssistant Analysis function is enabled. Then, you can select one or more counter sets to viewthe call records of the selected VIP subscribers.

l The task list of Area (3) in the right pane displays the basic information such as the taskname, start time, end time, and creator of the task.

----End









19.5 Reference for the CDMA VIP KPI Analysis GUIThis describes the interface for CDMA VIP KPI analysis and the relevant parameters. Beforeperforming relevant operations, familiarize yourself with the functions of CDMA VIP KPIanalysis.

19.5.1 Interface for CDMA KPI AnalysisThis describes the interface for CDMA KPI analysis. Before performing relevant operations,familiarize yourself with the functions of the areas on the interface.



19-13

19.5.2 Parameters for Creating and Modifying CDMA VIP Subscribers and VIP GroupsThis describes the parameters of VIP subscribers and groups. You can refer to the parameterdescription when creating or modifying a VIP subscriber or VIP group.


19.5.4 Parameters for Creating and Modifying CDMA VIP KPI Analysis TasksThis describes the parameters for creating and modifying the tasks of analyzing the QoS ofCDMA VIP subscribers. You can refer to the description when creating or modifying a CDMAVIP KPI analysis task.

19.5.5 Parameters for Querying a CDMA VIP KPI Analysis ReportThis describes the parameters for querying a CDMA VIP KPI analysis report. You can refer tothe description when querying a CDMA VIP KPI analysis report.

19.5.1 Interface for CDMA KPI AnalysisThis describes the interface for CDMA KPI analysis. Before performing relevant operations,familiarize yourself with the functions of the areas on the interface.

The KPI analysis result interface displays the distribution of the counters of corresponding VIPsubscribers in a subscriber distribution chart and a subscriber distribution table, as shown inFigure 19-2 and Figure 19-3.

Figure 19-2 Interface for the KPI analysis (1)


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

SN Name Description

(1) Counter list Displays the basic information about all thecounters involved in an analysis task in atable.

(2) Subscriber distribution chart of a counter Displays the data about the counter, which iscalculated as per day. The horizontalcoordinate represents the IDs of the VIPsubscribers. The vertical coordinaterepresents the values of the countercorresponding to each ID. If you select a date,the subscriber distribution chart displays thecalculation result of the counter for each VIPsubscriber.

(3) Task information list Displays the basic information about this taskin table, such as the task name, start time, endtime, and creator of the task.

Figure 19-3 Interface for the KPI analysis (2)



19-15

SN Name Description

(4) Subscriber distribution table of a counter Displays the counter data, which is calculatedas per day. The data of the counter, which iscalculated during the selected time range, isdisplayed for each VIP subscriber as per day.

KPI descriptionKPI Description

Number of CS calls [Times] Indicates the total number of calls of all theVIP subscribers.

Number of CS call drops [Times] Indicates the total number of call drops of allthe VIP subscribers.

Number of unsuccessful CS call setups[Times]

Indicates the total number of call setupfailures of all the VIP subscribers.

CS call drop rate [%] Indicates the call drop rate (%) of all the VIPsubscribers.

Ratio of unsuccessful CS call setup [%] Indicates the ratio (%) of call setup failuresof all the VIP subscribers.

Duration of CS call setup(on the system side)[ms]

Indicates the total duration of calls of all theVIP subscribers. The duration is representedin milliseconds (ms).

Number of PS calls [Times] Indicates the total number of calls of all theVIP subscribers.

Number of PS call drops [Times] Indicates the total number of call drops of allthe VIP subscribers.

Times of unsuccessful PS call setups [Times] Indicates the total number of call setupfailures of all the VIP subscribers.

PS call drop rate [%] Indicates the call drop rate (%) of all the VIPsubscribers.

Ratio of unsuccessful PS call setup [%] Indicates the ratio (%) of call setup failuresof all the VIP subscribers.

Forward data throughput for data service[byte]

Indicates the forward data throughput of thedata service of all the VIP subscribers. Thedata throughput is represented in bytes.

Reverse data throughput for data service[byte]

Indicates the reverse data throughput of thedata service of all the VIP subscribers. Thedata throughput is represented in bytes.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

KPI Description

Average data rate of forward application layer[kbit/s]

Indicates the average forward data rate of thedata service of all the VIP subscribers. Thedata rate is represented in kbit/s.

Average data rate of reverse application layer[kbit/s]

Indicates the average reverse data rate of thedata service of all the VIP subscribers. Thedata rate is represented in kbit/s.

Connection setups [Times] Indicates the total number of connectionsetups of all the VIP subscribers.

Connection setup successes [Times] Indicates the total number of successfulconnection setups of all the VIP subscribers.

Call drops during connection [Times] Indicates the total number of call drops of allthe VIP subscribers.

Connection setup failure ratio [%] Indicates the ratio (%) of connection setupfailures of all the VIP subscribers.

Call drop ratio [%] Indicates the call drop ratio (%) of all the VIPsubscribers.

Access authentication failure ratio [%] Indicates the ratio (%) of accessauthentication failures of all the VIPsubscribers.

Paging failure ratio [%] Indicates the ratio (%) of successful pagingof all the VIP subscribers.

Connection setup average duration [ms] Indicates the average duration of connectionsetup of all the VIP subscribers. The durationis represented in milliseconds (ms).

Total call duration [ms] Indicates the total call duration of all the VIPsubscribers. The duration is represented inmilliseconds (ms).

Total flow of forward data [kbyte] Indicates the total forward data throughput ofall the VIP subscribers. The data throughputis represented in kbyte.

Total flow of reverse data [kbyte] Indicates the total reverse data throughput ofall the VIP subscribers. The data throughputis represented in kbyte.

User forward average rate [kbit/s] Indicates the average forward data rate of allthe VIP subscribers. The data rate isrepresented in kbit/s.

User reverse average rate [kbit/s] Indicates the average reverse data rate of allthe VIP subscribers. The data rate isrepresented in kbit/s.



19-17

KPI Description

Occupancy percentage of calls in pilotstrength(-3,0) [%]

Indicates the ratio (%) of the duration of callswhose pilot strength ranges from -3 to 0 dBto the total duration of calls of all the VIPsubscribers.

Occupancy percentage of calls in pilotstrength(-6,-3) [%]

Indicates the ratio (%) of the duration of callswhose pilot strength ranges from -6 dB to -3dB to the total duration of calls of all the VIPsubscribers.


Indicates the ratio (%) of the duration of callswhose pilot strength ranges from -9 dB to -6dB to the total duration of calls of all the VIPsubscribers.


Indicates the ratio (%) of the duration of callswhose pilot strength ranges from -15 dB to-9 dB to the total duration of calls of all theVIP subscribers.


Indicates the ratio (%) of the duration of callswhose pilot strength ranges from -32 dB to-15 dB to the total duration of calls of all theVIP subscribers.

Range of pilot strength during connection(-2,0) [s]

Indicates the total duration of calls whosepilot strength ranges from -2 to 0 dB for allthe VIP subscribers. The duration isrepresented in seconds (s).

Range of pilot strength during connection(-4.5,-2) [s]

Indicates the total duration of calls whosepilot strength ranges from -4.5 dB to -2 dBfor all the VIP subscribers. The duration isrepresented in seconds (s).

Range of pilot strength during connection(-7,-4.5) [s]

Indicates the total duration of calls whosepilot strength ranges from -7 dB to -4.5 dBfor all the VIP subscribers. The duration isrepresented in seconds (s).

Range of pilot strength during connection(-10,-7) [s]

Indicates the total duration of calls whosepilot strength ranges from -10 dB to -7 dB forall the VIP subscribers. The duration isrepresented in seconds (s).

Range of pilot strength during connection(-32,-10) [s]

Indicates the total duration of calls whosepilot strength ranges from -32 dB to -10 dBfor all the VIP subscribers. The duration isrepresented in seconds (s).


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

19.5.2 Parameters for Creating and Modifying CDMA VIPSubscribers and VIP Groups

This describes the parameters of VIP subscribers and groups. You can refer to the parameterdescription when creating or modifying a VIP subscriber or VIP group.

Description of the parameters of VIP subscribersParameter Description

User Name Indicates the name of a VIP subscriber.Value range:l A maximum of 128 characters

l Any character except for ~ ! # $ % ^ * + = | \ / , ' `


l Case sensitive

Phone Number Indicates the mobile number of a VIP subscriber.

IMSI Indicates the International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) ofthe VIP subscriber.

ESN Indicates the Equipment Serial Number (ESN) of the VIPsubscriber.

MEID Indicates the Mobile Equipment Identifier (MEID) of the VIPsubscriber.

Description Indicates the description of the VIP subscriber.Value range:l A maximum of 512 characters


Description of the parameters of VIP groupsParameter Description

Group Name Indicates the name of a VIP group.Value range:l A maximum of 128 characters



l Case sensitive

Priority Indicates the priority of a VIP group, such as Very Important,Important, Medium, Low, and Very Low.Select a parameter value from the drop-down list box.



19-19


Description Indicates the description of the VIP group.Value range:l A maximum of 512 characters


Group Member Indicates all the VIP subscribers of the VIP group.



BasicInformation








19.5.4 Parameters for Creating and Modifying CDMA VIP KPIAnalysis Tasks

This describes the parameters for creating and modifying the tasks of analyzing the QoS ofCDMA VIP subscribers. You can refer to the description when creating or modifying a CDMAVIP KPI analysis task.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


BasicInformation

Task Name Indicates the name of a VIP KPI analysis task.Value range:l A maximum of 60 characters



l Case sensitive

Task Type Choose CDMA VIP KPI Analysis Task from thenavigation tree.

Execution Type l Once task: The system executes the created tasksonly once at the specified time.

l Period task: The system executes the createdtasks at the preset time.



TimeInformation

Begin Date Indicates time for starting a task. The start timeshould be later than the current server time.You can either type the time value in this field, or

click to select the date and time in the DateSelection dialog box.This parameter is valid for only periodic tasks.

Cycle Indicates the interval between periodic tasks. Thisparameter involves the period unit and the interval.l Unit: day.

l Interval: 1 to 30.

This parameter is valid for only periodic tasks.

Execution Times Indicates the times that a periodic task is executed.If this parameter is set to 0, you can infer that thetask is executed all the time.Value range: 0 to 9999.This parameter is valid for only periodic tasks.



19-21




Task Start At Indicates the time when the analysis task isexecuted.The time specified in this field should not precedethe end time specified in the Data Time Scopefield.

Time l All day: The task is executed every day duringthe selected time range.

l Specify: The task is executed during the specifiedtime segment every day during the selected timerange.The time segment cannot overlap.The start time of the next time segment must belater than or the same as the end time of thecurrent time segment.

ObjectInformation

VIPs If you select this option, the navigation tree displaysall the VIP subscribers of the entire network.

VIP Groups If you select this option, the navigation tree displaysall the VIP groups of the entire network.

19.5.5 Parameters for Querying a CDMA VIP KPI Analysis ReportThis describes the parameters for querying a CDMA VIP KPI analysis report. You can refer tothe description when querying a CDMA VIP KPI analysis report.


Counter Type Indicates the service type that the KPI belongs to. The service typecan be 1X voice service, 1X data service, EVDO service, 1X radioenvironment, and DO radio environment.

Counter Name Indicates the name of a counter.

Section Time Indicates the summary value of each KPI in this time segment.

User ID Indicates the ID of a VIP subscriber. An ID uniquely identifies a VIPsubscriber.

User Name Indicates the name of a VIP subscriber.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


Phone Number Indicates the mobile number of a VIP subscriber.

IMSI Indicates the International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) of theVIP subscriber.

VIP Group Indicates the name of the VIP group that a VIP subscriber belongs to.



19-23

20 CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis

About This Chapter

CDMA complaint assistant analysis involves managing complaint assistant analysis tasks andquerying CDMA complaint assistant analysis reports. After receiving a subscriber complaint,the Nastar quickly locates the relevant calls, which are recorded before and after the complaint,of the subscriber. By querying the user call events records, the Nastar helps you analyze thepossible cause, locate and solve the problem, and thus improve the efficiency of handlingcomplaints.

20.1 Basic Knowledge of CDMA Complaint Assistant AnalysisThe CDMA complaint assistant analysis function helps you to analyze the subscriber calls thatare recorded before and after a complaint and to locate and rectify the fault. This improves theefficiency of handling complaint and increases user satisfaction.

20.2 Process of CDMA Complaint Assistant AnalysisThis describes the process of CDMA complaint assistant analysis.

20.3 Managing CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis TasksThis describes how to manage CDMA complaint assistant analysis tasks. You can create,modify, delete, suspend, and resume CDMA complaint assistant analysis tasks. You can alsoview the status and execution progress of such tasks.

20.4 Querying a Complaint Assistant Analysis ReportThis describes how to query a complaint assistant analysis report. After receiving a complaint,the system quickly finds the UCERs related to the complaint. You can query the UCERs toanalyze the possible causes of the complaint, locates and solves the problem quickly. Thisfacilitates the complaint handling.

20.5 Reference for the CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis GUIThis describes the interface for CDMA complaint analysis and the relevant parameters. Beforeperforming relevant operations, familiarize yourself with the functions of CDMA complaintassistant analysis.

NastarOperator Guide 20 CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis


20-1

20.1 Basic Knowledge of CDMA Complaint AssistantAnalysis

The CDMA complaint assistant analysis function helps you to analyze the subscriber calls thatare recorded before and after a complaint and to locate and rectify the fault. This improves theefficiency of handling complaint and increases user satisfaction.

You can group the user callevents record (UCER) counters based on the requirements on servicesso that you can perform analyses based on different service requirements.

The compliant assistant analysis function can quickly locate the relevant UCERs before andafter a complaint or locate all the UCERs that are related to a faulty cell based on the InternationalMobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI), the number of the MS, or the Equipment Serial Number(ESN). The Nastar provides the information about the key event of each call, call path, and MRthat is sent before the call is released. By analyzing the information, the Nastar helps you tolocate and rectify faults. This improves the efficiency of handling complaint and increases usersatisfaction.

20.2 Process of CDMA Complaint Assistant AnalysisThis describes the process of CDMA complaint assistant analysis.

Figure 20-1 shows the process of complaint assistant analysis.

Figure 20-1 Workflow of complaint assistant analysis

Start

Set a complaint assistant analysis task

End

Query a complaint assistant analysis

report

Export a complaint assistant analysis

report


20 CDMA Complaint Assistant AnalysisNastar

Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

Table 20-1 Description of the workflow of complaint assistant analysis


1 Create acomplaintassistantanalysis task

You can create a complaint assistant analysis task in the AnalysisTask Management window of the main interface on the Nastarclient. After the task is created, the Nastar periodically obtainsthe required user call events record from the Nastar database,and then generates an analysis report through the analysis.

2 Query acomplaintassistantanalysis report

After the Nastar receives a complaint, you can query thecorresponding complaint assistant analysis report to quickly findthe user call events record (UCERs) related to the complaint.Then, you can analyze the UCERs to find the possible causes ofthe complaint, locate the problem, and solve the problemquickly. This facilitates the complaint handling.

3 Export acomplaintassistantanalysis report

You can export a complaint assistant analysis report from theNastar.

20.3 Managing CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis TasksThis describes how to manage CDMA complaint assistant analysis tasks. You can create,modify, delete, suspend, and resume CDMA complaint assistant analysis tasks. You can alsoview the status and execution progress of such tasks.

20.3.1 Creating User-Defined Counter SetsThe Nastar provides the function of creating user-defined counter sets. You can group certaincounters to a counter set so that you can analyze complaints based on the service requirements.

20.3.2 Creating CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis TasksBy creating CDMA complaint assistant analysis tasks, you can enable the Nastar to quicklylocate the relevant calls, which are recorded before and after a complaint, of the subscriber afterreceiving the complaint. By querying the user call events records, the Nastar helps you analyzethe possible cause and thus locate and solve the problem.

20.3.3 Modifying CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis TasksThis describes how to modify the attributes of a CDMA complaint assistant analysis task. Youcan modify the attributes of a CDMA complaint assistant analysis task as required.

20.3.4 Checking CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis TasksThis describes how to check CDMA complaint assistant analysis tasks. You can check theattributes, the execution progress, and the execution result of a CDMA complaint assistantanalysis task.

20.3.1 Creating User-Defined Counter SetsThe Nastar provides the function of creating user-defined counter sets. You can group certaincounters to a counter set so that you can analyze complaints based on the service requirements.



20-3


l You are authorized to manage the counter set.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Function List > System Function > CDMA Complaint Record Counter SetManagement from the navigation tree in the Analysis Task Management window. The CDMAComplaint Record Counter Set Management window is displayed.The preset counter sets of the Nastar include DO Basic Counter Set, 1X Basic Counter Set,Network Connection Failure, No Signal in an Indoor Environment, Slow Response Speedof 1X Network Connection, Slow Response Speed of DO Network Connection, CallDrop, Call Failure, The voice quality is poor, No Signal in an Outdoor Environment, andRoaming.

Step 2 Click New. The CDMA Complaint Counter Set Management - Create Counter Set windowis displayed.

Step 3 Set the parameters.l The system enables you to search for the objects in the navigation tree. You can right-click

any point of the navigation tree and then press Ctrl+F to display the Find dialog box. Typethe keywords, that is, the search condition, in the dialog box. Then, the system searches forthe query result that meets the search condition.You can select Case sensitive to ensure that the keywords you typed are case sensitive.You can select Up or Down in the Direction area to define the search range.

l For details about the relevant parameters, see 20.5.2 Parameters for User-Defined CountSets.

Step 4 Click OK.

----End

Postrequisite

To modify the attributes of an existing user-defined counter set, perform the followingoperations:

1. Select a counter set in the CDMA Complaint Record Counter Set Management window.Click Modify. The CDMA Complaint Counter Set Management - Modify CounterSet window is displayed.

2. Modify the relevant parameter settings.You can select objects and modify the remarks. The name of the counter set, however,cannot be modified.For details about the relevant parameters, see 20.5.2 Parameters for User-Defined CountSets.

3. Click OK.

To delete a counter set, perform the following operations:

1. Select a counter set in the CDMA Complaint Record Counter Set Management window,and then click Delete.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

2. Click Yes in the displayed Confirm dialog box.

20.3.2 Creating CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis TasksBy creating CDMA complaint assistant analysis tasks, you can enable the Nastar to quicklylocate the relevant calls, which are recorded before and after a complaint, of the subscriber afterreceiving the complaint. By querying the user call events records, the Nastar helps you analyzethe possible cause and thus locate and solve the problem.


l The relevant trace tasks are already opened on NEs.



l The task for importing the CDMA complaint analysis data is created by the system. Youneed not create the task.

Procedure



Step 3 Click Next.


Step 5 Click Next.

Step 6 Set OSS name and BSC name.

Step 7 Click Next.

Step 8 On the Filter by VIP tab page, perform the following operations:1. Select Start Filtering by User.

The filtering condition can be Subscriber, IMSI, ESN, MEID, or any combination of thesefour options.

2. Click Select from VIPs or VIP groups, select one or more VIP subscribers or subscribergroups, and then click OK.The Nastar filters the subscriber IDs based on the selected filtering condition and displaysthe results on the right area.

Step 9 On the Filter by NE tab page, perform the following operations:1. Select Start Filtering by NE.

The filtering condition can be Accessed Carriers or Released Carriers.



20-5

2. Select one or more carriers from the navigation tree.

Step 10 Select one or more counter sets on the Select Counters to Be Queried tab page.


----End


You can delete a complaint assistant analysis task that is not required so that you can savesystem resources.

NOTE


1. Choose CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis Task from the navigation tree in theAnalysis Task Management window.If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performanceanalysis tasks.


l Suspending a taskTo delay the task execution, you can suspend a complaint assistant analysis task that is inthe idle state. After this operation, the complaint assistant analysis task is in the suspendedstate.

NOTE

The system can schedule only the complaint assistant analysis tasks that are not suspended.




l Resuming a taskYou can resume a suspended complaint analysis task to the idle state. Then, the task canbe scheduled by the system.

NOTE

Only the complaint assistant analysis tasks that are in the idle state can be scheduled by the system.




Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


20.3.3 Modifying CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis TasksThis describes how to modify the attributes of a CDMA complaint assistant analysis task. Youcan modify the attributes of a CDMA complaint assistant analysis task as required.


l A CDMA complaint assistant analysis task is created.


Procedure

Step 1 Choose CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis Task from the navigation tree in the AnalysisTask Management window.If you choose Subject Function, the task list on the right displays all the performance analysistasks.



l For details about the relevant parameters, see 20.5.3 Parameters for Creating andModifying CDMA Complaint Analysis Tasks.

l You can modify the Note parameter in the basic information, the Data Time Scope andTask Start At parameters in the time information, the filtering conditions, and the outputcounter sets.


----End

20.3.4 Checking CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis TasksThis describes how to check CDMA complaint assistant analysis tasks. You can check theattributes, the execution progress, and the execution result of a CDMA complaint assistantanalysis task.


l A CDMA complaint assistant analysis task is created.



20-7

Procedure



Purpose Operation

Check the attributes of a CDMA complaintassistant analysis task.



You can check the attributes of the selected taskand modify the relevant parameter settings. Fordetailed operations, see 20.3.3 ModifyingCDMA Complaint Assistant AnalysisTasks.






----End






Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


20.4 Querying a Complaint Assistant Analysis ReportThis describes how to query a complaint assistant analysis report. After receiving a complaint,the system quickly finds the UCERs related to the complaint. You can query the UCERs toanalyze the possible causes of the complaint, locates and solves the problem quickly. Thisfacilitates the complaint handling.


Procedure


Step 2 Select a task from the task list in the upper-right pane.All the analysis results of the selected task are displayed in the lower-right pane.

Step 3 Double-click or right-click an analysis result, and then choose CDMA Complaint AssistantAnalysis from the shortcut menu. The CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis window isdisplayed.This operation can be performed only when Result Status of a task is Successful. Otherwise,the shortcut menu is unavailable.

Step 4 In the CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis window, click the 1X item or DO item tab toview the counter information related to the analysis task.l The 1X item tab page displays all the 1x counter information involved in the analysis task.

l The DO item tab page displays all the DO connection level counter information and DOstreaming level counter information involved in the analysis task.

----End

Postrequisitel The system enables you to export query results. Right-click the query result list, and then

choose Save As from the shortcut menu. After setting the save path and filename, clickSave. Then, the query results are saved as a .csv or an .xls file.

l The system enables you to search for the query results. You can click any line of the queryresult list and then press Ctrl+F to display the Find dialog box. Then, type the keywords,that is, the search conditions, in the dialog box. The system searches for the query resultthat meets the search condition.You can select Case sensitive to ensure that the typed keywords are case sensitive.You can select Up or Down in the Direction area to define the search area.



20-9

20.5 Reference for the CDMA Complaint Assistant AnalysisGUI

This describes the interface for CDMA complaint analysis and the relevant parameters. Beforeperforming relevant operations, familiarize yourself with the functions of CDMA complaintassistant analysis.

20.5.1 Interface for CDMA Complaint Assistant AnalysisThis describes the interface for CDMA complaint assistant analysis. Before performing relevantoperations, familiarize yourself with the functions of the areas on the interface.

20.5.2 Parameters for User-Defined Count SetsThis describes the parameters for adding or modifying user-defined counter sets. You can referto the description when adding or modifying a user-defined counter set.

20.5.3 Parameters for Creating and Modifying CDMA Complaint Analysis TasksThis describes the parameters for creating and modifying CDMA complaint assistant analysistasks. You can refer to the description when creating or modifying a CDMA complaint assistantanalysis task.

20.5.4 Parameters for Querying a CDMA Complaint Assistant Analysis ReportThis describes the parameters for querying a CDMA complaint assistant analysis report. Youcan refer to the description when a CDMA complaint assistant analysis report.

20.5.1 Interface for CDMA Complaint Assistant AnalysisThis describes the interface for CDMA complaint assistant analysis. Before performing relevantoperations, familiarize yourself with the functions of the areas on the interface.

The complaint assistant analysis result interface displays in the 1X item and DO item tabs, asshown in Figure 20-2 and Figure 20-3.

Figure 20-2 Interface for the complaint assistant analysis (1)


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

The 1X item tab page displays all the 1x counter information involved in the analysis task.

Figure 20-3 Interface for the complaint assistant analysis (2)

The DO item tab page displays all the DO connection level counter information and DOstreaming level counter information involved in the analysis task.

20.5.2 Parameters for User-Defined Count SetsThis describes the parameters for adding or modifying user-defined counter sets. You can referto the description when adding or modifying a user-defined counter set.


Counter Set Name Indicates the name of a counter set, such as index_1.Value range:l A maximum of 128 characters

l The following characters are not allowed: ~ ! # $ % ^ * + = |\ / , ' `


l Case sensitive



20-11


Note Indicates the description of the counter set.Value range:l A maximum of 500 characters

l The following characters are not allowed: ~ ! # $ % ^ * + = |\ / , ' `

20.5.3 Parameters for Creating and Modifying CDMA ComplaintAnalysis Tasks

This describes the parameters for creating and modifying CDMA complaint assistant analysistasks. You can refer to the description when creating or modifying a CDMA complaint assistantanalysis task.


BasicInformation

Task Name Indicates the name of a complaint assistant analysistask.Value range:l A maximum of 60 characters



l Case sensitive

Task Type Choose CDMA Complaint Assistant AnalysisTask from the navigation tree.




TimeInformation




Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)


Task Start At Indicates the time when the analysis task isexecuted.The time specified in this field should not precedethe end time specified in the Data Time Scope field.

FilteringInformationby User

Start Filtering by User If you select this option, the Nastar filters the callsbased on the selected filtering condition.

Filtering ConditionSetting

The filtering condition can be Subscriber, IMSI,ESN, MEID, or any combination of these fouroptions.

Select from VIPs orVIP groups

If you select this option, the Nastar filters therequired MS numbers from the selected VIPsubscribers.

FilteringInformationby NE

Start Filtering by NE If you select this option, the Nastar filters the NEsbased on the selected filtering condition.

Filtering ConditionSetting

The filtering condition can be Accessed Carriers,Released Carriers, or a combination of the twooptions.

CounterInformation

Select Counters to BeQueried

You can select a set of counters to be exported basedon the service requirement.

20.5.4 Parameters for Querying a CDMA Complaint AssistantAnalysis Report

This describes the parameters for querying a CDMA complaint assistant analysis report. Youcan refer to the description when a CDMA complaint assistant analysis report.

Parameters related to the general information about a test carrier


MSC Where TestCarrier Is Located

Indicates the number of the MSC that the test carrier belongs to.

BSC Where TestCarrier Is Located

Indicates the name of the BSC that the test carrier belongs to, forexample, BSC_1.

Test Carrier Name Indicates the name of the test carrier, for example, Carrier_1.


Indicates the number of missing co-channel neighboring cells amongthe undefined neighboring cells of the test carrier.


Indicates the number of redundant co-channel neighboring cellsamong the defined neighboring cells of the test carrier.



20-13


Number ofNeighboring CellsWhose Priorities AreAdjusted

Indicates the number of neighboring cells that are specified asPriority Adjusting in the detailed neighboring cell list of the testcarrier.



Indicates the name of a neighboring cell.

Weighted Value Indicates the weighted value calculated through the neighboring-cellweighted algorithm.

Handoff Count Indicates the number of handovers of a neighboring cell.

Suggestion by Tool Lists the recommended operations on a neighboring cell and displayswhether the neighboring cell is defined.

RecommendedPriority

Indicates the recommended priority of a neighboring cell based on theweighted value of the neighboring cell. The higher the weightedvalue, the higher is the recommended priority.

Configured Priority Indicates the priority of an co-channel neighboring cell in theconfiguration data.

Final Priority Indicates the final priority after the manual adjustment based on therecommended priority.

Average EcIo Indicates the average Ec/Io of a neighboring cell in all the MRs thatcontain the information about this neighboring cell.Unit: dBm

Distance (m) Indicates the distance between the carrier and the current neighboringcell.

MSC ID Indicates the number of the MSC that a neighboring cell belongs to.

BTS ID Indicates the number of the BTS that a neighboring cell belongs to.

Cell ID Indicates the ID of a neighboring cell.

Sector ID Indicates the ID of the sector that a neighboring cell belongs to.

Frequency Point Indicates the frequency of a neighboring cell.

Band Indicates the band of a neighboring cell.The value 0 represents 800 MHz, the value 1 represents 1900 MHz,and the value 5 represents 450 MHz.


Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

21 FAQ

21.1 How to Solve the Problem That a Neighboring CellAnalysis Task or a Frequency Analysis Task Fails to BeExecuted?

This provides the causes of the problem that a neighboring cell analysis task or a frequencyanalysis task fails to be executed and the corresponding troubleshooting methods.

SymptomA neighboring cell analysis task or a frequency analysis task fails to be executed.

Fault AnalysisThe possible causes are as follows:

1. The required configuration data and performance data are not imported to the Nastardatabase.

2. After the configuration data of the existing network is updated, the Nastar does not collectthe new configuration data again. As a result, the configuration data does not match theperformance data in the Nastar database.

Troubleshootingl In the case of the first cause, do as follows:

1. In the Task Management window of the Nastar client, create a task for importing theconfiguration data.For details, see 7.2.3 Creating a Task of Importing GSM Configuration Data.

2. In the Task Management window of the Nastar client, create a task for importing theperformance data.For details, see 7.2.2 Creating a Task of Importing GSM Performance Data.

3. Perform the neighboring cell analysis and frequency analysis task again.l In the case of the second cause, do as follows:

NastarOperator Guide 21 FAQ


21-1

1. In the Task Management window of the Nastar client, create a task for collecting theconfiguration data.– Select Period from the Run Type drop-down list box.

– Select Config data from the Data Type drop-down list box.

– From the NE navigation tree, select the NEs whose configuration data are modifiedon the existing network.

– For details, see 7.2.1 Creating a Data Collection Task.

2. In the task list in the right pane of the Task Management window, right-click thenew configuration data collection task, and then choose Run At Once from theshortcut menu.

3. After the configuration data collection task is executed successfully, perform theneighboring cell analysis and frequency analysis tasks again.

21.2 How to Solve the Problem That the NE Information onthe Nastar Is Inconsistent with That on the M2000?

This provides the causes of the problem that the NE information on the Nastar is inconsistentwith that on the M2000 and the corresponding troubleshooting methods.

Symptom

After an NE is added, modified, or deleted on the M2000 client, the NE information on the Nastaris inconsistent with that on the M2000. Thus, the Nastar obtains the incorrect NE information.As a result, the created E2E tasks fail to be delivered.

Fault Analysis

The EAMInfo file is saved on the M2000 or OMC server and used to record information aboutNEs and versions. Through this file, the Nastar obtains NE information required for datacollection and data analysis from the M2000 or OMC. The EAMInfo file is generated throughthe system task of the M2000 or OMC, which is executed every four hours by default, but it canbe modified to one hour. Thus, the NE information on the Nastar is not updated in real time. Asa result, the NE information on the Nastar is inconsistent with that on the M2000.

Troubleshooting

Log in to the M2000 or OMC client as user admin, and then perform the following operations:

1. Choose Maintenance > Task Management. The Task Management window isdisplayed.

2. In the navigation tree on the left of the window, choose Task Type > NIC > NE BasicInformation Export.

3. Double-click the NE Basic Information Export task on the right, and then specify therelated information in the displayed dialog box.

NOTE

You are advised to set the period to one day and select all NEs.

4. Click OK.

21 FAQNastar

Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

5. Select the NE Basic Information Export task in the task list in the right pane, and thenright-click Run At Once.The time for executing the task and the result are displayed in the result information pane.

Log in to the Nastar client as user Administrator, and then perform the following operations:

1. Choose Maintenance > OSS Management. The OSS Management window is displayed.2. In the navigation tree on the left of the window, select the OSS node whose NE information

is to be synchronized, and then click NE Manager to open the NE Selector dialog box.3. Set the NEs that are managed by the selected OSS.

The left pane lists the NEs to be selected for the management of the OSS. The right panelists the NEs that are selected for the management of the OSS.l In the left pane, you can double-click an NE to add it to the right pane.

l You can click to move one or multiple NEs from the left pane to the right pane.

l You can click to move all the NEs from the left pane to the right pane.

l You can click to move one or multiple NEs from the right pane to the left pane.

l You can click to move all the NEs from the right pane to the left pane.

CAUTIONIf an NE is not added to the right pane, the data of this NE cannot be collected to theNastar server.

4. Click OK.

21.3 How to Solve the Problem That the OSS NavigationTree Cannot Be Displayed Normally in the OSSManagement Window?

This provides the cause of the problem that the OSS navigation tree cannot be displayed normallyin the OSS Management window and the corresponding troubleshooting method.

SymptomAfter the OSS Management window is opened, only the root node is displayed in the OSSnavigation tree in the left pane of the window. The OSSs are already created and the informationabout the OSSs is displayed on the Nastar clients of other PCs.

Fault AnalysisThe language of the operating system on the PC that is installed with the Nastar client softwareis inconsistent with the installation language of the software version on Nastar server.



21-3

Troubleshooting

1. Choose Start > Control Panel.2. Double-click Regional and Language Options to open the Regional and Language

Options dialog box.

3. On the Regional Options tab page, set the language format in the Standards andformats field to a value consistent with the installation language of the software versionon the Nastar server.

You need to set the language to English for all countries except the countries using English.

4. Log in to the Nastar client again.

21.4 How to Modify the Default Font Type and Font Size onthe Nastar Client?

This describes how to modify the default font type and font size on the Nastar client.

Question

How to modify the default font type and font size on the Nastar client?

Answer

1. Open the file \client\plugins\NastarPA\style\locale\zh_CN\mainfrm\General.properties under the installation path of the Nastar client.

If the English edition of the software version is installed, the corresponding file is \client\plugins\NastarPA\style\locale\en_US\mainfrm\General.properties.

2. Modify the related parameters.

Figure 21-1 shows the opened configuration file.

Figure 21-1 Configuration file

l FontFamily refers to the font type. You can change it to any font type name that issupported by the operating system of local PC.

l FontSize refers to the font size. You can change it to any value.

3. Log in to the Nastar client again.

21 FAQNastar

Operator Guide


Issue 06 (2010-08-18)

21.5 How to Query the Detailed Software Version of theNastar Client?

This describes how to query the detailed software version of the Nastar client.

QuestionHow to query the detailed software version of the Nastar client?

Answer1. Open the file \client\plugins\NastarPA\style\locale\zh_CN\mainfrm

\General.properties under the installation path of the Nastar client.If the English software version is installed, the corresponding file is \client\plugins\NastarPA\style\locale\en_US\mainfrm\General.properties.

2. Check the value of VersionID.The value behind VersionID= is the detailed software version of the current Nastar client.



21-5

Documents

Nastar Operator Guide(V600R002_06)